FAX Option Type 3030 Facsimile Reference

FAX Option Type 3030
Operating Instructions
Facsimile Reference
1
Transmission
2
Other Transmission Features
3
Reception
4
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
5
Storing a Document
6
Fax via Computer
7
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered
with, or prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy/Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
❒ The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional *1
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter EX Enterprise *1
the ScanRouter delivery software
*1
ii
Optional
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
NOTICE ...................................................................................................................1
Important Safety Instructions ...............................................................................4
Caution.......................................................................................................................4
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................5
Symbols .....................................................................................................................5
Names of Major Functions .........................................................................................5
Reading the Display...............................................................................................6
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys...............................................................7
Function List ..........................................................................................................9
1. Transmission
Transmission Modes ...........................................................................................13
Switching between Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission................14
Memory Transmission..............................................................................................15
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Memory Transmission) ......18
Parallel Memory Transmission ..............................................................................19
Automatic Redial ...................................................................................................20
Batch Transmission ...............................................................................................20
Dual Access...........................................................................................................21
Simultaneous Broadcast........................................................................................21
If memory runs out while storing an original ..........................................................22
Immediate Transmission ..........................................................................................22
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission) ...24
Checking the Transmission Settings........................................................................25
IP-Fax Functions ..................................................................................................26
Terminology .............................................................................................................28
Notes on Using IP-Fax .............................................................................................29
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission ....................................................29
Internet Fax Functions ........................................................................................30
Notes on Using Internet Fax ....................................................................................32
Functions Not Available by E-mail Transmission .....................................................33
Functions Not Available by E-mail Reception ..........................................................33
E-mail Subject ..........................................................................................................34
T.37 Full Mode .........................................................................................................35
Placing Originals..................................................................................................36
Setting a Scan Area .................................................................................................38
Auto Detect............................................................................................................39
Regular ..................................................................................................................40
Area .......................................................................................................................41
Acceptable Original Sizes ........................................................................................42
Paper Size and Scanned Area.................................................................................43
When placing an original on the exposure glass ...................................................43
When placing an original into the ADF ..................................................................44
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect...............................................................................45
Transmission with Image Rotation ...........................................................................46
iii
Scan Settings .......................................................................................................47
Resolution ................................................................................................................47
Original Type............................................................................................................49
JBIG Transmission ................................................................................................50
Image Density (Contrast) .........................................................................................50
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original ...................................................52
Changing the Line Port .......................................................................................53
Simultaneous Broadcast Using Multiple Line Ports .................................................55
Specifying a Destination .....................................................................................56
Sending Over a Fax Line .........................................................................................56
Entering a pause ...................................................................................................57
Entering a tone ......................................................................................................58
Sending by IP-Fax....................................................................................................59
Regarding IP-Fax destinations ..............................................................................61
Sending to an E-mail Address..................................................................................63
Bypassing the SMTP server ..................................................................................66
Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations .....................................................68
Switching the titles in the Address Book................................................................69
Specifying Group Destinations.................................................................................70
Chain Dial.................................................................................................................71
Redial .......................................................................................................................72
Programming Destinations in the Address Book .............................................74
Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book ...........................................76
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book ............................................77
Search by Destination Name ...................................................................................78
Search by Fax Number ............................................................................................80
Search by E-mail Address........................................................................................82
Search by IP-Fax Destination ..................................................................................84
Search by LDAP Server ...........................................................................................85
Search by Registration Number ...............................................................................88
On Hook Dial ........................................................................................................89
External Telephone On Hook Dial............................................................................90
Manual Dial ...........................................................................................................91
Advanced Features..............................................................................................93
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission.......................................................................93
Setting a password ................................................................................................94
Setting SEP Codes for Reception ............................................................................95
Entering a password..............................................................................................97
Transfer Request .....................................................................................................97
With transfer requests set in the System Settings menu.....................................101
Setting multistep transfer.....................................................................................102
Canceling a Transmission ................................................................................ 103
Before the Original Is Scanned ..............................................................................103
While the Original Is Being Scanned......................................................................103
While the Original Is Being Transmitted.................................................................104
Before the Transmission Is Started........................................................................106
Confirming a Transmission .............................................................................. 108
Checking the Storage Result (Memory Storage Report)................................109
2. Other Transmission Features
iv
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) ......................................................... 111
Sender Settings..................................................................................................113
Priority Transmission ........................................................................................117
Confidential Transmission................................................................................ 119
Polling Transmission......................................................................................... 122
Polling Transmission Clear Report.........................................................................125
Polling Reception............................................................................................... 126
Polling Reception Reserve Report .........................................................................128
Polling Reception Result Report ............................................................................129
Sub Transmission Mode ................................................................................... 130
Book Fax ................................................................................................................130
Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission) ........................................132
E-mail Options........................................................................................................134
Entering the subject.............................................................................................134
Entering the text ..................................................................................................137
Requesting a reception notice .............................................................................139
Setting an e-mail destination as a BCC...............................................................141
Standard Message Stamp......................................................................................142
Sending an Auto Document ...................................................................................143
Printing documents stored as Auto Documents ..................................................145
Stamp.....................................................................................................................146
Transmission Options ............................................................................................147
Fax Header Print .................................................................................................148
Label Insertion .....................................................................................................149
Reduced Image Transmission.............................................................................151
Auto Reduce........................................................................................................152
Default ID Transmission ......................................................................................153
3. Reception
Types of Reception............................................................................................ 155
Immediate Reception .............................................................................................155
Memory Reception .................................................................................................156
Substitute Reception ..............................................................................................157
Receiving documents unconditionally .................................................................158
Receiving documents according to parameter-specified settings .......................158
Reception Modes ............................................................................................... 160
Manual Reception ..................................................................................................160
Auto Reception.......................................................................................................160
Switching the Reception Mode...............................................................................161
Receiving Internet Fax Documents ..................................................................162
Auto E-mail Reception ...........................................................................................162
Manual E-mail Reception .......................................................................................163
Received Images ...................................................................................................163
Reception Functions ......................................................................................... 165
Transfer Station......................................................................................................165
Multistep transfer .................................................................................................166
Sending the Transfer Result Report ....................................................................166
Transfer Result Report ........................................................................................167
Transfer Result Report (transfer request by e-mail) ............................................167
Forwarding Received Documents ..........................................................................168
Routing Received Documents with SUB Code ......................................................169
Transferring Received Documents.........................................................................170
v
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax......................................................................170
Routing e-mail received via SMTP ......................................................................171
JBIG Reception ......................................................................................................172
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up...............................................................................173
Printing Options.................................................................................................174
Print Completion Beep ...........................................................................................174
Checkered Mark.....................................................................................................174
Center Mark ...........................................................................................................175
Reception Time ......................................................................................................175
Two-Sided Printing.................................................................................................176
180-degree rotation printing ................................................................................177
Multi-Copy Reception.............................................................................................177
Image Rotation.......................................................................................................178
Combine Two Originals..........................................................................................179
Page Separation and Length Reduction ................................................................180
Reverse Order Printing ..........................................................................................181
Page Reduction......................................................................................................181
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print) ..........................................182
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size ................................................................182
Setting priority trays.............................................................................................183
Just size printing..................................................................................................183
Having incoming documents printed on paper from the bypass tray...................184
Where Incoming Documents Are Delivered - Output Tray.....................................185
Specifying tray for lines .......................................................................................185
Tray Shift .............................................................................................................185
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
vi
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory ......................................................187
Deleting a Destination from a Simultaneous Broadcast.........................................188
Adding a Destination ..............................................................................................190
Changing the Transmission Time ..........................................................................192
Changing the SMTP Server Setting .......................................................................193
Printing a File from Memory .............................................................................195
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)..................................... 197
Resending a File ................................................................................................198
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)....................................... 200
Confirming on Display ............................................................................................200
Confirming by Report .............................................................................................201
Confirming by E-mail..............................................................................................202
Confirming by Report and E-mail ...........................................................................203
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) ........................................203
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission) .......................................204
Communication Failure Report ..............................................................................205
Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status) ............................................206
Confirming on Display ............................................................................................206
Confirming by Report .............................................................................................207
Journal.................................................................................................................207
Print Journal....................................................................................................... 208
Printing the Journal ................................................................................................208
All.........................................................................................................................209
Print per File No...................................................................................................210
Print per User ......................................................................................................211
Journal ...................................................................................................................212
Transmitting Journal by E-mail...............................................................................214
Journal by e-mail .................................................................................................214
Displaying the Memory Status.......................................................................... 215
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File).... 217
Printing Received and Stored Documents .............................................................218
Deleting Received and Stored Documents ............................................................219
Printing a Confidential Document .................................................................... 220
Confidential File Report..........................................................................................222
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock .................................................... 223
Personal Boxes ..................................................................................................225
Personal Boxes ......................................................................................................225
Printing Personal Box Documents .........................................................................226
Information Boxes ............................................................................................. 228
Information Boxes ..................................................................................................228
Storing Documents in Information Boxes...............................................................229
Printing Information Box Documents......................................................................231
Deleting Information Box Documents.....................................................................232
5. Storing a Document
Sending a Stored File ........................................................................................235
Storing a Document ...............................................................................................236
Programming a user name ..................................................................................238
Setting a file name...............................................................................................239
Setting a password ..............................................................................................239
Sending Stored Documents ...................................................................................240
Specifying documents from the File List..............................................................243
Specifying documents by User Name .................................................................243
Specifying documents by File Name ...................................................................244
Printing Stored Documents ....................................................................................244
Changing Stored Document Information................................................................246
Changing a user name ........................................................................................247
Changing the file name........................................................................................248
Changing the password.......................................................................................248
Deleting a Stored Document ..................................................................................249
6. Fax via Computer
Sending Fax Documents from Computers ......................................................251
Before Use .............................................................................................................252
Using the Software.................................................................................................252
LAN-Fax Driver....................................................................................................253
Address Book ......................................................................................................253
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor ...............................................................................254
Auto Run program ...............................................................................................254
Installing Individual Applications ............................................................................255
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.........................................................................256
Setting print properties ........................................................................................256
Making settings for option configuration ..............................................................257
Basic Transmission ................................................................................................258
Specifying a destination using a destination list ..................................................259
Specifying a destination using Address Book......................................................259
vii
Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number,
Internet Fax destination, or IP-Fax destination..................................................260
Specifying Options .................................................................................................261
To send a fax document at a specific time ..........................................................261
To print a sender stamp.......................................................................................262
To attach a cover sheet .......................................................................................262
To specify two-sided printing ...............................................................................262
To display preview...............................................................................................262
Saving as files .....................................................................................................263
To store the fax document on the Document Server...........................................263
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver......................................................264
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail ..........................................................264
LAN-Fax Result Report ..........................................................................................265
Printing and Saving ................................................................................................266
Editing Address Book.............................................................................................266
Programming new destinations ...........................................................................267
Editing programmed destinations ........................................................................268
Deleting programmed destinations......................................................................268
Using the Machine's Address Book Data in the Destination List of the LAN-Fax....269
Editing Fax Cover Sheets ......................................................................................269
Creating a cover sheet ........................................................................................270
Attaching a created cover sheet ..........................................................................271
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ..................272
LAN-Fax Operation Messages...............................................................................272
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser .............................................273
Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Documents Using a Web Image Monitor...273
Viewing received fax documents using a Web browser ......................................273
Printing fax information using a Web browser .....................................................274
Deleting fax information using a Web browser ....................................................275
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser.....................................275
To edit machine properties already programmed................................................276
To add new receiver ............................................................................................277
Delivering Files Received by Fax ..................................................................... 278
7. Appendix
Programs ............................................................................................................279
Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs ....................................................279
Registering a priority function using a program ...................................................281
Changing a program name..................................................................................282
Deleting a Program ................................................................................................283
Using a Program ....................................................................................................284
Optional Equipment........................................................................................... 285
Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM) ........................................................................285
Handset..................................................................................................................285
Extra G3 Interface Unit...........................................................................................285
Specifications..................................................................................................... 286
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination Machines.......................288
Maximum Values................................................................................................289
INDEX....................................................................................................... 291
viii
NOTICE
❖ USA
❖ FCC Requirements
A This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the cover of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
B This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
C A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring
and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68
rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone
cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to
be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for detail.
D The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN
for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
E If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of
service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
F The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain
uninterrupted service.
G If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT.
at 1-800-FASTFIX. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is resolved.
H In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication), refer to the solving problems section in this
manual.
1
I
J
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the
state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the
telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified
installer.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS
TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
A Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for
the call before hanging up.
B Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning
hours or late evenings.
❖ CANADA
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of
devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
❖ Note to users in the United States of America
❖ Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
❖ Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
2
❖ Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA only)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or
individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should
complete the following steps: Follow the FAX HEADER programming
procedure in the Programming chapter of the operating instructions to enter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal or
business. This information is transmitted with your document by the FAX
HEADER feature. In addition to the information, be sure to program the
date and time into your machine.
❖ Note to users in Canada
❖ Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
❖ Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
❖ Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
3
Important Safety Instructions
Caution
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always
be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl,
kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote
risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
Save these instructions.
IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ
Certalnes mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l’utilisation de matérial téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d’incendle, de choc électrique et de
blessures. En voici quelquesunes:
• Ne pas utiliser l’appareil près de l’eau, p.ex., près d’une balgnoire, d’un lavabo, d’un évier de cuisine, d’un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près
d’une piscine.
• Éviter d’utiliser le téléphone (sauf s’il s’agit d’un apparell sans fil) pendant un
orage électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la
foudre.
• Ne pas utiliser l’appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fulte de gaz s’il est
situé près de la fuite.
• Utiliser seulement le cordon d’alimentation et le type de piles indiqués dans
ce manual. Ne pas jeter les piles dans le feu: elles peuvent exploser. Se conformer aux ègrlements pertinents quant à l’élimination des piles.
Conserver ces instructions.
4
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
Names of Major Functions
This machine's major functions are referred to in this manual as follows:
• Internet Fax (by specifying an e-mail address) → Internet Fax
• Internet Fax (by specifying an IPv4 address) → IP-Fax
5
Reading the Display
This section explains how to use control panel and screen-displayed keys.
The display guides you through operations, shows messages, machine status,
and destinations registered in the destination lists.
If you press the {Facsimile} or {Clear Modes} key during operation, the standby
display appears.
Note
❒ This machine automatically returns to standby mode if you do not use the
machine for a certain period of time. You can select the period using the Facsimile Auto Reset Timer in System Settings.
❒ You can have the machine return to default mode after each transmission using [Scan End Reset] under Gen. Settings/ Adjust in the Facsimile Features
menu.
❒ To manually return to the standby display, do one of the following:
• If you have placed the original in the optional Auto Document Feeder
(ADF) and have not pressed the {Start} key, remove the original.
• If you have not placed an original, press the {Clear Modes} key.
• If you are in User Tools mode, press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
6
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys
This section explains key functions and messages that appear on the control panel.
Important
❒ To use the Internet Fax or IP-Fax function, the optional HDD unit and printer/scanner functions are required.
❖ Initial Display
AJC102S
1. Allows you to select scanning
conditions and sizes.
4. Displays messages and the machine status.
2. Displays the date and time. Dis-
5. Displays the entered number of a
plays the name, facsimile number of
the destination, and the size of the
original when transmitting.
destination. When adding destinations using the number keys, press
[Add].
When user authentication is set, a login
user name appears.
6. Press to display various informa-
3. Press this button to enter or add
7. Switches transmission mode between Memory Transmission and
Immediate Transmission.
fax numbers, e-mail address, or IPFax destination.
• Internet Fax setting “On”:
• IP-Fax, H.323, SIP setting “On”:
• Internet Fax setting “On” and IP-Fax,
H.323, SIP setting “On”:
tion about transmission.
8. Displays Quick Operation keys set
for frequently used functions. [TX File
Status] and [RX File Status] are preset.
9. Displays various sending functions.
7
10. Title word keys appear. Allows
12. Appears on Destination keys
you to switch from one page (display)
to another on the destination list.
programmed as a transfer station.
11. Allows you to search for a destina-
13. Appears on Destination keys programmed with a group of destinations.
tion by destination name, fax number,
e-mail address or registration number.
Note
❒ The display will differ depending on installed optional units.
❒ You can change Internet Fax setting under E-mail Settings in the Facsimile
Features menu.
❒ You can change IP-Fax settings under IP-Fax Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
p.13 “Transmission Modes”
p.14 “Switching between Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission”
p.69 “Switching the titles in the Address Book”
p.77 “Searching for a Destination in the Address Book”
p.111 “Other Transmission Features”
p.187 “Changing/Confirming Communication Information”
p.235 “Storing a Document”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
8
Function List
This section explains various items that can be specified in the Facsimile Features menu.
Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to display the Facsimile Features menu. For
details about the settings, see “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
❖ Gen. Settings/ Adjust
Function name
Description
Memory / Immed. Transmission Switch
Specify the Transmission Mode for document transmission.
Text Size Priority
Specify the character size of your originals
for scanning.
Original Type Priority
Specify the type of originals for scanning.
Auto Image Density
Use this function to prioritize automatic Image Density for scanning your originals.
Adjust Scan Density
Specify the scan density of your originals.
Select Title
Use this function for selecting the title to be
shown on the destination list.
Change Initial Mode
Select whether contents registered in program No.1 are to be used as the initial settings after the power is turned on or the
{Clear Modes} key is pressed.
Adjust Sound Volume
Adjust the sound volume during On Hook
Mode and Immediate Transmission.
Program Fax Information
Program information to be shown on the display of the other machine and printed as a
report.
Scan End Reset
Use this function to return to the initial settings each time an original is scanned.
TX Stamp Priority
Use this function to press a TX stamp.
Line Priority Setting
Specify the line to be used.
Program Economy Time
Specifying a time for transmission when call
charges are low.
On Hook Mode Release Time
Specify a time to cancel On Hook mode after
you transmit using On Hook dialing.
Quick Operation Key
Frequently used functions programmed as
Quick Operation keys are shown on the
menu immediately after the power is turned
on.
9
❖ Reception Settings
Function name
Description
Switch Reception Mode
Specify the method for receiving fax documents.
Authorized RX
Specify whether or not unwanted fax documents are to be screened out.
Forwarding
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be forwarded to a programmed
receiver.
RX File Print Qty
Specify the number of copies to be printed
for each fax document received.
2 Sided Print
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be printed on both sides of the
paper.
RX Reverse Printing
Specify whether or not received fax documents
are to be printed from the last page received.
Paper Tray
Use this function to print fax documents received from programmed senders and fax
documents from other senders, using different paper trays.
Specify Tray for Lines
Specify a paper tray for each line (telephone,
Internet Fax, IP-Fax).
Checkered Mark
Specify whether or not a checkered mark is
to be printed on the first page of received fax
documents.
Center Mark
Specify whether or not a center mark is to be
printed halfway down the left side and at the
top center of each page received.
Print Reception Time
Specify whether or not the received date,
time, and file number are printed at the bottom of received fax documents.
❖ E-mail Settings
10
Function name
Description
Internet Fax Settings
You can select to display
Max. E-mail Size
When the other party has a limit on the size
of e-mail messages that can be received, or
sending data heavy e-mail causes problems,
you can make settings to limit the size of sent
e-mail.
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings
This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via SMTP.
or not.
❖ IP-Fax Settings
Function name
Description
Enable H.323
Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IPFax transmission.
Enable SIP
Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax
transmission.
H.323 Settings
Set the IPv4 address or host name of the gatekeeper, and alias telephone number.
SIP Settings
Set the SIP server's IPv4 address or host
name, and SIP user name.
Program / Change / Delete Gateway
Register, change, or delete the gateway used
for transmission to IP-Fax.
❖ Administrator Tools
Function name
Description
Program / Change / Delete Standard Message Use this function to program standard messages to be printed at the top of the first page
of the original.
Store / Change / Delete Auto Document
You can program, change, or delete pages
stored as auto documents.
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
You can program, change, or cancel frequently used sizes.
Print Journal
The Journal allows you to check a maximum
of the last 50 communications (receptions and
transmissions) performed by the machine.
Transmission Page Count
This function allows you to check the total
number of pages transmitted and received.
Forwarding
This function allows you to have documents
printed on the machine, and sent to a specified End Receiver.
Memory Lock RX
When you switch Memory Lock on, received
documents are stored in memory and not
printed automatically.
ECM
If part of a transmission fails because of a line
problem, the lost data is automatically resent.
Parameter Setting
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.
Program Special Sender
By programming particular receivers as Special Sender in advance, you can have Special
Senders treated differently.
Box Setting
The following functions are for delivery and
transfer of documents: Personal Box, Information Box, Transfer Box.
11
Function name
Description
Transfer Report
For the Requesting Party to be able to receive
Transfer Result Reports from the Transfer
Station, the Requesting Party must program
the number of the telephone line that is connected to their own machine.
Program Confidential ID
Program a Confidential ID to print a Confidential Reception.
Program Polling ID
Program a Polling ID to use the Transfer Request, Transfer Station, Default ID Polling
Transmission, and Default ID Polling Reception functions.
Program Memory Lock ID
Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered before printing documents when the Memory
Lock function is activated.
Select Dial / Push Phone
Use this function to select a line type when
the machine is connected to a G3 analog line.
Reception File Setting
Selects whether received documents are
saved on the hard disk to be printed later or
printed immediately without being saved.
Stored RX File User Setting
The administrator can be specified for managing documents stored on the machine after
fax documents are received. To specify the
administrator, enter the administrator user
code for managing documents using Web
Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder.
Menu Protect
Using Menu Protect, you can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the user
tools.
Folder Transfer Result Report
You can set whether the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted to the specified email address, when folders are programmed
as the forwarding destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special
Senders.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
12
1. Transmission
This section explains basic transmission operations such as specifying a transmission mode or destination.
Transmission Modes
There are two types of transmission:
• Memory Transmission
• Immediate Transmission
Important
❒ It is recommended that you call the receiver and confirm with them when
sending important documents.
❖ Memory Transmission
Transmission starts automatically after the original is stored in memory. This
is convenient when you are in a hurry and want to take the document away
with you. You can also send the same original to several destinations.
❖ Immediate Transmission
Immediately dials the destination number, and while scanning the original,
sends it. It is very convenient when you want to send an original quickly or
when you want to check the destination you are sending to. When using this
type of transmission, the original is not stored in memory. You can only specify one address.
13
Transmission
Reference
p.19 “Parallel Memory Transmission”
p.21 “Simultaneous Broadcast”
1
Switching between Memory Transmission and Immediate
Transmission
Check the display to see which mode is currently active. You can change transmission mode by pressing [Immed. TX] or [Memory TX].
Note
❒ You can set the machine to enter Memory Transmission mode or Immediate
Transmission mode right after the power is turned on or the {Clear Modes} key
is pressed, with [Memory / Immed. Transmission Switch] under Gen. Settings/
Adjust. in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
14
Transmission Modes
Memory Transmission
Memory transmission mode has standard fax, Internet Fax and IP-Fax.
1
Important
❒ If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine
is unplugged for about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you identify deleted files. Simply turning off the power
by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents. See
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
❒ If memory is full (0% appears under [Information] on the display), Memory
Transmission is disabled. Use Immediate Transmission instead.
A Make sure that [Memory TX] is selected.
B Place the original.
The original can be placed anytime before the {Start} key is pressed.
C Make the scan settings you require.
15
Transmission
D Using the number keys or a Destination key, specify a destination.
A fax number, e-mail address and IP-Fax destination can be specified simultaneously.
1
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the correct
number.
To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations”.
If you do not want to do a broadcast transmission, proceed to step G.
E When sending the same original to several destinations (broadcasting),
press [Add] to specify the destinations.
You do not have to press [Add] when adding a destination using the destination list.
F Specify the next destination.
Pressing
switches the destination list between fax number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax destination.
To specify another destination, repeat steps E and F.
G Press the {Start} key.
The machine dials the destination. After scanning, the standby display appears.
16
Transmission Modes
Note
❒ If the combined total number of programmed destinations exceeds the
maximum value, only Immediate Transmission is possible.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can specify per file, see
“Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can specify for all files (including files in memory), see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of documents you can store in memory for
Memory Transmission, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of pages you can store in memory (using A4
Standard <ITU-T q1 Chart>), see “Maximum Values”.
1
Reference
p.36 “Placing Originals”
p.47 “Resolution”
p.49 “Original Type”
p.50 “Image Density (Contrast)”
p.56 “Sending Over a Fax Line”
p.59 “Sending by IP-Fax”
p.63 “Sending to an E-mail Address”
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
p.70 “Specifying Group Destinations”
p.71 “Chain Dial”
p.72 “Redial”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
17
Transmission
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Memory Transmission)
Follow these steps to send multiple originals using the exposure glass.
A Make sure that [Memory TX] is selected.
B Place the first page of the original face down on the exposure glass.
C Specify a destination.
D Make the scan settings you require.
E Press the {Start} key.
1
The machine starts scanning.
F Place the next original on the exposure glass within 60 seconds after the machine has finished scanning the first original.
G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.
H Place the last original, and then press [#].
The machine dials the destination and starts transmission.
18
Transmission Modes
Parallel Memory Transmission
This function dials while the original is being scanned.
Standard Memory Transmission stores the original in memory, then dials the
destination. However, Parallel Memory Transmission allows you to confirm the
connection status quickly. In addition, this function scans the original faster than
Immediate Transmission. This is useful when you are in a hurry and need to use
the original for another purpose.
1
Important
❒ Standard Memory Transmission is used instead of Parallel Memory Transmission in the following cases:
• When the line is busy and could not be connected to
• With Send Later
• When you store an original for Memory Transmission while another communication is in progress
• When two or more destinations are specified
• When you send only an Auto Document
• When an original is placed on the exposure glass, and then sent
• When you send documents stored in the Document Server
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 07, bit 2)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Standard Memory Transmission may be used instead of Parallel Memory
Transmission depending on the optional equipment installed if there is not
enough free memory left.
❒ If you use this function, the Memory Storage Report will not be printed.
❒ If the {Clear/Stop} key is pressed, the original jams or memory runs out, Parallel Memory Transmission will stop. The Communication Result Report is
printed and files are deleted.
❒ When using Parallel Memory Transmission, only the page number is printed
on the header of the fax, the total number of originals is not automatically
printed.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
19
Transmission
Automatic Redial
If a fax document could not be sent because the line was busy or an error occurred during transmission, the line is switched to another at five-minute intervals and redial is attempted up to five times.
If redialing fails after four redials, the machine cancels the transmission and
prints a Communication Result Report or Communication Failure Report.
1
Note
❒ If there are a large number of files stored in memory, documents might not be
sent in the order they were scanned.
Reference
p.203 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”
p.205 “Communication Failure Report”
Batch Transmission
If you send a fax document by Memory Transmission and there is another fax
document waiting in memory to be sent to the same destination, that document
is sent along with your original.
Several fax documents can be sent with a single call, thus eliminating the need
for several separate calls. This helps save communication costs and reduce transmission time. Fax documents whose transmission time was set in advance are
sent by batch transmission when that time is reached.
Important
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax and IP-Fax.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 14, bit 2)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ The originals to be transmitted at a specific time is sent at that time.
❒ If fax memory is overloaded, documents may not be sent in the order they
were scanned.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
20
Transmission Modes
Dual Access
The machine can scan other documents into memory even while sending a fax
document from memory, receiving a document into memory, or automatically
printing a report. Since the machine starts sending the second document immediately after the current transmission ends, the line is used efficiently.
1
Note
❒ During Immediate Transmission or when in User Tools mode, the machine
cannot scan an original.
Simultaneous Broadcast
Use this function to send the same original to multiple destinations simultaneously.
To specify multiple destinations, specify the first destination, and then specify
the next destination by pressing [Add].
If you dial several destinations for the same document (broadcasting), the documents are sent in the order in which they were dialed. If the fax document could
not be transmitted, the machine redials that destination after the last destination
specified for broadcasting. For example, if you specify four destinations, A
through D, for broadcasting, and if the lines to destinations A and C are busy,
the machine dials the destinations in the following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.
To check the transmission progress, print the TX file list.
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can use the Simultaneous
Broadcast function to send faxes simultaneously on different phone lines.
If you specify a second transmission while broadcasting to several destinations,
faxes are transmitted alternately to each remaining destination in the current
and second broadcast.
For example, if you specify a broadcast to destinations A and B, and then specify
a broadcast to destinations C and D while transmission to destination A is in
progress, the machine sends the faxes in the following order: A, C, B, and then D.
If the previous file and next file are both on standby, these are also sent in the
same order.
Note
❒ To avoid accidentally pressing the wrong Destination key, you can set the
machine so that each time a destination is added using a Destination key,
[Add] must be pressed. Make the setting in User Parameters (switch 17, bit 2)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
p.55 “Simultaneous Broadcast Using Multiple Line Ports”
p.197 “Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
21
Transmission
If memory runs out while storing an original
If you run out of memory while storing an original (free space reaches 0%), the
message “ Memory is full. Cannot scan more. Transmitting only
scanned pages.” is displayed. Press [Exit] to transmit stored pages only.
1
Note
❒ When this happens, only the scanned pages are sent. If you want to delete the
scanned pages and cancel transmission in this case, contact your service representative.
Immediate Transmission
Immediate Transmission is possible with standard fax transmission and IP-Fax
transmission.
Important
❒ Internet Fax is executed in only Memory Transmission that starts transmission automatically after storing documents in memory. If you specify Immediate Transmission in Internet Fax, the mode is switched to Memory
Transmission while an e-mail address is being entered.
❒ Group cannot be used for Immediate Transmission. You cannot send the
same document to multiple destinations (broadcasting). If you specify broadcast or transmission for a group, the machine changes automatically to Memory Transmission.
A Make sure that [Immed. TX] is selected.
B Place the original.
The original can be placed anytime before the {Start} key is pressed.
22
Transmission Modes
C Select the scan settings you require.
1
D Using the number keys or a Destination key, specify a destination.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the correct
number.
To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations”.
E Press the {Start} key.
The machine dials a destination.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
Note
❒ Documents are not stored in memory.
Reference
p.36 “Placing Originals”
p.47 “Resolution”
p.49 “Original Type”
p.50 “Image Density (Contrast)”
p.56 “Sending Over a Fax Line”
p.59 “Sending by IP-Fax”
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
p.70 “Specifying Group Destinations”
p.71 “Chain Dial”
p.72 “Redial”
23
Transmission
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission)
Follow these steps to send multiple originals using the exposure glass.
A Make sure that [Immed. TX] is selected.
B Place the first page face down on the exposure glass.
C Specify a destination.
D Make the scan settings you require.
E Press the {Start} key.
F Place the next original on the exposure glass within 10 seconds after the ma-
1
chine has finished scanning the first original.
G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.
H Place the last original, and then press [#].
24
Transmission Modes
Checking the Transmission Settings
On this screen you can check the destination, transmission mode, and other
transmission settings before transmitting.
1
A Press the {Check Modes} key, and then check the transmission settings.
ZLBS040N
The following display appears.
B After checking the settings on the display, press the {Check Modes} key.
The display before the {Check Modes} key was pressed appears.
25
Transmission
IP-Fax Functions
The IP-Fax function sends or receives documents between two facsimiles directly via a TCP/IP network.
This function has the following advantages and is suitable for communication
within the same LAN:
• Reducing communication costs
• Communicating between IP-Faxes at higher speed than by standard fax
IP-Fax uses SIP and H.323 as the network protocol.
Specify an IPv4 address or host name instead of a fax number for sending. When
using a gatekeeper, specify its alias telephone number. Specify addresses of the
gatekeeper or SIP server (proxy server, register server, redirect server) as appropriate in IP-Fax Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
When using a SIP server, you can send by specifying SIP user name.
You can also transmit to a G3 facsimile connected to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) via a gateway (T.38-compliant).
You can receive IP-Faxes in the same manner as standard faxes.
1
26
IP-Fax Functions
1
ALT001S
Important
❒ The optional HDD unit and printer/scanner functions are required.
❒ To use IP-Fax functions, this machine must be connected to a LAN and set up
correctly under IP-Fax Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ The facsimile function of this machine cannot be used with IPv6.
❒ Before using this function, configure the network in the System Settings
menu.
Note
❒ IP-Fax supported by this machine is ITU-T Recommendation T.38 compliant.
27
Transmission
Reference
p.155 “Types of Reception”
“Connecting the Machine”, General Settings Guide
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
1
Terminology
The following are words you should know when using IP-Fax:
❖ H.323
A multimedia communication protocol that sends or receives files via one-toone communication over a LAN or the Internet.
❖ SIP
A communication control protocol for Internet telephone that utilizes VoIP
(which converts voice information to IP packets) and is equipped with functions such as creating, modifying, and terminating sessions with one or more
participants.
❖ Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper)
A gatekeeper manages devices connected to an IP network and converts alias
telephone numbers to IPv4 addresses and performs authentication functions.
In addition, a gatekeeper governs band (transmission rate assignment) and
access control.
❖ SIP server
A SIP server mediates connection requests between devices connected to an
IP network and is composed mainly of servers that have the following three
functions:
• Proxy server: Receives SIP requests and forwards them on behalf of the requestor.
• Register server: Receives information about a device's address within an IP
network and registers them in the database.
• Redirect server: Used to inquire the destination address.
❖ Gateway (VoIP gateway)
A gateway connecting a telephone network and IP network, it has functions
such as protocol conversion for connecting these different networks, and also
connects communication devices (telephones, facsimiles, etc.) to a LAN or
other network.
28
IP-Fax Functions
Notes on Using IP-Fax
The following are notes about using IP-Fax:
• You may not be able to send to a firewall-protected network.
• You cannot use telephones on a LAN.
• If a power outage lasts about an hour, or the machine is disconnected from
the power outlet for about an hour, documents stored in the fax machine's
memory are deleted. If any document is deleted, the Power Failure Report is
automatically printed out when the main power switch is turned on. Use this
report to check which documents were deleted. Simply turning off the power
by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents. See
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
1
Reference
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission
You can use the following functions with standard fax transmission, but not IPFax transmission:
• Batch Transmission
• On hook dial
• Manual dial
29
Transmission
Internet Fax Functions
This machine converts scanned document images to e-mail format and transmits
the data over the Internet.
The e-mail sent by this machine can be received by another Internet Fax machine. Instead of dialing the telephone number of the destination you want to
send to, you enter the relevant e-mail address.
You can also print or forward received e-mail messages.
1
ALT002S
Important
❒ The optional HDD unit and printer/scanner functions are required.
❒ To use Internet Fax functions, this machine must be connected to a LAN and
set up correctly in “System Settings”.
❒ The facsimile function of this machine cannot be used with IPv6.
❒ Before using this function, configure the network in the System Settings
menu.
❒ To send Internet Fax documents, in the Facsimile Features menu, under Email Settings, set [Internet Fax Settings] to [On]. However, documents can still
be forwarded or delivered to Internet Fax destinations even if [Off] is selected.
❒ To receive Internet Fax documents, in the System Settings menu, in File
Transfer, under [Fax E-mail Account], set [Account] to [Receive].
30
Internet Fax Functions
Note
❒ The Internet Fax function supported by this machine is compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation T.37.
❒ You can receive e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image from computers.
❒ Though Internet Fax documents are normally sent via an SMTP server, you
can also send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without
going through an SMTP server. To do this, set whether or not to bypass the
SMTP server on the standby display.
❒ When sending Internet Fax documents, you can set e-mail options using [Sub
TX Mode].
❒ You can limit the size of transmitted e-mail messages in “E-mail Settings” of
“Facsimile Features”.
❒ See “Received Images” for how e-mail is actually received by the computer.
❒ You cannot send e-mail to a destination as cc.
❒ If you send Internet Fax documents specifying a user code, and the e-mail address is set as the routing destination of the specified user code, a Communication Result Report is sent after the transmission is completed. This makes it
possible to verify the result of a transmission.
❒ For details about how to confirm the transmission result, see “Checking the
Transmission Result (TX File Status)”.
1
Reference
p.66 “Bypassing the SMTP server”
p.134 “E-mail Options”
p.163 “Received Images”
p.200 “Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)”
p.288 “Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination Machines”
“Connecting the Machine”, General Settings Guide
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
31
Transmission
Notes on Using Internet Fax
The following are notes about using Internet Fax:
• When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals
larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver is in compliance with the
T.37 full mode, originals are sent at the size specified in the Address Book.
• When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at “Detail” resolution, even if you specify “Super Fine”. To send a document at “Super Fine”,
configure the Full Mode when registering the destinations in the Address
Book.
• If a transmission is not successful, this machine usually receives an e-mail error notification. However, e-mail error notifications may not be transmitted
for various reasons. It is recommended that you confirm receipt of important
document by calling the other party.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. It is recommended
that you use the telephone network for confidential communications.
• Voice communication is not supported over a LAN.
• Internet Fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use Internet Fax transmission that bypasses the SMTP server, a public telephone line
fax, or IP-Fax whenever communication time is a concern.
• If a power outage lasts about an hour, or the machine is disconnected from
the power outlet for about an hour, documents stored in the fax machine's
memory are deleted. If any document is deleted, the Power Failure Report is
automatically printed out when the main power switch is turned on. Use this
report to check which documents were deleted. Simply turning off the power
by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents. See
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
• You may not be able to send large files as e-mail, depending on e-mail environment conditions.
• When available memory is low, you may not be able to send Internet Fax documents.
• Because the machine sends documents as e-mail messages with an attached
TIFF-F image, viewer applications are required in order to view documents
when they are received on a computer.
• With a large volume of document, it may take some time before transmission
starts. This is due to the time the machine requires to convert the data in memory.
1
Reference
p.35 “T.37 Full Mode”
p.43 “Paper Size and Scanned Area”
p.66 “Bypassing the SMTP server”
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
32
Internet Fax Functions
Functions Not Available by E-mail Transmission
The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not
with Internet Faxing.
• Immediate Transmission
• Confidential Transmission
• ID Transmission
• Polling Transmission
• Chain Dial
• Transmission by SUB Code
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• JBIG Transmission
• Batch Transmission
• ECM (Error Correction Mode)
1
Functions Not Available by E-mail Reception
The following functions are supported with standard fax reception, but not with
Internet Faxing.
• Confidential Reception
• Memory Lock Reception
• Polling Reception
• SEP Code Reception
• Authorized Reception
• Reception File Print Quantity
33
Transmission
E-mail Subject
If you send e-mail without specifying a subject, a subject is automatically inserted. Subjects differ depending on Stamp Sender Name settings.
1
❖ When Stamp Sender Name is set to [On]:
From Sender Name(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
❖ When Stamp Sender Name is set to [Off]:
• If Own Fax Number and Own Name are programmed:
From “Own Fax Number”(“Own Name”)(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Fax Number is programmed:
From “Own Fax Number”(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Name is programmed:
From “Own Name”(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If neither Own Fax Number nor Own Name are programmed:
Fax Message NO.xxxx
Note
❒ “xxxx” is the document number that appears in the Journal.
Reference
p.113 “Sender Settings”
34
Internet Fax Functions
T.37 Full Mode
This machine is T.37 full mode compatible. T.37 full mode is an international
standard for Internet Fax transmission. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532)
When an Internet Fax communication is made between T.37 full mode compatible machines, the receiver side sends the return receipt (dispatched) in response
to the reception notice request attached to the sent e-mail. This return receipt includes the receiver's reception capability information (compression type, paper
size, and resolution). When the receiver is programmed in the Address Book as
the full mode destination, the sender side automatically registers the received information in the Address Book. This allows you to send a subsequent Internet
Fax document to that receiver based on this information.
1
❖ Returning a Return Receipt
When e-mail is received, if the sender requests reception notice, the receiver
sends a return receipt that includes the receiving machine's capability (compression type, paper size, and resolution).
❖ Registering the Received Reception Confirmation Contents
When the sender receives the return receipt that includes the receiver's reception capability, the sender checks that the final recipient address sent is programmed in the Address Book. If it is programmed as a full mode destination,
the sender automatically registers the receiver's reception capability. The registered reception capability is updated each time the sender receives new reception capability information. The sender can send documents to the
receiver based on this information.
If the receiver is programmed as the simple mode machine or not programmed in the Address Book, the receiver's reception capability cannot be
registered.
If you know the receiver's reception capability, you can set it manually.
❖ Requesting a Reception Notice
When the receiver's machine supports T.37 full mode and is programmed as
a full mode machine in the Address Book, the machine requests the reception
notice from the receiver. Then, the machine will receive the return receipt
(sent) that includes the receiver's reception capability.
Note
❒ Use Web Image Monitor to manually program a receiver's reception capability information.
❒ If you use Internet Fax transmission, you can send documents to multiple
destinations at once. However, if you specify full mode destinations, since
each destination may have a different reception capability, transmission is
done one by one in the specified transmission order.
Reference
p.139 “Requesting a reception notice”
p.275 “Programming Destination Information from Web Browser”
35
Transmission
Placing Originals
Place the original on the exposure glass or the ADF. For details about how to
place originals, see the following:
• Placing originals on the exposure glass
“Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass”, Copy/Document Server Reference
• Placing originals into the ADF
“Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder”, Copy/Document Server
Reference
“Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)”,
Copy/Document Server Reference
Note that [Special Original] of the copy function cannot be used with the facsimile
function.
Place the originals according to their paper size.
1
❖ How to place A4, B4 JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), A3, 8 1/2"×11", 8 1/2"×14",
and 11"×17" size originals
ARY006S
Generally, place A4, 8 1/2"×11" originals in the landscape orientation (L). If you
place an A4, 8 1/2"×11" original in the portrait orientation (K), the image is sent
rotated by 90°.
❖ How to place A5 and B5 JIS size originals
ARY007S
36
Placing Originals
Important
❒ If you place A5 size originals on the exposure glass, they are not detected.
Place A5 size originals into the ADF.
❒ Do not lift the ADF while using it to scan originals.
1
Note
❒ To scan multiple originals using the Auto Document Feeder (ADF), set originals in a stack.
❒ When sending a fax, the image output at the other end depends on the size
and orientation of paper used in the receiver's machine. If the receiver does
not use paper of the same size and orientation as that of the original, the fax
image may be reduced in size, trimmed at both edges, or divided across two
or more sheets. When sending an important original, ask the receiver about
the size and orientation of the paper in their machine.
❒ When sending an original of irregular (i.e. custom) size or part of a large original, you can specify the scan area precisely.
❒ Custom size originals are scanned as regular size originals, so the receiver
may find extra blank margins or edges of images missing. If you specify a
scan area, only that area is scanned regardless of the actual size of the original.
❒ To send an original longer than 420 mm (17"), make either of the following
settings, and then scan the original using the ADF (if a jam occurs, the original
might become damaged because scanning does not stop in this mode):
• Specify the area under “Scan Area”.
• Select Long Document mode with the User Parameters (switch 14, bit 1) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Documents longer than 800 mm (32") must be sent by Memory Transmission
(Immediate Transmission may not be possible).
❒ If an original jams, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then carefully remove the
original.
❒ Make sure that all ink, correcting fluid etc., has completely dried before placing your original. If it is still wet, the exposure glass will become marked and
those marks will appear on the received image.
❒ You can send the first page from the exposure glass then the remaining pages
from the ADF. You cannot change from the ADF to the exposure glass.
❒ When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals
larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver's machine is compliant
with the T.37 full mode, originals are sent at the size specified in the Address
Book.
❒ Information about this machine is printed at the destination. This information
is printed on the side of the paper that is to your left when placing the documents on the exposure glass or the ADF. However, the information is also
printed rotated by 90 degrees if an A4, 8 1/2"×11" original is placed in the portrait orientation (K).
37
Transmission
❒ When setting bound originals (books, magazines, etc.), you can select to have
either the left or right page sent first with the User Parameters (switch 06, bit 6)
in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Book Fax”.
❒ For acceptable types of originals, see “Acceptable Original Sizes”, “Paper Size
and Scanned Area” and “Original Sizes Difficult to Detect”.
❒ For how to place two-sided originals, see “Two-Sided Transmission (DoubleSided Transmission)”.
1
Reference
p.18 “Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Memory Transmission)”
p.24 “Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission)”
p.35 “T.37 Full Mode”
p.38 “Setting a Scan Area”
p.42 “Acceptable Original Sizes”
p.43 “Paper Size and Scanned Area”
p.45 “Original Sizes Difficult to Detect”
p.46 “Transmission with Image Rotation”
p.130 “Book Fax”
p.132 “Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission)”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Placing Originals”, Copy/Document Server Reference
Setting a Scan Area
Normally, a placed original is scanned according to the automatically detected
size. If a scan area is specified, the original is scanned accordingly. Thus, originals can be sent without extra space or blank margins.
Note
❒ When placing different size originals into the ADF, adjust the document
guide to the largest original.
❒ Small-size originals may be sent at a slight slant since they do not match the
document guide.
Reference
p.45 “Original Sizes Difficult to Detect”
38
Placing Originals
Auto Detect
The area of a placed original is scanned automatically.
If the machine cannot detect the original size, a confirmation message appears.
Place the original again.
1
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Scan Area].
C Make sure that [Auto Detect] is selected.
If it is not, press [Auto Detect].
D Press [OK].
“Auto Detect” is shown above [Scan Area].
E Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
39
Transmission
Regular
The placed original is scanned according to specified size regardless of actual
size.
The sizes that can be specified are A4KL, B4 JISL, A3L, 81/2"×11"KL,
81/2"×14"L, and 11"×17"L.
1
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Scan Area].
C Press [Regular].
D Press the size of the originals to be sent, and then press [OK].
81/2"×11" indicates LT. 81/2"×14" indicates LG. 11"×17" indicates DLT.
40
Placing Originals
E Press [OK].
1
The selected size is shown above the highlighted [Scan Area].
To cancel the selected scan size, select [Auto Detect].
F Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Area
Program the sizes of the originals to be scanned in advance in the Facsimile Features menu. Only the area in the specified size is scanned regardless of the actual
size of a placed original.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Scan Area].
C Press [Area 1] or [Area 2].
41
Transmission
D Press [OK].
1
“Area 1” or “Area 2” is shown above the highlighted [Scan Area].
To cancel the selected scan size, select [Auto Detect].
E Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Acceptable Original Sizes
Where original is set
Acceptable original size
Exposure glass
Up to A3 (297 × 420 mm),
11" × 17" (279 × 432 mm)
ADF,
one-sided document
A5 L to A3 L
(up to 1200 mm long)
Maximum
number of
sheets
1
Paper thickness
----
50 sheets
40-128 g/m2
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) (11-34 lb)
51/2" × 81/2" K to 11" × 17"L
ADF,
two-sided document
A5 L to A3 L
(up to 432 mm long)
51/2" × 81/2" K to 11" × 17"L
42
50 sheets
52-105 g/m2
2, 20 lb)
(14-28 lb)
(80 g/m
Placing Originals
Paper Size and Scanned Area
This section explains the size of the area the machine can scan and detect.
1
Note
❒ There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the destination.
❒ Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the ADF, a
margin of 3 mm (0.1") around each edge of the original may not be sent.
❒ If the receiver uses paper of a smaller width than the original, the image is reduced to fit that paper.
Reference
p.152 “Auto Reduce”
When placing an original on the exposure glass
Important
❒ If you place an original larger than A3, 11" × 17" on the exposure glass, only
an A3, 11" × 17" area is scanned.
• Maximum scan area
The following shows the maximum scan area:
297 × 432 mm/11" × 17" (W × L)
The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways:
❖ Metric Version
ARY001S
43
Transmission
❖ Inch Version
1
ARY002S
× - Unable to auto detect
*1 Normally a length of about 420 mm (16.5") can be scanned; however, it is only
possible to specify a scanning size up to 432 mm (17").
Reference
p.38 “Setting a Scan Area”
When placing an original into the ADF
• Maximum scan area
The following shows the maximum scan area:
Memory Transmission: 297 × 1200 mm/11" × 47" (W × L)
Immediate Transmission: 297 × 1200 mm/11" × 47" (W × L)
The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways:
❖ Metric Version
ARY008S
44
Placing Originals
❖ Inch Version
1
ARY009S
Note
❒ During Immediate Transmission, the length of the scanning range can become narrower than 1200 mm (47"), depending on the resolution as well as
the settings on the destination machine.
❒ If a paper misfeed occurs when using a custom size original, program a custom scanning size that has a vertical-size that is nearly equal to the actual size
of the original. To do this, open the Facsimile Feature menu and set a new
scan area in “Program/Change/Delete Scan Size”. Then, in the standby
screen select the scanning size you programmed and scan the original again.
See “Setting a Scan Area”.
Reference
p.38 “Setting a Scan Area”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Original Sizes Difficult to Detect
The machine has difficulty detecting the size of the following kinds of originals.
(When this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the correct size.)
• documents placed on the exposure glass of sizes other than those listed in the
following table
• originals with index tabs, tags, or protruding parts
• transparent originals, such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• dark originals with dense text or drawings
• originals that contain areas of solid print
• originals that have solid print around their edges
• originals with glossy surfaces
• bound originals of more than 10 mm (0.3") in thickness, such as books.
The following paper sizes are automatically detected in facsimile mode.
45
Transmission
❖ Metric Version
Paper size
where
original is
placed
1
A3L
8 1/2"×13"
(F4)
B4 JIS L
A4KL
B5 JISKL
A5KL
Exposure
glass
×
ADF
- Auto detect
× - Unable to auto detect
❖ Inch Version
Paper size where
original is placed
11"×17"L
8 1/2"×14" L
8 1/2"×11" KL
Exposure glass
5 1/2"×8 1/2" K
×
ADF
- Auto detect
× - Unable to auto detect
Transmission with Image Rotation
Generally, place A4, 81/2"×11" originals in the landscape orientation (L). If you
place an A4, 81/2"×11" original in the portrait orientation (K), the image is sent
rotated by 90°. Providing the receiver has A4, 81/2"×11" landscape paper (L),
the document is printed the same size as the original.
Note
❒ This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission.
❒ When Image Rotation is used, all documents are sent by normal Memory
Transmission.
46
Scan Settings
Scan Settings
You may want to send many different types of fax documents. Some of these
may be difficult to reproduce at the receiver's end. However, the machine has
three settings that you can adjust to help you transmit the document with the
best possible image quality.
1
❖ Resolution:
Standard, Detail, Super Fine (optional)
❖ Original Type:
Text, Text / Photo, Photo
❖ Image Density (Contrast):
Auto Image Density, Manual Image Density (seven levels), Combined Auto
and Manual Image Density
Resolution
This section explains how to set the resolution of the original.
Images and text are scanned into the machine by converting them to a sequence
of dots. The density of the dots determines the quality of the image and how long
it takes to transmit. Therefore, images scanned at high resolution (Super Fine)
have high quality but transmission takes longer. Conversely, low resolution
(Standard) scanning results in lower quality but the original is sent more quickly. Select the setting that matches your needs based upon this trade off between
speed and image clarity.
❖ Standard (8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100 dpi)
Select for originals containing normal size characters.
❖ Detail (8 x 7.7 lines/mm, 200 x 200 dpi)
Select for originals containing small characters or when you require greater
clarity. This resolution is twice as fine as Standard.
❖ Super Fine (optional expansion memory required: 16 x 15.4 lines/mm, 400 x 400 dpi)
Select for originals with very fine details or when you require the best possible image clarity. This resolution is eight times finer than Standard.
A Press [Resolution].
47
Transmission
B Select the resolution you require, and then press [OK].
1
Note
❒ If you install the optional expansion memory, “Super Fine” appears in the
Resolution box.
❒ If the other party's machine does not support the resolution at which you
are sending, this machine automatically switches to a resolution that is
supported. You can check the resolution at which you actually sent by
printing the Journal.
❒ Sending with Super Fine resolution requires that the machine has the optional expansion memory, and the other party's machine has the capability
to receive fax documents at Super Fine resolution.
❒ The machine supports Standard, Detail, Fine (with the optional expansion
memory), and Super Fine (with the optional expansion memory) resolutions for reception.
❒ You can set the resolution type that is selected right after the machine is
turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed, with [Text Size Priority] under
Gen. Settings/ Adjust in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at “Detail” resolution, even if you have specified “Super Fine”. To send a document at
“Super Fine”, configure the Full Mode when registering the destinations in
the Address Book.
Reference
p.35 “T.37 Full Mode”
p.208 “Print Journal”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
48
Scan Settings
Original Type
If the original contains photographs, illustrations, or diagrams with complex
shading patterns or grays, select the appropriate original type to optimize image
clarity.
1
❖ Text
Select [Text] to send high-contrast black-and-white image originals. Use this
setting when you only want to send clearer text, even if the original contains
text and photographs.
❖ Text / Photo
Select [Text / Photo] to send an original containing both a high-contrast blackand-white image, such as text, and a halftone image, such as a photograph.
❖ Photo
Select [Photo] to send an original containing a halftone image, such as a photograph or a color original.
A Press [Original Type].
B Select the original type you require, and then press [OK].
Note
❒ If you select [Text / Photo] or [Photo], the transmission will take longer than
when [Text] is selected.
❒ If you send a fax document with [Text / Photo] or [Photo] and the background
of the received image is dirty, reduce the density setting and resend the fax.
❒ You can set the original type that is selected right after the machine is
turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed, with [Original Type Priority]
under Gen. Settings/ Adjust in the Facsimile Features menu.
49
Transmission
Reference
p.50 “Image Density (Contrast)”
JBIG Transmission
1
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image experts Group) compression, you can send
originals scanned using [Photo] faster than with other compression methods.
Important
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax function.
❒ This function requires that the other party's fax machine has both the JBIG
function and ECM function (G3 communication only).
❒ If ECM is turned off in the Facsimile Features menu, JBIG Transmission is unavailable.
Reference
p.49 “Original Type”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Image Density (Contrast)
The text and diagrams on originals should stand out clearly from the paper they
are on. If the original has a darker background than normal (for example, a
newspaper clipping), or if the writing is faint, adjust the density.
❖ Auto Image Density
The appropriate density setting for the original is automatically selected.
A Make sure that [Auto Image Density] is selected.
50
Scan Settings
❖ Manual Image Density
Use manual image density to set image density manually.
You can select one of seven image density levels.
A If [Auto Image Density] is selected, press [Auto Image Density] to turn it off.
B Press [iLighter] or [Darkerj] to adjust the density.
The square moves.
1
❖ Combined Auto and Manual Image Density
You can only adjust image density for photographs, illustrations, or diagrams
if the original has a dark background.
You can select one of seven image density levels.
A Make sure that [Auto Image Density] is selected.
B Press [iLighter] or [Darkerj] to adjust the density.
The square moves.
Note
❒ Selecting [Text] or [Text / Photo] for the original type causes [Auto Image Density]
to be selected.
❒ You can set the image density that is selected right after the machine is turned
on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed, with [Auto Image Density] under Gen.
Settings/ Adjust in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
51
Transmission
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original
When sending an original of several pages, you can select a different image density, resolution, and original type setting for each page.
It is recommended that originals be placed on the exposure glass when mixing
scan settings for a multiple page original.
1
❖ When placing originals on the exposure glass
A Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
B Remove the previous page and place the next page that you checked on the
exposure glass.
C Select the image density, resolution, and original type.
While the machine is beeping, you have about 60 seconds (10 seconds for
Immediate Transmission) to select density, resolution, and original type.
The time remaining is shown on the display.
Adjust the settings for each page before you press the {Start} key.
❖ When placing originals in the optional Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
A Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
B Select the image density, resolution, and original type before the page you
want to change the settings for starts being scanned.
Depending on what time the scan settings are adjusted, the settings may
not be reflected in the resulting operation.
52
Changing the Line Port
Changing the Line Port
Select a line port to be used for standard fax transmission.
When the extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can connect to a maximum of
three ports.
1
Important
❒ The optional extra G3 interface unit is required.
❖ G3
G3 is selected after power up or when the machine is reset. If you install the
extra G3 interface unit, you can select “G3-1”, “G3-2”, “G3-3”, or “G3 Auto”depending on the number of the installed unit.
❖ Multi-port
When the extra G3 interface unit is installed, communications can take place
simultaneously through three lines at once.
The following list shows protocol combinations available for each line type.
Option
Available line types
Available protocol combinations
Without option
PSTN
G3
Extra G3 interface unit
PSTN n PSTN
G3 n G3
Extra G3 interface unit n
Extra G3 interface unit
PSTN n PSTN n PSTN
G3 n G3 n G3
53
Transmission
A Press [Select Line].
1
B Select the line you want to use.
When one optional extra G3 unit is installed
If you select “G3 Auto”, the machine will use any available line. This increases efficiency.
C Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ When you install the extra G3 interface unit, you can specify the line port
home position under Gen. Settings/ Adjust in the Facsimile Features
menu.
❒ When sending a fax, you can select the line port if dialing with the number
keys or Chain Dial.
❒ A maximum of three simultaneous communications are possible. You cannot perform three Immediate Transmissions simultaneously.
❒ If three communications are in progress, the display shows the first communication that was initiated.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
54
Changing the Line Port
Simultaneous Broadcast Using Multiple Line Ports
The Standard Broadcast function sends faxes one at a time to multiple destinations in the order of specified destinations. However, the Simultaneous Broadcast function can simultaneously send faxes to multiple destinations using
different lines.
This results in a shorter overall transmission time.
1
Important
❒ The optional extra G3 interface unit is required.
Note
❒ A maximum of three simultaneous transmissions (including LAN) are possible.
❒ When using the optional extra G3 interface unit, if you set the line selection
as “G3 Auto” beforehand, the machine will use whichever G3 line is not busy.
This increases efficiency.
55
Transmission
Specifying a Destination
This section explains how to specify a destination.
Fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations, and e-mail addresses can be specified.
1
Note
❒ The display shows the percentage of free memory space for storing originals.
Since fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations and e-mail addresses are programmed
in separate memory, dialing fax numbers using the number keys does not
change the percentage on the display.
Sending Over a Fax Line
Enter numbers directly using the number keys on the right side of the control
panel.
A Enter the fax number using the number keys.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter again.
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, select the line you want to
use before pressing the {Start} key.
To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations”.
B Press the {Start} key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
Note
❒ You can insert pauses and tones in a fax number.
❒ Press [ProgDest] after entering the fax number to store the fax number in the
destination list.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
56
Specifying a Destination
Reference
p.53 “Changing the Line Port”
p.57 “Entering a pause”
p.58 “Entering a tone”
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
p.76 “Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
1
Entering a pause
Press the {Pause/Redial} key when dialing or storing a number to insert a pause
of about two seconds.
Note
❒ If you press the {Pause/Redial} key at the first digit, the Redial screen appears.
❒ A pause is shown as a “-” on the display.
❒ You can also program numbers including pauses in the destination list.
Reference
p.72 “Redial”
57
Transmission
Entering a tone
This function allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send tonal
signals (for example if you want to use a special service on a tone dialing line).
When you press the {Tone} key, the machine dials the number using tonal signals.
This section explains how to use the tone function with On Hook Dial as an example.
1
A Press the {On Hook Dial} key.
ZLBS070N
B Enter the fax number using the number keys.
C Press the {Tone} key.
D Enter the number you want to tone dial using the number keys.
E Press the {Start} key.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
Note
❒ Certain services may be unavailable even when using the {Tone} key.
❒ A tone is shown as a “·” on the display and the next numbers are dialed
using tonal signals.
58
Specifying a Destination
Sending by IP-Fax
This section explains how to specify a destination using IP-Fax transmission.
When using IP-Fax transmission, specify the IP-Fax destination (IPv4 address,
host name, or alias telephone number) in place of the fax number.
A Press
1
to switch the destination to IP-Fax destination.
B Press [Manual Input].
To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations”.
59
Transmission
C Enter the IP-Fax destination, and then press [OK].
If you have set both of “Enable H.323” and “Enable SIP” parameters to “On”
with “IP-Fax Settings” under “Facsimile Features”, [Protocol] appears. Press
this button to select a protocol to be used.
If you enter an incorrect character, press [Backspace] or [Delete All]. Then, reenter the characters correctly.
To change the IP-Fax destination after pressing [OK], press [Edit Dest.], re-enter
an IP-Fax destination, and then press [OK].
The destination is specified.
1
Press [ProgDest] in this order to store the entered IP-Fax destination in the Address Book.
If you do not want to add a destination, proceed to step F.
D To add a destination, press [Add].
It is not necessary to press [Add] when adding destinations using the destination list.
E Specify the next destination.
60
Pressing
switches the destination list between fax number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps D and E.
Specifying a Destination
F Press the {Start} key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
1
Note
❒ Depending on security settings, [Manual Input] may not appear, and you
may be unable to enter the IP-Fax destination.
❒ For a list of gateways (T.38-compliant), gatekeepers, or SIP servers that are certified
as operable with this machine, contact your local reseller or service representative.
❒ When using the transfer request function, you can specify the IP-Fax destination to the transfer station. See “Sending the Transfer Result Report”.
❒ Methods of entering a destination vary depending on the network settings
made by the administrator. Ask the machine administrator for details. For
details about entering the IP-Fax destination, see “Regarding IP-Fax destinations”.
❒ To avoid accidentally pressing the wrong Destination key, you can set the
machine so that each time a destination is added using a Destination key,
[Add] must be pressed. Make the setting in User Parameters (switch 17, bit 2)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.26 “IP-Fax Functions”
p.61 “Regarding IP-Fax destinations”
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
p.72 “Redial”
p.76 “Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book”
p.166 “Sending the Transfer Result Report”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Regarding IP-Fax destinations
Depending on the network to which this machine is connected or this machine's
configuration, enter the IP-Fax destination as follows:
❖ When not using a gatekeeper/SIP server
• From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the IPv4 address or host name of the receiving machine.
Example: 192.168.1.10 (IPv4 address)
Example: IPFAX1 (host name)
• From IP-Fax to G3 fax
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
61
Transmission
❖ When using a gatekeeper server
• From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the alias telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0311119999 (alias telephone number)
• From IP-Fax to G3 fax
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
1
❖ When using a SIP server
• From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the SIP user name of the receiving machine.
Example: ABC (SIP user name)
• From IP-Fax to G3 fax
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
Note
❒ To send to a G3 fax via a gateway connected to a public telephone line, you
must specify it’s the receiver’s machine telephone number. For example, if the
receiver’s fax number is “0312345678”, specify “5678”. To send from an IPFax to G3 fax without using gatekeeper or SIP server, you must register the
gateway also.
❒ When you specify a destination with IP-Fax, depending on the receiver's network configuration, you may need to specify the IPv4 address and port number of the receiving machine. For example, if the receiver's IPv4 address is
“192.168.1.10” and the port number is “2100”, specify “192.168.1.10:2100”.
Ask the network administrator for details.
❒ When you specify a host name, depending on the receiver's network configuration, you may need to specify the host name and port number of the receiving machine. For example, if the receiver's host name is “IPFAX1”and the
port number is “2100”, specify “IPFAX1:2100”. Ask the network administrator for details.
❒ An alias telephone number is a number that is registered in the gatekeeper,
and is available only in the network to which the gatekeeper is connected.
❒ Pay attention to the number of telephone number digits set in the gateway/IPv4 address conversion table to avoid transmission error.
62
Specifying a Destination
Sending to an E-mail Address
This section explains how to specify an e-mail address as a destination.
When using Internet Fax transmission, specify the e-mail address in place of the fax number.
1
Important
❒ In the destination list, register senders, specify their e-mail addresses, and set Use Name
as [Sender] in advance using “Address Book Management” in “System Settings”.
❒ Internet Fax is executed in only Memory Transmission that starts transmission automatically after storing documents in memory. If you specify Immediate Transmission in Internet Fax, the mode is switched to Memory
Transmission while an e-mail address is being entered.
A Press
to switch the destination to e-mail address.
B Specify the sender.
For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”.
C Press [Manual Input].
To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations”.
63
Transmission
D Enter the e-mail address destination, and then press [OK].
1
If you enter an incorrect character, press [Backspace] or [Delete All]. Then, reenter the characters correctly.
To change the e-mail address after pressing [OK], press [Edit Dest.], re-enter an
e-mail address, and then press [OK].
The destination is specified.
If you do not want to add a destination, proceed to step G.
Press [ProgDest] in this order to store the entered e-mail address in the Address Book.
You can specify whether or not to bypass the SMTP server by pressing [SMTP].
E To add a destination, press [Add].
It is not necessary to press [Add] when adding destinations using the destination list.
64
Specifying a Destination
F Specify the next destination.
1
Pressing
switches the destination list between fax number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax destination.
You can specify fax destination and Internet Fax destination simultaneously.
To add another destination, repeat steps E and F.
G Press the {Start} key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
Note
❒ Depending on security settings, [Manual Input] may not appear, and you
may be unable to enter the e-mail address.
❒ For details about canceling a transmission, see “Canceling a Transmission”.
❒ To avoid accidentally pressing the wrong Destination key, you can set the
machine so that each time a destination is added using a Destination key,
[Add] must be pressed. Make the setting in User Parameters (switch 17, bit 2)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ If “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “On” in “System Settings”, the
sender is automatically specified and you can omit the procedure for specifying a sender. If “On” is selected, the specified e-mail address is printed
at “From:”. If no e-mail address is specified for the sender, or if the specified e-mail address is not programmed in the destination list, Internet Fax
documents cannot be sent.
65
Transmission
Reference
p.30 “Internet Fax Functions”
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
p.72 “Redial”
p.103 “Canceling a Transmission”
p.113 “Sender Settings”
p.134 “E-mail Options”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
1
Bypassing the SMTP server
You can send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP server.
Important
❒ To use this function, the following settings must be made. For details about
these settings, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide and “Special
Operations under Windows”, Network Guide.
• In “System Settings”, “SMTP” in “E-mail Communication Port”, set the
port number to “25”.
• To specify the host name of the other party as the domain part of the e-mail
address, program the host name of the other party on the DNS server.
❒ If the other party's IPv4 address is not registered on the DNS server, specify
the IPv4 address at the domain part of the e-mail address.
❒ To use this function, the other party's fax machine must be:
• compatible with Internet Fax
• connected to the same LAN as this machine
• have its reception protocol set to SMTP
❒ SMTP authentication set on the other party's fax machine is disabled when Internet Fax is transmitted using this function.
❒ If an Internet Fax is transmitted from the other party using this function, even
if reception is not successful, an Error Mail Notification is not sent to the sender.
❒ When an Internet Fax is transmitted using this function, even if transmission
is not successful, the error e-mail is not sent from the server.
❒ When using this function, you cannot send Internet Fax documents to the administrator's e-mail address programmed on this machine.
66
Specifying a Destination
You can send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP server. Internet Faxes are normally transmitted via the
SMTP server. However, with this feature the domain part of the destination's email address is read as the SMTP server's address and transmissions bypass the
SMTP server. Since this reduces load on the server, you can send faxes without
having to take server to destination transfer time into account.
There are two ways of specifying a destination, as follows:
1
❖ Specify the other party's host name
Specify a destination's e-mail address by adding the other party's host name
to the domain part of the e-mail address. Specify the address to the right of @
as follows: “host name”, “. (dot)”, and “domain name”.
xxxx@host name of the other party.domain name
Example: The other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the
host name is “HOST”; abc@HOST.defcompany.com
❖ Specify the other party's IPv4 address
Specify a destination's e-mail address by changing the domain part of the email address to the other party's IPv4 address.
xxxx@[the other party's IPv4 address]
Example: The other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the
IPv4 address is “192.168.1.10”; abc@[192.168.1.10]
Follow these steps to bypass the SMTP server.
A Press [SMTP].
B Press [No].
C Press [Exit].
67
Transmission
Note
❒ When you specify destinations directly using the number keys, you can
specify whether or not to use the SMTP server for each destination.
❒ When you select destinations in the destination list, the SMTP server setting specified in the Address Book is enabled.
❒ To send Internet Fax documents from a computer, use the LAN-Fax Driver
to specify whether or not to bypass the SMTP server. When sending with
the [Use device address] check box selected, the SMTP server setting specified on this machine is enabled.
1
Reference
p.251 “Sending Fax Documents from Computers”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
“Special Operations under Windows”, Network Guide
Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations
When destinations are programmed in a destination list, you can specify a destination by selecting a Destination key from the destination list.
The programmed name appears on Destination key.
Pressing
switches the destination list between fax number, e-mail address,
and IP-Fax destination.
Important
❒ In the destination list, program an individual fax number, IP-Fax destination,
e-mail address and/or groups of destinations.
A Press
to switch the destination between fax number, e-mail address,
and IP-Fax destination.
B Press the title word key where the desired destination is programmed.
For example, if you want to specify “NEW YORK OFFICE” programmed in
“LMN”, press [LMN].
68
Specifying a Destination
C Press the Destination key programmed with the desired destination.
1
If the desired Destination key is not shown, press [U] and [T] to look through
the list.
To cancel the selection, press the selected Destination key again. You can also
press the {Clear / Stop} key to cancel the selection.
To select more destinations, repeat steps B and C.
The destination is set and the Destination key is highlighted.
D Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ To check the contents of Destination keys, print the destination list.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
Switching the titles in the Address Book
There are three types of titles for destination lists; “Title 1”, “Title 2”, and “Title 3”.
The above display shows “Title 1”.
A Press , the magnifier icon.
B Press [Switch Title].
C Select the type of the title, and then press [Exit].
69
Transmission
Specifying Group Destinations
If you program multiple destinations into a Group, you can send documents to
all destinations in that Group using just a few keystrokes. Destinations programmed in a group are indicated by
.
1
Important
❒ In the destination list, program an individual fax number, IP-Fax destination,
e-mail address and/or groups of destinations.
❒ Group destination can be used only for Memory Transmission; it cannot be
used for Immediate Transmission. The machine automatically changes to
Memory Transmission when you use group destination.
❒ The total number of destinations programmed in multiple groups should not
exceed the maximum number of destinations you can specify for one file. For
details, see “Maximum Values”.
A Press
to switch the destination between fax number, e-mail address,
and IP-Fax destination.
B Press the title word key where the desired destination is programmed.
For example, if you want to specify “FACTORY” programmed in “EF”, press
[EF].
C Press the Destination key programmed with the desired group.
The destination is set and the Destination key is highlighted.
To select more groups, repeat steps B and C.
D Press the {Start} key.
70
Specifying a Destination
Note
❒ Destinations programmed in groups can be checked using “Print Group
Dial List” in “System Settings”.
❒ If a destination where a fax number, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination
is not programmed is included in the specified group, the confirmation
message appears. Press [Select] to specify destinations where the fax number, the e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination is programmed. Press [Cancel] to change the destination. You can select the priority order used to
specify an alternative destination if there is no destination of the specified
type. Make this setting with User Parameters (switch 32, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ To cancel any destination(s) among the group, press [UPrev.] and [TNext]
to display the desired destination. Then, press the {Clear/Stop} key. You
can also cancel a transmission by pressing the highlighted Destination key
to deselect it.
1
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
Chain Dial
This allows you to compose a telephone number from various parts, some of
which may be stored in Destination keys and some of which may be entered using the number keys.
For example, to dial “01133-1-555333” using a Destination key that is programmed as “01133”, use the following procedure:
Important
❒ You cannot use this function with Internet Fax transmission.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press the Destination key that is programmed “01133”.
C Press the {Pause/Redial} key.
D Enter {1}, {5}, {5}, {5}, {3}, {3}, {3} using the number keys.
E Press the {Start} key.
71
Transmission
Note
❒ For Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission, insert a pause
between parts of a number. For On Hook Dial and Manual Dial, no pause
is needed.
1
❒ The Advanced Features function programmed in the destination list is unavailable.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
Redial
The machine stores the latest destinations specified for each transmission method. This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination repeatedly, as you do not have to enter the destination again.
Important
❒ The following kinds of destinations are not stored:
• Destinations specified using the destination list
• Destinations specified as a group destination
• Destinations dialed as Receiving Stations for Transfer Request
• Destinations dialed using the external telephone
• Destinations dialed by Redial (regarded as already stored in memory)
• Second and later destinations broadcasted to
• Destinations specified in the LAN-Fax Driver on the computer
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press the {Pause/Redial} key.
72
Specifying a Destination
C Select the destination you want to redial to.
1
D Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ To redial a fax number, do not dial any numbers before you press the
{Pause/Redial} key. If you press the {Pause/Redial} key after entering numbers using the number keys, a pause is entered instead.
❒ You can specify Internet Fax and IP-Fax destinations using the Redial function. Select this function before pressing [Manual Input].
❒ When the date and time the original was scanned appears as a key, select
by pressing it.
❒ When you press [ProgDest], you can register a selected recipient in the destination list.
❒ For the maximum number of redials the machine can store, see “Maximum
Values”.
Reference
p.76 “Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
73
Transmission
Programming Destinations in the Address
Book
1
You can program fax numbers, e-mail addresses, IP-Fax destinations, and folder
destinations using Address Book Management in Administrator Tools in the
System Settings menu.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
B Press [System Settings].
C Press [Administrator Tools], and then press [TNext].
D Press [Address Book Management].
E Press [New Program].
For a description of the subsequent procedure, see “System Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
74
Programming Destinations in the Address Book
Note
❒ You can also register programmed fax numbers, e-mail addresses, IP-Fax
destinations, and folder destinations in a Group.
❒ When the facsimile initial display is shown, after changing the contents of
the Address Book, the “Destination list / machine settings are
updated.” message appears. Press [Exit] to bring up the facsimile's initial
display.
❒ You can register in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about installation, see “Monitoring
and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide, or, for information about
the Address Book, see the relevant Help.
1
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
“Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide
75
Transmission
Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book
This section explains how to register a directly entered fax number, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination to the Address Book.
When registering a destination directly entered or displayed on the Redial
screen in the Address Book, [ProgDest] appears in the destination field.
1
A Press [ProgDest].
B Press [Names] and enter any necessary information.
For details about registering destinations, see “Registering Addresses and
Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide.
C Press [OK].
Note
❒ Depending on security settings, [ProgDest] may not appear, and you may
be unable to register the destination.
Reference
p.72 “Redial”
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
76
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
Searching for a Destination in the Address
Book
1
Use this function to search for a destination registered in the destination list or
on the LDAP server.
Note
❒ If you press [Fax], [E-mail] or [IP-Fax] on the search result display, you can
switch between fax destination, e-mail destination and IP-Fax destination.
❒ The search returns only destinations whose beginnings match the entered
name.
❒ A warning message appears if the search returns more than the maximum
number of destinations you can search for at a time. Press [OK] and change the
destination name to view fewer destinations.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can search at a time, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
77
Transmission
Search by Destination Name
Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by
name.
1
A Press
, the magnifier icon.
B Press [Advanced Search].
C Press [Search by Dest. Name].
D Enter a destination name to search for, and then press [OK].
78
If you enter a wrong destination name, press [←] or [→] and [Backspace] or
[Delete All], and then enter the destination name again.
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
E Confirm the entered character and press [OK].
1
A search-in-progress message appears.
When the search is finished, a result appears.
F Select a destination.
If the desired destination does not appear, use [U] or [T] to scroll through the
list.
Reference
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
79
Transmission
Search by Fax Number
Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by
fax number.
1
A Press
, the magnifier icon.
B Press [Advanced Search].
C Press [Fax Number].
D Enter a number to search for, and then press [OK].
80
If you enter a wrong number, press [←] or [→] and [Clear], and then enter the
number again.
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
E Confirm the entered fax numbers and press [OK].
1
A search-in-progress message appears.
When the search is finished, a result appears.
F Select a destination.
If the desired destination does not appear, use [U] or [T] to scroll through the
list.
81
Transmission
Search by E-mail Address
Follow these steps to use an e-mail address to search for a destination registered
in the destination list.
1
A Press
, the magnifier icon.
B Press [Advanced Search].
C Press [E-mail Address].
D Enter an e-mail address to search for, and then press [OK].
82
If you enter a wrong e-mail address, press [←] or [→] and [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then enter the e-mail address again.
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
E Confirm the entered characters and press [OK].
1
A search-in-progress message appears.
When the search is finished, a result appears.
F Select a destination.
If the desired destination does not appear, use [U] or [T] to scroll through the
list.
Reference
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
83
Transmission
Search by IP-Fax Destination
Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by
IP-Fax destination.
1
A Press
, the magnifier icon.
B Press [Advanced Search].
C Press [Search IP-Fax Dest.].
D Enter an IP-Fax destination to search for, and then press [OK].
84
If you enter a wrong destination, press [←] or [→] and [Backspace] or [Delete
All], and then enter the destination again.
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
E Confirm entered IP-Fax destination and press [OK].
1
A search-in-progress message appears.
When the search is finished, a result appears.
F Select a destination.
If the desired destination does not appear, use [U] or [T] to scroll through the
list.
Search by LDAP Server
Follow these steps to search for a destination registered on the LDAP server.
Important
❒ To search for a destination from an LDAP server, the LDAP server must be
registered in advance.
A Press
, the magnifier icon.
B Press [Search LDAP].
C Press [Select Server].
85
Transmission
D Select the LDAP server to search through.
Make sure at least one LDAP server is highlighted. If no LDAP server is selected, an error message appears after you start searching.
E Press [OK].
F Press [Advanced Search].
1
G Enter a partial string for each search condition.
Conditions (Name, E-mail Address, Fax Number, Company Name, and Department Name) are those programmed in the LDAP server.
Press each condition to display the entry field, where you enter the necessary
information.
86
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
H Press [Search Criteria] for each condition, and then select the search criteria.
1
The meanings of the search criteria are as follows:
• [Search Beginning Word]: Search for strings that start with the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “A”.
• [Search End Word]: Search for strings that end with the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “C”.
• [Exact Match]: Search for strings that fully match the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “ABC”.
• [Include One of Words]: Search for strings that include the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “A”, “B”, or “C”.
• [Exclude Words]: Search for strings that do not include the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “D”.
• [Fuzzy Search]: Perform a fuzzy search (according to the searching method
supported by the LDAP server).
I Press [OK].
When the search is finished, the search result appears.
J Select a destination.
If the required destination does not appear, press [U] or [T] to display it.
Press [Detail] to display the detailed information of the selected destination.
Note
❒ You can add one additional search condition for LDAP servers by specifying the Search Options under Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server
under System Settings.
❒ The string you enter in the [Name] condition field is read as the first or last
name, depending on the administrator's setting. For example, to search for
the name “John Smith”, ask the system administrator whether you should
enter “John” or “Smith”.
❒ Although one user can program multiple e-mail addresses, only one address can be retrieved by the search. The address retrieved by the search
depends on the searching method supported by the LDAP server. However, the address programmed first is normally retrieved.
❒ For details about registering LDAP servers, see “System Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
87
Transmission
Reference
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
1
Search by Registration Number
Follow these steps to search for a destination by specifying a registration number stored in the destination list.
A Press
to switch the destination between fax number, e-mail address,
and IP-Fax destination.
B Press [Registration No.].
The registration number entry display appears.
C Enter a registration number using the number keys.
You do not need to enter the first zeros of a registration number when the display prompts you to enter five digits. If you do not enter 5 digits, press the
{q} key to complete the entry.
The corresponding destination appears.
The title word key switches to the destination list to which the specified destination is programmed.
Note
❒ If the “Cannot find the specified Registration No.” message appears, the specified registration number is wrong. Press [Exit], check the
registration number again, and then follow the procedure from step B.
88
❒ If the “No valid destination under the specified No.” message
appears, the
key is wrong. Press [Exit], and then follow the procedure
from step A.
On Hook Dial
On Hook Dial
The On Hook Dial function allows you to dial while listening to the tone from
the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the connection.
1
Important
❒ This function is not available for the optional extra G3 interface unit, Internet
Fax and IP-Fax.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press the {On Hook Dial} key.
ZLBS070N
You will hear a low tone from the internal speaker.
If you want to cancel this operation, press the {On Hook Dial} key again.
C Dial.
The machine immediately dials the destination.
If you make a mistake, press the {On Hook Dial} or {Clear Modes} key, and then
return to step B.
To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations”.
89
Transmission
D When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the
{Start} key.
The transmission starts.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
1
Note
❒ This function is unavailable in some countries.
❒ You can adjust the volume of the on-hook sound by pressing [Higher] or
[Lower] in the upper right-hand corner of the display. The volume can also
be preprogrammed in “Gen. Settings/ Adjust” in the Facsimile Features
menu.
❒ For details about On Hook Mode Release Time, see “Facsimile Features”,
General Settings Guide.
Reference
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
External Telephone On Hook Dial
If you have an external telephone on the fax machine, you can speak with the
other party when you hear a voice.
If you hear a voice before pressing the {Start} key, pick up the external telephone
and tell the receiver you want to send a fax document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
90
Manual Dial
Manual Dial
Pick up the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone and dial.
When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the {Start}
key to send your fax document. If, on the other hand, you hear a voice at the other end, continue conversation as normal.
1
Important
❒ The optional handset or an external telephone is required.
❒ This function is not available for the optional extra G3 interface unit, Internet
Fax and IP-Fax.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Pick up the handset.
You will hear a dial tone.
C Dial.
The machine immediately dials the destination.
If you make a mistake, replace the handset, and then try again from step B.
To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book
to Specify Destinations”.
D When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the
{Start} key to send your fax document.
If you hear a voice, tell the receiver that you want to send them a fax document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
The transmission starts.
E Replace the handset.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
91
Transmission
Note
❒ When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you
cannot operate this machine using only the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch to
turn on the machine.
1
Reference
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
92
Advanced Features
Advanced Features
This section describes how to specify a destination using advanced features.
1
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission
Follow these steps to send a document with a SUB Code as a confidential transmission.
Normally you can only use Confidential Transmission to send documents to fax
machines of the same manufacturer that have the Confidential Reception function. However, if the other machine supports a similar function called “SUB
Code”, you can send fax documents to the other party using this method instead.
For details about the SUB Code, see “Box Settings” in “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
Important
❒ A SUB Code cannot be used with Internet Fax.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.
C Press [Adv. Features].
D Press [SUB Code].
E Press [TX SUB Code].
F Enter a SUB Code, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Cancel] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
“SUB Code” appears one line above [Adv. Features] on the display.
93
Transmission
G When a password is required, press [Password (SID)], enter the password
with the number keys, and then press [OK].
H Press [Exit].
I Press the {Start} key.
1
If you use Immediate Transmission and the fax machine at the destination
does not support the SUB Code function, a message will appear on the display
to inform you of this. When this happens, press [Exit] to cancel the transmission.
Note
❒ You can enter numbers, p, q, and spaces.
❒ Make sure the number of digits in the SUB Code matches the specification
of the machine to which you are sending. For the maximum number of digits for the SUB Code of this machine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can store SUB Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke Programs.
❒ The SUB Code is printed on lists and reports. This is possible only if the
SUB Code is specified in [Adv. Features] using the number keys.
Reference
p.279 “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
Setting a password
There are times when you may want to use an “SID” (Sender ID) when sending
confidential faxes with the SUB Code function. When you use a Transfer Box
that has a password, enter the SID Code as the password.
Note
❒ For the maximum number of digits for the SID Code, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can enter numbers, p, q, and spaces.
❒ You can store SID Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination
list and Keystroke Programs.
❒ The SID Code is printed on lists and reports. This is possible only if the SID
Code is specified in [Adv. Features] using the number keys.
Reference
p.279 “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”
94
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
Advanced Features
Setting SEP Codes for Reception
Normally you can only use Polling Reception to receive faxes from machines
that have the Polling Reception function and the same manufacturer. However,
if a machine of another manufacturer supports Polling Reception, you can receive fax documents from the other party using this method instead.
You can receive documents that have the same SEP Code as the SEP Code you
entered. For details about the SEP Code, see “Box Settings” in “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
1
Important
❒ A SEP Code cannot be used with Internet Fax.
A Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.
B Press [Adv. Features].
C Press [SEP Code].
D Press [RX SEP Code].
E Enter a SEP Code, and then press [OK].
“SEP Code” appears one line above [Adv. Features] on the display.
If you make a mistake, press [Cancel] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
F When a password is required, press [Password (PWD)], enter the password
using the number keys, and then press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
95
Transmission
H Press [Transmission Mode].
1
I Press [Polling RX].
J Press [Default ID / Free Polling RX], and then press [OK].
To cancel Polling RX, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step I.
K Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
L Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ Make sure the number of digits in the SEP Code matches the specification
of the machine from which you are receiving. For the maximum number
of digits for the SEP Code of this machine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can enter numbers, p, q, and spaces.
❒ You can store SEP Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke Programs.
❒ The SEP Code is printed on lists and reports. This is possible only if the SEP
Code is specified in [Adv. Features] using the number keys.
Reference
p.279 “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
96
Advanced Features
Entering a password
There are times you may want to use a password when receiving faxes by SEP
Code Reception. If you receive a document from a machine of the same manufacturer, the password does not have to be entered.
1
Note
❒ For the maximum number of digits for the PWD Code, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can enter numbers, p, q, and spaces.
❒ You can store PWD Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke Programs.
❒ The PWD Code is printed on lists and reports. This is possible only if the
PWD Code is specified in [Adv. Features] using the number keys.
Reference
p.279 “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
Transfer Request
Transfer Request allows fax machines that have this function to automatically
transfer incoming documents to multiple fax destinations.
This function helps you save costs when you send the same document to more
than one place in a distant area, and saves time since many documents can be
sent in a single operation.
The following diagram may make the concept clearer.
GFTRRQ1E
The following terminologies are used in this section:
❖ Requesting Party
The machine where the document originates.
❖ Transfer Station
The machine that forwards the incoming document to another destination.
97
Transmission
❖ Receiving Station
The facsimile or computer that received the document from the Transfer Station.
Important
❒ Before you can use this function, you must make the following preparations:
1
• Program each Transfer Station number in this machine (Requesting Party)
and in the Transfer Station itself.
• Program the same Polling ID in both this machine (Requesting Party) and
the Transfer Station.
• To send a Transfer Request by fax, the Transfer Station must be a fax machine of the same manufacturer and have the Transfer Station function.
• To send a Transfer Request by e-mail, the Transfer Station must be a fax
machine of the same manufacturer that supports Internet Fax.
• To send a Transfer Request by IP-Fax, the Transfer Station must be a fax
machine that supports IP-Fax and be made by the same manufacturer.
• The Requesting Party's fax number must be programmed in the Transfer
Station's Quick Dial or Speed Dial.
• The Receiving Station's fax number must be programmed in the Transfer
Station's Quick Dial, Speed Dial or Group Dial.
❒ You cannot enter Receiving Station numbers directly. The numbers must be
stored in destination lists, Speed Dial, or Groups in the Transfer Station(s). To
specify a Receiving Station, use the following procedure.
A Place the original, and then select any scan settings you require.
B Specify a Transfer Station.
Enter directly or use a destination list to specify the fax number, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination of the Transfer Station.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
C Press [Adv. Features].
D Press [Transfer Req.].
E Press [Receiving Statn].
98
Advanced Features
F To specify a Receiving Station using the Transfer Station's destination list,
select [q Quick Dial], and then enter the registration number of the destination list.
For example, to select the registration number stored in Quick Dial 01 of the
Transfer Station, enter: {0} {1}.
1
G To specify a Receiving Station using the Transfer Station's Speed Dial, se-
lect [qp Speed Dial], and then enter the number of the Speed Dial code.
For example, to select the number stored in Speed Dial 12 of the Transfer Station, enter: {1} {2}.
H To specify a Receiving Station using the Transfer Station's Group Dial, se-
lect [qpp Group Dial], and then enter the number of the Group number.
For example, to select the number stored in Group Dial 04 of the Transfer Station, enter: {0} {4}.
I To specify another Receiving Station, press [Add].
Press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to see the Receiving Stations already entered. You
can select a Receiving Station from this list and remove it by pressing [Clear]
or the {Clear/Stop} key.
99
Transmission
J When you have specified all the Receiving Stations, press [OK].
To cancel the Transfer Request, press [Cancel] twice. The display returns to
that of step E.
K Press [Exit].
1
The Transfer Stations and Receiving Stations are displayed.
L Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If you specify a Transfer Station's Group, the Group counts as a single receiver.
❒ When a Transfer Request is sent by e-mail, as soon as the Transfer Station
completes transfer to all Receiving Stations, it sends back a Transfer Result
Report by e-mail.
❒ When a Transfer Request is sent by e-mail to a computer or facsimile without the Transfer Request function, that machine receives it as ordinary email. It does not transfer the document nor send an error report back to the
Requesting Party. To send Transfer Request by e-mail, use a Transfer Station that supports Internet Fax and has the Transfer Station function.
❒ When using a Transfer Request by e-mail, documents are sent at “Detail”
resolution, even if you have specified “Super Fine”. To send a document at
“Super Fine”, configure the Full Mode when registering the destinations in
the Address Book.
❒ When using a Transfer Request by e-mail, originals are sent at A4 size.
Originals larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver is in compliance with the T.37 full mode, originals are sent at the size specified in the
Address Book.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step C.
❒ When a Transfer Request is sent by e-mail, e-mail options can be set. See
“Sub Transmission Mode”.
❒ For the maximum number of Transfer Stations you can specify in a Transfer Request, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of Receiving Stations you can specify per Transfer Station, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for a registration number you can specify in [q Quick Dial], see “Maximum Values”.
100
Advanced Features
Reference
p.35 “T.37 Full Mode”
p.56 “Sending Over a Fax Line”
p.59 “Sending by IP-Fax”
p.63 “Sending to an E-mail Address”
p.68 “Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations”
p.130 “Sub Transmission Mode”
p.167 “Transfer Result Report (transfer request by e-mail)”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
1
With transfer requests set in the System Settings menu
You can program a Destination key with Transfer Station and/or Receiving Station under Program / Change / Delete Transfer Request in the System Settings
menu.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press the key programmed with Transfer Request.
C Press the {Start} key.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
101
Transmission
Setting multistep transfer
This function allows fax documents to be transferred via multiple stations and
makes fax document transfer more efficient.
Register a Transfer Station in a destination list. When the machine receives a
Transfer Request that specifies a registered Transfer Station as the Receiving Station, the machine sends the Transfer Request to that registered Transfer Station.
1
Note
❒ For the maximum number of Receiving Stations you can specify per Transfer
Station, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.101 “With transfer requests set in the System Settings menu”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
102
Canceling a Transmission
Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.
1
Important
❒ Remember that the Communicating indicator turns off almost immediately
when an Internet Fax is being sent.
Before the Original Is Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the {Start} key.
A Press the {Clear Modes} key.
ZLBS050N
Note
❒ When originals are placed into the ADF, you can cancel transmission simply by removing them.
While the Original Is Being Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission while the originals are being
scanned after the {Start} key has been pressed.
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
The machine stops scanning.
Note
❒ You can also cancel scanning by pressing [Stop Scanning].
❒ Scanning may be completed while you are performing the cancel operation.
103
Transmission
While the Original Is Being Transmitted
Follow these steps to cancel a transmission while the Communicating indicator
is lit.
1
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
You can also cancel a Memory Transmission by pressing [Change / Stop TX File].
B Select the file you want to cancel.
If the desired file is not shown, press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to find it.
There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination appears as “p”, depending on the security settings.
C Press [Stop Transmission].
To cancel another file, repeat steps B and C.
To cancel stopping transmission, press [Save].
104
Canceling a Transmission
D Press [Exit].
1
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ If you cancel a document while it is being sent, the transmission is halted
as soon as you finish the cancellation procedure. However, some pages of
the document may already have been sent and received at the other end.
❒ You can also cancel an Immediate Transmission by pressing [Stop Transmission].
❒ If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure, it
will not be canceled.
❒ If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears.
105
Transmission
Before the Transmission Is Started
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original is scanned.
This function is useful to cancel a transmission when you notice a mistake in destination or with the originals after storing. To cancel Memory Transmission,
search for the file to be canceled among the files stored in memory, and then delete it.
You can cancel transmission of a file while the file is being sent, stored in memory, or fails to transmit. All the scanned data is deleted from memory.
1
Important
❒ This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission.
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
The list of stored files being transmitted or waiting for transmission appears.
B Select the file you want to cancel.
If the desired file is not shown, press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to find it.
To display only the files being sent, press [Files under TX].
There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination appears as “p”, depending on the security settings.
106
Canceling a Transmission
C Press [Stop Transmission].
1
To cancel another file, repeat steps B and C.
To cancel stopping transmission, press [Save].
D Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ To delete some destinations from a broadcast, see “Deleting a Destination
from a Simultaneous Broadcast”.
❒ If you cancel a transmission while the file is being sent, some pages of your
file may have already been sent and is received at the other end.
❒ If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure,
transmission cannot be canceled.
❒ If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of the destinations that have not received the document you sent is shown.
❒ If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears. To display all destinations, press [Check / Change Settings].
Reference
p.188 “Deleting a Destination from a Simultaneous Broadcast”
107
Transmission
Confirming a Transmission
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
1
B Press [Check / Change Settings].
C Select a file to check.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the name of the destination you
specify first and only the number of destinations that have not received the
document you sent are shown.
D Confirm a transmission, and then press [Exit].
E Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
108
Checking the Storage Result (Memory Storage Report)
Checking the Storage Result (Memory
Storage Report)
1
This report is printed after an original is stored in memory. It helps you review
the contents and the destinations of stored originals.
Important
❒ If you use Parallel Memory Transmission, the Memory Storage Report is not
printed.
Note
❒ You can turn this report on and off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 2)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Even if the machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an original could not be stored.
❒ You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with
the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameters
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
109
Transmission
1
110
2. Other Transmission Features
This section explains the features of [Transmission Mode] and [Sub TX Mode], which
you can use to apply transmission functions.
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
Using this function, you can instruct the machine to delay transmission of your
fax document until a specified later time. This allows you to take advantage of
off-peak telephone charges without having to be by the machine at the time.
If you have a non-urgent fax, select Send Later with Economy Transmission
when you scan it. Faxes are queued in memory and sent during Economy Transmission Time.
Important
❒ If the machine is switched off for about one hour, all fax documents stored in
memory are lost. If documents are lost for this reason, a Power Failure Report
is automatically printed when the operation switch is turned on. Use this report to identify lost documents. For details, see “Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
❒ This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission. Use Memory
Transmission.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Transmission Mode].
111
Other Transmission Features
C Press [Send Later].
D Enter the time using the number keys and select [AM] or [PM]. Then press [OK].
2
Press [Economy Time] to specify the economy time.
When entering numbers smaller than 10, add a zero at the beginning.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To cancel Send Later, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
The specified time is shown above the highlighted [Send Later].
E Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [Transmission Mode].
F Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can specify a time within 24 hours of the current time.
❒ If the current time shown is not correct, change it.
❒ Set the Economy Transmission Time in the Facsimile Features menu to coincide with off-peak call charge time.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit steps B and C.
❒ You can cancel the transmission setup for Send Later. See “Changing the
Transmission Time”.
Reference
p.192 “Changing the Transmission Time”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
112
Sender Settings
Sender Settings
Use this function to set sender information.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered in the destination list, the sender can
receive transmission results by e-mail.
Also, if you enable the Stamp Sender Name, the registered sender's name (user
name) appears on the receiver's sheet, lists, and report.
2
Important
❒ In the destination list, register senders, specify their e-mail addresses, and set
Use Name as [Sender] in advance using “Address Book Management” in
“System Settings”.
❒ If user authentication is set, the user logged in is set as sender. The transmission result is sent to the logged-in user's e-mail address.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Transmission Mode].
C Press [Sender Settings].
113
Other Transmission Features
D Select a sender.
2
If a destination protection code is set, the entry screen appears. Enter the protection code for destination using the number keys, and then press [OK].
E Confirm the selected sender, and then press [OK].
F To print the sender's name on the receiver's sheet, select [On] for the Stamp
Sender Name function.
If you enable this function, the sender's name (user name) appears on the receiver's sheet, lists, and report.
114
Sender Settings
G To confirm the transmission results by e-mail notification, select [Yes] for
the E-mail TX Results function.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered, you can send the transmission result to the registered e-mail address.
2
H Press [OK].
The display returns to that of step C.
The selected sender's name appears above [Sender Settings]. The sender name
is displayed in up to 14 characters, followed by an ellipsis (. . . ).
I Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [Transmission Mode].
J Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
115
Other Transmission Features
Note
❒ If a user logs in with User Code, the transmission result is sent by e-mail to
the logged-in user.
❒ You can confirm transmission results by using both the E-mail TX Results
function, which sends the results by e-mail, and the Communication Result Report printed by the machine. You can set whether to use both of
these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can use Communication Result Report, etc. to check usage status by
specified users. If user authentication is set, you can check usage by
logged-in users. If User Code is set to sender, you can count the number of
uses by each user.
❒ To cancel the Sender Name, cancel the transmission. See “Canceling a
Transmission”.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step B.
2
Reference
p.103 “Canceling a Transmission”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
116
Priority Transmission
Priority Transmission
By using this function you can have your document sent before other queued
documents.
Normally, documents you send with Memory Transmission are sent in the order
they are scanned. Therefore, if several documents are queued in memory, the
next document will not be sent immediately.
2
Important
❒ This function is not available with Immediate Transmission. If this function is
selected, the machine automatically switches to Memory Transmission.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Transmission Mode].
C Press [Priority TX], and then press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [Transmission Mode].
117
Other Transmission Features
D Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If there is already a document stored with this function or a transmission
in progress, your document is sent after that document is transmitted.
❒ Press [Change / Stop TX File] to cancel the transmission.
Reference
p.106 “Before the Transmission Is Started”
2
118
Confidential Transmission
Confidential Transmission
If you want to limit who views your document, use this function.
The document is stored in memory at the other end and not printed until an ID
is entered.
2
GFSINS0N
There are two types of Confidential Transmission:
❖ Default ID
It is not necessary to enter an ID when transmitting.
The other party can print the document by entering the Confidential ID programmed in their machine.
❖ ID Override
Should you want to send a confidential document to a particular person at the
other end, you can specify the Confidential ID that the receiver has to enter to
see that document. Before you send the document, do not forget to tell the receiver the ID that must be entered to print the document.
Important
❒ The destination machine must be of the same manufacturer and have the
Confidential Reception function.
❒ The destination machine must have enough memory available.
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Transmission Mode].
C Press [Confidential TX].
119
Other Transmission Features
D To use the Default ID function, check that [Default ID] is selected, and then
press [OK].
2
To cancel Confidential Transmission, press [Cancel]. The display returns to
that of step C.
E To use the Override ID function, select [ID Override], enter the Confidential
ID (4-digit number) using the number keys, and then press [OK].
“ID Override: ” and the entered Confidential ID are shown above the highlighted [Confidential TX].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To cancel Confidential Transmission, press [Cancel]. The display returns to
that of step C.
F Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [Transmission Mode].
G Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ It is recommended that you program the Confidential ID in this machine
beforehand.
❒ An ID can be any 4-digit number (except 0000).
❒ If the destination machine is not of the same manufacturer, you can use
Confidential Transmission with “SUB Code”.
❒ You can cancel the transmission setup for Confidential Transmission. See
“Before the Transmission Is Started”.
120
Confidential Transmission
Reference
p.93 “Setting SUB Codes for Transmission”
p.106 “Before the Transmission Is Started”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
2
121
Other Transmission Features
Polling Transmission
Use Polling Transmission to leave an original in the machine memory for others
to pick up. The document is sent when the other party calls you up.
2
There are three types of Polling Transmission:
❖ Free Polling Transmission
It is not necessary to enter the Polling ID during the procedure. Anybody can
poll the document from your machine. The machine sends it regardless of
whether Polling IDs match.
❖ Default ID Transmission
It is not necessary to enter the Polling ID during the procedure. The document
will only be sent if the Polling ID of the machine trying to poll your document
is the same as the Polling ID stored in your machine. Make sure in advance
that both machines' Polling IDs are identical.
❖ ID Override Transmission
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to the transmission. This ID
overrides the ID stored in the machine. The user must supply this ID when
they poll your machine. If the IDs match, the document is sent. Make sure in
advance the other end knows the ID you are using.
Important
❒ Before using ID Polling Transmission, you must register a Polling ID in the
Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Polling Transmission is allowed only if the receiver's machine has the Polling
Reception function.
❒ Usually, only machines of the same manufacturer that support Polling Reception can perform ID Polling Transmission. However, if the Information Box
File function is used, and the other party's fax machine supports Polling
Transmission and the SEP function, you can still carry out Polling Transmission with an ID.
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax.
122
Polling Transmission
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Transmission Mode].
2
C Press [Polling TX].
D To use Free Polling Transmission, check that [Free Polling TX] is selected.
E To use Default ID Transmission, select [Default ID TX].
F To use ID Override Transmission, select [ID Override Transmission], and then
specify a 4-digit ID using the number keys and [A], [B], [C], [D], [E], and [F].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
123
Other Transmission Features
G Press [Only Once] or [Save] to delete or save the file after transmission.
To delete the original immediately after transmission, select [Only Once].
To repeatedly send the original, select [Save].
To cancel Polling Transmission, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step C.
H Press [OK].
2
“pppppppppp” appears.
The type of Polling Transmission is shown above the highlighted [Polling TX].
I Press [OK].
To check the settings, press [Transmission Mode].
J Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ A Polling ID may be any four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F), except 0000 and FFFF.
❒ Free Polling and Default ID Transmission allow only one file to be stored
in memory.
❒ ID Override Polling Transmission allows a file to be stored in memory for
each ID. For the maximum number of files you can store in memory by
changing IDs, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can set whether a Polling Transmission file is deleted in User Parameters (switch 11, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu. To save a file for frequent sending, set to “Standby (Save)”.
❒ Polling Transmission Clear Report allows you to verify Polling Transmission has taken place.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using this key allows you to omit step B.
❒ The communication fee is charged to the receiver.
❒ You can cancel the transmission setup for Polling Transmission. See “Before the Transmission Is Started”.
Reference
p.106 “Before the Transmission Is Started”
p.125 “Polling Transmission Clear Report”
p.228 “Information Boxes”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
124
Polling Transmission
Polling Transmission Clear Report
This report allows you to verify Polling Transmission has taken place.
If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation key, you can have the
report e-mail sent after transmission.
Important
❒ This report is not printed if the User Parameters (switch 11, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu are set to allow the stored originals to be repeatedly
sent.
2
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 6)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can have a portion of the sent image printed on the report with the User
Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can check the result of Polling Transmission with the Journal.
❒ To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character
width in your e-mail application's settings.
❒ You can display a destination with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can indicate the sender's name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
p.208 “Printing the Journal”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
125
Other Transmission Features
Polling Reception
Use this function to poll a document from another machine.
You can also poll documents from many machines with only one operation (use
Groups and Keystroke Programs to fully exploit this function).
2
There are two types of Polling Reception.
❖ Default ID/Free Polling Reception
Use this method for Free Polling or Default ID Polling. If the Polling ID is programmed in your machine, any document waiting in the transmitting machine with the same ID are received. If the other machine does not have any
documents waiting with the same Polling ID, any documents that do not require ID are received (Free Polling).
❖ ID Override Polling Reception
You must enter an Override Polling ID unique to this transmission. This ID
overrides the one stored in this machine. Your machine will receive any documents waiting in the transmitting machine that have matching ID's. If no
ID's match, any documents that do not require IDs are received (Free Polling).
Important
❒ Before using ID Polling Reception, you must register a Polling ID in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Polling Reception requires that the other machine is capable of Polling Transmission.
❒ Usually, you can only receive documents with a Polling ID from machines of
the same manufacturer that support the polling function. However, if the other party's fax machine supports Polling Transmissions and the SEP function,
and also has stored IDs, you can still perform Polling Reception.
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax.
126
Polling Reception
A Press [Transmission Mode].
2
B Press [Polling RX].
C To use Default ID/Free Polling Reception, check that [Default ID / Free Polling
RX] is selected, and then press [OK].
To cancel Polling Reception, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step
B.
D To use ID Override Polling Reception, select [ID Override Polling Reception],
specify a 4-digit ID using the number keys and [A], [B], [C], [D], [E], and [F],
and then press [OK].
“ID Override: ” and the entered Polling ID are shown above the highlighted
[Polling RX].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To cancel Polling Reception, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step
B.
E Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
127
Other Transmission Features
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ A Polling ID may be any four numbers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F), except 0000 and FFFF.
❒ To receive a document sent by Default ID Polling Transmission or ID
Override Polling Transmission, it is necessary to specify the same Polling
ID as the sender's. Free Polling Transmission does not require the same
Polling ID.
❒ Polling Reception Result Report allows you to verify Polling Reception has
taken place.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step A.
2
Reference
p.95 “Setting SEP Codes for Reception”
p.129 “Polling Reception Result Report”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Polling Reception Reserve Report
This report is printed after Polling Reception is set up.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 3)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can have a destination displayed with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
128
Polling Reception
Polling Reception Result Report
This report is printed after each Polling Reception is completed and shows its result.
If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation key, you can select
whether a report e-mail is sent after reception.
Note
❒ You can also check the result of a Polling Reception with the Journal.
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 4)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character
width in your e-mail application's settings.
2
Reference
p.208 “Printing the Journal”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
129
Other Transmission Features
Sub Transmission Mode
This section explains the features of [Sub TX Mode].
Book Fax
2
Use to send book originals from the exposure glass.
Pages are scanned in the following order.
Important
❒ Place the original on the exposure glass. You cannot use the optional ADF.
❒ Depending on paper sizes available in the destination machine, the document
may be reduced when printed at the other end.
A Place the original on the exposure glass, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Press [Book Fax].
D Select the size of the original.
130
To cancel this mode, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
Sub Transmission Mode
E Select [From First Page] or [From Second Page], and then press [OK].
2
The selected original size is shown above the highlighted [Book Fax].
Select [From First Page] to send a book original from the first page.
Select [From Second Page] if you want to send a cover letter as the first page.
To cancel this mode, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
F Press [OK].
G Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
When sending more than one page, place the originals individually, one after
the other, pressing the {Start} key after each page.
After scanning the last original, press [#].
Note
❒ You can have bound originals scanned as left or right page first. You can
set which page (left or right) the machine scans first as default with the
User Parameters (switch 06, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver is T.37 full mode
compliant, originals are sent at the size specified in the Address Book.
❒ If you select A3, the original will be sent using Image Rotation Transmission.
❒ If [#] is not pressed in step G, the machine will automatically start sending
the documents, 60 seconds after the last original has been scanned.
Reference
p.35 “T.37 Full Mode”
p.46 “Transmission with Image Rotation”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
131
Other Transmission Features
Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission)
Use this function to send two-sided originals.
The front and back of the scanned original will be printed in order on separate
sheets at the other end. The orientation of alternate sheets may be reversed at the
other end. If you want to print the original with the same orientation at the other
end, specify the “Original position” and “Page opening orientation”.
2
Important
❒ The optional ADF is required to use this function. Two-sided originals cannot
be sent by using just the exposure glass.
❒ Two-sided originals are only sent with Memory Transmission. Immediate
Transmission is not possible.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Press [2 Sided Original].
132
Sub Transmission Mode
D Specify the original position.
Check the orientation of the placed document, and then press
or
.
2
Make sure that the specified original position matches the orientation of originals loaded in the ADF.
E Specify the page opening orientation from [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom].
F Specify the transmission mode from [2 Sided from 1st Page] or [1 Sided for 1st
Page], and then press [OK].
The selected original position and page opening orientation are shown above
the highlighted [2 Sided Original].
To cancel this mode, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
Select [2 Sided from 1st Page] to send a two-sided original from the first page.
Select [1 Sided for 1st Page] if you want to send a cover letter as the first page.
G Press [OK].
H Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
133
Other Transmission Features
Note
❒ You can confirm whether both sides were properly scanned using the
Stamp function.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step B.
Reference
p.146 “Stamp”
2
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
E-mail Options
When sending documents, you can set e-mail options using [Sub TX Mode].
Reference
p.63 “Sending to an E-mail Address”
Entering the subject
Allows you to enter a subject for the e-mail document you want to send.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Specify the sender.
For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”.
C Press [Sub TX Mode].
D Press [E-mail Options].
134
Sub Transmission Mode
E Press [Change] for Enter Subject.
2
There are two methods of entering a subject: Selecting from programmed
subjects, or entering characters directly. If you are entering characters, proceed to step G.
F Select the subject from the displayed list.
The selected subject appears in the manual input column.
You can enter extra characters after the selected subject. If you do not need to
enter extra characters, proceed to step I.
G Press [Manual Input].
135
Other Transmission Features
H After entering the subject, press [OK].
2
Entered characters appear in the manual input column.
You can add a programmed subject after the entered subject. Select the subject from the displayed subjects.
I Press [OK].
J Press [OK] twice.
The standby display appears.
K Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
136
Sub Transmission Mode
Note
❒ For convenience, program frequently-used subjects in advance in “Program / Change / Delete Subject” in “System Settings”. “[Urgent]” and
“[High]” are programmed as default.
❒ If you send e-mail without setting a subject, a subject is automatically inserted. For details about how the subject is automatically inserted, see “Email Subject” and “Received Images”.
❒ You cannot send a subject only as e-mail without an original.
❒ For the maximum number of characters for an e-mail subject, see “Maximum Values”.
2
Reference
p.34 “E-mail Subject”
p.113 “Sender Settings”
p.163 “Received Images”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Entering the text
Allows you to enter the text for the e-mail document you want to send.
Important
❒ Program text strings in advance in “Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message” in “System Settings”.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Specify the sender.
For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”.
C Press [Sub TX Mode].
137
Other Transmission Features
D Press [E-mail Options].
2
E Press [Change] for Enter Text.
F Select a text, and then press [OK].
G Press [OK] twice.
The standby display appears.
H Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You cannot send text only without an original.
Reference
p.113 “Sender Settings”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
138
Sub Transmission Mode
Requesting a reception notice
You can confirm sent documents were properly received using e-mail or the
Journal.
The receiver sends back a reception notice message. Once the reception notice
message is received, “OK” appears in the Result column of the Journal, allowing
the originator to verify the transmission was received.
2
Important
❒ The Reception Notice feature is only available if the receiver supports MDN
(Message Disposition Notification).
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Specify the sender.
For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”.
C Press [Sub TX Mode].
D Press [E-mail Options].
E Select [On] or [Off] for Recept. Notice.
139
Other Transmission Features
F Press [OK] twice.
The standby display appears.
G Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If the fax is not received normally, “Error” appears in the Result column.
❒ Only the last 50 communications appear in the Journal. If you do not receive a reception notice message before the last 50 communications are finished, “OK” might not be printed in the Journal's Result column. This may
happen even if the mail is received normally at the other end.
❒ If you specify mailing list addresses, do not set for Reception Notice. Otherwise, you will receive multiple reception notice messages from e-mail recipients, and the Result column will be overwritten each time a new notice
message is received. However, if you receive a reception notice message
indicating an error, “Error” appears in the Result column and will not be
overwritten, even if you subsequently receive a reception notice message
as “OK” following the error message.
❒ Reception notice results are only shown in the Journal. The Result column
in all other files, lists, and transmission reports show “- -”.
❒ Reception notice messages themselves are not recorded in the Journal.
❒ You can select whether or not to print the Reception Notice. This can be set
with User Parameters (switch 21, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You cannot broadcast e-mail using Reception Notice. The documents are
sent to the destinations in the order in which they were specified.
2
Reference
p.113 “Sender Settings”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
140
Sub Transmission Mode
Setting an e-mail destination as a BCC
E-mail is sent to all specified destinations as bcc.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Specify the sender.
For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”.
2
C Press [Sub TX Mode].
D Press [E-mail Options].
E Select [Yes] or [No] for BCC TX.
F Press [OK] twice.
The standby display appears.
G Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
p.113 “Sender Settings”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
141
Other Transmission Features
Standard Message Stamp
Use this function to stamp a standard message at the top of the first original sent.
There are four types of standard messages: “Confidential”, “Urgent”, “Please
phone”, and “Copy to corres. section”
You can also program other messages.
2
Important
❒ While this function is in use, the third line of the Label Insertion is not printed.
❒ When there is an image around the area where the standard message is to be
stamped, that image is deleted.
❒ Program a standard message in “Program / Change / Delete Standard Message” in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
A Place the originals, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Press [Std. Message].
D Select the standard message to be stamped, and then press [OK].
Programmed standard messages are shown in the keys.
The selected standard message is shown above the highlighted [Std. Message].
To cancel the selection, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
E Press [OK].
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
142
The machine cannot stamp multiple standard messages.
Sub Transmission Mode
Reference
p.149 “Label Insertion”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Sending an Auto Document
2
If you often send a particular page to people (for example a map, a standard attachment, or a set of instructions), store that page in memory as an Auto Document. This saves rescanning every time you want to send it.
You can fax an Auto Document by itself, or attach it to a standard fax document.
Important
❒ Store an Auto Document beforehand using “Store / Change / Delete Auto
Document” in the Facsimile Features menu.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
When you fax an Auto Document, start from step B.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Press [Auto Document].
D Select an Auto Document file, and then press [OK].
Programmed Auto Documents are shown in the keys.
When you fax an Auto Document by itself, press [TX Stored File (AD) Only], and
then press [OK].
The selected file name is shown above the highlighted [Auto Document].
To cancel the Auto Document, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step C.
143
Other Transmission Features
E Press [OK].
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can attach one Auto Document to each transmission.
❒ Files with Auto Documents are sent by Memory Transmission.
❒ When sending an Auto Document with other files, the Auto Document is
sent first.
❒ Storing Auto Documents reduces the amount of free memory slightly. Unless you delete the document, free memory will not return to 100%.
❒ You can print an Auto Document currently stored in memory.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the Quick Operation keys allows you to omit step B.
❒ For the maximum number of Auto Documents you can store, see “Maximum Values”.
2
Reference
p.145 “Printing documents stored as Auto Documents”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
144
Sub Transmission Mode
Printing documents stored as Auto Documents
This function is used for printing documents stored as Auto Documents.
This function is very convenient as it can be used for checking the contents of
stored files.
A Press [Sub TX Mode].
2
B Press [Auto Document].
C Select an Auto Document file to be printed, and then press [Print File].
To cancel the Auto Document, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step B.
D Press the {Start} key.
Once printing is completed, the display returns to that of step C.
To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.
E Press [Cancel].
F Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ You can also send Auto Documents.
Reference
p.143 “Sending an Auto Document”
145
Other Transmission Features
Stamp
When sending a fax document using the ADF, the machine can stamp a circle
mark at the bottom of the original.
When sending a two-sided document, the document is marked at the bottom of
the front page and top of the rear page.
2
Important
❒ The optional ADF is required to use this function. Stamp only works when
scanning from the ADF.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Press [Stamp], and then press [OK].
To cancel the stamp, press [Stamp] again before pressing [OK].
D Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
146
Sub Transmission Mode
Note
❒ This stamp indicates that the original has been successfully stored in memory
for Memory Transmission, or successfully sent by Immediate Transmission.
❒ When the stamp starts getting lighter, replace the cartridge.
❒ If a multi-page feed or paper jam occurs, the originals are not sent properly
and not stamped. If you find a page that is not stamped, send only that
page again.
❒ If you use this function often, you can set the default in “TX Stamp Priority” in the Facsimile Features menu so that this function is always on. In this
case, Stamp can easily be turned off for any single transmission by pressing
[Stamp].
❒ A paper jam during Parallel Memory Transmission may cause the transmission to fail even if stamping is performed.
❒ You cannot turn the Stamp function on or off while an original is being
scanned.
2
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Adding Paper, Toner and Staples”, Troubleshooting
Transmission Options
This section describes various functions that you can switch on and off for any
particular transmission.
In addition, if you frequently use a certain option configuration, you can change
the default home position (on or off) of each option.
147
Other Transmission Features
Fax Header Print
When the Fax Header is set to “On”, the stored name is printed on the receiver's
paper.
You can store two Fax Headers; “First Name” and “Second Name”.
For example, if you store your department name in one and your organization
name in the other, you could use the first when sending internal faxes and the
second for external faxes.
2
Important
❒ In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line
your machine is connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page
you send. Required in the USA.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Select [Options].
D Press [On] for Fax Header Print.
To cancel the option settings, press [Cancel].
E Press [OK] twice.
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
148
Sub Transmission Mode
Note
❒ You can program fax header names using the Program Fax Information
function in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can select whether or not dates, fax header names, file numbers, or
page numbers are printed by changing their respective User Parameters
(switch 18, bit 3, 2, 1, 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ If you used the number keys to specify the receiver, the first header name
is printed on the receiver's paper. To print the second header name, contact
your service representative.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit steps B
through E.
❒ In the USA, law requires that your fax number be included in the Fax
Header. Register the fax number and switch on Fax Header Print with User
Parameters (switch 18, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
2
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Label Insertion
With this function you can have the receiver's name printed on the document
that is received at the other end.
Important
❒ To use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when registering fax destinations in the Address Book, and also select [Programmed Name] when sending
fax documents.
❒ When there is an image around the area where the Label is to be printed, that
image is deleted.
The receiver's name is printed as follows:
• Receiver's name: printed at the top of the page and preceded by “To:”.
• Standard message: the programmed message is printed within the next two
lines.
Set this function as follows:
• Set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax destinations.
• Select [Programmed Name] for Label Insertion when sending fax documents.
• On the Std. Message screen, select the standard message you want to print.
149
Other Transmission Features
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
2
C Select [Options].
D Press [Programmed Name] for Label Insertion.
Press [Off] if you do not want to insert a destination.
To cancel the option settings, press [Cancel].
E Press [OK] twice.
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit steps B
through E.
❒ To print a standard message that is not programmed as a default, program
it in advance in “Program / Change / Delete Standard Message” in the
Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
p.142 “Standard Message Stamp”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
150
Sub Transmission Mode
Reduced Image Transmission
Using this function, your document is sent at a reduced size (93%) with a blank
margin on the left.
2
Important
❒ This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission, or specified transmission of a stored document.
❒ Image Rotation is unavailable with this function.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Select [Options].
D Press [On] for Reduced Image TX.
Press [Off] if you do not want to do a reduced transmission.
To cancel the option settings, press [Cancel].
151
Other Transmission Features
E Press [OK] twice.
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Auto Reduce
When this function is turned on, if the receiver's paper is smaller than the size of
the original you are sending, the document is automatically reduced to fit onto
the paper available at the other end.
2
Important
❒ If you turn this function off, the scale of the original is maintained and some
parts of the image may be deleted when printed at the other end.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Select [Options].
152
Sub Transmission Mode
D Press [On] for Auto Reduce.
2
Press [Off] if you do not want to use the Auto Reduce function.
To cancel the option settings, press [Cancel].
E Press [OK] twice.
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Default ID Transmission
If you turn this function on, transmission will only take place if the destination's
Polling ID is the same as yours. This function can stop you accidentally sending
information to the wrong place.
Important
❒ You need to register a Polling ID beforehand.
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [Sub TX Mode].
C Select [Options].
153
Other Transmission Features
D Press [On] for Default ID TX.
2
Press [Off] if you do not want to use ID transmission.
To cancel the option settings, press [Cancel].
E Press [OK] twice.
F Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the Quick Operation key allows you to omit steps B
through E.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
154
3. Reception
This section explains reception and reception functions such as printing received
documents or routing received documents to other fax machines.
Types of Reception
This section explains different ways of receiving fax documents.
Immediate Reception
Each page of a fax document is printed as soon as it is received. This method is
used for standard fax documents.
Important
❒ When receiving important fax documents, it is recommended that you confirm the contents of the received documents with the senders.
❒ The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory
space is low.
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Immediate Reception, any further reception becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
❒ Normally this machine receives documents by Immediate Reception. But
Memory Reception is used when Combine Two Originals, Multi-copy Reception, Reverse Order Printing, or Two-Sided Printing is active.
❒ If the Substitute Reception is used, a fax document is not printed: it is stored
in memory.
❒ This machine supports Standard, Detail, Fine (with the optional expansion
memory), and Super Fine (with the optional expansion memory) resolutions
for reception. If you do not have the optional expansion memory, faxes sent
at Super Fine resolution is printed on your machine at Detail resolution. This
may differ from the sender's intended resolution.
155
Reception
Reference
p.47 “Resolution”
p.156 “Memory Reception”
p.157 “Substitute Reception”
p.174 “Printing Options”
Memory Reception
The machine waits until all pages of the document have been received into memory before printing it.
3
Important
❒ About one hour after the machine is turned off, all fax documents stored in
memory are lost. If any documents are lost in this way, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed when the operation switch is turned on. Use this
report to identify lost documents. See “Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
❒ The machine may not be able to receive large numbers of documents or documents with high data content. In such cases, it is recommended that you
switch off Combine Two Originals, Multi-copy Reception, Reverse Order
Printing, and Two-Sided Printing or install the optional expansion memory.
❒ The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory
space is low.
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Memory Reception, any further reception
becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
❒ Normally this machine receives documents by Immediate Reception. But
Memory Reception is used when Combine Two Originals, Multi-copy Reception, Reverse Order Printing, or Two-Sided Printing is active.
❒ If you have selected Store for Reception File Setting, received document is
saved on the hard disk and will not be printed. You can print those documents by operating the machine or a connected computer, as necessary.
156
Types of Reception
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
Substitute Reception
Substitute Reception is used when the machine cannot print any fax documents.
In Substitute Reception, a received fax document is stored in memory instead of
being printed. Fax documents received using Substitute Reception are automatically printed when the condition which caused the machine to use Substitute
Reception is rectified.
Depending on why the machine cannot print, Substitute Reception might be
used for all fax documents received, or for only those documents that match a
condition specified in the User Parameters in the Facsimile Features menu.
The Receive File indicator lights to let you know when fax documents have been
received using Substitute Reception.
3
ZLBS030N
Important
❒ Reception may not take place if there is not enough free memory.
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Substitute Reception, any further reception
becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
❒ When a fax document is received after Store is selected for Reception File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu, the Receive File indicator lights.
❒ The Receive File indicator may light even when receiving documents using
Immediate Reception.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
157
Reception
Receiving documents unconditionally
If one of the conditions in the following list occurs, the machine receives all fax
documents using Substitute Reception.
Problems
Causes
Solutions
The machine is printing
with a different function.
The machine is busy printThe document is automatically
ing with a different function. printed after the current job finishes.
The message “Follow-
The output tray is full.
Remove paper from the output tray.
The cover is open.
Close the cover shown in the display.
ing output tray is
full. Remove paper.” appears.
3
M is lit.
Receiving documents according to parameter-specified settings
If one of the conditions in the following list occurs, the machine receives only
those documents that match the conditions specified in the User Parameters
(switch 05, bit 2, 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
Problems
Causes
x is lit.
Paper is jammed.
Solutions
Remove the jammed paper.
For details about removing the paper, see
“Clearing Misfeeds”, Troubleshooting.
B is lit.
All trays are out of paper.
Add paper.
For details about adding paper, see
“Adding Paper, Toner and Staples”,
Troubleshooting.
D is lit.
Toner is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge.
For details about replacing the toner
cartridge, see “Adding Paper, Toner
and Staples”, Troubleshooting.
All trays are out of action.
The message “This
tray is out of order.” appears.
158
Call your service representative.
Types of Reception
You can specify the following conditions with the User Parameters (switch 05, bit 2, 1)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
• When Own Name or Own Fax Number is received
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number. If the power is switched off
for more than an hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. In
this case, the Journal can be used to identify the senders of the deleted documents, so you can ask them to resend.
If a sender has not programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number, the
machine may fail to receive an important fax document. It is recommended
that you ask important senders to program an Own Name or Own Fax Number in advance.
• Free
The machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of whether or not
the sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number.
• Polling ID match
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the programmed
Polling ID of the other end matches the ID of this machine.
• Disable
The machine does not receive any documents.
3
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Adding Paper, Toner and Staples”, Troubleshooting
“Clearing Misfeeds”, Troubleshooting
159
Reception
Reception Modes
There are two ways you can set up the machine to handle incoming calls:
• Manual Reception (the optional handset or an external telephone required)
• Auto Reception
You can change the reception mode only if a standard G3 line is used.
You cannot change the reception mode when a line other than the standard G3
line (G3-2 or G3-3) is used.
3
Note
❒ The optional handset or an external telephone is required to use this machine
as a telephone.
Manual Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the machine rings. If the call is a fax document,
you must switch manually to facsimile mode.
A When the machine rings, pick up the optional handset or the handset of the
external telephone.
B If you hear beeps, press the {Start} key or the {Start Manual RX} key. (The
{Start} key is only available in facsimile mode when an original is not
placed.)
C Replace the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone. The
machine will start receiving.
Note
❒ When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you
cannot operate this machine using only the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch to
turn on the machine.
Auto Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the machine automatically receives it as a fax
document. Use this setting on a dedicated fax line.
160
Reception Modes
Switching the Reception Mode
You can switch reception modes using Reception Settings in the Facsimile Features menu.
If you program a Quick Operation key with Switch Reception Mode, you can
switch the reception mode quickly.
A Press [Switch RX Mode].
3
B Select the reception mode, and then press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To cancel the selection, press [Cancel].
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
161
Reception
Receiving Internet Fax Documents
You can receive e-mail documents by Internet Fax.
There are two methods of receiving e-mail: Auto E-mail Reception and Manual
E-mail Reception.
Important
❒ E-mail with attachments other than TIFF-F format files cannot be received.
Senders receive an Error Mail Notification if their e-mail contains attachments. You can select whether or not the machine sends this message with
User Parameters (switch 21, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu. However,
TIFF-F documents created by the Saving function of DeskTopBinder can be
received.
3
❒ If [Require Secure Password Authentication (SPA) for all client connections] is selected in Windows Server 2003, reception is not possible.
Note
❒ When Reception Protocol is set to POP3 or IMAP4, you can set the machine
to retain incoming e-mail or delete it from the server in “System Settings”.
❒ With User Parameters (switch 21, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu, you
can have the machine send the return receipt in response to the reception notice request attached to the sent e-mail.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Auto E-mail Reception
When this function is turned on, the machine periodically checks the e-mail
server for incoming e-mail and downloads it as necessary.
Note
❒ If memory runs out, e-mail will not be received at the specified intervals. Reception will resume when sufficient memory becomes available.
❒ E-mail auto-reception should be set in “System Settings”. When you select
auto-reception, set the reception interval in minutes.
❒ E-mail can be received manually.
Reference
p.163 “Manual E-mail Reception”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
162
Receiving Internet Fax Documents
Manual E-mail Reception
Follow these steps to receive a fax by accessing the e-mail server manually.
Important
❒ Program the Manual E-mail RX function to a Quick Operation key beforehand.
A Press [Manual E-mail RX].
3
The machine accesses the server to check for e-mail and receives any new e-mail.
B Check the message, and then press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Received Images
Here is an example of an Internet Fax document sent from this machine and received on a computer using the Outlook Express e-mail application.
The received image varies according to the e-mail application.
Important
❒ When Internet Fax e-mail is sent to computer, the following information is always inserted in the e-mail text: “This E-mail was sent from “Host
Name” (product name) Queries to: “Administrator's e-mail address”” To check the host name and e-mail address, see “System Settings”,
General Settings Guide.
163
Reception
3
ALV011S
1. E-mail transmitted without specifying a subject in “E-mail Options”.
2. E-mail transmitted with a subject
specified in “E-mail Options”.
3. From
The name (e-mail address) of the sender
6. Subject
Shows the subject specified in “E-mail
Options” at the time of transmission. If
no subject is specified, one is automatically assigned in the format shown in 1
above.
4. Date
7. The message is inserted in all email. “xxxx” is the machine name.
The date and time of e-mail transmission
8. Attachment File
5. To
Any document included by the sender is
displayed as an attached document.
The e-mail address of the recipient
Note
❒ The display format of the sender name differs according to that of the Stamp
Sender Name setting and other functions.
❒ The display format of the subject varies according to Stamp Sender Name and
other settings.
Reference
p.34 “E-mail Subject”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
164
Reception Functions
Reception Functions
This section explains useful functions for receiving fax documents.
Transfer Station
Transfer Stations allow you to expand the standard functions of your fax machine
to set up complex networks. The following diagram may make the concept clearer.
3
GFTRRQ2E
The following terminologies are used in this section:
❖ Requesting Party
The machine where the document originates.
❖ Transfer Station (this machine)
The machine that forwards the incoming document to another destination.
❖ Receiving Station
The facsimile or computer that receives the document from the Transfer Station.
The final destination of the document, this is the machine the Transfer Station
sends to. Receiving Stations must be programmed into a Destination key in
the Transfer Station.
Important
❒ This machine can receive forwarding requests by e-mail. Before you can use
this function, you must make the following preparations.
• Program each Transfer Station number in this machine (Transfer Station)
and in the Requesting Party itself.
• Program the same Polling ID in both this machine (Transfer Station) and
the Requesting Party.
• The Requesting Party's fax number must be programmed in the destination list of this machine (Transfer Station). The registration number must
be between 00001 and 00100.
• The End Receiver's fax number, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination, must
be programmed in the destination list of this machine (Transfer Station).
165
Reception
Note
❒ You can receive Transfer Requests only when your machine has the capacity
to store two or more destinations specified using the number keys.
❒ If the Requesting Party specifies a Group for the Receiving Stations and the
total number of Receiving Stations exceeds the maximum value, the Transfer
Station cannot transfer the document and sends a Transfer Result Report to
the Requesting Party. For the maximum number of destinations you can register in a group, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ If the Requesting Party specified a destination fax number, Internet Fax destination and IP-Fax destination programmed in Transfer Station as the End
Receiver, this machine sends the document to the destination according to the
User Parameter (switch 32, bit 0) setting.
3
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Multistep transfer
The principles of Transfer Stations can be used to build up a multi-step facsimile
network where documents are passed through several Transfer Stations.
By programming the Receiving Stations in a Transfer Station Group, you can enable this machine to transfer documents onto other Transfer Stations.
Important
❒ This function can only be used if the machines are made by the same manufacturer.
Note
❒ For more information, contact your service representative.
Sending the Transfer Result Report
This machine compares the fax number of the Requesting Party with the Requesting Party's number programmed as a Destination key. If the lower five digits of the two numbers match, it sends the Transfer Result Report to the
Requesting Party.
For example:
• Requesting Party's own dial number:
001813-11112222
• Transfer Station's Destination key:
03-11112222
166
Reception Functions
Transfer Result Report
This reports whether transmission to the Receiving Stations was successful or
not.
When the Transfer Station has transferred the document to all Receiving Stations, it sends the Transfer Result Report back to the Requesting Party. The machine prints the report if it cannot be sent back to the Requesting Party.
Important
❒ Program the Requesting Party fax number into a Destination key in the Transfer Station (this machine) in advance.
3
❒ Program your own fax number under “Transfer Report” in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Program the Polling ID under “Program Polling ID” in the Facsimile Features
menu.
Note
❒ You can select whether the Transfer Result Report be automatically printed
using the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can set whether a portion of the original image is printed on the report
with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ “Unprogrammed” indicates that the document could not be sent because the
end receiver's address is incorrect or not programmed.
❒ “--” indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Transfer Result Report (transfer request by e-mail)
When this machine receives a transfer request by e-mail, the Transfer Result Report is sent by e-mail to the Requesting Party after completing all transmissions
to the specified Transfer Stations.
If the Administrator's e-mail address is programmed, the Transfer Result Report
e-mail is forwarded to that address.
Note
❒ “Unprogrammed” indicates that the document could not be sent because the
end receiver's address is incorrect or not programmed.
❒ “--” indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine.
❒ When using multistep transfer, the Transfer Result Report e-mail is sent to the
last Transfer Station that sent Transfer Request.
167
Reception
Forwarding Received Documents
This machine can forward received documents to other destinations programmed in this machine.
3
ALT004S
Note
❒ A fax number, Internet Fax address, IP-Fax destination, or folder address can
be set as a forwarding destination.
❒ If an e-mail address is programmed as the destination, documents received
are forwarded as e-mail.
❒ You need to specify the forwarding destination in advance. Forwarding can
be set under Administrator Tools in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ If you would like the machine to forward received documents to a particular
destination according to the sender, specify the Forwarding destination for
each sender under Facsimile Features, Administrator Tools, Program Special
Sender. Documents from other senders are forwarded to the default Forwarding destination specified for this function.
❒ You can select whether the machine prints out the documents it forwards
with User Parameters (switch 11, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can set whether or not the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted
to the specified e-mail address if folders are programmed as the forwarding
destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special Senders.
For details, see “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can program in a group, see
“Maximum Values”.
168
Reception Functions
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Routing Received Documents with SUB Code
This section describes how to route received documents using SUB Codes.
When a document is received, its SUB Code is compared to SUB Codes programmed in Personal Boxes, and if a match is found, the document is routed to
the destination whose SUB Code is specified.
In addition to SUB Codes, you can use the forward feature to send all received
transmissions to a specific e-mail address. See “Forwarding Received Documents”.
3
ALT003S
Important
❒ You must set the Personal Box and register a delivery destination beforehand.
Personal Boxes can be programmed in “Box Setting” in the Facsimile Features
menu.
❒ This function is not available when you set received documents to be delivered to the network delivery server. Delivery of received documents can be
set in “System Settings”.
❒ Documents cannot be routed to folders using this function.
Note
❒ If the destination specified is an e-mail address, the received document is
routed to that destination as e-mail.
❒ You can route documents received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
Reference
p.168 “Forwarding Received Documents”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
169
Reception
Transferring Received Documents
The machine can transfer received documents by using SUB Codes.
Originals sent with a SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a
Transfer Box are received then relayed to the programmed receiver.
Important
❒ Transfer Boxes and Receiving Stations must be set up in order to transfer received documents. Transfer Boxes can be programmed in “Box Setting” in the
Facsimile Features menu.
3
Note
❒ When e-mail addresses are programmed as receivers, received documents
are sent in an e-mail format to the receivers.
❒ Transfer Results are not sent back to the Requesting Party.
❒ You can transfer data received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax
You can receive a document sent Internet Fax using SMTP reception.
With SMTP reception, e-mail is received as soon as it is sent to the e-mail address
set by the machine.
ALT005S
Important
❒ Set this machine beforehand using the MX record of the DNS server to enable
SMTP reception.
❒ Set the reception protocol to SMTP under “System Settings”.
170
Reception Functions
Note
❒ You can route received e-mail to other Internet Fax machines as well.
❒ Even if SMTP reception is enabled on the DNS server, e-mail sent from the
SMTP server will not be received and the machine reports an error if SMTP
reception is not set under “System Settings”. Also, the SMTP server sends an
error notification to the originator.
❒ If an error occurs while receiving e-mail, reception is aborted, the e-mail is deleted, and Error Report is printed. Also, the SMTP server will send an error
notification to the originator.
❒ When the SMTP server attempts to route received documents to this machine
while the machine is transmitting e-mail, the machine will respond to the
SMTP server with a “busy” signal. Then, the SMTP server usually tries resending the documents until the set timeout.
3
Reference
p.162 “Auto E-mail Reception”
p.171 “Routing e-mail received via SMTP”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
Routing e-mail received via SMTP
E-mail received via SMTP can be routed to other fax machines. It can also be
routed to single or group destinations programmed in the destination list.
ALT006S
Important
❒ Before routing e-mail received via SMTP, you first must set “SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings” to “On” in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Depending on security settings, this function may not be available.
171
Reception
The originator can request transfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by specifying the e-mail address as follows:
❖ Fax Number
fax=destination fax number@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to fax number 212-123-4567:
fax=2121234567@abc.company.com
❖ Single destination programmed in the destination list
fax=qregistration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination number 00001:
fax=q00001@abc.company.com
3
❖ Group destination programmed in the destination list
fax=qppregistration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination programmed under Group number
00004:
fax=qpp00004@abc.company.com
Note
❒ If an e-mail transfer request is received when the “SMTP RX File Delivery Settings” is “Off” in the Facsimile Features menu, this machine responds with an
error message to the SMTP server.
❒ You can make settings that limit transfer to specified originators.
❒ Using this function, you can also send documents from your e-mail application to e-mail addresses and G3 fax machines' destinations through this machine simultaneously.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can program in a group, see
“Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
JBIG Reception
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group) compression, you can send
photographic originals faster than with other methods of compression. It allows
you to receive documents sent in the JBIG format through JBIG Transmission.
Important
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax function.
❒ If ECM is turned off in the Facsimile Features menu, JBIG Reception is unavailable.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
172
Reception Functions
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up
This machine can be set to shut down automatically if no one has used it for a
while. In these situations, even though the operation switch is off, the machine
can still receive incoming documents as long as the main power switch is on.
Important
❒ Reception is not possible if both the operation switch and main power switch
are turned off.
Note
❒ You can set whether documents are printed as soon as they are received (Immediate Reception) with the User Parameters (switch 14, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
3
❒ You can also have fax documents received by Memory Reception (Substitute
Reception) printed after the machine is turned on.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
173
Reception
Printing Options
This section explains useful functions for printing received documents.
Print Completion Beep
When this function is turned on, the machine beeps to let you know when a received document is printed.
Note
❒ You can alter the volume of the beep or turn it off completely using “Adjust
Sound Volume” in the Facsimile Features menu (set the volume to the minimum level).
3
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Checkered Mark
When this function is turned on, a Checkered Mark is printed on the first page
of fax documents to help you separate them.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off using Checkered Mark in the Facsimile
Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
174
Printing Options
Center Mark
When this function is enabled, marks are printed halfway down the left side and
at the top center of each page received.
This makes it easy for you to position a hole puncher correctly when you file received documents.
3
Note
❒ The Center Mark may deviate a little from the exact center of the edge.
❒ You can enable or disable this function using Center Mark in the Facsimile
Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Reception Time
You can have the date, time, and file number printed at the bottom of the document when it is received.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off using Print Reception Time in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ When a received document is split and printed on two or more sheets, the reception time is printed on the last sheet.
❒ The time when the document was printed can also be recorded on the document. If you need this function, contact your service representative.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
175
Reception
Two-Sided Printing
You can have a received document printed on both sides of a sheet.
3
Important
❒ The optional HDD is required.
❒ To use this function, all pages of the received document must be of the same
size-inform the sending party of this beforehand if necessary. You must also
have paper set in the machine of the same size as that sent by the sending party. In Two-Sided Printing, this machine will correctly receive in A3L, B4 JIS
(Japanese Industrial Standard)L, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL(11"×17"L,
81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L). The following table shows the results that can be achieved when receiving with this machine.
ARY005S
❒ This function works only when all pages are of the same width and received
into memory.
❒ This function cannot be used with Combine Two Originals.
176
Printing Options
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off using 2 Sided Print in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Printouts may vary depending on how the sender sets the originals.
❒ You can select to have documents only from selected senders printed in this
way.
❒ Stored documents of the same size are printed on the same paper. Some
stored documents may be unavailable for this printing option.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
3
180-degree rotation printing
When printing on both sides of the paper, this machine rotates images as shown
in the diagram.
CP2B02E0
Multi-Copy Reception
If you switch this function on, multiple copies of each incoming fax document is
printed.
You can also select to have multiple copies made of documents from particular
senders.
177
Reception
Note
❒ For the maximum number of copies that can be made for each document, see
“Maximum Values”.
❒ When using the Multi-copy function with specified senders, the maximum
number of copies is 10.
❒ You can turn this function on or off using RX File Print Qty in the Facsimile
Features menu.
❒ The machine will use Memory Reception for Multi-copy Reception.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
3
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Image Rotation
If you have set paper in the standard tray K, incoming fax documents are automatically rotated to fit onto the paper.
Note
❒ If you specified a tray for “Paper Tray” in the Facsimile Features menu, the
paper loaded in the specified tray is selected.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
178
Printing Options
Combine Two Originals
When two documents of the same size and orientation are received consecutively, they are printed on a single sheet when you turn this function on.
This can help you economize on paper.
3
•
•
•
•
Two A5K documents are printed side by side on a sheet of A4L.
Two B5 JISK documents are printed side by side on a sheet of B4 JISL.
Two A4K documents are printed side by side on a sheet of A3L.
Two 81/2"×51/2"K documents are printed side by side on a sheet of
81/2"×11"L.
• Two 81/2"×11"K documents are printed side by side on a sheet of 11"× 17"L.
Important
❒ This function does not work with documents larger than A5K, B5 JISK,
A4K, 81/2"×11"K or 81/2"×51/2"K. When A5K, B5 JISK, A4K, 81/2"×11"K
or 81/2"×51/2"K size paper is loaded in the machine, each page of the received document is printed on a single sheet. When A5L, B5 JISL, A4L,
81/2"×11"L or 81/2"×51/2"L size paper is loaded in the machine, each page
of the received document is rotated and printed on a single sheet.
❒ If paper matching the size and orientation of a received document is available, Combine Two Originals is not possible.
❒ If Combine Two Originals and 2 Sided Print are selected at the same time, 2
Sided Print takes priority and Combine Two Originals is canceled.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 10, bit 1)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ This function uses Memory Reception.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
179
Reception
Page Separation and Length Reduction
If the size of a received document is longer than the paper loaded in the machine,
each page of the document can be split and printed on several sheets, or reduced
and printed on a single sheet.
3
For example, this function splits the document if the document length is 20 mm
(0.79") or longer than the paper used. The document is reduced if it is less than
20 mm (0.79"). When a document is split, an asterisk (p) is inserted at the split
position and about 10 mm (0.39") of the split area is duplicated on the top of the
second sheet.
Note
❒ Your service representative can customize this function with the following
settings:
• Reduction
• Print split mark
• Overprinting
• Overprinting length
• Guideline for split
❒ You can adjust the overprinting and reduction lengths within the following
ranges:
• Overprinting length: 4 mm (0.16"), 10 mm (0.39"), 15 mm (0.59")
• Guideline for split: 5-155 mm (5 mm steps)/0.2-6.1" (0.2" steps)
180
Printing Options
Reverse Order Printing
Normally, pages of the received document are printed and stacked on the tray
in the order they are received. If you turn this function on, the machine will start
printing the document from the last page received.
3
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off using RX Reverse Printing in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ When this function is on, the first page is printed last.
❒ This function uses Memory Reception.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Page Reduction
If you receive a document that is longer than the paper in the tray, the machine
usually prints it on two pages. If you turn this function on, the machine reduces
the width and length of the received image so that it will fit on one page.
If A4L paper is loaded and a document of B4 JISL size is received, the machine
will reduce the document to a single A4L sheet.
181
Reception
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 10, bit 3)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ When this function is used, the printing quality may not be as good as usual.
Reference
p.180 “Page Separation and Length Reduction”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print)
3
Usually the sender's Fax Header is printed on received documents. When you
receive an Internet Fax document, the e-mail address of the sender is printed. If
the sender has not programmed their Fax Header, you will not be able to identify them. However, if you turn this function on, the sender's Own Name or Own
Fax Number is printed instead so you can find out where the document came
from.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off in the User Parameters (switch 02, bit 3)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size
If there is no paper in the machine that matches the size of a received document,
the machine will choose a paper size based on the paper available.
Page reduction
Disabled
Reduction in Sub-scan Direction
Enabled
Page Separation Threshold
20 mm (0.79")
Width or Length Priority
Width
Note
❒ The document is split over two sheets of paper depending on the paper size.
❒ Paper placed in the bypass tray is not usually selected for printing a received
document. However, you can use this tray if you select the bypass tray as the
main paper tray using Reception with Specified Senders.
❒ Widths that this machine can receive are A4, B4 JIS, LT (81/2"×11") and A3.
Any documents narrower than A4 or LT (81/2"×11") are received at A4 or LT
(81/2"×11") width. The length of documents depends on the document.
❒ The paper size used to print a received document may be different from the
size of the sent original.
182
Printing Options
Reference
p.178 “Image Rotation”
p.180 “Page Separation and Length Reduction”
p.181 “Page Reduction”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Setting priority trays
With the same size of paper loaded into multiple trays, you can make the machine use one tray for one function and another tray for another function.
For example, you may load white A4 paper into tray 1 to use when making copies, and yellow A4 paper into tray 2 to use when printing received faxes. You can
then easily identify for which purpose paper has been output. You can perform
this setting in “Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile” in “System Settings”.
3
Note
❒ When a different size of document from the priority tray is received, the tray
containing the same size of paper as the received document is used.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
Just size printing
If you enable this function, received documents are printed on the sheet that has
the highest priority.
This function is enabled with User Parameters (switch 05, bit 5) in the Facsimile
Features menu.
If the paper tray is not stocked with paper of a suitable size to print a received
document, a message appears on the display prompting you to load paper of the
required size. When you have loaded new paper, press [Exit] to print the document.
183
Reception
Note
❒ After pressing [Exit], procedure varies depending on machine status when the
message occurred.
• If any received documents or reports were being printed automatically, the
printer automatically continues printing from where it left off.
• If any documents or reports were being printed manually, the printer does
not resume printing. Perform the operation from the beginning again.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
3
Having incoming documents printed on paper from the bypass tray
You can print documents sent from Specified Senders on paper from the bypass
tray.
Set as follows:
• Program a special sender and select the Bypass Tray for the paper tray type.
• In “Program Special Sender” in the Facsimile Features menu, turn on the
“Special RX Function” in “Initial Set Up”.
Important
❒ When using this function, printed sheets cannot be delivered to the finisher
output tray. Even if you specify the finisher output tray, sheets are delivered
to the Internal Tray 1.
Note
❒ You can load a maximum of 100 sheets of standard paper in the bypass tray.
❒ You can use a size of paper not loaded in the paper tray(s) in the bypass tray.
❒ The machine can detect A4L, A3L (81/2"×11"L, 11"×17"L) paper sizes.
When you load any other size, specify the paper size. However, if the specified paper size and size of paper set in the bypass tray do not match, paper
jams may occur, or the image may be shortened.
❒ Documents printed on paper smaller than A4 may be shortened, or split
across sheets.
❒ Paper longer than 600 mm may be creased, not sent, or jam.
❒ Print area depends on optional expansion memory, resolution, and vertical
length of originals.
❒ If you use this function, Image Rotation and 180-degree rotating printing are
not possible.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
184
Printing Options
Where Incoming Documents Are Delivered - Output Tray
You can specify the output tray or output position to facilitate separation of received documents.
Specifying tray for lines
Use this function to specify the output tray for each line port.
You can specify the document feeding tray for each port (telephone, Internet
Fax, IP-Fax). For example, you can specify documents received through the G31 port to be fed to the “Internal Tray 1” and documents received through the G32 port to be fed to the “Internal Tray 2”, facilitating separation of files. You can
also set the machine to output Internet Fax documents and ordinary faxes onto
different trays.
3
Important
❒ The optional extra G3 interface unit is required.
Note
❒ To use this function, specify the port and destination using [Specify Tray for
Lines] in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Tray Shift
Use this function to shift the output position for each document, so you can separate received documents easily.
When the optional finisher unit is selected for fax output, you can use the Tray
Shift function whenever a fax or report is printed.
This is useful for separating faxes stacked in the finisher output tray. For example, if the previous incoming fax was output to the left, the next incoming fax
will be output to the right and vice-versa.
Important
❒ The optional finisher or shift sort tray unit is required.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 19, bit 0)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ When the optional 500-sheet finisher is installed, B5L cannot be output.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
185
Reception
3
186
4. Changing/Confirming
Communication Information
This section explains the features of [Information] and [Change / Stop TX File], which
you can use to confirm communication results on the screen or printed reports.
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
After you have pressed the {Start} key (after scanning originals), you can check
and edit the destination or settings of Memory Transmission. You can also cancel a transmission, change the settings of a transmission, print a stored file, print
a list of stored files, and resend a file which the machine failed to transmit.
Note
❒ If there are no files being sent, or stored by Memory Transmission, [Change /
Stop TX File] does not appear on the display.
❒ You cannot check or edit a file being sent. Also a Confidential Transmission
file or stored file to be printed as a report cannot be checked or edited.
❒ There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination appears as “p”, depending on the security settings.
187
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Deleting a Destination from a Simultaneous Broadcast
You can delete selected broadcasting destinations.
Important
❒ If you delete a destination that is the only destination for a transmission, the
transmission is canceled.
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
4
B Press [Check / Change Settings].
C Select the file from which you want to delete a destination.
188
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
D Press [Change] for the destination you want to delete.
Pressing
switches the destination list between fax number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax destination.
E Press [Clear] to delete the destination.
4
Pressing [Clear] deletes by single digits the fax number or IP-Fax address entered using the number keys. The Internet Fax address can be entirely deleted
at once by pressing [Clear].
F Press [Exit].
To delete another destination, repeat from step C.
G Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
189
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Adding a Destination
You can add a destination for broadcasting.
Important
❒ A destination cannot be added using a destination list.
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
4
B Press [Check / Change Settings].
C Select the file to which you want to add a destination.
190
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
D Press [Add].
Pressing
switches the destination list between fax number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax destination.
E Specify the destination using the number keys or soft (on-screen) keys.
4
To add an e-mail address, press [Manual Input], and then specify the destination.
You can also program a SUB Code or SEP Code by pressing [Adv. Features].
F Press [Exit].
Repeat from steps C through E, if you want to add another destination.
G Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
191
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Changing the Transmission Time
You can change the transmission time specified with Send Later.
You can also delete the transmission time. If the transmission time is deleted, the
file is transmitted immediately.
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
4
B Press [Check / Change Settings].
C Select the file for which you want to change or cancel the transmission
time.
D Press [Change TX Time].
192
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
E Press [Clear], re-enter the transmission time using the number keys or select
[Economy Time], and then press [OK].
If you select [Economy Time], the economy time you specified in the Facsimile
Features menu is entered.
If you press [Transmit Now], the file is transmitted immediately. However, if
there is a file on standby, that file is sent first.
4
F Press [Exit].
Repeat from step C, if you want to change another transmission time.
G Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Changing the SMTP Server Setting
You can change the settings for whether or not to bypass the SMTP server.
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
B Press [Check / Change Settings].
193
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
C Select a file whose SMTP server setting you want to change.
D Press [Change].
4
E Press [SMTP].
F Select [Yes] or [No], and then press [Exit].
G Press [Exit].
Repeat from step C to change the SMTP server settings of other recipients.
H Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
194
Printing a File from Memory
Printing a File from Memory
If you want to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet
sent, use this procedure to print it out.
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
4
B Press [Print File].
C Select the file you want to print.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of the destinations
that have not received the document you sent is shown.
If you want two-sided printing, press [Print 2 Sides].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel]. The display returns to the previous screen.
D Press the {Start} key.
To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.
Repeat from step C, if you want to print another file.
195
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
E Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ Confidential Transmission files are displayed, but cannot be printed.
❒ You can also print files that have not been successfully transmitted.
4
196
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX
File List)
Print this list if you want to find out which files are stored in memory and what
their file numbers are. Knowing the file number can be useful (for example when
erasing files).
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
4
B Press [Print List].
To cancel printing before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel]. The screen
returns to that displayed before pressing [Print List].
C Press the {Start} key.
To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step B.
D Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ The contents of a file stored in memory can also be printed.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
197
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Resending a File
Machine memory stores documents that could not be successfully transmitted
using Memory Transmission. Use this procedure to resend these documents.
Important
❒ Set “Store documents in memory that could not be transmitted” to “On” in
User Parameters (switch 24, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].
4
B Press [Transmit Failed File].
C Select the file you want to resend.
“TX failed” is displayed for files that could not be sent.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the name of the destination you
specify first and only the number of destinations that have not received the
document you sent are shown.
To add a destination, press [Add], and then specify the destination.
198
Resending a File
D Press [OK].
Repeat from step C to resend another file.
To cancel transmissions, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step C.
E Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Transmission starts.
Note
❒ Files that could not be transmitted are kept for either 24 or 72 hours, depending on the setting you make in User Parameters (switch 24, bit 1) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
4
199
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File
Status)
You can confirm transmission by the display, report, or e-mail.
Confirming on Display
Follow these steps to display the transmission results.
A Press [Information].
4
B Select [TX File Status].
C Check the transmission results.
Transmission results are displayed, from the latest result down, in groups of
six.
When a fax is sent, “Destination” shows the Own Fax Number or Fax Header
information of the receiver. When an Internet Fax is sent, the e-mail address
and name programmed in the destination list appears. For a transmission
from a computer, “-- LAN-Fax -->” is shown.
Depending on security settings, the destination may appear as p.
D Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
200
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)
Note
❒ Only the transmission results of the latest communications are displayed.
For the maximum number of communication results you can check on this
machine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can view sent fax documents and their lists, using a Web Image Monitor
on a network computer. For details, see the Web Image Monitor's Help.
❒ If a transmission is completed while you are using this function, the result
will not appear. To view the latest result, exit TX File Status, and then try again.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step A.
❒ When documents are transmitted from the computer to the machine, “--LAN-Fax -->”
appears. To check if the documents are sent to the receiver, confirm the
same File No.
4
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Confirming by Report
Print reports for confirmation.
❖ Memory Transmission
If a document cannot be sent, a Communication Failure Report is automatically printed. Or, you can use the Communication Result Report to check each
transmission result regardless of status.
This report is printed each time a Memory Transmission is completed if
turned on with User Parameters (switch 03, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can also print the report by programming the TX Status Report to a Quick
Operation key and pressing this when specifying a destination.
If you turn the Communication Result Report on, the Communication Failure
Report is not printed.
❖ Immediate Transmission
You can confirm the result with an Immediate TX Result Report.
Select to print this report in User Parameters (switch 03, bit 5) in the Facsimile
Features menu. A report is printed after every Immediate Transmission is
completed.
You can also print the report by programming the TX Status Report to a Quick
Operation key and pressing this when specifying a destination.
Reference
p.203 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”
p.204 “Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)”
p.205 “Communication Failure Report”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
201
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Confirming by E-mail
Use the E-mail TX Results function to send reports by e-mail to a computer, and
then confirm them on the computer.
The available reports are:
• Communication Result Report.
• Immediate TX Result Report.
• Polling TX Clear Report.
• Polling RX Result Report.
Important
❒ You must first register the e-mail addresses of the destinations the report is to
be sent to on the destination list.
4
Note
❒ By programming the E-mail TX Results to a Quick Operation key in advance,
you can send transmission results by e-mail after each transmission is completed. Select the destination for notification from the Internet Fax destinations in the destination list.
❒ When using the Sender Settings function to select the sender, the transmission results are sent to senders' e-mail addresses that have been registered. Select the sender from the Internet Fax destinations in the destination list.
❒ If you send fax documents from a computer, use LAN-Fax Driver to specify
whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is sent to the computer.
Reference
p.113 “Sender Settings”
p.125 “Polling Transmission Clear Report”
p.129 “Polling Reception Result Report”
p.203 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”
p.204 “Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)”
p.208 “Print Journal”
p.264 “Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide
202
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)
Confirming by Report and E-mail
You can confirm transmission results using both the E-mail TX Results function,
which sends the results by e-mail, and the Communication Result Report printed by the machine.
You can set whether to use both of these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)
4
This report is printed when a Memory Transmission is completed, so you can
check the result of the transmission.
Note
❒ If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation key, you can select
whether a report e-mail is sent after transmission.
❒ If two or more destinations are specified, this report is printed after the fax
document is sent to all the destinations.
❒ If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could
not be successfully transmitted, a Communication Failure Report is printed.
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 0)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with
the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character
width in your e-mail application's settings.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a destination with the User Parameters
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column
gives the number of pages that could not be sent successfully.
❒ “--” indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
Reference
p.205 “Communication Failure Report”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
203
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)
If you turn this report on, a report is printed after every Immediate Transmission
so you have a record of whether the transmission was successful or not.
If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could not
be successfully transmitted, the Error Report is printed instead.
Note
❒ If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation key, you can select
whether a report e-mail is sent after transmission.
❒ You can switch this report on or off in the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 5)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character
width in your e-mail application's settings.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a destination with the User Parameters
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ If the page was sent successfully, the Page column gives the total number of
pages sent successfully.
4
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
204
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)
Communication Failure Report
This report is printed when a document could not be successfully transmitted
with Memory Transmission.
If the machine is set up to print a Communication Result Report, this report is
not printed. Use it to keep a record of failed transmissions so you can send them
again.
Note
❒ You can select whether the Communication Failure Report is automatically
printed using the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features
menu.
❒ This report is only printed if the Communication Result Report is turned off
and a document could not be successfully transmitted with Memory Transmission.
❒ You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with
the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can display a destination with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column
gives the number of pages that could not be sent successfully.
❒ “Unprogrammed” indicates that the document could not be sent because the
Transfer Station's fax number is incorrect, or not programmed.
❒ “--” indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
4
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
205
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Checking the Reception Result (RX File
Status)
Confirm the reception result on the screen or in a report.
Confirming on Display
Follow these steps to display the reception result.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [RX File Status].
C Check the reception results.
Reception results are displayed, from the latest result, in groups of six.
When a fax or IP-Fax is received, “TX Station” shows the Own Fax Number
or Fax Header information. When an Internet Fax is received, the sender's email address appears.
D Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
206
Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status)
Note
❒ Only the reception results of the latest communications are displayed. For
the maximum number of communication results you can check on this machine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can view received fax documents and their lists, using a Web Image
Monitor on a network computer. For details, see the Web Image Monitor's
Help.
❒ If a document is received while you are using this function, the result will
not appear. To view the latest result, exit RX File Status, and then try again.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step A.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
4
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Confirming by Report
Print a report to confirm reception results.
Journal
Print the Journal to confirm the latest reception results. For details, see “Journal”.
Reference
p.212 “Journal”
207
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Print Journal
You can print the Journal manually.
Important
❒ The contents of a Journal printed automatically are deleted after printing.
Keep the journal if you require a record of transmissions and receptions.
Printing the Journal
To print the Journal manually, select the printing method: “All”, “Print per File
No.”, or “Print per User”.
4
Note
❒ You can set whether the Journal is automatically printed after every 50 communications in User Parameters (switch 03, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features
menu.
❒ You can display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ Depending on security settings, the Journal is not automatically printed.
❒ If the machine is equipped with the optional extra G3 interface unit, you can
print the Journal of each line type.
❒ You can set whether the Journal is printed by line type with the User Parameters (switch 19, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit the step where you press [Information].
❒ Depending on security settings, the destination may not appear.
❒ The sender name column of the Journal is useful when you need to program
a special sender.
❒ For the maximum number of communication results printed in the Journal,
see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
208
Print Journal
All
Prints the results of communications in the order made.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Print Journal].
C Select [All].
D Press the {Start} key.
To cancel a file printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of
step C.
E Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
209
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Print per File No.
Prints only the results of communications specified by file number.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Print Journal].
C Select [Print per File No.].
D Enter a 4-digit file number.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
E Press the {Start} key.
To cancel a file printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of
step C.
F Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
210
Print Journal
Print per User
Prints the results of communications by individual senders.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Print Journal].
C Select [Print per User].
D Select a user.
Press [Cancel] if the user is not registered. The display returns to that of step C.
Press [Clear] to return to the previous screen if a wrong user name is selected.
E Press [OK] after checking the user name shown on the display.
Press [Cancel] if a wrong user name is selected. The display returns to that of step C.
F Press the {Start} key.
To cancel a file printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.
G Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
211
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Journal
This section explains the items printed in the Journal.
4
ADJ102S
1. Printing date
5. Other end
Shows the date and time the report was
printed.
• For fax destinations
Shows the name (for display) programmed by the other end.
Shows the programmed fax number if the
name (for display) was not programmed.
If neither name nor fax number was
programmed by the other end, an entered
fax number or a name programmed in a
destination list is shown for transmissions.
2. Programmed Fax Header
Shows the sender name programmed for
printing.
3. Date
Shows the transmission or reception
date.
4. Time
Shows the transmission or reception start
time.
212
Print Journal
• For Internet Fax destinations
At time of transmission, it shows the
e-mail address or name programmed
in the destination list. At time of reception, it shows the e-mail address of
the sender.
At time of broadcasting transmission,
it shows the number of destinations
after the e-mail addresses or names of
destination.
When documents are transmitted
from the computer to the machine, “-LAN-Fax -->” appears. To check if the
documents are sent to the receiver,
confirm the same File No.
• For IP-Fax destinations
Shows the IP-Fax destination or name
programmed in the destination list.
The fax destination details appear on
the reception report.
• For Folder destinations
Shows the name programmed in the
destination list.
6. Communication mode
• For fax transmissions and receptions
After the line type, “T” for outgoing
faxes or “R” for incoming faxes, and
the communication mode appear in
alphabetical letters or symbols. If the
optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, “G3-1”, “G3-2”, or “G3-3” appears.
• For Internet Fax transmissions and receptions
After
, “T” for outgoing e-mail or
“R” for incoming e-mail, and the communication mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols. A “Q”
indicates outgoing e-mail for which a
Reception Notice is set in “E-mail Options”, whereas an “A” indicates reception notice e-mail.
• For IP-Fax transmissions and receptions
After
, “T” for outgoing faxes or
“R” for incoming faxes, and the communication mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols.
• For forwarding to the folder destinations
After
(folder mark) and “T” for
outgoing faxes, the communication
mode appears in alphabetical letters
or symbols.
7. Communication time
Shows time taken for transmissions or receptions.
8. Number of pages
4
Shows the number of pages transmitted
or received.
9. Communication result
Shows the result of transmissions or receptions.
OK: All pages were properly transmitted
or received. When Reception Notice is activated using Internet Fax E-mail Options, receipt of Reception Notice is
shown. The results of received documents that were routed are preceded by
“n”.
--: The Internet Fax document was sent to
the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the
e-mail was delivered.) When using LANFax, the results of communication from a
computer to this machine are shown.
Error: A communication error occurred.
D: Power was disconnected during communication. Not all fax documents were
transmitted.
10. User name
Shows the sender's name.
11. File number
Shows file management numbers.
Note
❒ To prioritize a fax number or name programmed in the destination list, contact your service representative.
213
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Transmitting Journal by E-mail
Use this function to send the Journal to the administrator's e-mail address.
The Journal is sent automatically after every 50 communications. A CSV format
Journal is attached to the e-mail.
Important
❒ To transmit the Journal by e-mail, it is necessary to make settings with User
Parameters (switch 21, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ This machine does not store sent CSV files. It is recommended that you double-check the e-mail address of an administrator before the Journal is transmitted. If the e-mail address of the administrator is not correct, your
important Journal may be lost. Sent CSV files are not left on the fax machine.
4
Note
❒ If the administrator's address is wrong, you may not be able to acquire the
Journal.
❒ If the Journal fails to be transmitted in e-mail format, the Journal is printed
out.
❒ The name of an attached CSV file is “JOURNALnyear, month, date, hours,
minutes”. For example, the file name transmitted in 14:40 on 20th, December,
2006 is “JOURNAL200612201440.csv”.
❒ The subject of a Journal sent by e-mail begins with “Journal”.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Journal by e-mail
If the setting is made so that the Journal is transmitted as e-mail, it is transmitted
to the e-mail address of an administrator.
Note
❒ To transmit the Journal, it is necessary to make settings with the User Parameters (switch 21, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ To set the administrator e-mail address, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
❒ Depending on security settings, the Destination/Sender name may not appear.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
214
Displaying the Memory Status
Displaying the Memory Status
Use this function to display a summary of current memory usage.
Items shown are the percentage of free memory space, the number of received
confidential documents, the number of files to be sent, the number of Memory
Lock files and the number of received documents to be printed.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Memory Status].
C Check the memory status.
“Others” is displayed when:
• storing Auto Documents.
• storing Transfer Request files.
• storing originals in the Information Boxes.
• sending to the Personal Box.
D Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ If you made the machine save received documents on the hard disk, see
“RX Print Standby File” on the display to check the number.
215
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Reference
p.143 “Sending an Auto Document”
p.165 “Transfer Station”
p.217 “Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete
Stored RX File)”
p.226 “Printing Personal Box Documents”
p.229 “Storing Documents in Information Boxes”
4
216
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored
Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)
You can print documents that are received and stored on the hard disk. You can
also delete unwanted documents.
4
Important
❒ The optional HDD unit and printer/scanner functions are required.
❒ Make the settings for received and stored documents in “Reception File Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu before using this function.
Note
❒ If you have selected to store received documents and specified an e-mail address for notification of receipt, fax reception notification can be sent to that
e-mail address.
❒ For the maximum number of received documents you can store on the machine's hard disk, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can view and print received and stored documents using a Web Image
Monitor or DeskTopBinder.
Reference
p.273 “Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
DeskTopBinder's manuals and Help
217
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Printing Received and Stored Documents
Use the following procedure to print documents saved on the hard disk.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Print / Delete Stored RX File].
C Select a file to be printed, and then press [Print].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
To delete the document after printing, press [Delete File after Printing].
To perform two-sided printing, press [Print on 2 Sides] before pressing the
{Start} key.
D Select the printing mode, and then press the {Start} key.
To stop printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step C.
E Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ This function allows you to print only received and stored documents.
❒ You cannot print and delete received documents using the Document Server function.
❒ You can specify and print multiple documents. For the maximum number
of documents you can specify at a time, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
218
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)
Deleting Received and Stored Documents
Use the following procedure to delete documents stored on the hard disk.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Print / Delete Stored RX File].
C Select a file to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
D Press [Yes].
To cancel a deletion, press [No]. The display returns to that of step C.
E Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ You cannot delete a document while another person is previewing or
printing it using a Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder.
❒ You can specify and delete multiple documents. For the maximum number
of documents you can specify at one time, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
219
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Printing a Confidential Document
This function is designed to prevent unauthorized users from reading your documents.
If someone sends you a document using Confidential Transmission, it is stored
in memory but not automatically printed. To print the document you have to enter the Confidential ID. When your machine has received a confidential document, the Confidential File (i) indicator lights.
Important
❒ Before using this function, program your Confidential ID in the Facsimile
Features menu.
❒ If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all confidential documents are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report is printed
so you can confirm which documents have been deleted. For details, see
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
❒ You must program the Confidential ID for Confidential Reception to work.
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax.
4
A Confirm that the Confidential File indicator is lit.
ZLBS060N
B Press [Information].
C Press [Print Confidential RX File].
If no confidential documents have been received, the message “No reception file.” is shown. Press [Exit].
220
Printing a Confidential Document
D Enter a 4-digit Confidential ID using the number keys, and then press the
{Start} key.
E Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
4
Note
❒ The Confidential ID differs depending on the Sender's specifications.
❒ You must enter the Confidential ID programmed in this machine, if the received file has no Confidential ID.
❒ You must enter the Confidential ID programmed by the sender. Confirm
the sender's Confidential ID in advance.
❒ If the Confidential IDs or Personal Confidential IDs do not match, the message “No reception file under specified Confidential ID.” appears. Press [Exit] to cancel the operation, and then check the Confidential
ID or Personal Confidential ID with the other party, and then try again.
❒ The Confidential File indicator also lights if the machine received a document with a SUB Code. If you cannot print confidential files even if the
Confidential File (i) indicator is lit, check the Personal Boxes. Print from
the Personal Box when a file is sent from another party with a SUB Code
attached.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step B.
Reference
p.226 “Printing Personal Box Documents”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
221
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Confidential File Report
When this function is turned on, this report is printed whenever your machine
receives a confidential document.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 0)
in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
4
222
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock
This is a security function designed to prevent unauthorized users from reading
your documents. If Memory Lock is switched on, all received documents are
stored in memory and are not automatically printed.
To print the documents, you have to enter the Memory Lock ID. When your machine has received a document with Memory Lock, the Confidential File (i) indicator blinks.
Before using this function, the following preparations are required in the Facsimile Features menu.
• Program your Memory Lock ID.
• Set Memory Lock to On.
4
Important
❒ If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents protected by Memory Lock are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure
Report is printed so you can confirm which documents have been deleted.
For details, see “Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
A Confirm that the Confidential File indicator is blinking.
ZLBS060N
B Press [Information].
C Press [Print Memory Lock].
If no documents were received while Memory Lock was switched on, the
message “No reception file.” is shown. Press [Exit] .
223
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
D Enter a 4-digit Memory Lock ID with the number keys, and then press the
{Start} key.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
If the Memory Lock ID does not match, the “Specified code does not
correspond to programmed Memory Lock ID.” message appears. Press
[Exit] and retry after checking the Memory Lock ID.
4
E Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ If Memory Lock and received document storage are both set to on, Memory Lock is unavailable and received documents become stored documents.
❒ Even when Memory Lock is available, if free memory is insufficient, reception is not possible.
❒ You can also apply a Memory Lock to documents that come only from certain senders.
❒ Documents received by Polling Reception are automatically printed even
if this function is switched on.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step B.
❒ If you print a Memory Lock File, it is deleted.
Reference
p.217 “Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete
Stored RX File)”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
224
Personal Boxes
Personal Boxes
You can receive confidential documents to Personal Boxes.
Important
❒ Before using this function, set the Personal Box in advance.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Personal Boxes
This function lets you set up the machine so that incoming documents addressed
to certain users are stored in memory instead of being printed out immediately.
Each user must be assigned a SUB Code (Personal Code) that was designated as
a Personal Box beforehand. When the other party sends their document, they
specify the SUB Code of the receiver. When the document is received, it is stored
in the Personal Box with the matching SUB Code. This enables several individuals or departments to share a single fax machine yet be able to differentiate between documents. Furthermore, if you specify a receiver for the Personal Box,
instead of being stored in memory, incoming documents with this SUB Code appended are forwarded directly to the destination you specify. You can specify a
fax number, e-mail address or IP-Fax destination as the receiver. See “Facsimile
Features”, General Settings Guide for details about programming receivers.
For details about the SUB Code, see “Box Settings” in “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
4
• To be able to receive documents into a Personal Box, you must inform the
sender of the SUB Code programmed for that Personal Box and ask them to
send the document using SUB Code Transmission with that SUB Code.
• When documents have been received into Personal Boxes, the Confidential
Reception/Memory Lock indicator lights and the Confidential File Report is
printed.
• If a receiver is assigned, the delivered document is deleted.
• If a receiver is not assigned, you can print the received documents on this machine.
225
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Important
❒ If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents received
into Personal Boxes are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report
is printed so you can confirm which documents have been deleted. For details,
see “Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
Reference
p.222 “Confidential File Report”
p.226 “Printing Personal Box Documents”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
Printing Personal Box Documents
4
Follow these steps to print a document received into a Personal Box.
A Make sure that the Confidential File indicator is lit.
ZLBS060N
B Press [Information].
C Press [Print Personal Box File].
226
Personal Boxes
D Select the box with the document you want to print.
E If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press
[OK].
4
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step D.
F Press the {Start} key.
To stop printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step D.
G Press [Exit].
To print a document in another Personal Box, repeat from step D.
H Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ If you print a Personal Box document, it is deleted.
❒ The passwords for Personal Boxes can be programmed under “Box Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
227
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Information Boxes
This section describes how to use Information Boxes.
Important
❒ Before using this function, set the Information Box in advance.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Information Boxes
Use the Information Box function to set up the machine as a document server.
By scanning documents into Information Boxes, other parties can receive these
documents whenever they request them.
For details about the SEP Code, see “Box Settings” in “Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide.
4
• You can program documents for this function with “Store / Delete / Print Information Box File”.
• For other parties to be able to retrieve a document programmed in an Information Box, you need to inform them of the SEP Code assigned to that Information Box.
• When an SEP Code Polling Reception request is made by another party, the
SEP Code they specify is matched against the SEP Codes programmed in that
Information Boxes. If a code matches, the document stored in the Information
Box is sent to the other party automatically.
• You can check the contents of Information Boxes with “Store / Delete / Print
Information Box File”.
• You can set a password for Information Boxes in advance. A password can be
set in “Box Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu.
228
Important
❒ If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents stored
in Information Boxes are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report
is printed so you can confirm which documents have been deleted. For details,
see “Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
Information Boxes
Reference
p.95 “Setting SEP Codes for Reception”
p.229 “Storing Documents in Information Boxes”
p.231 “Printing Information Box Documents”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
Storing Documents in Information Boxes
Follow these steps to store a document in an Information Box.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Store / Delete / Print Information Box File].
C Select the box in which you want to store the file.
When there are pre-programmed files, a file mark appears to the right of the
box name.
A message is displayed if you select a box with a file stored in it. Press [Yes]
when changing the file. The stored original file is overwritten.
229
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
D If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step C.
4
E Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
You can also select the following settings:
• Book Fax
• 2 Sided Original (The optional ADF is required.)
• Stamp (The optional ADF is required.)
F Press the {Start} key.
The machine starts to scan the original.
To stop scanning, press [Stop Scanning]. The display returns to that of step C.
G Press [Exit].
To store a document in another Information Box, repeat from step C.
H Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ One Information Box stores one file.
❒ The stored file is not deleted automatically. If you want to delete a stored
file, see “Deleting Information Box Documents”.
230
Reference
p.232 “Deleting Information Box Documents”
Information Boxes
Printing Information Box Documents
Follow these steps to print a document stored in an Information Box.
A Press [Information].
4
B Press [Store / Delete / Print Information Box File].
C Press [Print File].
D Select the box that contains the stored file you want to print.
You cannot select a box that has no stored file.
E If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step D.
231
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
F Press the {Start} key.
If you want two-sided printing, press [Print 2 Sides] before pressing the {Start}
key.
To stop printing before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step D.
To stop printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step D.
G Press [Exit].
Repeat from step D to print another stored file in the box.
H Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
4
Deleting Information Box Documents
Follow these steps to delete a file stored in an Information Box.
A Press [Information].
B Press [Store / Delete / Print Information Box File].
C Press [Delete File].
D Select the box that contains the stored file you want to delete.
232
Information Boxes
E If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step D.
4
F Press [Delete].
To stop deleting, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of step D.
G Press [Exit].
Repeat from step D to delete another stored file in another box.
H Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
233
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
4
234
5. Storing a Document
This section explains storing and managing documents in the Document Server.
Sending a Stored File
This section describes how to store and manage fax documents in the Document
Server.
The Document Server can store documents from various applications.
The documents that are stored using the facsimile function are available to transmit by facsimile.
Storing in the Document Server enables the following:
• Once stored, a document can be sent out as many times as you want, just by
selecting it.
• Storing a document does not use facsimile memory.
You can send and print multiple stored documents as a single document, and also
send them with scanned originals at the same time. Follow the instructions under
[Select Stored File] in [Sub TX Mode] when sending or printing stored documents.
Important
❒ The optional HDD is required.
❒ Data stored in the machine can be lost if there is an error on the machine's
hard disk. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that might result from the loss of data.
235
Storing a Document
Note
❒ Stored documents are not deleted even if there is a power failure, or the main
power switch is turned off.
❒ You can specify whether or not the machine automatically deletes documents
from the Document Server after a certain number of days. You can change
this setting using “Auto Delete File in Document Server” under “System Settings” . See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
❒ You cannot check received and stored documents through the Document
Server.
❒ Using the DeskTopBinder or Web Image Monitor, documents you stored in
the Document Server can be downloaded and managed on the computer. See
“Document Server”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
❒ For the maximum values of the following items, see “Maximum Values”.
• Number of documents you can store in the Document Server using the facsimile function
• Number of pages per document you can store in the Document Server
• Number of pages you can store in the Document Server (in total – copy
function, facsimile function, printer function, and scanner function)
5
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Utilizing Stored Documents”, About This Machine
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Document Server”, Copy/Document Server Reference
Storing a Document
You can store and send a document at the same time. You can also just store a
document.
❖ File names
Scanned documents are automatically assigned names like “FAX0001” or
“FAX0002”.
❖ User Names
You can set this function if necessary to know who and what departments
stored documents in the machine.
❖ Password
You can set this function so as not to send to unspecified people.
A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display
is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the {Facsimile} key.
236
B Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
Sending a Stored File
C Press [Store File].
D Select [Store & Transmit] or [Store only].
Select [Store & Transmit] to send documents after they are stored.
Select [Store only] to store documents.
5
When [Store only] is selected, “pppppppppp” is shown.
E Press [File Info. Setting], and then set the user name, file name, and password
as necessary.
If you are not setting a user name, file name, or password, proceed to step F.
You cannot change multiple documents at once.
F Press [OK].
G If you have selected [Store & Transmit], specify the receiver.
If you have selected [Store only], proceed to step H.
H Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ You can change file names and user names.
237
Storing a Document
Reference
p.238 “Programming a user name”
p.239 “Setting a file name”
p.239 “Setting a password”
p.246 “Changing Stored Document Information”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
Programming a user name
Set a user name from those programmed in the user code. User code is programmed in System Settings.
A Press [User Name].
5
B Press the user name to be programmed, and then press [OK].
Press the title key to switch between titles.
To set a non-programmed user name, press [Non-programmed Name], and then
enter the name. User names entered by pressing [Non-programmed Name] are
not programmed into the user code.
C Press [OK].
Reference
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
238
Sending a Stored File
Setting a file name
A Press [File Name].
B Enter the file name, and then press [OK].
C Press [OK].
Reference
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
5
Setting a password
A Press [Password].
B Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [#].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[#], and then reenter your password.
You can enter up to four to eight digits.
C Enter the password again, and then press [#].
239
Storing a Document
D Press [OK].
Press [Change] to enter a different password.
E Press [OK].
Sending Stored Documents
The machine sends documents stored in the Document Server.
The documents stored in the Document Server can be sent again and again until
they are deleted. Once sent, documents are stored in the Document Server.
Therefore, you can send them in just one operation without having to set your
originals again.
Important
❒ Store the documents to be sent in advance. You can program a password for
this function. You can change the user names, file names, and passwords of
stored documents.
5
❒ You cannot use the following transmission methods:
• Free Polling Transmission
• Default ID Transmission
• ID Override Transmission
• Immediate Transmission
• Parallel Memory Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
A Press [Sub TX Mode].
B Press [Select Stored File].
240
Sending a Stored File
C Select the documents to be sent.
When multiple documents are selected, they are sent in the order of selection.
• Press [TX Order] to arrange the order of the documents to be sent.
• Press [File Name] to place the documents in alphabetical order.
• Press [User Name] to place the documents in order by programmed user
name.
• Press [Date] to place the documents in order of programmed date.
To see details of the selected document, press [Detail]. To return to the display
of step C, press [Select File].
5
D If you select a document with a password, enter the password, and then
press [OK].
If the document does not have a password, proceed to step E.
241
Storing a Document
E When you want to add your originals to stored documents and send them
all at once, press [ROrigi. n Stored File] or [Stored file n R Origi.].
When sending only stored documents, proceed to step F.
When [ROrigi. n Stored File] is pressed, the machine sends the originals, and
then stored files. When [Stored file n R Origi.] is pressed, the machine sends
the stored files, and then originals.
The added originals are not stored.
5
F Press [OK] twice.
G Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
To add an original to stored documents, place the original, and then select
any scan settings you require.
Note
❒ You can send only documents saved with the facsimile function in the Document Server. You cannot send documents stored in the Document Server
using the copy, printer, or scanner functions.
❒ The specified documents are sent with the scan settings made when they
were stored.
❒ Received fax documents are stored and categorized as stored received
files.
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the Quick Operation keys allows you to omit step A.
❒ For the maximum number of stored documents you can specify at a time,
see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of stored pages you can send in one operation,
see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
242
Sending a Stored File
Specifying documents from the File List
A Press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to display the documents to be sent.
B Select the file.
Specifying documents by User Name
A Select [Search by User Name].
5
B Select the user name of the programmed document, and then press [OK].
To search by directly entering a user name, press [Non-programmed Name], and
then enter the user name. Partial matching is used when searching for a user
name.
C Select the file to be sent.
Reference
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
243
Storing a Document
Specifying documents by File Name
A Select [Search by File Name].
B Enter the name of the document to be sent, and then press [OK].
5
Partial matching is used when searching for a file name.
C Select the file to be sent.
Printing Stored Documents
Use this function to print documents stored in the Document Server.
Important
❒ When [Print 1st Page] is selected, originals larger than A4 size are printed after
they are reduced to A4 size.
A Press [Sub TX Mode].
B Press [Select Stored File].
244
Sending a Stored File
C Select the document to be printed.
D If you select a document with a password, enter the password, and then
press [OK].
5
If the document does not have a password, proceed to step E.
E Press [Print File] or [Print 1st Page].
When [Print File] is pressed, the machine prints all the pages. When [Print 1st
Page] is pressed, the machine prints only the first page.
To print both sides, press [Print 2 Sides]. When multiple files are specified they
are printed per file.
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
F Press the {Start} key.
When only the first page is printed, the file name is printed at the top of the
paper.
To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing].
G Press [OK] twice.
The standby display appears.
Note
Only documents stored using the facsimile function can be printed.
You can also print the first page only to check the content of the original.
You can specify and print multiple documents at one time.
For the maximum number of stored documents you can print at a time using [Print 1st Page], see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of stored pages you can print at a time, see
“Maximum Values”.
❒
❒
❒
❒
245
Storing a Document
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
Changing Stored Document Information
You can change the file name, user name, and password of stored documents.
To change a stored document, delete the document you no longer need, and then
reprogram the new document.
A Press [Sub TX Mode].
5
B Select [Select Stored File].
C Select [Manage / Delete File], and then press the document to be changed.
D If you select a document for which a password is set, enter the password,
and then press [OK].
When a selected file does not have a password, proceed to step E.
246
Sending a Stored File
E Change the desired information of the stored document.
Press the keys for the items you want to change.
F Press [Exit].
G Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step A.
5
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Changing a user name
A Press [Change User Name].
B Press [Clear].
The user name is deleted.
C Enter the new user name, and then press [OK].
Press the title word keys to switch between titles.
To set a non-programmed user name, press [Non-programmed Name], and then
enter the name.
User names entered by pressing [Non-programmed Name] are not programmed
into the user code.
247
Storing a Document
Reference
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
Changing the file name
A Press [Change File Name].
B Press [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then re-enter the file name.
5
C Press [OK].
Reference
“Entering Text” About This Machine
Changing the password
A Press [Change Password].
B Press upper [Change].
C Enter a new password using the number keys, and then press [#].
D Press lower [Change].
E Enter the password again, and then press [#].
F Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
248
Sending a Stored File
Deleting a Stored Document
Use this function to delete stored documents.
A Press [Sub TX Mode].
B Press [Select Stored File].
C Press [Manage / Delete File].
5
D Select the document you want to delete.
You can also delete multiple documents at once.
249
Storing a Document
E If you select a document for which a password is set, enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
F Press [Delete File].
G Press [Delete].
If you do not want to delete the document, press [Do not Delete].
H Press [Exit].
I Press [OK].
5
The standby display appears.
Note
❒ You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this
function. Using the key allows you to omit step A.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
250
6. Fax via Computer
This section explains how to use this machine's facsimile function from a computer via a network.
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
You can send a document created with a Windows application from a computer
connected to the machine to another fax machine.
Connect computers to the machine via parallel port (optional), LAN, IEEE
802.11b (wireless LAN) (optional), or USB 2.0.
• To send a fax, simply select [Print] from the Windows application, then select
LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify a destination. LAN-Fax enables paperless faxing from your computer to the other destinations.
• In addition to sending faxes, the LAN-Fax Driver allows this machine to be
used for printing out documents prepared on a computer for proof checking.
• To use the LAN-Fax Driver, connect this machine to a LAN and make the necessary network settings, and then install the LAN-Fax Driver and the related
utilities on your computer.
ALT007S
251
Fax via Computer
Important
❒ The optional HDD unit and printer/scanner functions are required.
❒ Errors occurring when the machine is used as a LAN-Fax will not be displayed on the computer. Check for errors by using a Web Image Monitor. See
Web Image Monitor help.
❒ USB connection is not available when using the LAN-Fax function on Windows 98.
❒ If your operating system is Windows Me, download USB Printing Support
for Windows Me from the supplier's Web site.
❒ The facsimile function of this machine cannot be used with IPv6.
Note
❒ It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor running under the
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser
may not open and an error may occur.
Before Use
To use these features, a LAN-Fax Driver must be installed on your computer.
Use the LAN-Fax Driver included on the printer CD-ROM. You must also make
the required computer to fax network settings on the machine, according to the
type of connection.
6
Note
❒ When a personal computer and the machine are connected in parallel: See
“Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference.
❒ When using Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN): See “Connecting the
Machine”, General Settings Guide.
Reference
“Connecting the Machine”, General Settings Guide
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference
Using the Software
This section provides information about LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.
252
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
LAN-Fax Driver
This driver allows you to use LAN-Fax functions.
Important
❒ All operations cannot be guaranteed depending on the system environment.
❒ If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, download LAN-Fax Driver for
Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier's Web site.
❒ When you use Windows NT, LAN-Fax Driver will not work in an RISC base
processor (MIPS R series, Alpha AXP, PowerPC) environment.
❖ Location of the file
The following folders are on the CD-ROM:
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 98/Me
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN9X_ME
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN2K_XP
❖ Operating environment
• Computer
PC/AT compatible
• Operating systems
Microsoft Windows 98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
• Display
VGA 640×480 pixels or more
6
Note
❒ Before beginning installation, exit all other applications.
Address Book
Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations.
❖ Operating systems
Microsoft Windows 98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
253
Fax via Computer
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.
❖ Operating systems
Microsoft Windows 98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Auto Run program
The installers for various drivers and utilities launch automatically as Auto Run
programs when you insert the CD-ROM.
LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor can be installed by Auto Run.
Important
❒ If the plug and play function starts, click [Cancel] in the [New Hardware Found],
[Device Driver Wizard], or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then insert the CD-ROM. The [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard], or [Found
New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears depending on the system version of
Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT
4.0.
❒ Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the
case, double-click “Setup.exe”, located on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the {SHIFT} key (when your system is Windows 2000/Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, hold down the
left {SHIFT} key) while inserting the CD-ROM. Keep the {SHIFT} key held
down until the computer stops reading the CD-ROM.
❒ Clicking [Cancel] during installation aborts the installation. If you cancel the
installation, restart your computer and install the rest of the software or printer driver.
6
Note
❒ If your operating system is Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, installing a printer driver using Auto Run requires Administrator permissions.
When you install LAN-Fax Driver using Auto Run, log on using an account
that has Administrator permissions.
254
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Installing Individual Applications
You need to install a LAN-Fax Driver on your computer before using the LAN-Fax
functions. The LAN-Fax Driver is on the CD-ROM included with this machine.
Address Book and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor are installed with the LAN-Fax
Driver. Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations. LANFax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.
The following explanation assumes that you are familiar with general Windows
procedures and practices. If you are not, see the operating instructions that come
with Windows for details.
Use the following procedure to install LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor at one time.
Important
❒ Before installing the above applications, install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM included with this machine into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer.
The installer launches automatically, and the language selection window appears.
Depending on your operating system settings, the installer may not launch
automatically. If it does not, double-click “Setup.exe” in the CD-ROM root directory to launch the installer.
6
C Select the interface language of the software, and then click [OK].
D Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
The software license agreement window appears.
E Read all of the terms and, if you agree, select [I accept the agreement.], and
then click [Next].
If you select [I don't accept the agreement.], you cannot complete the installation.
F Select the [LAN-Fax Driver] check box, and then click [Next].
G Confirm that the [Printer Name:<LAN-Fax M7>] check box is selected, and then
click [Continue].
Select the desired port.
H Click [Finish].
The installation completion dialog box appears.
I Click [Finish].
J Click [Exit].
255
Fax via Computer
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties
This section explains how to set properties required for using the LAN-Fax Driver.
Note
❒ If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000/XP, or Windows
Server 2003, log on using an account that has Administrator rights.
Setting print properties
This section explains how to make settings such as paper size or resolution.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
With Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, select [Printers and
Faxes] on the [Start] menu.
With Windows XP Home Edition, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu.
Next select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].
B Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M7], then click [Properties] on the [File] menu.
With Windows NT, click [Document Defaults...] on the [File] menu.
6
C When using Windows 98/Me, click the [Paper] tab to set the following properties.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Paper Size
Orientation
Tray
Resolution
Gray Scale
Print as Graphics
D When using Windows NT 4.0, set the following properties.
•
•
•
•
Paper size
Orientation
Tray
Resolution
E When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, click the [Printing
Preferences...] button to set the following properties.
• Paper size
• Orientation
• Tray
• Resolution
F Click [OK].
256
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Making settings for option configuration
Make settings for optional units installed in this machine.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
With Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, select [Printers and
Faxes] on the [Start] menu.
With Windows XP Home Edition, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu.
Next select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].
B Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M7], then click [Properties] on the [File] menu.
C Click the [Accessories] tab, and then make the settings for the option configuration.
D When the machine is connected to a network, option configuration is automatically performed. If the settings do not match the installed optional
units, click [Load from Device].
E When this machine is connected locally to your computer, select the check
boxes for the installed optional units.
F Click [Apply].
6
Option configuration settings are complete.
G Click [OK].
[Accessories] tab
The [Accessories] tab contains the following items besides option configuration items.
• Prohibit manual destination entry
Check this option to inhibit direct destination specification.
• Enable E-mail
Check this when using Internet Fax with the LAN-Fax function.
• IP-Fax
Check this option when using IP-Fax.
After checking this option, select a protocol by clicking an appropriate radio button.
Note
❒ If the options on this machine are not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax
functions may fail.
❒ When this machine is connected to a network and the port is set via the
“SmartDeviceMonitor for Client” port, option configuration is automatically performed. For details about automatic option configuration, see
LAN-Fax Deriver's Help.
257
Fax via Computer
Basic Transmission
This section explains how to send fax documents created using Windows applications.
To send a fax, simply select [Print...] from the Windows application, then select
[LAN-Fax M7] as the printer, and then specify a destination in the [LAN-Fax] dialog
box.
Open the application document you want to send or create a new document, and
then perform the following procedure.
For details, see LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
Important
❒ When using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you cannot send documents to
this machine using more than one LAN-Fax at the same time.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
B Select [LAN-Fax M7] in the [Name:] list.
C Click [OK].
6
The LAN-Fax dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using.
In all cases, select [LAN-Fax M7] for the printer.
D Specify the destination.
For details about specifying a destination, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
When user authentication is used with this machine, click [User Settings...].
E Specify necessary options.
F Click [Send].
When you click [Send & Print], the fax is sent to the destination and your machine prints a copy of the document you sent.
Note
❒ The machine can retain documents sent from a LAN-Fax Driver as files to
be sent. For the maximum number of documents the machine can retain,
see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can specify per file, see
“Maximum Values”.
258
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Reference
p.259 “Specifying a destination using a destination list”
p.259 “Specifying a destination using Address Book”
p.260 “Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number, Internet
Fax destination, or IP-Fax destination”
p.261 “Specifying Options”
p.264 “Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail”
p.266 “Editing Address Book”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
Specifying a destination using a destination list
A Click the [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab.
The [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab appears.
B Select the [Device Address] (or [Use device address]) check box.
C The address is displayed in the [Device Address] field on the [Address Book]
6
tab. On the [Specify Destination] tab, enter the registration number of the Destination key in the [Device Address:] box.
D Click [Set as Destination].
The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then
click [Delete from List].
E To specify more destinations, repeat steps C and D.
Specifying a destination using Address Book
Important
❒ In order to use this method, you need to register destinations in the address
list using Address Book.
A Click the [Address Book] tab.
The [Address Book] tab appears.
B Select a CSV file containing the desired destination list, from the [Address
Book:] dropdown menu.
Up to the three most recently used files appear in the dropdown menu. To use
a destination list that did not appear, click [Browse...], and then select the file.
259
Fax via Computer
C Select [Contact] or [Group] in the [Name:] dropdown menu as the display format.
Destination list contents change as follows, depending on the option selected:
• Contact: Individual name, company name, department name, fax number
• Group: Group name
If you selected [Group], proceed to step E.
D If you selected [Contact] in step C, select the type of fax from the [Type:]
dropdown menu.
To send by standard fax, select [Fax].
To send by Internet Fax, select [E-mail].
To send by IP-Fax, select [IP-Fax].
E Click the destination in the destination list to highlight it, and then click
[Set as Destination].
The selected destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then
click [Delete from List].
In the Address Book list box, directly enter the name you want to search for.
You can then jump to the name you entered.
6
F To specify more destinations, repeat steps B through E.
Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number, Internet Fax destination, or
IP-Fax destination
A Click the [Specify Destination] tab.
The [Specify Destination] tab appears.
B Select the type of fax from the [Type:] dropdown menu.
To send by standard fax, select [Fax].
To send by Internet Fax, select [E-mail].
To send by IP-Fax, select [IP-Fax].
After you select the fax type, the items corresponding to the selected type appear.
C Specify the destination.
Specify the destination depending on the selected fax type as follows:
• If you selected [Fax]: enter the fax number.
• If you selected [E-mail]: enter the e-mail address.
• If you selected [IP-Fax]: enter the IP-Fax destination.
To enter a pause in the fax number, click [Pause]. If you selected [E-mail] or [IPFax] in step B, [Pause] is not available.
260
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
D Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission.
Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission selected in step B,
as follows:
• If you selected [Fax], select a line or a protocol in the [Line:] list.
• If you selected [E-mail], select the [Do not use SMTP server] check box if you
want to bypass the SMTP server.
• If you selected [IP-Fax], select a protocol in the [Protocol:] list.
E Click [Set as Destination].
The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then
click [Delete from List].
F To specify more destinations, repeat steps B through E.
Note
❒ For the maximum number of digits for a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.56 “Sending Over a Fax Line”
6
p.59 “Sending by IP-Fax”
p.63 “Sending to an E-mail Address”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
Specifying Options
You can specify the following transmission options when sending a fax.
For details about transmission options, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• Sending at specific time
• Print Fax Header
• Attach a Cover Sheet
• 2 sided printing
• Preview
• Save as file
• Document Server
To send a fax document at a specific time
A Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Sending at specific time] check box, and then specify a transmission
time.
261
Fax via Computer
To print a sender stamp
A Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Print Fax Header] check box.
To attach a cover sheet
A Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.
A cover sheet is added to the first page of a transmission file.
Click [Edit Cover Sheet...] to edit the cover sheet.
Reference
p.269 “Editing Fax Cover Sheets”
6
To specify two-sided printing
Important
❒ The optional HDD is required.
A Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [2 sided printing] check box.
To display preview
Selecting the [Preview] check box allows you to check how the fax document will
be output at the destination.
A Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Preview] check box.
C Click [Print], [Send] or [Send & Print].
The [Preview] window appears.
D Click [Next] or [Previous] to check the image.
To close the [Preview] window, click [Cancel].
To print the preview image, click [OK].
262
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Saving as files
You can save the fax document in TIFF format (TIFF-F).
A Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Save as file] check box.
C Click [Save to...].
D Select a folder on the folder tree.
E Select a method of file naming.
To enter a file name manually, select the [Specify file name when saving] check
box. To have the file assigned a name and saved automatically, select the [Automatically create a new file] check box.
F Click [OK].
G Click [Save] or [Save & Send].
6
If you select [Automatically create a new file], the image file is assigned a name
and saved under the specified folder.
The file name will be RicHHMMSS.tif (HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds).
H Enter a file name.
You can also change the folder in this step.
I Click [Save].
The image file is saved in the specified folder.
Note
❒ Single-page documents are saved as single TIFF files, and multiple-page
documents are saved as multiple TIFF files.
To store the fax document on the Document Server
Important
❒ If [Hard Disk Unit] is not selected in [Accessories] on the printer properties dialog box, you cannot select [Document Server].
A Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Send to Document Server] check box, and then enter a user name,
file name, and password.
263
Fax via Computer
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver
From “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”, “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”, or
Web Image Monitor, you can check information about files sent using LAN-Fax
Driver. For the maximum number of transmission results you can check, see
“Maximum Values”.
Also, you can save the contents of the Journal in a personal computer as a CSV
file using [Load Fax Journal] in “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”.
Note
❒ When data is transmitted from the LAN-Fax Driver via the “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client” port, the “Data-transmission complete.” message appears on the computer's display, so you can easily ascertain the
communication progress. However, if the volume of communication data
from the LAN-Fax to this machine increases, the message may appear during
the operation, due to the differences in memory capacity between this machine and “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”. For more accurate fax transmission results, use “E-mail TX results”.
❒ The job history may differ from the machine's transmission results. In that
case, refer to the machine's transmission results.
❒ See the relevant Help for details.
6
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail
After communicating in the LAN-Fax mode, this function transmits the communication results with the computer by e-mail.
When you have done [Send] or [Send & Print] using the LAN-Fax, and when the
communication was successful, it transmits e-mail of the transmission result.
Result notification e-mail is sent when printing is complete, or if an error occurs
during communication between this machine and a computer.
A Click the [E-mail Settings] tab.
B Select the [Notify] check box under [E-mail TX results].
C Enter the destination.
When entering the e-mail address directly, click the [Specify destinations] radio
button, and then enter the e-mail address in the [Specify destinations] field.
When entering the machine's programmed address, click the [Device Address]
radio button, and then enter the registration number of the Destination key in
the [Device Address] box.
The [Device Address] box is unavailable when [Specify destinations] is selected,
and you cannot enter anything in the text box.
264
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
D Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
Note
❒ You can confirm transmission results using the E-mail TX Results function
and the Communication Result Report. You can set whether to use both of
these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ If there be any insufficient configurations in the e-mail menu on this machine, or if “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “Off”, the LAN-Fax result
notification e-mail is not transmitted, and the LAN-Fax Result Report is
printed. See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide for the e-mail settings, and see “LAN-Fax Result Report” for the LAN-Fax Result Report.
Reference
p.203 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”
p.265 “LAN-Fax Result Report”
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
6
LAN-Fax Result Report
This section explains the LAN-Fax Result Report.
If “E-mail TX results” is set to “Notify”, if there be any insufficient configurations in the e-mail menu on this machine, or if “Auto Specify Sender Name” is
set to “Off”, the LAN-Fax result notification e-mail is not transmitted, and the
LAN-Fax Result Report is printed. If the “E-mail TX Results” of “Sender Settings” has not been set to on, the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed.
Note
❒ Whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed, can be configured with
User Parameters (Switch 20, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ When executing [Send] or [Send & Print] with the LAN-Fax Driver, and when
the E-mail TX Result Report has not arrived, the Communication Result Report is printed.
Reference
p.203 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
265
Fax via Computer
Printing and Saving
You can print documents created using Windows applications.
Open the application document you want to print or create a new document,
and then perform the following procedure.
For details about printing the fax image, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
B Select [LAN-Fax M7] in the [Name:] list, and then click [OK].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using.
In all cases, select [LAN-Fax M7] for the printer.
C Click [Print] or [Send & Print].
You can save the fax image in a file. See “Specifying Options”.
Note
❒ You can also save documents in TIFF format. For details about saving in
TIFF format, see “Saving as files”.
6
❒ You can select the length of time the machine keeps document data in
memory if print fails due to problems such as a paper shortage or paper
jams. Make this setting with User Parameters (switch 20, bit 2, 3, 4, 5) in the
Facsimile Features menu. Date is deleted when the specified length of time
elapses.
Reference
p.261 “Specifying Options”
p.263 “Saving as files”
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
Editing Address Book
You can program and edit destinations in the address list using the Address
Book.
For details about the Address Book, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
Note
❒ You can use files created in CSV format as Address Book data. For this purpose, create CSV files that conform to a certain format. For more information,
see Help.
266
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Programming new destinations
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
B Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list
to be edited.
C Enter the destination and name.
You can enter a contact name, company name, department name, fax number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax address. The name and destination (Fax Number, E-mail address or IP-Fax address) cannot be omitted.
D Click [Add].
The destination is added to the destination list.
E Click [Close].
F If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
6
save the changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any
changes after starting Address Book.
Note
❒ To program the contents of the destination list of this machine to the Address Book, select the [Use device address] check box, then enter the Destination key's registration number in the [Device Address:] field.
❒ For [Line:] under [Fax Number:], the following line types are selectable; G3,
G3-2, G3-3, G4, G3 Dir. Auto, G3 PABX Auto, or I-G3. However, this machine does not support G4.
❒ For [Protocol:] under [IP-Fax address:], select [H.323] or [SIP].
❒ To bypass the SMTP server, under the [E-mail address:] box, select the [Do
not use SMTP server] check box.
267
Fax via Computer
Editing programmed destinations
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
B Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list
to be edited.
C Select the destination you want to edit so it is highlighted in the list.
D Edit the data.
E Click [Update].
F Click [Close].
G If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
save the changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any
changes after starting Address Book.
6
Deleting programmed destinations
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
B Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list
to be edited.
C Select the destination you want to delete so it is highlighted in the list.
D Click [Delete].
E Click [Yes].
F Click [Close].
268
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
G If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
save the changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any
changes after starting Address Book.
Using the Machine's Address Book Data in the Destination List of
the LAN-Fax
You can save information about fax destinations registered to this machine in a
personal computer as a CSV file using “Address Management Tool” in “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”. Saved CSV files can be inserted into the destination
table of the LAN-Fax Driver by selecting [New/Browse...] in Address Book. Save
the file again for the LAN-Fax Driver.
Note
❒ When destinations registered in groups by this machine are inserted into Address Book, each person's destination is determined according to the following order of priority (check before inserting and changing the order of
priority, if necessary): IP-Fax destination → Fax number → Mail address
6
❒ Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine
when it is updating the Address Book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
❒ For details, see “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin” Help.
Editing Fax Cover Sheets
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor allows you to edit the format for fax cover sheets.
Important
❒ It is necessary to create a cover sheet file before attaching a cover sheet to fax
document using LAN-Fax Driver.
269
Fax via Computer
Creating a cover sheet
Use the following procedure to create a fax cover sheet.
You can edit the following items using LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.
• Company name as destination information
• Department name as destination information
• Contact name as destination information
• Company name as sender information
• Department name as sender information
• Contact name as sender information
• Telephone number as sender information
• Fax number as sender information
• Date
• Message
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click
[LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor].
The [LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor] dialog box appears.
6
B Edit the cover sheet.
For details about operations, see Help.
C Click [Save as...] on the [File] menu.
D Select a folder, and then enter a file name.
E Click [Save].
Note
❒ Cover sheet data is stored in its own format (using “fcp” as its extension).
270
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Attaching a created cover sheet
Use the following procedure to attach a created cover sheet file to a fax document.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
B Select [LAN-Fax M7] in the [Name:] list, and then click [OK].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
C Click [Edit Cover Sheet...].
The [Cover Sheet] dialog box appears.
D Select a cover sheet file from the dropdown list or after clicking [Browse...]
in [Select Cover Sheet].
The selection made in [Select Cover Sheet] is not canceled unless you select another file. If you want to change only destination information, omit this step
and proceed to step E.
E Select the type of information from [To:].
You can select [Use Address Book], [To Whom It May Concern], [Edit Names], or
[(None)]. Selecting [Edit Names] allows you to enter company, department, and
contact names.
6
F To print the date, select the [With a Date] check box.
G Enter the sender information.
You can enter company, department, and contact names, and telephone and
fax numbers.
To add a message, select the [With a Message] check box, and then enter a message.
H Click [OK].
I Specify a destination.
J Click the [Send Options] tab, and then select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check
box.
K Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
271
Fax via Computer
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin
You can check information about this machine's fax functions using a computer
and save files on a computer using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ For details about SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and its installation, see
“Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide.
❒ For details, see Network Guide and SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Reference
“Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide
LAN-Fax Operation Messages
This section explains typical operation error messages displayed on the computer when using the LAN-Fax Driver, and solutions to those messages.
Message
6
Causes and Solutions
Cannot connect to the device.
Check the network connection.
The number of entries in
Destinations exceed the
limits. Up to 500 entries
can be entered.
The number of destinations specified exceeds the
maximum possible. The maximum number of destinations that can be specified at one time is 500.
"LAN-Fax" has already been
launched. Cannot launch it
again.
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box is already open. Quit LANFax once, and then start it up again.
Check that the power is turned on.
Failed to allocate memory. Available memory on the computer is insufficient.
Quit applications currently not in use.
272
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web
Browser
You can view received fax documents and their lists or print these documents
using a Web Image Monitor on a network computer.
Note
❒ The optional HDD unit and printer/scanner functions are required.
❒ It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor running under the
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser
may not open and an error may occur.
❒ You need to select “Store” as the “Reception File Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu.
❒ You can also check and manage the documents using DeskTopBinder.
Reference
“Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
DeskTopBinder's manual and Help
Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Documents Using a
Web Image Monitor
Use the following procedure to view and/or print received fax documents using
a Web Image Monitor.
Viewing received fax documents using a Web browser
A Start a Web browser.
B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after “http://” in
the address field.
C Click [Fax Received File] in the left pane.
D If you have programmed a user code for the stored reception file, enter the
code, and then press [OK].
A list of the received fax documents appears.
If the programmed user code was deleted using the Address Book Management function under System Settings, a message indicating incorrect user
code entry appears. If this is the case, reprogram a user code.
E Click the Property icon of the desired fax document.
To view a list of the fax documents, select the thumbnail display, detail display,
or icon display. Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or [Icons] in the [Display method:] list. 273
6
Fax via Computer
F View the content of the fax document.
To enlarge the preview image, click [Enlarge Image]. Enlargement cannot be
performed without Acrobat Reader installed. For more information, see Help
on the Web Image Monitor.
G To download the received fax document, click [PDF] or [Multi-page TIFF].
A downloading confirmation dialog box appears.
Clicking [PDF] causes Acrobat Reader to start and the document to be displayed.
Clicking [Multi-page TIFF] causes a downloading confirmation window to appear.
Note
❒ If your computer cannot be connected to Web Image Monitor, see Network
Guide.
❒ To download the document data on the list of received fax documents,
click [TIFF] or [PDF]. For details about downloading, see the Web Image
Monitor Help.
❒ The method for downloading differs depending on the selected format.
For more information, see Help on the Web Image Monitor.
6
Reference
Network Guide
Printing fax information using a Web browser
A Start a Web browser.
B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after “http://” in
the address field.
C Click [Fax Received File] in the left pane.
The list of received fax documents appears.
D Select the check box of the fax document to be printed.
To view a list of the fax documents, select the thumbnail display, detail display,
or icon display. Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or [Icons] in the [Display method:] list.
E Click [Print].
F Click [Start Print].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel] before clicking [Start Print].
You can change the printing order of selected multiple documents. You can
also have documents printed on both sides of the paper. For more information, see Help on the Web Image Monitor.
G Click [OK].
The display returns to that of step D.
274
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser
Deleting fax information using a Web browser
A Start a Web browser.
B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after “http://” in
the address field.
C Click [Fax Received File] in the left pane.
The list of received fax documents appears.
D Select the check box of the fax document to be deleted.
To view a list of the fax documents, select the thumbnail display, detail display,
or icon display. Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or [Icons] in the [Display method:] list.
E Click [Delete].
F Click [Delete File].
To cancel deletion, press [Cancel] before clicking [Delete File].
After selecting multiple documents, you can also cancel deletion of some of
the selected documents. For more information, see Help on the Web Image
Monitor.
6
G Click [OK].
The display returns to that of step D.
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser
If the receiving machine is compliant with T.37 full mode Internet Fax, you can
program the receiver's properties from Web Image Monitor. You can program
the following properties:
• Compression type
• Paper size
• Character size
Note
❒ For a detailed description, see Help for Web Image Monitor.
❒ When a receiver that is programmed as full mode in the Address Book returns a Reception Notice e-mail, the contents of the newly received e-mail
overwrite the existing information.
Reference
p.35 “T.37 Full Mode”
275
Fax via Computer
To edit machine properties already programmed
Follow these steps to use Web Image Monitor to edit information about the destination machine registered in the Address Book.
A Start the Web browser.
B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after “http://” in
the address field.
The top screen is displayed.
C Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
D Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
The Address Book is displayed.
E Click the radio button to the left of the machine you want to modify, and
then click [Change].
The [Change User] page appears.
F Set the properties for Internet Fax data format other than the mode selection.
6
If you change the mode to “Simple Mode”, you cannot set machine properties.
G Click [OK] at the upper-right of the screen.
To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] in the upper-right of the screen.
The Address Book is displayed.
H Close the Web browser.
276
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser
To add new receiver
Follow these steps to use Web Image Monitor to add a new destination to the
Address Book.
A Start the Web browser.
B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after “http://” in
the address field.
The top screen is displayed.
C Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
D Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
The Address Book is displayed.
E Click [Add].
The [Add User] page appears.
F Check that [User] is selected in the dropdown menu.
G Enter the registration number, name, and e-mail address, then set the nec-
6
essary properties.
You can set the Internet Fax data format after entering the e-mail address.
H Click [Full Mode] under [Internet Fax Data Format], and set the properties ac-
cording to the receiver's properties.
If you change the mode to “Simple Mode”, you cannot set machine properties.
I Click [OK] in the upper-right of the screen.
To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] in the upper-right of the screen.
The Address Book is displayed.
J Close the Web browser.
277
Fax via Computer
Delivering Files Received by Fax
Documents received by the machine can be viewed on or downloaded to a computer using the network delivery server ScanRouter delivery software. This is a
useful function, enabling you to view and store documents on your computer
without printing them.
Important
❒ The optional HDD unit and printer/scanner functions are required.
❒ The ScanRouter delivery software is required as a delivery server. DeskTopBinder must be installed on your computer.
Using the delivery server, you can eliminate the task of retrieving and delivering
documents.
❖ Functions
Delivery server provides the following functions:
• Use the delivery server to associate incoming documents (SUB Code, Own
Name, and Own Fax Number) with receivers, so documents are delivered
to the intended receivers.
• You can select the delivery method for incoming documents: “Save in the
delivery server inbox”, “Send as an e-mail attachment”, or “Save in the
designated folder on the computer”. Incoming documents with no SUB
Code, Own Name, or Own Fax Number are saved in the delivery server
inbox. You can also set it so that the received documents are stored in the
specified delivery server inbox according to the line used for reception.
• You can check or download received documents stored in the delivery
server inbox using DeskTopBinder.
6
Note
❒ Confidential documents are also forwarded to the delivery server.
❒ To view or download documents stored in the delivery server inbox, you
need to install DeskTopBinder on your computer.
❒ To send received documents to your computer as e-mail attachments, your
computer must have an e-mail application that is compatible with the ScanRouter delivery software.
❒ To create a network using the delivery server, settings must be specified in
the User Tools of the machine. Settings must also be specified on the delivery
server.
❒ For details about the delivery server (ScanRouter delivery software), see the
ScanRouter delivery software's Help or instructions.
❒ For information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder's manual and
Help.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
278
DeskTopBinder's manual and Help
7. Appendix
This section explains features and specifications of the facsimile function.
Programs
If you regularly send documents to a particular destination or transmit using the
same functions, you can save repetitive number keys operations by registering
this information in a Keystroke Program. Programs can be recalled by just pressing a programmed key.
Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs
The following procedure can be used to program a new Keystroke Program or
overwrite an old one.
You can register the following items in Keystroke Programs:
• Memory Transmission, Internet Fax transmission, Immediate Transmission,
destinations, Resolution, Original Type, Select Line (only when a destination
is specified using number keys), Stamp, Send Later, Confidential TX, Auto
Image Density, Manual Image Density, Scan Area, Auto Document, Book
Fax, Polling TX, Polling RX, Transfer Req., 2 Sided Original, Enter Text, Recept. Notice, BCC TX, Protocol, Store File, Options
• Program name
Important
❒ Destinations and polling transmission cannot be registered in program No.1
as Keystroke Programs.
A Make the settings you want to register in the program.
The procedure for programming differs depending on the items you want to
register.
Press the {Clear Modes} key to cancel programming.
To register a program using Send Later with the fax number “0123456789”,
press {0}, {1}, {2}, {3}, {4}, {5}, {6}, {7}, {8}, {9} using the number keys, and
then continue doing the Send Later setting until the standby display appears
when you press [OK].
B Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display
is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the {Facsimile} key.
279
Appendix
C Press the {Program} key.
ZLFS310N
D Make sure that [Register] is selected.
E Select a program number in which “pNot Stored” is shown.
7
If you make a mistake, press [Cancel] and select a program number again.
When you change a Keystroke Program, press [Register] after pressing the
program number you want to change. If you make a mistake, press [Do not
Register] and try again.
F Enter the program name, and then press [OK].
The standby display appears.
If the program name is already registered, the name is displayed. To change
the program name, press [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then try again.
You should register the program name.
To cancel a program, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step E.
280
Programs
Note
❒ Use the same procedure to register and change programs. In step E, select
the program number you want to change.
❒ The method of registering or changing programs for the copy function is
different from that of the fax function.
❒ For the maximum number of Keystroke Programs you can register, see
“Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of characters you can enter for a program name,
see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can register to a Keystroke
Program, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.111 “Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)”
p.289 “Maximum Values”
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
Registering a priority function using a program
You can select whether or not the function registered in program No. 1 is set after the power is turned on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed.
After registering a function in program No. 1, select [Program No.1] for [Change Initial Mode] on the Facsimile Features menu.
7
Important
❒ Destinations and polling transmission cannot be registered in program No.1
as Keystroke Programs.
Note
❒ To store fax documents in the Document Server each time you send a fax, register [Store & Transmit] for Store File in program No.1, and then set the values
registered in program No.1 to be used as the initial settings after power on or
if the {Clear Modes} key is pressed.
Reference
“Facsimile Features”, General Settings Guide
281
Appendix
Changing a program name
Follow these steps to change a program name.
A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display
is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the {Facsimile} key.
B Press the {Program} key.
ZLFS310N
C Press [Change Name].
7
D Select the program number of the name you want to change.
E Enter a new program name, and then press [OK].
Press [Cancel] to cancel the change, and proceed to step F.
F Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
282
Programs
Deleting a Program
Follow these steps to delete an unnecessary program:
A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display
is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the {Facsimile} key.
B Press the {Program} key.
ZLFS310N
C Press [Delete].
7
D Select the program number you want to delete.
E Press [Yes].
Press [No] not to delete the program. The display returns to that of step D.
F Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
283
Appendix
Using a Program
Follow these steps to recall and use a registered program:
A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display
is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the {Facsimile} key.
B Place the original.
C Press the {Program} key.
ZLFS310N
D Confirm that [Recall] is selected, and press the registered program number.
7
The standby display appears.
The programmed fax number appears and the registered settings are recalled.
E Press the {Start} key.
The machine starts to scan the original.
Then, transmission starts with the recalled transmission settings.
Note
❒ Using the program causes the previous settings to be cleared.
❒ If you have no programmed destinations or scan settings as programs, select the program number, and then enter the fax number of the destination
and select the scan settings you require.
284
Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
This section explains the functions of options.
Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM)
This allows you to send fax documents at high resolution (Super Fine). This also
allows you to receive fax documents at high resolution (Fine or Super Fine). If
you require this option, consult your service representative.
Reference
p.289 “Maximum Values”
Handset
You can make or receive calls by installing the optional handset and dialing manually.
Reference
p.91 “Manual Dial”
Extra G3 Interface Unit
7
This option provides one extra G3 line connection.
A maximum of two G3 interface units can be installed.
285
Appendix
Specifications
❖ Fax Transmission and Reception
Standard
G3
Resolution
G3:
8 × 3.85/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 × 7.7/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 × 15.4/mm (Fine character: optional),
16 × 15.4/mm, 400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine character: optional)
Transmission time
G3: 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution
(JBIG transmission: 2 seconds)
Data compression method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Maximum original size
Standard size: A3L, 11" × 17"
Custom size: 297 × 1200 mm/11" × 47"
Maximum scanning size
297 × 1200 mm/11" × 47"
Print process
Printing on standard paper using a laser
Transmission speed
G3:
33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 / 19,200 /
16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 / 4,800 / 2,400bps
(auto shift down system)
7
❖ Power Consumption
Immediate Transmission
approx. 180 W
Memory Transmission
approx. 165 W
Memory Reception
approx. 165 W
Reception
approx. 630 W
❖ IP-Fax Transmission and Reception
Network
LAN: Local Area Network
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX, IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Scan line density
8 × 3.85 mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 × 7.7 mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 × 15.4 mm (Fine character: optional),
16 × 15.4 mm, 400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine character: optional)
Maximum original size
Standard size: A3L, 11" × 17"
Custom size: 297 × 1200 mm/11" × 47"
286
Maximum scanning size
297 mm × 1200 mm
Transmission protocol
Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP
(RFC 3261 compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible machines
IP-Fax compatible machines
Specifications
IP-Fax transmission function
Specify an IPv4 address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception function
Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a
network.
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
❖ Internet Fax Transmission and Reception
Network
LAN : Local Area Network
Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX, IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Transmit function
E-mail
Scan line density
200 × 100 dpi (Standard character), 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character), 200 × 400 dpi (Fine character: optional) *1 , 400 × 400 dpi
(Super Fine character: optional) *1
Original size : Scanning width
A3 *1 , B4 JIS *1 , A4
Communication Protocols
• Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
E-mail format
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion
7
Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR *1 , MMR *1 compression)
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Internet communication
Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail address
E-mail send functions
Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and
e-mail transmission. Memory transmission only.
E-mail receive functions
Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH)
files and ASCII text. Memory reception only.
*1
Full mode
287
Appendix
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination
Machines
This machine can communicate with Internet Fax machines that satisfy the following specification requirements.
When communicating with full mode compatible machines, you can take advantage of higher specifications for coding, original size, and resolution. For details about the specifications available in full mode, see “Internet Fax
Transmission and Reception” in “Specifications”.
Communication protocols
• Transmission
SMTP
• Reception
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4
E-mail format
• Format
MIME, Base64
• Content-Type
Image/tiff
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file forms))
Data format
• Profile
TIFF Profile S
• Coding
MH
7
• Original size
A4
• Resolution (dpi)
200×100/200×200, 204×98/204×196
Reference
p.286 “Specifications”
288
Maximum Values
Maximum Values
The following list contains the maximum value for each item.
Item
Standard
Expansion memory
(Optional)
Memory
4 MB
28 MB
Number of documents you can store in memory
for Memory Transmission
400
400
Number of pages you can store in memory (using
A4 Standard <ITU-T q1 Chart>)
Approx. 320
Approx. 2,240
Number of destinations you can register in the
destination list *1
500
500
Number of groups you can register
100
100
Number of destinations you can register in a
group
500
500
Number of destinations you can specify per file
500
500
Number of destinations you can specify for all
files (including files in memory)
500
500
Number of destinations you can search at a time
100
100
Number of redials the machine can store
10
10
Number of Transfer Stations you can specify in a
Transfer Request
500
500
Number of Receiving Stations you can specify
per Transfer Station
30
30
Number of digits for a registration number you
can specify using [q Quick Dial]
5
5
Number of digits for a destination
128
128
Number of digits for a SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
Code
20
20
Number of characters you can enter in the e-mail
subject line
128
128
Number of communication results you can check
on this machine
200
200
Number of communication results printed in the
Journal
50
50
Number of special senders you can register
30
30
Number of ID Override Polling Transmission
files you can store in memory
400
400
Number of Auto Documents you can store
6
6
7
289
Appendix
Item
7
Standard
Expansion memory
(Optional)
Number of LAN-Fax Driver transmission results 70
you can check from a network computer “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”, “DeskTopBinder”,
or Web Image Monitor.
70
Number of documents sent from a LAN-Fax
Driver that the machine can retain as files to be
sent
400
400
Number of destinations you can register into a
Keystroke Program
500
500
Number of Keystroke Programs you can register 100
100
Number of characters you can enter for a program name
20
20
Number of received documents you can store on
the machine's hard disk
400
400
Number of copies that can be made for each doc- 10
ument
10
Number of documents you can print at a time in
[Print / Delete Stored RX File]
30
30
Number of documents you can delete at a time in
[Print / Delete Stored RX File]
30
30
Number of stored documents you can specify at
a time in [Select Stored File]
30
30
Number of stored pages you can send in one op- 1,000
eration in [Select Stored File]
1,000
Number of stored documents you can print at a
time using [Print 1st Page]
30
30
Number of stored documents you can print at a
time using [Print File]
30
30
Number of documents you can store in the Document Server using the facsimile function
3,000
3,000
Number of pages per document you can store in
the Document Server
1,000
1,000
Number of pages you can store in the Document Approx. 9,000
Server (in total – copy function, facsimile function, printer function, and scanner function) (Using ITU-T q4 Chart)
*1
Approx. 9,000
You can program up to 2,000 destinations when the optional HDD is installed.
Note
❒ The maximum number of pages that can be stored or transmitted may decrease depending on the contents of documents.
290
INDEX
C
180-degree rotation printing, 177
1 Sided for 1st Page, 132
2 Sided from 1st Page, 132
2 Sided Original, 132
2 Sided Print, 9
2 sided printing, 176, 262
A
Acceptable original sizes, 42
Add, 21, 190
Adding a destination, 190
Address Book, 68, 70, 253, 266
Adjust Scan Density, 9
Adjust Sound Volume, 9
Administrator Tools, 9
Advanced Features, 93
Advanced Search, 77
Adv. Features, 93
All, 209
Area, 41
Area 1, 41
Area 2, 41
Attach a Cover Sheet, 262
Attaching a created cover sheet, 271
Authorized RX, 9
Auto Detect, 39
Auto Document, 143
Auto e-mail reception, 162
Auto fax reception power-up, 173
Auto Image Density, 9, 50
Automatic Redial, 20
Auto Reception, 160
Auto Reduce, 152
Auto Run program, 254
B
Basic transmission, 258
Batch Transmission, 20
BCC Transmission, 141
BCC TX, 141
Before use, 252
Book Fax, 130
Box Setting, 9
Broadcasting sequence, 21
Bypassing the SMTP server, 66
Canceling a Memory Transmission, 103
Canceling an Immediate Transmission, 103
Canceling a transmission, 103
Canceling a transmission before the
original is scanned, 103
Canceling a transmission before the
transmission is started, 106
Canceling a transmission of an Internet Fax, 103
Canceling a transmission while the
original is being scanned, 103
Canceling a transmission while the
original is being transmitted, 104
Caution, 4
Center Mark, 9, 175
Chain Dial, 71
Change File Name, 248
Change Initial Mode, 9
Change Name, 282
Change Password, 248
Change / Stop TX File, 106, 108, 187, 195,
197, 198
Change TX Time, 192
Change User Name, 247
Changing a program name, 282
Changing Keystroke Programs, 279
Changing stored document information, 246
Changing the line port, 53
Changing the settings of files in memory, 187
Changing the SMTP server setting, 193
Changing the transmission time, 192
Check / Change Settings, 108
Checkered Mark, 9, 174
Checking a destination, 108
Checking the reception result, 206
Checking the result of the communication, 203
Checking the result of the
Immediate Transmission, 204
Checking the storage result, 109
Checking the transmission result, 200
Checking the transmission settings, 25
Checking transmission using
LAN-Fax Driver, 264
Check Modes key, 25
Clear Modes key, 6, 103
Clear/Stop key, 103, 104
Combined Auto and Manual Image Density, 50
Combine Two Originals, 179
Communicating indicator, 104
Communication Failure Report, 205
Communication Result Report, 203
291
Compatible machines, 288
Confidential document, 220
Confidential File indicator, 220, 223, 226
Confidential File Report, 222
Confidential Transmission, 119
Confidential TX, 119
Confirming a transmission, 108
Confirming by e-mail, 202
Confirming by report, 201, 207
Confirming by report and e-mail, 203
Confirming on display, 200, 206
Confirming transmission results by e-mail, 264
Creating a cover sheet, 270
CSI - Own Fax Number, 158
D
Darker, 50
Default ID, 119
Default ID/Free Polling Reception, 126
Default ID / Free Polling RX, 95, 126
Default ID Transmission, 122, 153
Default ID TX, 122, 153
Delete, 219, 283
Delete File, 232, 249
Delete File after Printing, 218
Deleting a destination from a
Simultaneous Broadcast, 188
Deleting a program, 283
Deleting a stored document, 249
Deleting fax information using a
Web browser, 275
Deleting Information Box documents, 232
Deleting programmed destinations, 268
Deleting received and stored documents, 219
Delivering files received by fax, 278
Destination key, 68, 70
Destination list, 68, 70
Detail, 47
Display, 6
Displaying the memory status, 215
Document Server, 235, 263
Dual Access, 21
E
292
ECM, 9
Economy Time, 111, 192
Economy Transmission Time, 111
Edit Cover Sheet..., 271
Edit Dest., 59, 63
Editing Address Book, 266
Editing fax cover sheets, 269
Editing programmed destinations, 268
E-mail Address, 82
E-mail Options, 134
E-mail Settings, 9
E-mail subject, 34
E-mail text, 163
E-mail transfer, 171
E-mail TX Results, 113, 202
E-mail TX results, 264
Enable H.323, 9
Enable SIP, 9
Entering an e-mail address, 63
Entering an IP-Fax destination, 59
Entering a pause, 57
Entering a tone, 58
Entering numbers using the number keys, 56
Enter Subject, 134
Enter Text, 137
Expansion memory, 285
External telephone, 91, 160
External telephone on hook dial, 90
Extra G3 interface unit, 285
F
Facsimile Features, 9
Facsimile key, 6
Fax Header Print, 148
Fax Number, 80
Fax via computer, 251
File Info. Setting, 236
File List, 243
File Name, 239
First Name, 148
Folder Transfer Result Report, 9
Forwarding, 9, 168
Forwarding received documents, 168
Free Polling Transmission, 122
Free Polling TX, 122
From First Page, 130
From Second Page, 130
Full mode, 35, 275
Function list, 9
Functions not available by e-mail reception, 33
Functions not available by
e-mail transmission, 33
Functions not available for
IP-Fax transmission, 29
G
G3, 53
G3 Auto, 53
Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper), 28
Gateway (VoIP gateway), 28
Gen. Settings/ Adjust, 9
Group, 70
Group Dial, 97
H
H.323, 28
H.323 Settings, 9
Handset, 91, 160, 285
Having incoming documents printed on
paper from the bypass tray, 184
Higher, 89
How to read this manual, 5
I
ID Override, 119
ID Override Polling Reception, 126
ID Override Transmission, 122
If memory runs out while storing an original, 22
If there is no paper of the correct size, 182
Image density (contrast), 50
Image Rotation, 46, 178
Immediate Reception, 155
Immediate Transmission, 13, 14, 22
Immediate TX Result Report, 204
Immed. TX, 14, 22
Important Safety Instructions, 4
Information, 200, 206, 208, 215, 218, 219,
220, 223, 226, 229, 231, 232
Information Box, 228
Initial display, 7
Installing individual applications, 255
Internet Fax functions, 30
Internet Fax Settings, 9
IP-Fax functions, 26
IP-Fax Settings, 9
J
JBIG reception, 172
JBIG transmission, 50
Journal, 207, 212
Journal by e-mail, 214
Just size printing, 183
K
L
Label Insertion, 149
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor, 254, 269
LAN-Fax Driver, 251, 253
LAN-Fax operation messages, 272
LAN-Fax Result Report, 265
LDAP server, 85
Lighter, 50
Line Priority Setting, 9
Lower, 89
M
Making settings for option configuration, 257
Manage / Delete File, 246, 249
Managing facsimile functions using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 272
Manual Dial, 91
Manual e-mail reception, 163
Manual E-mail RX, 163
Manual Image Density, 50
Manual Input, 59, 63
Manual Reception, 160
Manuals for this machine, i
Max. E-mail Size, 9
Maximum values, 289
MDN, 139
Memory / Immed. Transmission Switch, 9
Memory Lock, 223
Memory Lock RX, 9
Memory Reception, 156
Memory Status, 215
Memory Storage Report, 109
Memory Transmission, 13, 14, 15
Memory Transmission sequence, 21
Memory TX, 14, 15
Menu Protect, 9
Mixing scan settings for a
multiple page original, 52
Multi-copy reception, 177
Multi-port, 53
Multistep transfer, 102, 166
N
Names, 76
Names of major functions, 5
Non-programmed Name, 238, 243, 247
Notes on using Internet Fax, 32
Notes on using IP-Fax, 29
NOTICE, 1
Keystroke Programs, 279
293
O
On Hook Dial, 89
On Hook Dial key, 58, 89
On Hook Mode Release Time, 9
Operation switch, 173
Optional equipment, 285
Options, 147
Original size, 36, 42
Original sizes detected automatically, 45
Original sizes difficult to detect, 45
Original Type, 49
Original Type Priority, 9
Origi. + Stored File, 240
Output tray, 185
P
Page reduction, 181
Page separation and length reduction, 180
Paper size and scanned area, 43
Paper Tray, 9
Parallel Memory Transmission, 13, 19
Parameter Setting, 9
Password, 239
Password (PWD), 97
Password (SID), 94
Pause, 57
Pause/Redial key, 57, 71, 72
Personal Box, 225
Photo, 49
Placing into the ADF, 36
Placing on the exposure glass, 36
Placing originals, 36
Polling ID, 122, 126, 153, 158
Polling Reception, 126
Polling Reception Reserve Report, 128
Polling Reception Result Report, 129
Polling RX, 95, 126
Polling Transmission, 122
Polling Transmission Clear Report, 125
Polling TX, 122
Preview, 262
Print, 218
Print 1st Page, 244
Print completion beep, 174
Print Confidential RX File, 220
Print / Delete Stored RX File, 218, 219
Print Fax Header, 262
Print File, 145, 195, 244
Printing a confidential document, 220
Printing a file from memory, 195
Printing a file received with Memory Lock, 223
Printing a list of files in memory, 197
294
Printing and saving, 266
Printing documents stored as
Auto Documents, 145
Printing fax information using a
Web browser, 274
Printing Information Box documents, 231
Printing on both sides, 176
Printing options, 174
Printing Personal Box documents, 226
Printing received and stored documents, 218
Printing stored documents, 244
Printing the Journal, 208
Print Journal, 9, 208
Print List, 197
Print Memory Lock, 223
Print per File No., 210
Print Personal Box File, 226
Print per User, 211
Print Reception Time, 9
Priority Transmission, 117
Priority trays, 183
Priority TX, 117
ProgDest, 56, 59, 63, 72, 76
Program / Change / Delete Gateway, 9
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size, 9
Program / Change / Delete
Standard Message, 9
Program Confidential ID, 9
Program Economy Time, 9
Program Fax Information, 9
Program key, 279
Program Memory Lock ID, 9
Programming a user name, 238
Programming destination information
from Web browser, 275
Programming destinations in the
Address Book, 74
Programming new destinations, 267
Program No.1, 281
Program Polling ID, 9
Programs, 279
Program Special Sender, 9
Properties, 256
Protocol, 59
PWD Code, 97
Q
Quick Dial, 97
Quick Operation Key, 9
R
Reading the display, 6
Reading the display panel and using keys, 7
Recall, 284
Received and stored documents, 217
Received images, 163
Receive File indicator, 157
Receiving a fax in manual reception mode, 160
Receiving documents according to
parameter-specified settings, 158
Receiving documents unconditionally, 158
Receiving Internet Fax documents, 162
Receiving Station, 97, 165
Receiving Statn, 97
Reception File Setting, 9
Reception functions, 165
Reception modes, 160
Reception Notice, 139
Reception notice message, 139
Reception Result (RX File Status), 206
Reception Settings, 9
Reception time, 175
Recept. Notice, 139
Redial, 72
Reduced Image Transmission, 151
Reduced Image TX, 151
Regarding IP-Fax destinations, 61
Registering a priority function using a
program, 281
Registering entered destinations to the
Address Book, 76
Registering Keystroke Programs, 279
Registration No., 88
Regular, 40
Report, 109, 197, 203, 204, 205, 212,
222, 265
Requesting a reception notice, 139
Requesting Party, 97, 165
Resending a file, 198
Resolution, 47
Returning the machine to the standby mode, 6
Reverse order printing, 181
Routing e-mail received via SMTP, 171
Routing received documents with
SUB Code, 169
RTI - Own Name, 158
RX File Print Qty, 9
RX File Status, 206
RX Reverse Printing, 9
S
Saving as files, 263
Scan Area, 38
Scan End Reset, 9
Scan settings, 47
Search by destination name, 78
Search by Dest. Name, 78
Search by e-mail address, 82
Search by fax number, 80
Search by File Name, 244
Search by IP-Fax destination, 84
Search by LDAP server, 85
Search by registration number, 88
Search by User Name, 243
Search Criteria, 85
Searching for a destination in the
Address Book, 77
Search IP-Fax Dest., 84
Search LDAP, 85
Second Name, 148
Select Dial / Push Phone, 9
Select Line, 53
Select Server, 85
Select Stored File, 240, 244, 246
Select Title, 9
Sender Settings, 113
Sending an Auto Document, 143
Sending a stored file, 235
Sending at a specific time, 111
Sending at specific time, 261
Sending by Internet Fax, 63
Sending by IP-Fax, 59
Sending fax documents from computers, 251
Sending multiple originals using the
exposure glass, 18, 24
Sending over a fax line, 56
Sending stored documents, 240
Sending the Transfer Result Report, 166
Sending to an e-mail address, 63
Send Later, 111
SEP Code, 95, 228
Setting a file name, 239
Setting an e-mail destination as a BCC, 141
Setting a password, 239
Setting a scan area, 38
Setting LAN-Fax Driver properties, 256
Setting print properties, 256
SID Code, 94
Simultaneous Broadcast, 21
Simultaneous Broadcast using
multiple line ports, 55
SIP, 28
SIP server, 28
SIP Settings, 9
SMTP, 66, 171, 193
SMTP reception, 170
SMTP reception using Internet Fax, 170
295
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings, 9
Specifications, 286
Specifying a destination, 56
Specifying a destination by
directly entering, 260
Specifying a destination using
Address Book, 259
Specifying a destination using a
destination list, 259
Specifying a host name, 61
Specifying an alias telephone number, 61
Specifying an IPv4 address, 59
Specifying a SIP user name, 61
Specifying documents from File List, 243
Specifying group destinations, 70
Specifying options, 261
Specify Tray for Lines, 9
Speed Dial, 97
Stamp, 146
Stamp Sender Name, 34, 113
Standard, 47
Standard Message Stamp, 142
Start Manual RX key, 160
Std. Message, 142
Stop Scanning, 103
Stop Transmission, 104, 106
Store / Change / Delete Auto Document, 9
Store / Delete / Print
Information Box File, 229, 231, 232
Stored file + Origi., 240
Stored RX File User Setting, 9
Store File, 236
Store only, 236
Store & Transmit, 236
Storing a document, 236
Storing documents in Information Boxes, 229
SUB Code, 93, 169, 170, 225
Subject, in e-mail, 34, 134
Substitute Reception, 157
Sub transmission mode, 130
Sub TX Mode, 130, 240, 244, 246, 249
Super Fine, 47
Switching between Memory
Transmission and
Immediate Transmission, 14
Switching the reception mode, 161
Switching the titles in the Address Book, 69
Switch Reception Mode, 9
Switch RX Mode, 160, 161
Switch Title, 69
Symbols, 5
296
T
T.37 full mode, 35, 275
Terminology, 28
Text, 49
Text, in e-mail, 137
Text / Photo, 49
Text Size Priority, 9
TIFF-F format, 30
Title 1, 69
Title 2, 69
Title 3, 69
Title word key, 7
To add new receiver, 277
To edit machine properties
already programmed, 276
Tone, 58
Tone key, 58
Top to Bottom, 132
Top to Top, 132
Transfer Box, 170
Transfer Report, 9
Transfer Req., 97
Transfer Request, 97
Transfer Result Report, 167
Transfer Result Report
(transfer request by e-mail), 167
Transferring received documents, 170
Transfer Station, 97, 165
Transmission, 15, 22
Transmission Mode, 111, 113, 117, 119,
122, 126
Transmission modes, 13
Transmission options, 147
Transmission Page Count, 9
Transmission with Image Rotation, 46
Transmit Failed File, 198
Transmitting Journal by e-mail, 214
Tray for lines, 185
Tray Shift, 185
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber
Identification Print), 182
TSI - Transmitting Subscriber Identification, 182
Two-Sided Printing, 176
Two-Sided Transmission
(Double-Sided Transmission), 132
TX File, 187
TX File List, 197
TX File Status, 200
TX Stamp Priority, 9
Types of reception, 155
U
User Name, 238
User Tools/Counter key, 9
Using a program, 284
Using the Address Book to
specify destinations, 68
Using the Document Server, 235
Using the machine's Address
Book data in the destination list of the
LAN-Fax, 269
Using the software, 252
V
Viewing fax information using a
Web browser, 273
Viewing received fax documents using a
Web browser, 273
W
Web Image Monitor, 273
When placing an original into the ADF, 44
When placing an original on the
exposure glass, 43
Where incoming documents are
delivered - output tray, 185
With transfer requests set in the
System Settings menu, 101
297
298
EN
USA
B766-8515
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, WindowsNT® and Outlook® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PowerPC® is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Adobe® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
•
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
•
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
•
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
•
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
•
The product names of the Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
•
The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2006
FAX Option Type 3030 Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference
EN USA B766-8515
Operating Instructions
Printer Reference
1
Preparing the Machine
2
Setting Up the Printer Driver
3
Other Print Operations
4
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
5
The Functions and Settings of the Machine
6
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Notes
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Trouble Shooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or
prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy/Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................2
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
Display Panel..........................................................................................................3
Initial Display ..............................................................................................................3
Printer Features Menu ...........................................................................................5
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray........................................................................ 9
Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel ......................................................11
Setting Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel ...............................................13
Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the Control Panel ....................14
1. Preparing the Machine
Confirming the Connection Method...................................................................15
Network Connection.................................................................................................15
Local Connection .....................................................................................................18
Installing the Printer Driver................................................................................. 19
Quick Install..............................................................................................................19
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port .....................................................21
Using as a Windows Network Printer ................................................................31
Using as a NetWare Print Server/Remote Printer .............................................34
Form Feed................................................................................................................36
Banner Page ............................................................................................................36
Printing after Resetting the Printer ...........................................................................36
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................37
Windows Me - USB ..................................................................................................37
Windows 2000 - USB ...............................................................................................39
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB .............................................................40
Printing with Parallel Connection.......................................................................42
Printing with Bluetooth Connection...................................................................44
Supported Profiles....................................................................................................44
Printing with Bluetooth Connection .......................................................................... 45
Configuring Security Mode Settings.........................................................................46
Printing in the Security Mode ...................................................................................46
Making Option Settings for the Printer ..............................................................47
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication ............................................................ 47
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled..............................................................49
Installing Font Manager 2000..............................................................................50
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 ..............................................51
iii
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties.............................................................53
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................53
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................55
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................57
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................59
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties ..........................................................61
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................61
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................63
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................65
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................67
3. Other Print Operations
Printing a PDF File Directly................................................................................. 69
Printing Method ........................................................................................................69
Using DeskTopBinder Lite .......................................................................................69
Using commands .....................................................................................................72
Unauthorized Copy Control ................................................................................ 73
Using [Data security for copying] .................................................................................74
Using [Mask type:] .....................................................................................................76
Important Notice.......................................................................................................77
Using the Print Job Function..............................................................................78
Selecting the Initial Print Job List ............................................................................. 80
Printing from the Print Job Screen ....................................................................81
Sample Print.............................................................................................................81
Locked Print .............................................................................................................85
Hold Print .................................................................................................................89
Stored Print ..............................................................................................................92
Printing from the List Per User ID Screen .........................................................96
Printing the Selected Print Job.................................................................................96
Printing All Print Jobs ...............................................................................................97
Form Feed.............................................................................................................99
Printing from a Selected Tray...................................................................................99
Canceling a Print Job .............................................................................................100
Canceling a Print Job ........................................................................................101
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel ......................................................101
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer .............................................102
Checking the Error Log .....................................................................................103
Spool Printing .................................................................................................... 105
User Defined Pages ...........................................................................................106
Printing with the Finisher..................................................................................107
Staple ..................................................................................................................... 108
Collate ....................................................................................................................110
Covers.................................................................................................................112
Chaptering ..........................................................................................................116
No slip sheets.........................................................................................................116
Inserting chapter slip sheets ..................................................................................117
Slip Sheet............................................................................................................118
iv
4. Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
Accessing the Document Server......................................................................121
5. The Functions and Settings of the Machine
Mainframe ...........................................................................................................123
Functions................................................................................................................123
Interface .................................................................................................................123
List of the Setting Items ....................................................................................124
Web Image Monitor................................................................................................124
telnet ......................................................................................................................127
UNIX.......................................................................................................................128
Settings that can be used with PostScript 3...........................................................129
6. Appendix
Specifications.....................................................................................................131
Options...................................................................................................................133
INDEX....................................................................................................... 135
v
vi
Notice
❖ Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer/Scanner Controller
Model Number: Printer/Scanner Unit Type 3010, Printer Unit Type 3010,
Printer Enhance Option Type 3010, RPCS Printer Unit Type 3010
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
A This device may not cause harmful interference, and
B this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
A Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for
connections to a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC
emission limits.
B An AC adapter with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
❖ Note to users in the United States of America
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
❖ Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
❖ Note to users in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
❖ Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
❖ Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
1
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
2
Display Panel
This section describes configuration using the display panel when the printer
function is selected.
Initial Display
Important
❒ The machine switches to offline when you make settings when the machine
is online. After you complete the setting, the machine switches to online automatically.
❒ If you make a setting when the machine is offline, it will stay offline afterwards.
❒ The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify
an item by pressing it lightly.
❒ When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it becomes highlighted.
❒ Keys dimmed (for example,
) cannot be used.
AJO002S
1. Operational status or messages
4. [Job Reset]
Displays current machine status, such as
“Ready”, “Offline”, and “Printing...”. Information about the print job (user ID and
document name) appears in this section.
Press to cancel the current print job.
If you press it when the machine is offline
and Hex Dump is selected, Hex Dump is
canceled.
2. [fOnline]/[ Offline]
5. [Print Jobs]
When you press these keys, the machine
switches between online and offline.
When the machine is online, it can receive data from the computer.
When the machine is offline, it cannot receive data from the computer.
Press to display print jobs sent from a
computer.
3. [Form Feed]
Press to print all the data left in the machine's input buffer.
• When the machine is online, the status
appears dimly.
• This function is not available with the
RPCS printer language.
6. [Error Log]
Press to display the error logs of print
jobs that sent from a computer.
7. [Spooling Job List]
Press to display spooled jobs.
8. Paper Tray Status indicators
The paper tray settings appear.
3
Note
❒ When the power is turned on, the copier display is shown. This is a factory
default. This initial setting can be changed. See “User Tools (System Settings)”, General Settings Guide.
4
Printer Features Menu
The following explains settings and meanings of functions on Printer Feature.
Printer Feature screen appears when you press the {User Tools/Counter} key. For
details, see “Printer Features Menu”, General Settings Guide.
❖ List / Test Print
Menu
Description
Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log.
Config. Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that
occurred during printing.
Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function menus.
PCL Config. / Font Page
You can print the current configuration and
installed PCL font list.
This menu can be selected only when the
PCL unit is installed.
PS Config. / Font Page
You can print the current configuration and
installed PostScript font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
PDF Config. / Font Page
You can print the current configuration and
installed PDF font list.
This menu can be selected only when both
the optional PostScript 3 unit and the optional hard disk are installed.
Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
❖ Maintenance
Menu
Menu Protect
Description
This function lets you protect menu settings
from accidental change. It makes it impossible to change menu settings with normal
procedures unless you perform the required
key operations.
In a network environment, only administrators can make changes to menu settings.
List / Test Print Lock
You can lock the [List / Test Print] menu.
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs temporarily
stored in the machine.
Delete All Stored Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.
5
❖ System
Menu
Description
Print Error Report
You can print an error report when a printer
or memory error occurs.
Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue.
When it is On, printing continues after a system error occurs.
Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error
report printed.
Job Separation
You can enable Job Separation.
This menu can be selected only when a finisher (optional) is installed.
Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print
jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print
jobs stored in the machine.
Initial Print Job List
You can set the default Printer screen when
you press [Print Jobs].
Memory Usage
You can select the amount of memory used
in Font Priority or Frame Priority, according
to paper size or resolution.
Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of
each page.
Copies
You can specify the number of print sets.
This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print has been specified with the printer
driver or another command.
Blank Page Print
You can select whether or not to print blank
pages.
Edge Smoothing
You can set to smoothen the edges of printed
characters.
Toner Saving
Make setting to select either to apply or not
to apply Toner Saving.
Printer Language
You can specify the printer language.
Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper
Size (A4↔LT) feature.
Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
Letterhead Setting
You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always
rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore, output
might not be as expected when printing onto
letterhead or preprinted paper requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify
image rotation.
6
Menu
Description
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
You can specify which of the two options,
(Printer) Driver / Command or Machine Settings, has priority for determining the paper
size for the bypass tray.
Edge to Edge Print
You can select whether or not to print on the
entire sheet.
Default Printer Language
You can set the default printer language if
the machine cannot find the printer language
automatically.
Tray Switching
You can set to switch the paper tray.
❖ Host Interface
Menu
Description
I/O Buffer
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting.
I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine
should wait before ending a print job. If data
from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you should increase this
timeout period.
❖ PCL Menu
This menu can be selected only when the PCL unit is installed.
Menu
Description
Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
Font Source
You can set the storage location of the default font.
Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you
want to use.
Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for
the selected font.
Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per
inch for the selected font.
Symbol Set
You can specify the set of print characters for
the selected font. The available options are as
follows:
Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
Extend A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width
when printing on A4 sheet with PCL.
Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow
each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR−LF, FF=CR−
FF.
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per
inch.
7
❖ PS Menu (optional)
Menu
Description
Data Format
You can select a data format.
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per
inch.
❖ PDF Menu (optional)
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit and the
optional hard disk are installed.
Menu
Description
Change PDF Password
You can set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
PDF Group Password
You can set the group password already
specified with DeskTopBinder Lite.
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per
inch.
Note
❒ Some options do not appear depending optional units or selected printer languages.
❒ The PCL printer language is optional depending on the options installed on
the machine, but is required if the PCL unit is installed.
❒ Some options cannot be set depending on security settings.
❒ If you are using the machine that does not have the optional hard disk installed, some options are not displayed.
Reference
For details, see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
For more information about copier features and system settings, see Copy
Reference and General Settings Guide.
8
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray
This section gives instructions for setting paper on the bypass tray.
For details about paper size and paper type, see “Recommended Paper Size and
Types”, About This Machine.
Paper within the following dimensions can be set in the bypass tray:
• Vertical: 90 - 297 mm (3.5 - 11.7 in.)
• Horizontal: 148 - 600 mm (5.9 - 23.6 in.)
Important
❒ The following functions are disabled when printing from the bypass tray:
• Duplex printing (when the optional unit is installed)
• Auto Tray Select
• Auto Tray Switching
• Rotating collate
• Staple (when the optional unit is installed)
❒ Be sure to set the paper size using the printer driver when printing data from
the computer. The paper size set using the printer driver has priority over the
one set using the display panel.
❖ Printing onto paper with specific orientation
When printing onto paper that has specific orientation requirements, such as
envelopes or letterhead paper, be sure to set as the followings:
• If the paper feed orientation is L, insert paper print side down in the bypass tray, and set the bottom edge of the paper toward the machine.
• If the paper feed orientation is K, insert paper print side down in the bypass tray, and set the bottom edge of the paper toward you.
To print on paper that is set in the opposite position to either of the correct
positions described above, rotate the print image 180 degrees using the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
A Open the bypass tray.
AJO007S
9
B Adjust the paper guides to the paper size.
If the paper guides are not flush against the paper, skewing and misfeeds
might occur.
Before loading paper, unlock the paper guides by pushing up the paper guide
release lever.
To lock the paper guides, push down the paper guide release lever. The machine then selects the bypass tray automatically.
AJO008S
1. Extender
2. Paper Guide
3. Paper guide release lever
C Gently insert paper facing down into the bypass tray until the beeper
sounds.
Fan the paper to get air between the sheets to avoid a multi-sheet feed.
D Select the paper size.
Note
❒ Open out the extender to support paper sizes larger than A4 L, 81/2 ×11 L.
❒ When setting an OHP transparency, make sure that its front and back sides
are properly positioned.
Reference
For printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help.
Select paper type when printing onto OHP transparencies or thick paper
(over 127.9 g/m2). For details, see p.14 “Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the Control Panel”.
10
Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to set the machine using the control panel when
loading standard size paper onto the bypass tray.
Important
❒ The following procedures are not required if you select [Driver / Command]
from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features]. In that case,
set the paper size using the printer driver. For details, see General Settings
Guide.
❒ If you select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of
[Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide), the settings
made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver settings.
❒ If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide). Set paper size using the control panel.
❒ Thick paper and OHP transparencies are delivered face up on the top of the
preceding page; therefore, the prints need to be rearranged into the correct order. To avoid this, select [Reverse order print] in the RPCS printer driver settings to deliver the prints in the correct page order.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key on the control panel.
AJO009S
B Press [System Settings].
C Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
D Press [TNext] to scroll through the list.
E Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
11
F Select the paper size.
Press [UPrevious] or [TNext] to scroll through the list.
G Press [OK].
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
When loading thick paper or OHP transparencies, select paper size and paper type. For details, see p.14 “Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies
Using the Control Panel”.
12
Setting Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to set the machine using the control panel when
loading custom size paper onto the bypass tray.
Important
❒ The following procedures are not required if you select [Driver / Command] from
[Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”,
General Settings Guide). In that case, set the paper size using the printer driver.
❒ If you select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of
[Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide), the settings
made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver settings.
❒ If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide). Set paper size using the control panel.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key on the control panel.
B Press [System Settings].
C Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
D Press [TNext] to scroll through the list.
E Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].
F Press [Custom size].
If a custom size is already set, press [Change Size].
G Press [Vertical].
H Enter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys, and then press {#}.
I Press [Horizontal].
J Enter the horizontal size of the paper using the number keys, and then press {#}.
K Press [OK].
The paper sizes entered are displayed.
L Press [OK].
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ When loading OHP transparencies or thick paper, set paper size and paper type.
❒ For printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help.
13
Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to set the machine using the control panel when
loading thick paper or OHP transparencies onto the bypass tray.
Important
❒ The following procedures are not required if you select [Driver / Command]
from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see “Printer
Features”, General Settings Guide). In that case, set the paper size using the
printer driver.
❒ If you select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of
[Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide), the settings
made using the control panel have priority over the printer driver settings.
❒ If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide). Set the paper size using the control panel.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key on the control panel.
B Press [System Settings].
C Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
D Press [TNext] to scroll through the list.
E Press [Paper Type: Bypass tray].
F Select [OHP] or [Thick Paper].
G Press [OK].
The paper type selected is displayed.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ The settings made will remain valid until they are reset again. After printing on OHP transparencies or thick paper, make sure to clear settings for
the next user.
Reference
When loading letterhead paper, pay attention to its orientation. See “Orientation- Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper”, General Settings Guide.
When configuring [Printer Features] of [System Settings], see General Settings
Guide.
For printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help.
14
1. Preparing the Machine
Confirming the Connection Method
This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow
the driver installation procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.
Network Connection
This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.
Using this Machine as the Windows Printing Port
Network connections can be established through Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b.
Available ports are determined by the combination of your Windows operating
system's version and connection method.
ZZZ035S
15
Preparing the Machine
❖ Windows 95/98
1
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
❖ Windows Me
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
❖ Windows 2000
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
❖ Windows XP
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
❖ Windows Server 2003
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
❖ Windows NT 4.0
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
LPR port
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of
port. For the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see p.21 “Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port”.
For the Standard TCP/IP port, see p.27 “Using the Standard TCP/IP Port”.
For the LPR port, see p.29 “Using the LPR Port”.
16
Confirming the Connection Method
Using as a Network Printer
This machine can be used as the Windows network printer, the NetWare print
server, or the NetWare remote printer.
1
ZZZ036S
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of
network printer.
For the Windows network printer, see p.31 “Using as a Windows Network
Printer”.
For the NetWare print server and remote printer, see p.34 “Using as a NetWare Print Server/Remote Printer”.
17
Preparing the Machine
Local Connection
Local connections can be established via parallel, USB, and Bluetooth connection.
The version of Windows operating system determines the available connection
methods.
• Windows 95:
Parallel connections
• Windows 98/98 SE:
Parallel connections
• Windows Me:
USB and Parallel connections
• Windows 2000:
USB, Parallel, and Bluetooth connections
• Windows XP:
USB, Parallel, and Bluetooth connections
• Windows Server 2003:
USB, Parallel, and Bluetooth connections
• Windows NT 4.0:
Parallel connections
1
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each method of
connection.
For the USB connection, see p.37 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”.
For the parallel connection, see p.42 “Printing with Parallel Connection”.
For the Bluetooth connection, see p.44 “Printing with Bluetooth Connection”.
18
Installing the Printer Driver
Installing the Printer Driver
This section explains how to install the printer driver. There are two ways to install the printer driver: using Quick Install, which installs the settings at once, or
installing the appropriate driver according to the port you wish to use.
1
Quick Install
Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, and Windows Server 2003 users can easily install this software using the supplied CD-ROM.
Using Quick Install, the RPCS printer driver and DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client are installed under network environment, and the TCP/IP
port will be set.
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ If you connect using USB, refer to p.37 “Installing the Printer Driver Using
USB” and install the printer driver.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [Quick Install].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
E After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click
[Next >].
F Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
For network connection via TCP/IP, select the machine whose IP address is
displayed in [Connect To].
For parallel connection, select the machine whose printer port is displayed in
[Connect To].
19
Preparing the Machine
G Click [Install].
The printer driver installation starts.
H Click [Finish].
1
A message about restarting the computer appears. Restart the computer to
complete installation.
I Click [Exit] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the CDROM.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ Select a machine to whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To] to install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client when using TCP/IP.
Reference
Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between
the machine and computer is enabled via parallel connection. See p.49 “If
Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled” for details about bidirectional
communication between the machine and computer.
20
Installing the Printer Driver
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
1
Important
❒ To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver
when using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].
E Select an interface language, and then click [Next >].
The default interface language is English.
F The message to quit all other applications appears. Quit all applications,
and then click [Next >].
G The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box. After reading through its contents, click [Yes].
H Click [Full install] or [Custom Install].
[Full install] installs all required applications: DeskTopBinder Lite and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
[Custom Install] installs selected applications.
I Follow the instructions on the display and click [Next >] to proceed next step.
J After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and click [Complete].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
21
Preparing the Machine
Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.
1
Windows 95/98:
A Open the [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.
B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0:
A Open [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.
B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port].
The [Configuration] dialog box appears.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
A Open the [Printers and Faxes] window from the [Start] menu.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
C Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration] dialog box appears.
Note
❒ For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.
22
❒ User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.
❒ If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the
procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the tasktray.
C Point to [Properties], and then click [Extended Features Settings].
D Select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box.
E Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
Installing the Printer Driver
Reference
For details about these settings, see “Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”, Network Guide, or SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
1
Installing the RPCS or PCL Printer Driver (TCP/IP)
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [RPCS Printer Driver] or [PCL Printer Driver].
To install RPCS printer drivers, click [RPCS Printer Driver]. To install PCL printer drivers, click [PCL Printer Driver].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next
>].
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Click [Next >].
H Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
I Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, or port.
23
Preparing the Machine
J Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
K Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
L Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
1
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
M Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the machine.
N Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
O Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic character or symbol
can be entered.
P Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
Q Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
R After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user
prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ Under Windows 95/98/Me, you cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use,
“192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192.168.0.20” is in use,
“192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See “When a
Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble
Shooting.
24
Installing the Printer Driver
Installing the RPCS or PCL Printer Driver (IPP)
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
1
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [RPCS Printer Driver] or [PCL Printer Driver].
To install RPCS printer drivers, click [RPCS Printer Driver]. To install PCL printer drivers, click [PCL Printer Driver].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next
>].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, or port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
K Click [IPP].
25
Preparing the Machine
L In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://printer's address/printer” as the printer's
address.
If the server authentication is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://printer's address/printer” (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://printer's address/ipp” as the printer's address.
1
M Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port name.
N Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For details about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
O Click [OK].
P Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
Q Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.
R Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
S Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
T After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check the number of sheets each user prints. For details, see
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
26
Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See “When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble Shooting.
Installing the Printer Driver
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port
This describes how to install the RPCS or PCL printer driver using the TCP/IP
port.
1
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
Installing the RPCS or PCL Printer Driver
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [RPCS Printer Driver] or [PCL Printer Driver].
To install RPCS printer drivers, click [RPCS Printer Driver]. To install PCL
printer drivers, click [PCL Printer Driver].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Click [Next >].
H Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
I Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, or port.
J Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
27
Preparing the Machine
K Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK].
Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings, and then see Windows Help if
[Standard TCP/IP Port] does not appear.
L Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
1
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name
if necessary.
When the device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter Driver C
Model”.
N Click [Next >].
O Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
The installation start dialog box reappears.
P Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
Q Configure the default printer as necessary.
R Click [Continue].
The printer driver installation starts.
S After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See “When a
Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble
Shooting.
28
Installing the Printer Driver
Using the LPR Port
This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver using the LPR port.
1
Important
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [RPCS Printer Driver] or [PCL Printer Driver].
To install RPCS printer drivers, click [RPCS Printer Driver]. To install PCL
printer drivers, click [PCL Printer Driver].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Click [Next >].
I Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, or port.
29
Preparing the Machine
J Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
K Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
If [LPR Port] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.
1
L Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
M Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click
[OK].
The port is added.
N Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
O Configure the default printer as necessary.
P Click [Continue].
The printer driver installation starts.
Q After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See “When a
Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble
Shooting.
30
Using as a Windows Network Printer
Using as a Windows Network Printer
This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver when using the
printer as a Windows network printer.
To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer
server”, and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer.
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate
with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure before the client is set up and configured correctly.
1
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
❒ To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
❒ If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used
from the client.
❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, notification functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.
❒ If you print with a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before you connect the print server to the printer.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
31
Preparing the Machine
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
1
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [RPCS Printer Driver] or [PCL Printer Driver].
To install RPCS printer drivers, click [RPCS Printer Driver]. To install PCL
printer drivers, click [PCL Printer Driver].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Click [Next >].
H Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer models you want to
use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
I Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
J Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
K Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
L Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Browse for Printer] window.
M Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
N Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
O Configure the user code as necessary.
For an RPCS printer driver, a user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.
32
Using as a Windows Network Printer
P Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
Q Click [Continue].
The printer driver installation starts.
1
R After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See “When a
Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble
Shooting.
33
Preparing the Machine
Using as a NetWare Print Server/Remote
Printer
1
This describes about how to set up the Windows computer used as the NetWare
client.
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client
computer and the NetWare server environment is correctly set up. Install all necessary client applications before following this procedure.
Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.
The following values are used in the example:
• Operating system: Windows 98
• NetWare version: 4.1
• File server name: CAREE
• Queue name: R-QUEUE
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case,
launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
B Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
C Click [RPCS Printer Driver] or [PCL Printer Driver].
To install RPCS printer drivers, click [RPCS Printer Driver]. To install PCL printer drivers, click [PCL Printer Driver].
D The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
E Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
34
Using as a NetWare Print Server/Remote Printer
F Click [Next >].
G Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to
use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
1
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.
The created queue is displayed.
L Select the print queue, and then click [OK].
M Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
N Click [Continue].
The printer driver installation starts.
O Click [Finish] in the [Select Program] dialog box.
P After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Q After restarting the computer, launch the [Printers] window, and then open
the printer properties.
Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, open the printer properties
from the [Printers and Faxes] window.
R On the [Printer Settings] tab, clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check
boxes.
Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click
the [NetWare setting] tab.
Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the
printer driver. If you select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.
S Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using Web Image Monitor or Telnet.
35
Preparing the Machine
Form Feed
Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not
print properly.
Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties
dialog box.
1
Banner Page
Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.
Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating
system used:
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Printing after Resetting the Printer
To print the server connection requires 30 - 40 seconds to resume after the printer
is reset. During this period, jobs may be accepted (depending on NetWare specifications) but not printed.
To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server
that the remote printer is disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to
print.
36
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in progress.
The printer drivers can be installed from the supplied CD-ROM or downloading
them from the supplier's website.
1
Windows Me - USB
Important
❒ Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95/98. Upgrade to Windows Me or later.
❒ Download USB Printing Support for Windows Me from the supplier's website.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
When USB is first used, the plug and play function starts and the [New Hardware
Found], [Device Driver Wizard], or [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, depending on the operating system.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [Printers] window.
A Download USB Printing Support from the supplier's website.
Use a search to find the model name, and then download USB Printing Support from the supplier's website.
Save it where you can locate it easily.
B Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
C In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next >].
D Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
E Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click
[Next >].
F Check the location, and then click [Next >].
USB Printing Support is installed.
37
Preparing the Machine
G Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled,
the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers]
window.
1
H Install the printer driver. Click [Search for the best driver for your device. [Recommended]], and then click [Next >].
I Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
J Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM into
the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the
CD-ROM.
K Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored,
and then click [Next >].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
L Check the location, and then click [Next >].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
M Click [Finish].
Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer
connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
❒ It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a different machine via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.
❒ After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed,
follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.
38
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
Windows 2000 - USB
Important
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrator permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrator permission.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing
Support is installed automatically.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [Printers] window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the supplied CD-ROM.
1
A Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
B In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next >].
C Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
E Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
F Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].
G Click [Next >].
39
Preparing the Machine
H Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed and plug and play is enabled,
the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers]
window.
1
Note
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB
Important
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing
Support is installed automatically.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [Printers] window.
The printer drivers can be installed from the supplied CD-ROM provided with
this machine.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the supplied CD-ROM.
A Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
B In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next >].
C Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
40
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
D Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best
driver in these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
1
E Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
F Click [Continue].
G Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001”
port is added to the [Printers and Faxes] window.
Note
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
41
Preparing the Machine
Printing with Parallel Connection
This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver when using the parallel port.
To use a machine connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when installing the printer driver.
1
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
Installing the RPCS or PCL Printer Driver
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [RPCS Printer Driver] or [PCL Printer Driver].
To install RPCS printer drivers, click [RPCS Printer Driver]. To install PCL printer drivers, click [PCL Printer Driver].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Click [Next >].
H Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to
use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
42
Printing with Parallel Connection
I Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
J Check that [LPT1:] is shown in [Port:].
K Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Click [Finish].
1
The printer driver installation starts.
M After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See “When a
Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble
Shooting.
43
Preparing the Machine
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
This describes how to print using Bluetooth devices.
1
Supported Profiles
Refer the following supported profiles for Bluetooth connection.
❖ SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers
can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by
SPP, one by HCRP.
• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped
computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel
the first established connection.
• The SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• The HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
❖ BIP
• For the BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed
in the machine.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.
Note
❒ In this manual, the instruction referred to print using SPP. To print using
HCRP or BIP, see the Help supplied with the Bluetooth adapter you use.
44
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.
1
Important
❒ To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
B Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
C On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port].
D Check that the message “Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) “ appears under
Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
E Click [Close].
F On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
G Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
H On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
I Click the [Ports] tab.
J Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box. X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.
K Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
❒
❒
❒
❒
Note
To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection]
check box.
System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see the manuals supplied with each product.
For details about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or
using it with different utilities, see the manuals supplied with those operating systems or utilities.
If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network
connection as follows:
A Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Faxes] box.
B Click [Connect].
Reference
For details, see the manuals supplied with the Bluetooth adaptor or computer equipped with Bluetooth.
45
Preparing the Machine
Configuring Security Mode Settings
This describes how to configure the security mode settings.
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
B On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
1
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
C Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.
If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog
box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see p.46 “Printing in the Security Mode”.
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
For information about each mode, see the manuals supplied with the utility.
D Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.
Reference
For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to transmit print jobs, see p.46 “Printing in the Security Mode”.
Printing in the Security Mode
This describes how to print in the security mode.
A Send the print job to the printer in use.
Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.
B The [Authentication] dialog box appears.
C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the machine's serial
number. You can find the serial number on the label attached to the back of
the machine. For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth
password is 1234.
D The print job is sent.
Note
❒ The Bluetooth password differs for each machine and cannot be changed.
46
Making Option Settings for the Printer
Making Option Settings for the Printer
Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional
communication is disabled.
1
Reference
For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.49 “If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled”.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication
Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed direction settings to be automatically sent to the printer. You can check machine
status from your computer.
• Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is enabled under Windows 2000, the [Change Accessories] tab is unavailable.
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communications and updates
the machine status automatically.
❒ The PCL printer driver supports bidirectional communications. You can update the machine status manually.
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
❖ When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and parallel connectors.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
47
Preparing the Machine
❖ When connected with the network
• The machine must support bidirectional communication.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:
• The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must
be used.
• The standard TCP/IP port must be used without changing the default
port name (for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003).
• Microsoft TCP/IP print IP address must be specified for use (for Windows NT 4.0).
• IPP port name must include the IP address when using the IPP protocol.
1
❖ When connected with USB
The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
The computer must support bidirectional communication.
Note
❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the supplied CD-ROM.
48
Making Option Settings for the Printer
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled
Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.
1
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder.
Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the
printer properties in the [Printers] (Windows 2000) or [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Windows Server 2003) folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
When using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, point to [Settings] on the
[Start] menu, and then click [Printers and Faxes]. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Change Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection
is enabled. In this case, no change is necessary for option settings.
If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab.
E Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
F Select the total amount of the memory in [Total memory:] when the optional
SDRAM module is added.
G Under [Paper source tray settings:], click and highlight the tray to be used, and
then select the appropriate size, position, and type for the tray. Select the
[Do not use Auto Tray Select] check box to exclude the tray from the targets of
automatic tray selection.
H Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
49
Preparing the Machine
Installing Font Manager 2000
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, installing applications by Auto Run requires administrator permission. To install a
Font Manager by Auto Run, log on using an account that has administrator
permission.
1
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the Font Manager CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Click [Font Manager 2000].
D Follow the instructions on the screen.
50
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5,
or 7.0
1
Under Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT
4.0 with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker folder.
PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder “DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1” on the CD-ROM.
The “WIN9X_ME” folder inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95/98/Me. Use
the folder at this level that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently using.
The third folder “(Language)” may be substituted by an appropriate language
name.
Copy the .ppd file to the PageMaker folder.
• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”.
• For PageMaker 6.5 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
• For PageMaker 7.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
Note
❒ If the driver is not set correctly after copying the “.ppd” file, printing may not
be performed properly.
❒ When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the
printer driver will not be active. The following procedure describes how to
activate the optional printer features.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print Document] dialog box appears.
B Make the necessary settings in the [Features] box.
51
Preparing the Machine
1
52
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties
Important
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making Printer Default Settings
To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
53
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
2
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
54
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrator and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
2
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Default Settings - Printing Preferences
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
55
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the
application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
56
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission
by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
2
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Default Settings - Printing Preferences
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
57
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list, and then click
[Preferences].
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the
application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
58
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
2
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Default Settings - Default
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
59
Setting Up the Printer Driver
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The [Default] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
2
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
60
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two dialog box types of the printer properties dialog box.
“Multi-tab” is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the
dialog box types, see the printer driver Help.
2
❖ Multi-tab
This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to
perform various printing operations.
❖ Custom Setting
This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings.
This type of dialog box may vary depending on the installed options.
Making Printer Default Settings
To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK], the
printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
61
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
2
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
62
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
This describes how to launch printer driver's properties.
Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
2
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission
by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK], the
printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
63
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making Printer Default Settings - Printing Preferences
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
2
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the
application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
64
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission
by default.
2
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK], the
printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
65
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making Printer Default Settings - Printing Preferences
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
2
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the
application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
66
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
Important
❒ The printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 is not included on the supplied CDROM. Download the printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier’s
website. For details, ask your sales/service representatives.
2
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK], the
printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Default Settings - Default
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
67
Setting Up the Printer Driver
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...].
The [Default] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
2
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Settings from an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
68
3. Other Print Operations
Printing a PDF File Directly
You can send PDF files directly to the machine for printing, without having to
open a PDF application.
Important
This function is possible only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
This function is possible for genuine Adobe PDF files only.
Version 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 PDF files are compatible.
Transparency and JBIG2 (functions of PDF version 1.4) are not compatible.
PDF version 1.5 exclusive functions are not compatible.
Some types of High Compression PDF files are not supported. Consult your
sales/service representative about the supported file types.
❒ It does not function properly when no optional hard disk installed.
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
Note
❒ Paper size errors may occur when printing on custom size paper.
Printing Method
The following procedures explain the two methods of direct PDF printing - using DeskTopBinder Lite or by entering commands.
Using DeskTopBinder Lite
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite
Follow the procedure below to install DeskTopBinder Lite.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case,
launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
D Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
E Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.
If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, restart the computer and continue the configuration.
69
Other Print Operations
DeskTopBinder Lite Enhancements
Follow the DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement procedure to print PDF files directly.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Extended Features
Wizard].
B When [Extended Features Wizard] appears, select [Start], and then click [Next >]
repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] screen appears.
C On the [Printing Function2] screen, click [Add...] to display [PDF Direct Print
3
Properties].
D Select the printer driver for the machine, click [OK], and then click [Next >]
repeatedly until [Finish] is displayed.
Click [Finish].
Function Palette
The Function palette contains buttons for functions that are already configured
through DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement. Using these buttons, you can print
Windows files, preview printouts, convert images, and register scanners for documents without having to open DeskTopBinder Lite. You can also use these
functions simply by dragging a target file to the button corresponding to the required function and dropping it there.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Function Palette].
An icon for the Function palette is added to the task bar displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
B Right-click the icon that is added to the task bar, and then click [Properties]
to display the Properties screen.
C Click the [Contents] tab, select the [PDF Direct Print] check box at the center,
and then click [OK].
The [Properties] screen closes and the [PDF Direct Print] icon is added to the
palette.
PDF Direct Printing
Use the method below to print PDF files directly.
A Drag the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon in the
palette and drop it there.
B [Output File List -PDF Direct Print] is displayed.
Highlight the PDF you want to print, and then click [OK].
The PDF file is printed.
70
Printing a PDF File Directly
Printing PDF Password-Protected Documents
Follow the procedure below to print password-protected PDF files.
A In the Windows [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Extended
Features Wizard].
B When [Extended Features Wizard] appears, select [Start], and then click [Next >]
repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] screen appears.
C On the [Printing Function2] screen, click [Properties...] to display [PDF Direct Print
3
Properties].
D Select the [Use PDF Password] check box at the bottom right of the screen, and
then click [OK].
Click [Next >] repeatedly until [Finish] appears.
Click [Finish] to close the [Extended Features Wizard] screen.
E Move the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon on the
palette using a drag-and-drop operation.
F [Output File List -PDF Direct Print] is displayed.
Select the PDF file you want to output to make it reverse video, and then click
[OK].
G The [PDF Direct Print Properties] screen opens.
Enter the password for the PDF file you want to print in the [PDF password:]
field at the bottom right of the screen, and then click [OK].
The password-protected PDF file is printed.
Note
❒ Before printing a password-protected PDF file, perform one of the followings:
• Enter the PDF password in the PDF Direct Printing Properties screen.
• Specify a PDF password by selecting [Change PDF Password] in [PDF
Menu] on the control panel of the machine.
❒ If a [PDF Group Password] for [PDF Menu] is assigned to either DeskTopBinder Lite or the control panel of this machine, a same group password needs
to be assigned to the other.
71
Other Print Operations
PDF Direct Print Properties
3
ASF001S
1. Setting name:
8. Orientation:
Displays the plug-in configuration name
(up to 63 single byte characters)
Specifies the original's orientation.
2. Change Icon...
Specifies the number of copies to print.
Changes the icon displayed on the tool
bar.
3. Printer:
Displays a list of RPCS drivers that support PDF direct printing.
4. Duplex
9. Number of copies
10. Collate
Sorts printed sheets.
11. Range
Specifies the print area on each page.
12. Resolution:
Prints on both sides of sheets.
Specifies a print resolution.
5. Layout
13. PDF password:
Prints multiple pages on a single sheet.
6. Staple
Staples together output sheets.
7. Display this dialog box before
printing
Appears in PDF direct printing mode if
this check box is selected.
If the PDF file is password-protected, enter the password in this field. Otherwise,
the file cannot be printed.
14. Group password:
If a group password is assigned to DeskTopBinder Lite and this machine, enter
the group password in this field. Otherwise, printing cannot start.
Using commands
You can print PDF files directly, using commands such as “ftp” “sftp”and “lpr”.
Reference
For details about UNIX commands, see Network Guide.
72
Unauthorized Copy Control
Unauthorized Copy Control
You can embed patterns and text under printed text to prevent unauthorized
copying of the document. Unauthorized Copy Control consists of two functions:
[Data security for copying] and [Mask type:].
Important
❒ This function is designed to discourage copying of confidential documents; it
does not prevent unauthorized use of information.
3
Opening the Unauthorized Copy Control Window
A In the RPCS printer driver, open the [Printing Preference] window.
B Click [Add/Change Custom Settings...].
C Select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
D Click [Control Settings...].
The Unauthorized Copy Control window appears.
Note
❒ For details, see the printer driver Help.
73
Other Print Operations
Using [Data security for copying]
You can embed a pattern by setting it in the printer driver.
3
❖ Setting [Data security for copying] in the printer driver
• Select the [Data security for copying] checkbox. You can also enter the text in
the [Text:] box.
• You cannot select the [Mask type:] checkbox at the same time.
• To print a document protected by gray overprint, the machine must be set
up correctly. Consult your administrator.
❖ Printing a document using [Data security for copying]
AJL030S
1. The pattern and text you have set
3. The document is blanked by gray
is printed.
overprint.
2. The document is copied or stored
in copiers/multifunction machines
which the optional Copy Data Security unit is installed.
74
Unauthorized Copy Control
Note
❒ When printing a document that is set with [Data security for copying], the machine does not require the optional Copy Data Security unit to be installed.
The Copy Data Security unit is required when copying or storing a document
protected by gray overprint.
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.
Printing at 200 dpi is not possible.
You cannot partially embed a pattern and text in a document.
Use 182 × 257 mm (71/4 × 101/2 in.) or larger paper.
Use ordinary or recycled paper of at least 70% whiteness.
Duplex printing may interfere with this function as a result of text and patterns being visible through the paper.
3
Reference
For details about setting [Data security for copying], see the printer driver Help.
75
Other Print Operations
Using [Mask type:]
You can embed patterns and text in a document by setting in the printer driver
to prevent unauthorized copying.
3
❖ Setting [Mask type:] in the printer driver
• Select a pattern from [Mask type:], and then enter text in the [Text:] box.
Note
❒ You can set only [Text:], but [Mask type:] and [Text:] must be set together.
❖ Printing a document using [Mask type:]
AJL031S
1. The pattern and text you have set
is printed palely.
2. The document is copied, scanned,
or stored in copiers/multifunction
machines.
76
3. The pattern and text you have set
appear clearly.
Unauthorized Copy Control
Note
❒ Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.
❒ You cannot partially embed patterns and text strings in a document.
❒ Printing at 200 dpi is not possible.
❒ To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size at least 50 pt (preferably 70 to 80 pt) and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
❒ Due to the effects of the settings, the results of copying, scanning, and saving
documents in the document server may vary depending on the machine
model and setting conditions.
❒ Printing with background patterns and text may be slower than normal
printing.
3
Reference
For details about setting [Mask type:], see the printer driver Help.
Important Notice
• The supplier does not provide warranty regarding the appearance of print
patterns and other copy protection features. The appearance of the print patterns and the performance of Unauthorized Copy Control may vary depending on the quality of paper used and the machine model and settings.
• The supplier takes no responsibility for any damages sustained in connection
with use of or inability to make use of Unauthorized Copy Control print patterns.
77
Other Print Operations
Using the Print Job Function
This describes how to print files stored in the machine.
The following types of printing can be selected using the printer driver: Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
You can print or delete the print jobs saved in the machine which is sent from
computers.
If you select Sample Print, Locked Print, and Hold Print, the print files saved in
the machine are deleted after printing is completed. If you select Stored Print,
the files remain in the machine even after printing is finished.
If you press [Print Jobs] on the Printer screen, the Complete List or the List Per User
ID screen appears depending on which list type you select from [Initial Print Job List].
3
❖ Complete List
AJO010S
1. [Complete List]
Displays all files stored in the machine.
2. [Locked Print Job List]
Displays only Locked Print files
stored in the machine.
3. [Sample Print Job List]
Displays only Sample Print files
stored in the machine.
4. [Hold Print Job List]
Displays only Hold Print files stored
in the machine.
5. [Stored Print Job List]
Displays only Stored Print files stored
in the machine.
6. User ID, Date/Time, and File
Name display
78
Displays the time when the instruction
to print the stored files was entered,
User ID, and the file names.
7. [UPrev.]/[TNext.]
If the list of files does not fit on the
screen, scroll down to view the list.
8. [Exit]
Returns to the Printer screen.
9. [Details]
Displays details about a selected file.
10. [Select All Jobs]
Selects all files stored in the machine.
11. [Clear All]
Clears all selections.
12. [Print]
Prints a selected file.
13. [Delete]
Deletes a selected file.
Using the Print Job Function
❖ List Per User ID
If you select [List Per User ID] from [Initial Print Job List], the following screen appears:
AJO020S
1. [Clear]
Deselects a selection.
2. User ID
Displays user IDs who sent files to the
machine.
3. [UPrev.]/[TNext.]
If the list of files does not fit on the
screen, scroll down to view the list.
4. [Exit]
3
5. [Complete List]
Displays all print jobs.
6. [List Per User ID]
Displays the print job list of each ID.
7. [Print All Jobs]
Prints all documents of the desired ID.
If a user sends a different type of print
jobs in the same ID, you can select
which type of a print job to print.
Returns to the Printer screen.
❒
❒
❒
❒
Note
Multiple files can be selected on the Print Jobs screen. To clear selection, press
the selected print jobs again.
The display is not updated if a new file is stored while the list of stored files
is displayed. To update the display, press [Exit] to return to the Printer screen,
and then press [Print Jobs] again.
If a large number of print jobs are stored in the machine, processing may slow
temporarily, depending on which functions are used.
If you press [List Per User ID] in the Complete List screen, the screen switches
to the List Per User ID screen where [Back] appears at the bottom right. Press
[Back] to switch to the Complete List screen.
Reference
p.81 “Sample Print”
p.85 “Locked Print”
p.89 “Hold Print”
p.92 “Stored Print”
79
Other Print Operations
Selecting the Initial Print Job List
Follow the procedure below to set the initial Print Jobs screen, and to display it.
Selecting the Initial Print Job List
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
B Press [Printer Features].
The Printer Features menu appears.
3
C On the [System] tab, press [Initial Print Job List].
D Select either [Complete List] or [List Per User ID].
After configuring the settings, the selected type of print job list is displayed.
Displaying a Print Job List
A Press [Print Jobs].
Either the Complete List or List Per User ID screen appears.
80
Printing from the Print Job Screen
Printing from the Print Job Screen
This section gives instruction about Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and
Stored Print.
Sample Print
Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print job. After you
have checked the result, remaining sets can be printed or canceled using the machine's control panel. This can reduce misprints due to mistakes in content or
settings.
3
Important
❒ A Sample Print file cannot be stored if:
• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored
Print files in the machine is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• sent or stored files in the machine contain over 9,000 pages in total.
• using the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
Note
❒ If a Sample Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the
display panel.
❒ Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents in the machine remain. However, the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print
Jobs] settings are applied first.
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before
sending a print job. By default, Sample Print jobs are automatically collated
by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application's
[Print] dialog box, more prints than intended may be produced.
❒ If the first set of the Sample Print files is not as you expected and you do not
want to print remaining sets, delete the Sample Print file using the display
panel. If you print the remaining sets of the Sample Print file, the job in the
machine is deleted automatically.
❒ The files sent to the machine is not saved if you use the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
Reference
For details about the error log on the control panel, see p.103 “Checking the
Error Log”.
For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored
Print Jobs], see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
81
Other Print Operations
Printing a Sample Print File
The following procedure describes how to print a Sample Print file with the
RPCS and the PCL 6/5e printer driver. For details about how to print a Sample
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Important
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
3
❒ Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this
function.
❒ If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this
function.
A Configure Sample Print in the printer driver's properties.
For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
B Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
Make sure to set more than two copies.
The Sample Print job is sent to the machine, and the first set is printed.
C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the Printer
screen.
D Press [Print Jobs].
A list of print files stored in the machine appears.
E Press [Sample Print Job List].
A list of Sample Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
82
Printing from the Print Job Screen
F Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].
To select all print jobs, press [Select All Jobs].
To clear a selection, press the highlighted print job again. To clear all selections, press [Clear All].
To view details about a selected print file, press [Details].
G Enter the new number of sets using the number keys.
3
You can enter up to 999 sets.
Press {Clear/Stop} to correct any entry mistakes.
H Press [Yes].
The remaining sets are printed.
Press [Stop] to cancel printing.
Note
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.
❒ If you select multiple documents and do not specify the number of sets on
the confirmation screen, one set less than the smallest number specified on
the computer is printed for every selected document. If the smallest number of sets specified on the computer is “1”, one set each is printed for every document.
❒ When the number of set quantity is changed, the changed quantity is applied to all selected files.
❒ When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
❒ To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer
screen appears, and then press [Job Reset]. The file will be deleted.
83
Other Print Operations
Deleting Sample Print Files
If you are not satisfied with the sample printout, you can delete the Sample Print
file, revise it and print it again until the settings are suitable.
A Press the {Printer} key to display the Printer screen.
B Press [Print Jobs].
A list of the print files stored in the machine appears.
C Press [Sample Print Job List].
3
A list of Sample Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
D Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen will appear.
E Press [Yes] to delete the file.
The selected file is deleted.
Note
❒ If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.
84
Printing from the Print Job Screen
Locked Print
Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents on
the machine over a shared network. Usually, it is possible to print data using the
display panel once it is stored in this machine. When using Locked Print, it is not
possible to print unless a password is entered on the machine's display panel.
Your confidential documents will be safe from being viewed by other people.
Important
❒ A Locked Print file cannot be stored if:
3
• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored
Print files in the machine is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• sent or stored files in the machine contain over 9,000 pages in total.
• using the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
Note
❒ If a Locked Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the
display panel.
❒ Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents remain. However, the
[Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are
applied first.
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. Locked Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer
driver as default. If a collate option is selected in the application print dialog
box, more sets than intended may be printed.
❒ After the Locked Print file is printed, the job is automatically deleted.
❒ The files sent to the machine is not saved if you use the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
Reference
For details about the error log on the display panel, see p.103 “Checking the
Error Log”.
For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored
Print Jobs], see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
85
Other Print Operations
Printing a Locked Print File
The following procedure describes how to print a Locked Print file with the
RPCS and the PCL 6/5e printer driver. For details about how to print a Locked
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Important
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
3
❒ Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this
function.
❒ If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this
function.
A Configure the Locked Print in the printer driver's properties.
For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the corresponding Help
files.
B Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
The Locked Print job is sent to the machine.
C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the Printer
screen.
D Press [Print Jobs].
A list of print files stored in the machine appears.
E Press [Locked Print Job List].
A list of Locked Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
86
Printing from the Print Job Screen
F Select the file you want to print, and then press [Print].
The password screen appears.
To select all print jobs, press [Select All Jobs].
To clear a selection, press the highlighted print job again. To clear all selections, press [Clear All].
To view details about a selected print file, press [Details].
3
G Enter the password using the number keys, and then press {OK}.
The print confirmation screen appears.
A confirmation screen will appear if the password is not entered correctly.
Press [Exit] to enter the password again.
If multiple print files are selected, the machine prints files that correspond to
the entered password. The number of files to be printed is displayed on the
confirmation screen.
If you forgot your password, ask your file administrator for help.
H Press [Yes].
The locked file is printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.
Note
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.
❒ When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
❒ To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer
screen appears, and then press [Job Reset]. The file will be deleted.
87
Other Print Operations
Deleting Locked Print Files
A Press the {Printer} key to display the Printer screen.
B Press [Print Jobs].
C Press [Locked Print Job List].
A list of Locked Print files stored appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
D Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
3
The password screen is displayed.
E Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
A confirmation screen will appear if the password is not entered correctly.
Press [Exit] to enter the password again.
If you forgot your password, ask your file administrator for help.
F Press [Yes].
The selected file is deleted.
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].
Note
❒ If multiple print files are selected, the machine deletes files that correspond
to the entered password. The number of files to be deleted is displayed on
the confirmation screen.
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.
88
Printing from the Print Job Screen
Hold Print
Use this function to temporarily hold a file in the machine, and print it from the
computer or the machine's control panel later.
Important
❒ A Hold Print file cannot be stored if:
• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored
Print files in the machine is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• sent or stored files in the machine contain over 9,000 pages in total.
• using the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
3
Note
❒ If a Hold Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the display panel.
❒ Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents in the machine remain. However, the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print
Jobs] settings are applied first.
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, Hold Print jobs are automatically collated by the
printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application's Print dialog
box, more prints than intended may be produced.
❒ The files sent to the machine is not saved if you use the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
Reference
For details about the error log on the display panel, see p.103 “Checking the
Error Log”.
For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored
Print Jobs], see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
89
Other Print Operations
Printing a Hold Print File
The following procedure describes how to print a Hold Print file with the RPCS
and the PCL 6/5e printer driver. For information about how to print a Hold
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see Postscript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file in the supplied CD-ROM.
Important
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
3
❒ Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this
function.
❒ If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this
function.
A Configure Hold Print in the printer driver’s properties.
For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
B Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
C Start printing from the application’s [Print] dialog box.
The Hold Print job is sent to the machine and stored.
D On the machine’s control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
E Press [Print Jobs].
F Press [Hold Print Job List].
A list of a print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
90
Printing from the Print Job Screen
G Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].
The confirmation screen appears.
To select all print jobs, press [Select All Jobs].
To clear a selection, press the highlighted print job again. To clear all selections, press [Clear All].
To view details about a selected print file, press [Details].
H Press [Yes].
The Hold Print file is printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.
3
Note
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.
❒ When printing is completed, the stored file is deleted.
❒ To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer
screen appears, and then press [Job Reset]. The file will be deleted.
Reference
For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help. You
can also print or delete a Hold Print file from Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Deleting Hold Print Files
A Press the {Printer} key to display the Printer screen.
B Press [Print Jobs].
A list of print files stored in the machine appears.
C Press [Hold Print Job List].
A list of a Hold Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
D Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
E Press [Yes] to delete the file.
The selected file is deleted.
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].
Note
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.
91
Other Print Operations
Stored Print
As print files are not deleted after printing is completed, sending the same print
file every time is not necessary, effective when printing same files repeatedly.
Important
❒ A Stored Print file cannot be stored if:
• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored
Print files in the machine is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• sent or stored files in the machine contain over 9,000 pages in total.
• using the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
3
Note
❒ If a Stored Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the
display panel.
❒ Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents remain. However, the
[Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are
applied first.
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, Stored Print jobs are automatically collated by the
printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application's Print dialog
box, more prints than intended may be produced.
❒ The files sent to the machine is not saved if you use the machine with no optional hard disk installed.
Reference
For details about the error log on the display panel, see p.103 “Checking the
Error Log”.
For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored
Print Jobs], see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
92
Printing from the Print Job Screen
Printing a Stored Print File
The following procedure describes how to print a Stored Print file with the RPCS
and the PCL 6/5e printer driver. For information about how to print a Stored
Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see Postscript 3 Supplement included as a PDF file on the supplied CD-ROM.
Important
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
3
❒ Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this
function.
❒ If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this
function.
A Configure Stored Print in the printer driver’s properties.
For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
B Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
You can also set a password. The same password must be entered when printing or deleting.
C Start printing from the application’s [Print] dialog box.
The Stored Print job is sent to the machine and stored.
D On the machine’s control panel, press the {Printer} key to display the Printer
screen.
E Press [Print Jobs].
F Press [Stored Print Job List].
A list of Stored Print files stored in the machine appears.
93
Other Print Operations
G Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].
To select all print jobs, press [Select All Jobs].
To clear a selection, press the highlighted print job again. To clear all selections, press [Clear All].
To view details about a selected print file, press [Details].
The confirmation screen appears.
If you set a password in the printer driver, a password confirmation screen
appears. Enter the password.
If multiple print files are selected, the machine prints files that correspond to
the entered password and files that do not require a password. The number
of files to be printed is displayed on the confirmation screen.
If you forgot your password, ask your file administrator for help.
3
H Enter the number of sets using the number keys.
You can enter up to 999 sets.
Press {Clear/Stop} to correct any entry mistakes.
I Press [Yes].
The Stored Print file is printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.
Note
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.
❒ When multiple print files are selected, the minimum number of set quantity among all settings is applied.
❒ When the number of set quantity is changed, the changed quantity is applied to all selected print files.
❒ To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer
screen appears, and then press [Job Reset]. A Stored Print file is not deleted
even if [Job Reset] is pressed.
❒ The Stored Print file that sent to the machine is not deleted unless you delete a file or select [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] (see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide).
Reference
For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help. You
can also print or delete a Stored Print file from Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
94
Printing from the Print Job Screen
Deleting Stored Print Files
A Press the {Printer} key to display the Printer screen.
B Press [Print Jobs].
A list of print files stored in the machine appears.
C Press [Stored Print Job List].
A list of Stored Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
3
D Select the file you want to delete, and press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
If you set the password in the printer driver, enter the password to delete.
If multiple print files are selected, and some of these require a password, the
machine deletes files that correspond to the entered password and files that
do not require a password. The number of files to be deleted is displayed on
the confirmation screen.
If you forgot your password, ask your file administrator for help.
E Press [Yes] to delete the file.
The selected file is deleted.
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].
Note
❒ If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.
95
Other Print Operations
Printing from the List Per User ID Screen
This describes how to print the files saved in the machine from the User ID
screen.
Printing the Selected Print Job
A Press the {Printer} key.
The Printer screen appears.
3
B On the Printer screen, press [Print Jobs].
A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the machine appears.
C Press the user ID whose file you want to print.
You cannot select multiple user IDs at the same time.
Press [UPrevious] or [TNext] to scroll through the list.
Press [Clear] to cancel a selection.
D Press [List Per User ID].
The print job list of the selected user ID appears.
E Select the desired print jobs.
To cancel a selection, press the highlighted print job again. To clear all selections, press [Clear All].
96
Printing from the List Per User ID Screen
F Press [Print].
The confirmation screen appears.
G Press [Yes].
The selected files are printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.
Note
❒ The confirmation screen displays the total number of files of the selected
user ID to be printed.
3
Printing All Print Jobs
A Press the {Printer} key.
The Printer screen appears.
B On the Printer screen, press [Print Jobs].
A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the machine appears.
C Press the user ID whose file you want to print.
You cannot select multiple user IDs at the same time.
Press [UPrevious] or [TNext] to scroll through the list.
Press [Clear] to cancel a selection.
D Press [Print All Jobs].
If the selected user ID has multiple types of print jobs, the selection screen of
the print job type appears.
97
Other Print Operations
E Select the desired print job type, and then press [OK].
The confirmation screen appears.
The confirmation screen does not appear if the selected ID has only one type
of print jobs.
3
F Press [Yes].
The selected files are printed.
Note
❒ After printing is completed, Sample Print, Locked Print, and Hold Print
files are deleted.
❒ You cannot select a print job that is not stored under the selected user ID.
❒ If you select multiple Sample Print Files and do not specify the number of
sets on the confirmation screen, one set less than the smallest number specified on the computer is printed for every selected document. If the smallest number of sets specified on the computer is “1”, one set each is printed
for every document.
❒ If you select Stored Print, the number you set on the confirmation screen is
applied to all files of the selected print job type. If you do not set a quantity,
the minimum number is applied to all files.
❒ If you select Locked Print, enter the correct password. If there are multiple
passwords, the machine prints only files that correspond to the entered
password.
❒ If you select Stored Print files, and some of these require a password, the
machine prints files that correspond to the entered password and files that
do not require a password.
❒ The confirmation screen displays the total number of files of the selected
user ID to be printed.
98
Form Feed
Form Feed
This section gives instructions for operating the machine when there is no tray
for the selected paper size or type, or when paper loaded in the machine has run
out.
Important
❒ The tray cannot be changed if the following functions are set:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Staple
Duplex Print to a tray that does not support duplex printing
Cover Sheet
Front or Back Covers
Slip Sheet
Chaptering
3
Note
❒ If form feed is selected for a tray with the following settings, you can change
the tray by canceling the settings:
• Staple
• Duplex
❒ If [Auto Continue] is selected, form fed paper is printed after a set interval. See
“System”, General Settings Guide.
Printing from a Selected Tray
If the machine does not have a tray for the selected paper size or paper type, or
if the selected paper loaded in the machine has run out, a caution message appears. If this message appears, do the following procedure.
A Press the {Printer} key.
B Select the tray for form feed from those that appear on the display panel.
If you want to print after adding paper to the tray, select the tray after loading
the correct paper.
C Press [Continue].
The machine prints using the selected tray.
Note
❒ If a tray with a smaller paper size is selected, the print job may be cut short,
or other problems may occur.
99
Other Print Operations
Canceling a Print Job
Follow the procedure below for canceling the print job if the message prompting
form feed appears.
A Press the {Printer} key.
The Printer screen appears.
B Press [Job Reset].
Delete the stored print jobs, and then cancel form feed.
3
C Press [Reset Current Job] to cancel the current print job, or [Reset All Jobs] to
cancel all jobs.
A confirmation message appears.
D Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
Press [No] to return to the previous display.
Note
❒ To resume printing print jobs, press [Resume Printing].
❒ If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
❒ Under Windows, if the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent print jobs may be canceled if [Reset All Jobs] is pressed
while “Waiting...” is on the display panel. After the interval set in [I/O Timeout] in [Printer Features] has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print
job sent from a different client computer will not be canceled in this case.
❒ You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this
reason, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [Job Reset].
❒ A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.
Reference
For details, see p.101 “Canceling a Print Job”.
100
Canceling a Print Job
Canceling a Print Job
This section gives instruction to stop printing from the computer or the display
panel.
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel
A Press the {Printer} key.
The Printer screen appears.
3
B Press [Job Reset].
C Press [Reset Current Job] or [Reset All Jobs].
• [Reset Current Job]: cancels the print job currently being processed.
• [Reset All Jobs]: cancels all jobs in the print queue.
• [Resume Printing]: resumes to print the print jobs.
A confirmation message appears.
D Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
Press [No] to return to the previous display.
101
Other Print Operations
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer
You can cancel a print job from the computer if transferring print jobs is not
completed.
A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.
A window appears, showing all print jobs currently queued for printing.
Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel].
D Press the {Printer} key on the machine's control panel.
3
Note
❒ If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
❒ If the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent
print jobs may be canceled if [Reset All Jobs] is pressed while “Waiting...”
is on the display panel. After the interval set in [I/O Timeout] in [Printer Features] has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job sent from a different client computer will not be canceled in this case.
❒ Under Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click
[Cancel] on the [Document] menu.
❒ Under Windows 95/98/Me/2000 or Windows NT 4.0, you can also open
the print job queue window by double-clicking the machine icon in the
[Printers] machine window (the [Printers and Faxes] window under Windows XP and Windows Server 2003).
❒ You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this
reason, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [Job Reset].
❒ A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.
102
Checking the Error Log
Checking the Error Log
If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors
by checking the error log on the control panel.
Important
❒ The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However,
if the oldest error belongs to one of the following print jobs, it is not deleted.
The error is stored separately until the number of those errors reaches 30. You
can check any of these print jobs for error log information.
• Sample Print
• Locked Print
• Hold Print
• Stored Print
❒ If the main power switch is turned off, the error log is deleted.
3
A Press the {Printer} key.
The Printer screen appears.
B Press [Error Log].
An error log list appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain errors may not be displayed.
C Press the desired job list.
You can select the job list from [Complete List], [Locked Print Job List], [Sample
Print Job List], [Hold Print Job List], or [Stored Print Job List].
103
Other Print Operations
D Select the print file you want to check, and then press [Details].
A detailed error log appears.
Press [UPrevious] or [TNext] to scroll the error files.
Note
❒ Press [Exit] after checking the log.
❒ Press [Back to List] to return to the error log list.
❒ To print files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files
have been printed or deleted.
3
104
Spool Printing
Spool Printing
Spool Printing allows print jobs transferred from a computer to be temporarily
stored, and then prints them after they are transferred. This shortens printing
time as it maximizes printer efficiency.
Important
❒ This function is available only on machines that have the optional hard disk
installed.
❒ During Spool Printing, the hard disk is accessed and the Data In indicator
blinks. Turning off the computer or machine during Spool Printing can damage the hard disk. Also, if the computer or machine is turned off during Spool
Printing, spooled jobs will be deleted. Therefore, do not turn the power of the
computer or machine off during Spool Printing.
❒ If data is sent to the machine using other protocols besides diprint, lpr, ipp,
and smb, Spool Printing cannot be performed.
3
❖ Setting Spool Printing
Spool Printing can be set using telnet or Web Image Monitor.
• Using Web Image Monitor
See Network Guide or Help for more information.
• Using telnet
Type in “spoolsw spool on” to set Spool Printing.
See Network Guide for more information about telnet.
❖ Viewing a list of spool jobs on the display panel
If Spool Printing is set, a list of spooled jobs can be viewed on the display panel screen.
Press the {Printer} key, and then press [Spooling Job List]. A list of spooled jobs
appears.
• Deleting jobs
Select files to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
Note
❒ If Spool Printing is not set, you cannot select [Spooling Job List].
❖ Viewing/Deleting spool jobs in Web Image Monitor
Start Web Image Monitor and enter the machine's IP address in the address
bar. This displays the top page.
For more information, see Network Guide.
Note
Up to a maximum of 150 jobs at once can be spool printed.
If Spool Printing is not set, you cannot select [Spooling Job List].
Printing the first page with Spool Printing will be slow.
The computer requires less print processing time when large amounts of data
are spooled.
❒ Stored spool jobs can be viewed or deleted using Web Image Monitor.
❒
❒
❒
❒
105
Other Print Operations
User Defined Pages
Using this function, you can specify the page numbers for each input tray.
Important
❒ This function is available with the PCL 6/5e printer driver only.
❒ Depending on which options are installed on the machine, the PCL printer
language is optional. In that case, installing the optional PCL unit is required
to use the PCL 6/5e printer drivers.
❒ If [Document Server] is selected under [Job Type:], User Defined Page cannot be
used.
❒ If [User Defined Pages] is selected under [Paper Selection:] on [Paper] tab, [Layout:] cannot be selected.
3
AEV044S
Reference
For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
106
Printing with the Finisher
Printing with the Finisher
You can collate, staple in printed paper by installing the optional finisher. Make
sure you read the following precautions when using the optional finisher.
Important
❒ Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is disabled.
❒ Be sure to set the paper size and paper orientation in the printer driver when
using duplex printing, combined printing (layout) or staple functions.
❒ The machine can have only one of the following installed at any one time: 500
Sheet Finisher, 1,000 Sheet Finisher
3
Note
❒ Depending on the application, print settings may not be enabled and printed
output may not be as expected.
❒ When setting Staple or Collate in the printer driver, make sure that the Collate
check box is cleared in the application's [Print] dialog box. If Collate is enabled
in the application, printing will not be as intended.
❒ When printing restarts after removing jammed paper, the printing position
may be different, depending on the location of the jam.
• If the paper jam occurred in the optional finisher, printing will restart from
the top page of the data currently being printed, or from the page where
the paper jam occurred.
• If the paper jam occurred in the machine, printing will restart from the
page where the paper jam occurred.
❒ Even if the paper jam occurred in the machine, the error will not be cleared
unless the cover of the finisher is opened and closed.
Reference
For details about duplex printing or combined printing (layout), see the printer driver Help.
For details about optional finishers, see General Settings Guide.
To remove paper misfeeds, see Trouble Shooting.
107
Other Print Operations
Staple
With the optional Finisher installed, sets can be stapled individually when printing multiple sets.
Staple Position
The specified staple position varies depending on paper size, type, quantity and
feed orientation. The following table shows staple positions:
3
AGP015S
Note
❒ Stapling might not be in the specified position if combine (layout) and duplex
printing are both selected. After setting the staple position, use the printer
driver's preview icon to check the position before printing.
Reference
For paper sizes and maximum numbers of sheets available for stapling, see
“Specifications for Options”, About This Machine.
For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
The staple position will vary when using the PostScript 3 printer driver. For
more information, see the PostScript 3 printer driver Help.
108
Printing with the Finisher
Stapling Precautions
Important
❒ Stapling can be done only with the optional finisher installed.
❖ Staple printing will be canceled under the following conditions:
• If the number of pages exceeds maximum for stapling.
• If a paper size that cannot be stapled is selected.
• If a paper type that cannot be stapled is selected.
• If positions other than those fixed for stapling are specified.
• If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in the duplex mode and
the staple position.
• If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in the letterhead mode
and the staple position.
• If paper sizes are mixed when a different paper size is specified during a
print job.
• When feeding paper from the bypass tray.
• When staples have run out and [Auto Continue] is set (Printing will continue
without stapling after the message has been displayed).
• When only 1 page is printed.
• When staples have run out.
3
Note
❒ When the stapling is cancelled, “Staple has been cancelled.” appears.
❒ When printing on letterhead, stapling may not be at the specified position.
❒ When the finisher is being used for another function's job (for example, a copy
job), printing will start after that job ends.
❒ Be sure to set paper size and orientation in the printer driver when stapling.
❒ When duplex printing is selected, adjust staple positions to the binding orientation.
❒ Depending on the software you are using, print settings may not be saved
and the printed result may not be as expected.
❒ When setting Staple in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in the print settings of the application. If a collate option is
selected in the application, printing will not be as intended.
❒ When using the optional Finisher 500 unit, following paper sizes can be stapled using the Mixed Size mode. (This function is not available when using
the optional Finisher 1000 unit.)
• A3 L and A4 K
• B4 L and B5 K
• 11 × 17 L and 8 1/2 × 11 K
109
Other Print Operations
Collate
When printing multiple documents such as handouts for meetings, you can separate sets into order. This function is known as “Collate”. Collate stores data
transmitted from a computer to the printer memory or hard disk drive. The followings are the three types of Collate:
Important
❒ If the optional hard disk is installed, you can specify up to 1,000 sheets per set
for Collate. If the optional hard disk is not installed, you can specify up to 200
sheets per set for Collate.
❒ If [Auto Continue] occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.
❒ If forced printing occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.
❒ When setting Collate in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate
option is not selected in the application's print settings. If a collate option is
selected, printing will not be as intended.
3
Note
❒ Set Collate and Rotating collate when using the RPCS printer driver.
❒ Follow the procedure below when using the printer driver other than the
RPCS:
• Set Collate and Rotating Collate in the printer driver.
• If you cannot make Shift Collate even with the optional finisher installed,
options may not be set up correctly in the printer driver. Correct the printer
driver's option settings.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.
Collate
Printed output is assembled as sets in sequential order.
AEU016S
110
Printing with the Finisher
Rotating collate
Every other print set is rotated by 90 degrees.
3
AEU017S
Important
❒ The Rotating Collate function requires two paper trays containing same size
paper but in different orientations.
❒ If the output tray has shift function, Shift Collate will be applied even if Rotating Collate is selected.
❖ When Rotating Collate is cancelled
If the following functions are selected, Collate or Shift Collate will be applied
even if Rotating Collate is selected:
• When combined with the staple function.
• If jobs containing pages of various sizes are set.
• When output tray is specified.
• When combined with the covers function.
• When combined with the slip sheet function.
• When combined with the chaptering function.
• If custom size paper is set.
Note
❒ When Rotating Collate has been selected, printing speed will be slower than
with other collate functions.
Shift Collate
The optional finisher is required for this function.
The finisher's shift tray moves backward or forward when a job is output, and
then it shifts to output the next set. Therefore, copies can be separated into per
set at a glance.
AEU018S
111
Other Print Operations
Covers
Using this function, you can insert covers and back sheets fed from a different
tray to that of the main paper, and print on them.
Important
❒ To use this function, Collate must be set. Rotating Collate cannot be set.
❒ The cover sheets should be the same size and orientation as the body of the
paper.
3
❖ Cover sheet
Prints the first page of the document on the sheet for the cover page.
• Printing on one side
Prints on one side of the cover sheet only, even when duplex printing is selected.
AEV016S
• Printing on both sides
Prints on both sides of the cover sheet when duplex printing is selected.
• Front cover printed on both sides
AEV017S
• Front cover printed on one side
AEV032S
112
Covers
• Blank
• When printing one side
AEV018S
• When printing both sides
3
AEV033S
❖ Front and Back cover
Prints the first and last page of the document as the cover and back cover pages.
• Printing on one side
Prints on one side of the cover sheets only, even when duplex printing is
selected.
• Back cover page face inside
AMT202S
113
Other Print Operations
• Printing on both sides
Prints on both sides of the cover sheets when duplex printing is selected.
• Front cover printed on both sides, back cover page face inside, and
the number of pages is even
AEV036S
3
• Front cover printed on both sides, back cover page face inside, and
the number of pages is odd
AEV037S
• Front cover printed on one side, back cover page face inside, and the
number of pages is even
1
AEV038S
• Front cover printed on one side, back cover page face inside, and the
number of pages is odd
1
AGP009S
114
Covers
• Blank
• When printing one side
3
AEV040S
• When printing both sides
AEV041S
Note
❒ If [Auto Tray Select] is set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the paper
will be delivered from a tray containing paper in the K orientation. Therefore, if the cover paper is set to the L orientation, the orientation of cover and
body will be different.
Reference
For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
115
Other Print Operations
Chaptering
The specified page is printed on the same side as the first page, like a book. Also,
you can insert chapter slip sheets before specified pages, and select whether or
not to print on the slip sheets.
No slip sheets
The specified page is always printed on the same side as the first page.
3
AJO025S
Note
❒ This function is only valid with duplex printing.
❒ Up to 20 pages can be specified as the front pages of chapters using the printer
driver.
❒ This function can be used together with combine (layout) printing.
Reference
For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
116
Chaptering
Inserting chapter slip sheets
Insert chapter slip sheets before the specified page.
• Print
Prints on the chapter slip sheets. When duplex printing is selected, both sides
of the slip sheets are printed on.
3
AJO023S
• Blank
AJO024S
Note
❒ Up to 20 pages can be specified as the front pages of chapters using the printer
driver.
❒ The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the body of the
paper.
❒ If [Auto Tray Select] has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the
paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper in the K orientation.
Therefore, when the cover paper has been set to the L orientation, the orientation of the output cover paper and body paper will be different.
❒ The same paper feed tray cannot be set for the body of the document and the
slip sheet.
Reference
For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
117
Other Print Operations
Slip Sheet
❖ Inserting a slip sheet between each page
• Print
3
AEV019S
• Blank
AEU023S
❖ Inserting a slip sheet between OHP transparencies
• Print
AEV020S
• Blank
AEU024S
118
Slip Sheet
Note
❒ Collate cannot be set when using slip sheets.
❒ When the duplex printing or cover printing is set, you cannot insert slip
sheets.
❒ The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the main paper.
❒ If [Auto Tray Select] has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the
paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper in the K orientation.
Therefore, when the cover paper has been set to the L orientation, the orientation of the output cover paper and body paper will be different.
❒ The same paper feed tray cannot be set for the main paper and slip sheets.
3
119
Other Print Operations
3
120
4. Saving and Printing Using
the Document Server
Accessing the Document Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents on the machine's hard
disk. You can also edit and print documents as you want.
Important
❒ Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this
function.
Note
❒ When you use the Document Server, the following functions can be selected
using the machine's control panel:
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
• Copies
• Collate
• Duplex
• Staple
• Paper selection: Paper source tray, paper type, paper output tray.
• Functions related to paper selection: Cover Sheet, Slip Sheet.
The above items are dimmed, so you cannot set them from the printer properties dialog box when the Document Server is selected.
You must enter a user ID, using up to eight alphanumeric characters.
You should enter a Password and File Name to distinguish the job from others.
Up to 3,000 files can be stored in the Document Server. No new files can be
stored after 3,000 is reached. Even if less than 3,000 files are stored, new files
cannot be stored when
• a file to be stored contains more than 1,000 pages,
• the total number of pages contained in files stored exceeds 9,000,
• the hard disk is full.
The Document Server also stores files scanned using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) or exposure glass. You should delete unnecessary stored
files once in a while so as not to exceed the capacity of the hard disk. For details about deleting stored files, see General Settings Guide.
When using the hard disk for functions other than those of Document Server,
you may not be able to store new files in the Document Server, even if there
are less than 3,000 files stored.
Reference
For more information about Document Server functions, see General Settings
Guide.
For details about how to access Document Server from a client, see the printer
driver Help.
121
Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
4
122
5. The Functions and Settings
of the Machine
Mainframe
Network Guide, PostScript 3 Supplement, and UNIX Supplement cover all models, and therefore contain all the functions and settings. This chapter describes
the functions and setting items used for configuring the model you are using.
Reference
For details about functions and setting items, see Network Guide, PostScript
3 Supplement and UNIX Supplement.
Functions
The following functions are available with the machine:
• Copy
• Printer
• Scanner
• Fax
• Document Server
Note
❒ The Printer, Scanner functions are need to be installed in order to use the
printer or scanner function.
Interface
The following interfaces are available with the machine:
• Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
• USB (2.0)
• IEEE 1284 (Parallel) (Optional)
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) (Optional)
• Bluetooth (Optional)
Note
❒ To use the IEEE 1284, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), Bluetooth or Ethernet
(Optional) interface, the machine must be equipped with the corresponding
unit for that interface.
❒ You cannot have the IEEE 1284, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), and Bluetooth
interface on the machine at the same time.
❒ You cannot have the standard Ethernet and the optional Ethernet interface on
the machine at the same time.
123
The Functions and Settings of the Machine
List of the Setting Items
Web Image Monitor
The following tables show Web Image Monitor items that can be viewed or modified depending on the selected mode on the Web browser.
Select one of the following modes to log on Web Image Monitor:
• User mode: log on as a user
• Administrator mode: log on as an administrator
❖ Top Page
Displays the top page.
❖ Status
Menu
5
User mode
Administrator mode
Input Tray
Read
Read
Output Tray
Read
Read
Toner
Read
Read
Function
Read
Read
System
Read
Read
Counter
Read
Read
Printer Language
Read
Read
❖ Document Server
User mode
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
Read/Modify
❖ Fax Received File
User mode
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
None
❖ Job
• Printer
Menu
124
User mode
Administrator mode
Spool Printing
Read
Read
Job History
Read
Read
Error Log
Read
Read
Print Jobs
Read
Read
List of the Setting Items
• Fax History
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Transmission
Read
Read
Reception
Read
Read
LAN-Fax
Read
Read
• Document Server
User mode
Administrator mode
Read
Read
❖ Address Book
Menu
Address Book
User mode
None
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
❖ Inquiry
User mode
5
Administrator mode
Read
Read
❖ Configuration
• Device Settings
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
System
Read
Read/Modify
Paper
Read
Read/Modify
Date/Time
Read
Read/Modify
Timer
Read
Read/Modify
E-mail
Read
Read/Modify
Auto E-mail Notification
None
Read/Modify
On-demand E-mail Notification
None
Read/Modify
File Transfer
None
Read/Modify
User Authentication Management
None
Read/Modify
Administrator Authentication Management
None
Read/Modify
Program/Change Adminis- None
trator
Read/Modify
LDAP Server
Read/Modify
None
125
The Functions and Settings of the Machine
• Printer
User mode
Administrator mode
Read
Read/Modify
• Fax
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
General
None
Read/Modify
Administrator Tools
None
Read/Modify
E-mail Settings
None
Read/Modify
IP-Fax Settings
None
Read/Modify
Gateway Settings
None
Read/Modify
Parameter Settings
None
Read/Modify
• Interface
5
User mode
Administrator mode
Read
Read/Modify
• Network
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
TCP/IP
Read
Read/Modify
NetWare
Read
Read/Modify
AppleTalk
Read
Read/Modify
SMB
Read
Read/Modify
SNMP
None
Read/Modify
SNMPv3
None
Read/Modify
SSDP
None
Read/Modify
Rendezvous
Read
Read/Modify
System Log
Read
Read
• Security
Menu
126
User mode
Administrator mode
Network Security
None
Read/Modify
Access Control
None
Read/Modify
IPP Authentication
None
Read/Modify
SSL/TLS
None
Read/Modify
Certificates
None
Read/Modify
List of the Setting Items
• RC Gate
Menu
User mode
Administrator mode
Setup RC Gate
None
Read/Modify
Update RC Gate Firmware
None
Read/Modify
RC Gate Proxy
None
Read/Modify
• Webpage
User mode
Read/Modify
Administrator mode
Read/Modify
• ROM Update
User mode
None
Administrator mode
Read
Note
❒ Some items are not displayed depending on the security settings.
5
❒ Some items do not appear on the menu, or do not function when no optional
hard disk installed.
❒ Some items are not displayed on the menu depending on which printer language/option is installed.
telnet
The following telnet can be used with the machine:
access, appletalk, autonet, rendezvous, btconfig, dhcp, diprint, dns, domainname, help, hostname, ifconfig, info, ipp, netware, passwd, prnlog, route, set,
show, slp, smb, snmp, spoolsw, ssdp, status, syslog, web, wins
127
The Functions and Settings of the Machine
UNIX
The following UNIX commands can be used with the machine:
Device Option
Value
Function Summary
binding
longedge, shortedge, left, top,
right
Specifies the binding direction for
duplex printing.
copies
Number of copies (1 - 999)
Specifies the number of copies.
duplex
off, on
Specifies whether duplex printing
is on or off.
filetype
pcl, postscript (rps)
Specifies the printer language for
printing.
filter
text
Specifies the text printing.
mediatype
plain, recycled, special, thick, thin, Specifies the paper type.
color, transparency, letterhead,
preprinted, prepunched, labels,
bond, cardstock, thickduplexbacks, plainorrecycled
orientation
portrait, landscape
Specifies the feed direction of the
paper.
outbin
finishershift, finisherproof, inner,
upper
Specifies the output tray.
paper
a3, a4, a5, a6, jisb4, jisb5, ledger, le- Specifies the paper size.
gal, letter, halfletter, executive, fgl,
foolscap, folio, com10, monarch,
c6, c5, dl, k8, k16, custom
qty
Number of collated sets (1 - 999)
Specifies the number to collate.
resolution
value of resolution (200, 300, 600)
Specifies the resolution for printing.
staple
off, lefttop, righttop, lefttopslant- Specifies the staple position.
port, lefttopslantland, lefttopvertport, lefttopvertland, left2port,
left2land, right2port, right2land,
righttopvertport, righttopvertland, righttopslantport, righttopslantland, righttophorizport,
righttophorizland, top2port,
top2land, lefttophorizport, lefttophorizland
tray
tray1, tray2, tray3, tray4, lct, bypass, all
5
Reference
For details, see UNIX Supplement.
128
Specifies the input tray.
List of the Setting Items
Settings that can be used with PostScript 3
The following PostScript 3 settings can be used with the machine:
Note
❒ Depending on a type of printer drivers, different items may be displayed.
Settings
Selectable Items
Collate:
Off, On
Dithering:
Auto, User Setting, Text, Photographic
Duplex:
Off, Open to Left, Open to Top
Fit to Print Size:
Prompt User, Nearest Size and Scale, Nearest Size and Crop
Image Smoothing:
Off, On, Auto, Less than 90 ppi, Less than 150 ppi, Less than
200 ppi, Less than 300 ppi
Input Tray:
AutoSelect Tray, Bypass Tray, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4
Output Tray: *1
Internal Tray, Printer Default
Orientation:
Portrait, Landscape, Rotated, Orientation Override
Resolution
600 dpi
Size:
See General Settings Guide.
Staple:
Off, Top Left, Top Right, 2 at Left, 2 at Right, 2 at Top
Edge Smoothing
Off, On
Toner Saving
Off, On
Type:
See General Setting Guide.
Paper Selection:
Same Paper for All Pages, Different Paper for First Page, Use
Slip Sheet, Chaptering
*1
5
Items that are displayed might vary depending on which options are installed.
129
The Functions and Settings of the Machine
5
130
6. Appendix
Specifications
This section contains the machine's electrical and hardware specifications, including information about its options.
Component
Specifications
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi
300 × 300 dpi
200 × 200 dpi
Printing speed
Type 1:
• 25 ppm
Type 2:
• 30 ppm
(A4K, 81/2 × 11 K plain paper)
Note
❒ Printing speeds depend on the machine.
Check which type of machine you have.
See About This Machine.
Interface
Standard:
• Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASET)
• USB 2.0 interface
Option:
• IEEE 1284 parallel interface
Use a standard 36-pin printer cable not
longer than 3 meters (10 feet).
• IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN interface
• Bluetooth interface
Network protocol
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Printer language
Standard: RPCS
Option: PostScript 3, PDF, PCL 6/5e *2
Fonts
PCL 6/5e :
Monotype Imaging 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, 13 International fonts, and 1 Bitmap font.
PostScript 3 :
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)
131
Appendix
Component
Specifications
Memory
Supports up to 384 MB
Default size: 128 MB
Optional memory size: 256 MB
Hard disk *1
Storage capacity : 40 GB
Network cable
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T shielded twisted-pair
(STP, Category/Type5) cable.
*1
*2
The hard disk is optional depending on a type.
Depending on which type of options installed in the machine, the PCL printer language is optional.
Note
❒ When using the USB Interface (Standard) with Mac OS 10.3.3, USB2.0 is supported.
❒ When using the USB Interface (Standard) with Windows Me, install USB
Printing Support. Windows Me only supports USB 1.1 speed.
6
132
Specifications
Options
Important
❒ Only one optional interface board can be installed in the machine at a time.
Therefore, the IEEE 802.11b interface unit, the IEEE 1284 interface board, and
Bluetooth interface unit cannot be installed concurrently.
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
❖ Transmission spec.:
IEEE 1284
❖ Required cable:
Standard IEEE 1284 compliant Micro Centronics 36 pin cable
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H
❖ Transmission spec.:
Based on IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
6
❖ Protocol:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Note
❒ SmartDeviceMonitor and Web Image Monitor are supported.
❖ Data transfer speed:
Auto select from below speed
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 11 Mbps
❖ Frequency range:
• Inch version:
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
• Metric version:
2412 - 2472 MHz (1 - 13 channels)
❖ Transmittable distance:
1 Mbps 400 m
2 Mbps 270 m
5.5 Mbps 200 m
11 Mbps 140 m
Note
❒ These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, the transmittable
distance indoors is 10 - 100 m, depending on environment.
❖ Transmission mode:
Ad hoc, and infrastructure mode
133
Appendix
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245
❖ Supported Profiles:
• SPP (Serial Port Profile)
• HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile)
• BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
❖ Frequency Range:
2.45 GHz ISM band
❖ Data Transmission Speed:
723 kbps
Note
❒ The transmission speed is adjusted according to factors such as the distance and obstacles between the devices, radio signal condition and Bluetooth adaptor.
❖ Maximum Range:
10 m
6
134
INDEX
B
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245, 134
Bypass tray, 9
Custom size paper using the control
panel, 13
setting the paper size using the control
panel, 11
C
Canceling a job
Windows, 101
Chaptering, 116
Collate, 110
Control panel
hold print, 89
locked print, 85
printer features, 5
sample print, 81
stored print, 92
Covers, 112
Custom size paper
printing, bypass tray, 9
D
Display panel, 3
Document Server, 121
E
Error log, 103
F
Finisher, 107
Font Manager 2000, 50
Fonts, 131
H
Hard disk, 131
Hold print
deleting, 91
printing, 90
How to Read This Manual, 2
I
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A, 133
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H, 133
Initial Display, 3
Inserting chapter slip sheets, 117
Installing the printer driver
Quick Install, 19
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB, 37
Interface, 131
L
List Per User ID
printing all print jobs, 96, 97
printing the desired print job, 96
Locked print
deleting, 88
printing, 86
M
Manuals for This Machine, i
Memory, 131
N
Network cable, 131
Network protocol, 131
No slip sheets, 116
O
OHP Transparencies
printing, bypass tray, 14
Operating system, 131
Options, 133
P
PageMaker, 51
PDF Direct Print, 69
Printer Features Menu, 5
Printer language, 131
Printing a PDF file directly
PDF direct print, 69
Printing Method
PDF direct print, 69
Printing speed, 131
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
Windows, 44
Printing with Parallel Connection
Windows 2000, 42
135
R
Resolution, 131
Rotating collate, 111
S
Sample print
deleting, 84
printing, 82
Shift collate, 111
Slip Sheet, 118
Specifications, 131
Spool printing, 105
Staple, 108
Stored print
deleting, 95
printing, 93
T
Thick Paper
printing, bypass tray, 14
W
Windows
canceling a job, 101
Windows 2000
printer properties, PCL, 55
printer properties, RPCS, 63
Windows 95/98/Me
printer properties, PCL, 53
printer properties, RPCS, 61
Windows NT 4.0
document defaults, PCL, 59
document defaults, RPCS, 67
printer properties, PCL, 59
printer properties, RPCS, 67
Windows Server 2003
printer properties, PCL, 57
printer properties, RPCS, 65
Windows XP
printer properties, PCL, 57
printer properties, RPCS, 65
U
Unauthorized copy control, 73
data security for copying, 74
mask type, 76
Using commands, 72
Using the Print Job Function, 78
136
EN
USA
D313-6503
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe®, PostScript®, Acrobat®, PageMaker® and Adobe Type Manager are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS and True Type are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
IPS-PRINTTM Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 2000, Oak Technology, Inc., All Rights Reserved.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product name of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
The product name of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
The product name of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions Printer Reference
EN USA D313-6503
Operating Instructions
Scanner Reference
1
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
2
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
3
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
4
Delivering Scan Files
5
Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
6
Various Scan Settings
7
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, staples, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered
with, or prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy/ Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ "PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
❒ The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional *
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional * and ScanRouter
EX Enterprise *
the ScanRouter delivery software
*Optional
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................2
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
About the Scanner Functions...............................................................................3
Display Panel..........................................................................................................4
Confirmation Displays ................................................................................................4
Scanner Features...................................................................................................7
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail.................................................................11
Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail..................................................................11
Preparation for Sending by E-mail ...........................................................................12
Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book................................................. 12
E-mail Screen...........................................................................................................13
Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail...........................................14
Switching to the E-mail Screen ..........................................................................17
Specifying E-mail Destinations ..........................................................................18
Selecting the Destination from the Machine’s Address Book................................... 18
Entering an E-mail Address Manually ......................................................................21
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server.............................................22
Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book .............................25
Specifying the E-mail Sender .............................................................................26
Selecting a Sender from the List ..............................................................................26
Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name ........................................27
Selecting the Sender by Searching the Machine’s Address Book ...........................28
Specifying the E-mail Subject.............................................................................29
Specifying the E-mail Message ..........................................................................30
Selecting a Message from the List ...........................................................................30
Manual Entry of a Message .....................................................................................31
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail ................................................. 32
Sending the URL by E-mail ................................................................................. 33
2. Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder ............................................................ 35
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder.....................................................35
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder ..............................................................37
Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book.............................................. 38
Scan to Folder Screen .............................................................................................39
Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder..................................................40
Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen ............................................................ 42
iii
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations ............................................................ 43
Selecting the Destination from the Machine’s Address Book................................... 43
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder ..............................................................46
Sending Files to an FTP Server ...............................................................................50
Sending Files to NetWare server ............................................................................. 52
Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book ...................56
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder ...................................57
3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Before Storing Files.............................................................................................59
Outline of File Storage under the Scanner Function ................................................59
Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files .............................................................61
Specifying File Information for a Stored File ....................................................63
Specifying a User Name ..........................................................................................63
Specifying a File Name ............................................................................................64
Specifying a Password.............................................................................................65
Displaying the List of Stored Files .....................................................................66
List of Stored Files ...................................................................................................66
Searching the List of Stored Files ............................................................................68
Checking Stored Files from a Client Computer ................................................70
Using Desk Top Binder Lite to Display Stored Files ................................................70
Using Web Image Monitor to Display Stored Files...................................................70
Sending a Stored File ..........................................................................................71
Sending Stored Files................................................................................................71
Managing Stored Files.........................................................................................73
Deleting a Stored File...............................................................................................73
Changing Information for a Stored File ....................................................................74
4. Delivering Scan Files
Before Delivering Files ........................................................................................79
Outline of Scan File Delivery....................................................................................79
Preparing to Deliver a File........................................................................................ 80
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM .....................................81
Network Delivery Scanner Screen ...........................................................................82
Basic Operation for Delivering Files ..................................................................83
Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen.........................................86
Specifying Delivery Destinations .......................................................................87
Selecting Destinations Registered in the Destination List of the Delivery Server .... 87
Specifying the Sender .........................................................................................90
Selecting a Sender from the Sender List .................................................................90
Selecting the Sender by Entering the Registration Number.....................................91
Selecting a Sender by Searching the Delivery Server’s Destination List .................92
Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server... 93
Simultaneous Storage and Delivery...................................................................94
iv
5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner .......................................................95
Outline of the Network TWAIN Scanner...................................................................96
Preparing to Use the Network TWAIN Scanner .......................................................97
Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM.........................................98
Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation ........................................................99
6. Various Scan Settings
Specifying Scan Settings ..................................................................................101
Items for Specifying Scan Settings..................................................................102
Scan Type ..............................................................................................................102
Resolution ..............................................................................................................102
Image Density ........................................................................................................102
Scan Size ...............................................................................................................103
Edit .........................................................................................................................111
Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals .......................................................... 112
One-sided original ..................................................................................................112
Two-sided original ..................................................................................................112
Setting of Original Feed Type ...........................................................................114
Original Orientation ................................................................................................114
Batch, SADF ..........................................................................................................116
Mixed Sizes............................................................................................................118
Divide ..................................................................................................................... 119
Stamp..................................................................................................................... 120
Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File .........................................122
Setting File Type and File Name.......................................................................124
Setting File Type .................................................................................................... 124
Setting File Name...................................................................................................125
Programs ............................................................................................................127
Registering Frequently Used Setting .....................................................................127
Recalling a Program...............................................................................................128
Changing a Registered Program............................................................................129
Deleting a Program ................................................................................................130
Changing the Registered Program Name ..............................................................130
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner .....................................................132
Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner ..............................................132
When Scanning Originals of Mixed Sizes Using TWAIN Scanner .........................133
7. Appendix
Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size ...........................................135
When Using E-mail, Folder Sending, Storing or Network Delivery Function .........136
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner.........................................................................137
Scan Settings and File Types ...........................................................................139
Software Supplied on CD-ROM ........................................................................140
Auto-Run Program .................................................................................................140
TWAIN Driver .........................................................................................................140
DeskTopBinder Lite................................................................................................141
v
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function ... 143
Transmission Function ...........................................................................................143
Storage Function.................................................................................................... 145
Network Delivery Function .....................................................................................146
Specifications.....................................................................................................147
INDEX....................................................................................................... 148
vi
Notice
❖ Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer/Scanner Controller
Model Number: Printer/Scanner Unit Type 3010, Scanner Enhance Option
Type 3010
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
A This device may not cause harmful interference, and
B this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
❖ Note to users in the United States of America
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
❖ Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
❖ Note to users in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
❖ Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
❖ Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
1
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
"Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
2
About the Scanner Functions
This section describes functions you can use in the scanner mode.
For details about each function, see respective chapters.
❖ Sending scanned files
There are several methods you can use to send captured data as files to computers.
• Sending scan files by e-mail
For details, see chapter 1 "Sending Scan Files by E-mail".
• Sending scan files to a shared folder
For details, see chapter 2 "Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder".
• Sending scan files to an FTP server
For details, see chapter 2 "Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder".
• Sending scan files to a NetWare server
For details, see chapter 2 "Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder".
• Delivering scan files using the delivery server
For details, see chapter 4 "Delivering Scan Files".
❖ Scanning originals using the TWAIN driver
Use the TWAIN driver to specify the machine where originals will be scanned
from a client computer. For details, see chapter 5 "Scanning Originals with the
Network TWAIN Scanner".
❖ Storing files
You can store scan files on the machine's hard disk. Stored files can be sent
later. For details, see chapter 3 "Storing Files Using the Scanner Function".
Reference
p.11 “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”
p.35 “Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder”
p.79 “Delivering Scan Files”
p.95 “Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner”
p.59 “Storing Files Using the Scanner Function”
3
Display Panel
This section explains the two confirmation displays - Check Modes and Scanned
Files Status.
You can find explanations about the E-mail screen, Scan to Folder screen, List of
Stored Files screen, or Network Delivery Scanner screen in this manual. For details, see "E-mail Screen", "Scan to Folder Screen", "List of Stored Files", and "Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
Reference
p.13 “E-mail Screen”
p.39 “Scan to Folder Screen”
p.66 “List of Stored Files”
p.82 “Network Delivery Scanner Screen”
Confirmation Displays
This section explains the two confirmation displays - Check Modes and Scanned
Files Status.
Check Modes
This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the Check
Modes screen.
Use the Check Modes screen to check scanning and transmission settings.
Pressing the {Check Modes} key switches the screen from the initial scanner
screen to the Check Modes screen.
ARQ005S
4
❖ Check Modes
ARQ003S
1. [Prev.]
3. Sender and Destinations list
Press to return the initial scanner screen.
Displays the sender and transmission or
delivery destinations list.
Use [UPrev.] or [TNext] to scroll through
the list.
2. Transmission function icon
Displays the icon of the transmission
function in use.
4. Number of destinations
Displays the number of specified destinations.
Scanned Files Status
This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the Scanned
Files Status screen.
Use the Scanned Files Status screen to check e-mail transmission, Scan to Folder,
and delivery results.
Press [Scanned Files Status] to display the Scanned Files Status screen.
Up to 5 transmission or delivery results are displayed at the same time. Press
[UPrev.] or [TNext] to switch between results.
5
❖ Scanned Files Status
ARQ004S
1. Date/Time
4. Sender
Displays the time and date transmission
was specified by this machine or the time
and date when Done, Error, or Cancelled
was confirmed.
Displays the sender name.
5. File Name
2. Transmission function icon
Displays the stored file name of files that
are simultaneously sent and stored, or of
stored files that are sent.
Displays the icon of the transmission
function used.
6. Status
3. Destination
Displays the transmission destination.
If you have selected multiple destinations, the first selected destination is displayed.
Other destinations appear as “+ X”. (X indicates the number of destinations.)
Displays one of the following transmission statuses: Done, Sending..., Waiting..., Error, or Cancelled.
7. [Cancel]
To cancel transmission, select a file
whose status is [Waiting...], and then press
[Cancel].
8. [Print]
Press to print transmission results.
Note
❒ Depending on security settings, some transmission results might not be displayed.
6
Scanner Features
This section explains Scanner Features settings.
To display the Scanner Features screen, press the {User Tools / Counter} key. For
detailed setting method, see General Settings Guide.
❖ Scan Settings
Items
Description
Default Scan Settings
Make various basic settings, such as scan type, resolution, image density, and scan size.
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure
Glass
Set which operation the machine performs while waiting for additional originals after scanning from the exposure glass.
Wait Time for Next Original(s):
SADF
Set the operation of this machine on the queue for additional originals after scanning the originals with Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). This function is not
available unless ADF is installed.
Original Setting
Set whether originals are one-sided or two-sided as
the default.
Switch to Batch
Select [SADF] or [Batch] as the scanning mode that appears under [Original Feed Type] on the initial display of
scanner mode.
Mixed Original Sizes Priority
This setting determines whether the original size is
automatically detected when originals of different sizes are inserted in the ADF.
Original Orientation Priority
Select the default original orientation. When originals
are always positioned the same way, select that orientation as the default.
Change Initial Mode
Set the initial scanner screen settings that appear
when the operation switch is turned on or the {Clear
Mode} key is pressed.
7
❖ Destination List Settings
Items
Description
Destination List Display Priority 1 Select the default destination list from the machine's
destination list or from the Destination List managed
by the delivery server.
This setting is available only when the Network Delivery Scanner function is enabled by the ScanRouter delivery software.
Destination List Display Priority 2 Select whether to prioritize the e-mail destination list
or the folder destination list.
Select Title
Select the titles for e-mail and Scan to Folder destinations and group destinations. Selected titles appear in
the e-mail and Scan to Folder destination list used
when searching for destinations.
Update Delivery Server Destination List
Allows you to update the delivery server's destination
list by pressing [Update Delivery Server Destination List].
To use this function, under [System Settings], set [Delivery Option] to [On].
This setting is available only when the Network Delivery Scanner function is enabled by the ScanRouter delivery software.
8
❖ Send Settings
Items
Description
TWAIN Standby Time
Select the machine's response if a client computer tries
to use the TWAIN scanner while scanning is in
progress.
File Type Priority
Select whether to send scanned originals as singlepage files or as a multiple-page file.
For single-page files, select either TIFF/JPEG or PDF.
For multi-page files, select either TIFF or PDF.
Compression (Black & White)
Specify a compression method for files scanned in
black and white.
Compression (Gray Scale)
Specify a compression method for files scanned in
gray scale.
Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Specify the machine's response of the maximum number of scanner journals is exceeded.
Print Scanner Journal
Allows you to print the scanner journal. The scanner
journal is then deleted.
Delete Scanner Journal
Allows you to delete the scanner journal without
printing it.
Max. E-mail Size
Select whether or not to limit the size of e-mail that has
attachments.
Divide & Send E-mail
Select whether or not to divide files that exceed the
size specified in [Max. E-mail Size] and send them as
multiple e-mails.
E-mail Information Language
Allows you to select the language of the messages that
appear when you send scanned files by e-mail.
Store File Priority
Select [Send & Store], [Store Only], or [Off] as the default
that is displayed when the operation switch is turned
on or the {Clear Mode} key is pressed.
Stored File E-mail Method
Sets the default for whether to attach a file or send
URL Link when sending stored files by e-mail.
❖ Administrator Tools
Items
Description
Menu Protect
Set the default access level for functions whose settings can be changed by users other than the administrator.
9
10
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail
You can attach scan files to e-mails and send them via connections such as LAN
and the Internet.
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail
This section explains the necessary preparations and the procedure for sending
scan files by e-mail.
Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail
This section outlines the function for sending scan files by e-mail.
ZZZ508S
1. This machine
3. Client computer
A scan file can be attached to an e-mail and
sent to a mail server.
Use e-mail client software to receive email messages and scan file attachments
that are generated by this machine.
2. SMTP server
You need to have an access to an e-mail
server that supports SMTP (Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol), to send scan files by email. However, it is not essential to have
an e-mail server inside the LAN where
this machine belongs. It transfers a received e-mail to a specified destination
through a LAN or the Internet.
4. LDAP Server
Use this server for administering e-mail
accounts, searching the network, and authenticating the computers that access
the machine. Using the LDAP server, you
can search for destinations from the machine.
11
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Preparation for Sending by E-mail
This section explains the preparation and settings for sending scan files by email.
1
A Connect the machine to the network.
Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b).
B Make the necessary network setting in [System Settings].
If you have connected the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable,
make the following settings. For details, see General Settings Guide.
• Specify the machine’s IP address and subnet mask
• Make settings for the DNS server
• Specify the gateway address
• In [Effective Protocol], enable [TCP/IP]
• Specify the SMTP server
C If necessary, change settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features].
Note
❒ To connect the machine to the network using a wireless LAN (IEEE
802.11b), an extended wireless LAN board is required respectively. For details, see Network Guide.
❒ Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For more information about network settings, see General Settings
Guide.
❒ For more information about [Scanner Features], see General Settings Guide.
Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book
You can register frequently used e-mail addresses in the address book.
Register e-mail addresses in [Address Book Management] under [Administrator
Tools] from [System Settings]. Addresses can also be registered as groups.
Note
❒ For details about registering e-mail addresses in the address book, see General Settings Guide.
12
❒ You can also register e-mail addresses in the address book using Web Image
Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about how to install
these applications, see Network Guide. For details about registering addresses in the address book, see Help of respective applications.
❒ Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine
when it is updating the address book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail
E-mail Screen
This section explains the screen layout when sending scan files by e-mail.
1
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by pressing it.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
[
]. Keys that cannot be selected appear like [
].
1. Destination field
The specified destination appears. If
more than one destination has been specified, press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to scroll
through the destinations.
2. [ ] E-mail / Scan to Folder
6. [Attach Sender's Name] [Return Receipt] [Subject / Message] [File Name /
Type]
Press to specify the sender, return receipt
setting, subject, message, and names and
formats of the files you want to send.
Press to switch between the e-mail function and the Scan to Folder function. You
can send a file to e-mail destinations and
Scan to Folder destinations at the same
time
7. [ ] Switch Destination
3. E-mail icon ( )
8. Destination List
Indicates that the E-mail screen is displayed.
The list of destinations registered in this
machine appears. If all of the destinations
cannot be displayed, press [U]or [T] to
switch the screen.
Group destinations are denoted by this
symbol ( ).
4. [Registration No.]
Press this key to specify the destination
using a 5-digit registration number.
5. [Manual Input]
List/Search/Switch Title
Press to switch a destination from the delivery server list to a destination list of
this machine, to search for a destination.
To specify destinations not registered in
the address book, press this key, and then
enter the e-mail addresses using the soft
keyboard that appears.
13
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
This section describes the basic operation for sending scan files by e-mail.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain.
1
If a previous setting remains, press the {Clear Modes} key.
B If the network delivery scanner screen or Scan to Folder screen appears,
switch to the E-mail screen.
For details, see "Switching to the E-mail Screen".
C Place originals.
D If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as scan
type, resolution, image density, or scan size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".
E If necessary, press [1 Sided Orig.] or [2 Sided Orig.] to scan one or both sides of
the originals.
For details, see "Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals".
F If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as original orientation.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
G If necessary, press [File Name / Type] to specify settings such as file name and
file format.
For details, see "Setting File Type and File Name".
H Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see "Specifying E-mail Destinations".
I To specify the e-mail sender, press [Attach Sender's Name].
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Sender".
14
Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail
J If necessary, press [Return Receipt] to make settings for the Return Receipt
function.
If you select [Return Receipt], the selected e-mail sender will receive e-mail notification when his/her e-mail is opened by the recipient.
1
K If necessary, specify the e-mail subject.
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Subject".
L If necessary, enter the e-mail message.
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Message"
M Press the {Start} key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
Note
❒ If you have selected two or more destinations, the destinations can be
made to appear one by one by pressing [UPrev.] or [TNext] next to the destination field.
❒ To cancel a selected destination, press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to display the
destination in the destination field, and then press the {Clear / Stop} key.
You can cancel a destination selected from the destination list by pressing
the selected destination again.
❒ In [System Settings], you can specify the Administrator's E-mail Address as
the default sender name. This lets you send e-mail without entering anything for [Attach Sender's Name]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
❒ Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as
[Attach Sender's Name].
❒ To use the Return Receipt function, you must specify the sender. Note,
however, that the [Return Receipt] notification e-mail may not be transmitted if the e-mail software of the recipient does not support Message Disposition Notification (MDN).
❒ When the Administrator's E-mail Address is automatically specified as a
sender, notification e-mail will not be sent even if [Return Receipt] is selected. For details about [Administrator's E-mail Address] and [Auto Specify Sender
Name], see General Settings Guide.
❒ If you press the {Check Modes} key before pressing the {Start} key, the initial scanner screen switches to the Check Modes screen. You can use the
Check Modes screen to check the settings such as destinations. For details,
see "Check Modes".
❒ To cancel scanning, press the {Clear / Stop} key or [Stop] on the display panel.
❒ You can also store a scan file and simultaneously send it by e-mail. For details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail".
15
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Reference
p.17 “Switching to the E-mail Screen”
p.101 “Various Scan Settings”
p.112 “Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals”
p.114 “Setting of Original Feed Type”
p.124 “Setting File Type and File Name”
p.18 “Specifying E-mail Destinations”
p.30 “Specifying the E-mail Message”
p.29 “Specifying the E-mail Subject”
p.26 “Specifying the E-mail Sender”
p.4 “Check Modes”
p.32 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail”
1
16
Switching to the E-mail Screen
Switching to the E-mail Screen
This section explains how to switch the screen to the E-mail screen.
If the Scan to Folder screen is being displayed, press [ ] to switch to the E-mail
screen.
If the network delivery scanner screen is being displayed, switch to the E-mail
screen as follows:
1
A Press [ ].
B Press [Switch Destination List].
C Press [E-mail].
D Press [Exit].
The e-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears.
E If the Scan to Folder screen appears, press [
].
The E-mail screen appears.
Note
❒ You cannot switch from the network delivery scanner screen while delivery destinations are being specified. To clear the specified destination, display the destination in the destination field of the network delivery
scanner screen, and then press the {Clear / Stop} key.
17
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Specifying E-mail Destinations
This section explains how to specify e-mail destinations.
You can specify e-mail destinations by any of the following methods:
• Select the destination from the machine’s address book
• Enter the e-mail address directly
• Search the LDAP server for the destination and select it
Before you select destinations, make sure you have selected [To]. If necessary,
press [Cc] or [Bcc], and then select destinations.
1
Selecting the Destination from the Machine’s Address Book
This section explains how to select the destination from the machine’s address
book.
Important
❒ To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in
advance. For details, see General Settings Guide.
You can use the following methods to select destinations registered in the machine's address book:
• Select a destination from the list
• Select a destination by entering the registration number
• Select a destination by searching the machine's address book
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, certain destinations may not be displayed.
18
Specifying E-mail Destinations
Selecting a destination from the list
Select the destination from the destination list.
A In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.
1
The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears
in the destination field at the top of the screen.
If the target destination does not appear, take one of the following steps:
• Display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the title
• Display the destination by pressing [U] or [T]
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in
the destination list.
Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers
Select the destination from the machine’s address book using its registration
number.
A Press [Registration No.].
19
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
B Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned
to the required destination folder.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press the {q} key after the last
number.
Example: To enter 00003 Press the {3}, and then press the {q} key.
1
Searching the machine’s address book for the destination and selecting it
This section explains how to search the machine’s address book for the destination and select it.
A Press [
].
B To search by destination name, press [Search by Dest. Name].
To search by e-mail address, press [E-mail Address].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Search by Dest. Name] and [E-mail Address].
C Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by e-mail address, enter the beginning of the address.
20
Specifying E-mail Destinations
D Press [OK].
E Select a destination.
1
F Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
G Press [Exit].
Entering an E-mail Address Manually
This section explains how to enter an e-mail address manually.
A Press [Manual Input].
The soft keyboard appears.
For information about how to enter characters, see About This Machine.
B Enter the e-mail address.
C Press [OK].
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, [Manual Input] may not be displayed.
❒ For details about maximum number of characters that can be entered, see
"Sending E-mail".
❒ To change an entered e-mail address, press [Change].
❒ The e-mail address that is entered directly can be registered in the machine’s address book. For details, see "Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book".
21
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Reference
p.143 “Sending E-mail”
p.25 “Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book”
1
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server
You can search the LDAP server for an address and then specify that address as
an e-mail destination.
Important
❒ This function requires an LDAP server to be running on the network.
❒ Under [System Settings], the server must be registered and [Use LDAP Server]
must be set to [On]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
A Press [
].
B Press [Search LDAP].
C Press [Select Server].
D Select the LDAP server.
If authentication is required to access the selected server, the authentication
screen appears. To authenticate, enter the user name and password.
E Press [OK].
22
Specifying E-mail Destinations
F Press [Advanced Search].
1
G Enter a character string related to the destination for a search condition
such as [Name], [E-mail Address], [Fax Number], [Company Name], or [Department
Name].
If you select a search condition setting, a soft keyboard appears. Enter a text
string according to the search criteria.
If you search by [Name], the LDAP server's settings determine whether the
search is by surname or first name. Consult your administrator.
The illustrated screen is an example. The items that actually appear on the
screen may differ.
H Press [Search Criteria] corresponding to each item, and then select criteria
from the list displayed.
I Press [OK].
J Select the destination.
K Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
L Press [Exit].
23
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Note
❒ The [Name], [E-mail Address], [Fax Destination], [Company Name], and [Department Name] search conditions that appear in [Advanced Search] are registered in the LDAP server.
1
❒ If you specified [Search Options] on [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server] under [System Settings], you can add a search condition for LDAP search on
the [Advanced Search] screen. For details, see General Settings Guide.
❒ By pressing [Detail], you can view details about the selected destinations.
❒ Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
❒ If an e-mail address returned by the LDAP server is too long, it will be impossible to specify it as the destination. For details about the number of
characters that can be specified, see "Sending E-mail".
❒ You can register multiple e-mail addresses in individual LDAP server accounts. However, only one e-mail address will be displayed as the search
result. Usually, the address that was registered first on the LDAP server is
the address that is displayed.
❒ By pressing [Search Criteria], the following criteria appear:
• [Search Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character
or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [Search End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
• [Include One of Words]: The names which contain an entered character or
characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or
characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".
• [Fuzzy Search]: a vague search (The function of this vague search depends
on the system supported by the LDAP server.)
Reference
p.143 “Sending E-mail”
24
Specifying E-mail Destinations
Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book
This section explains how to register a directly-entered destination in the machine’s address book. You can also register a destination selected from the LDAP
server.
1
A In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.
B Press [ProgDest].
C Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see General Settings Guide.
D Press [OK].
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, [ProgDest] may not appear. In such case,
you cannot complete the registration.
❒ To register in the machine’s address book a destination searched for and
selected from the LDAP server, display the destination, and then press
[ProgDest].
25
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Specifying the E-mail Sender
This section explains how to specify the e-mail sender.
To send e-mail, you must specify the name of the sender.
1
You can specify the e-mail sender by any of the following methods:
• Select the sender from the sender list
• Select the sender by entering the registration number
• Select the sender by searching the machine’s address book
Note
❒ Senders must be registered in advance under [System Settings]. For details, see
General Settings Guide.
❒ In [System Settings], you can specify the Administrator's E-mail Address as the
default sender name. This lets you send e-mail without specifying the sender.
For details, see General Settings Guide.
❒ Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as the
sender.
❒ When a protection code has been set, a screen for entering the protection code
appears after selecting the sender. Enter the protection code, and then press
[OK]. If the protection code you entered is correct, the sender name is displayed.
Selecting a Sender from the List
This section explains how to select the sender from the machine’s sender list.
A Press [Attach Sender's Name].
26
Specifying the E-mail Sender
B Select the sender.
1
C Press [OK].
Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name
Select the sender using the registration numbers specified by users in the machine's address book.
A Press [Attach Sender's Name].
B Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned
to the required destination folder.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press the {q} key after the last
number.
Example: To enter 00006
Press the {6} key, and then press the {q} key.
C Press [OK].
27
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Selecting the Sender by Searching the Machine’s Address Book
This section explains how to select the sender by searching the machine’s address book.
1
A Press [Attach Sender's Name].
B Press [
].
C To search by user name, press [User (Dest.) Name].
To search by e-mail address, press [E-mail Address].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [User (Dest.) Name] and [E-mail Address].
D Enter the beginning of the sender’s name you want to search for.
To search by e-mail address, enter the beginning of the address.
28
E Press [OK].
F Select the sender.
G Press [Exit].
H Press [OK].
Specifying the E-mail Subject
Specifying the E-mail Subject
This section explains how to specify the e-mail subject.
The procedure to specify the subject “[Urgent] New product appearance” is explained as an example here.
1
A Press [Subject / Message].
B Press [Attach Subject].
C Select the subject [Urgent].
D Press [Manual Input].
The soft keyboard appears.
E Enter the subject “New product appearance”.
F Press [OK] three times.
Note
❒ For details about entering the text, see About This Machine.
❒ For details about maximum number of characters that can be entered, see
"Sending E-mail".
Reference
p.143 “Sending E-mail”
29
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Specifying the E-mail Message
This section explains how to specify the e-mail message.
The message can be created in the following ways:
• Select the e-mail message from the list
• Enter the message directly
1
Selecting a Message from the List
You can select a message from the list.
Important
❒ The messages that can be selected from the list must be registered in [System
Settings] in advance. For details, see General Settings Guide.
A Press [Subject / Message].
B Press [E-mail Message].
C Select a message.
D Press [OK] twice.
30
Specifying the E-mail Message
Manual Entry of a Message
You can enter the message manually.
A Press [Subject / Message].
1
B Press [E-mail Message].
C Press [Manual Input].
The soft keyboard appears.
D Enter the message.
E Press [OK] three times.
Note
❒ For details about entering the text, see About This Machine.
❒ For details about the maximum number of characters that can be entered,
see “Sending E-mail”.
Reference
p.143 “Sending E-mail”
31
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail
This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously send it by e-mail.
A Press [Store File].
1
B Press [Send & Store].
C If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File
Name], and [Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
D Press [OK].
E Specify the destination, make any other necessary settings, and then send
the e-mail.
For details about sending a file by e-mail, see "Basic Operation for Sending
Scan Files by E-mail".
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead
of [User Name]. For details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult your
administrator.
❒ You can resend stored files by e-mail. To resend stored files, select the files
on the screen for selecting stored files, and then send them. For details, see
"Sending a Stored File".
Reference
p.63 “Specifying File Information for a Stored File”
p.14 “Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail”
p.71 “Sending a Stored File”
32
Sending the URL by E-mail
Sending the URL by E-mail
This section explains how to send the URL of a scanned file by e-mail.
Use this function if network restrictions prevent you sending attachments by e-mail.
1
A In [Scanner Features], select [Send URL Link] under [Stored File E-mail Method].
For details about specifying the setting, see General Settings Guide.
B Return to the initial scanner screen, and then press [Store File] to select [Send
& Store].
To send the URL by e-mail, you must select [Send & Store].
C Press [OK].
D Specify the e-mail destination, make any other necessary settings, and then
send the e-mail.
For details about sending e-mail, see "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files
by E-mail".
An e-mail similar to the following will be sent to the destination:
E In the e-mail destination, click the URL.
Web Image Monitor starts.
F View, delete, or download the file over the network using Web Image Monitor.
Note
❒ For details about Web Image Monitor functions and their settings, see Network
Guide.
❒ It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor on the same network
environment.
❒ Depending on the environment, even if you click the URL in the file sent
by e-mail, the browser may not start and you may not be able to view the
file. If this happens, click the same URL again, or manually enter the URL
in the browser's address bar.
❒ To display details about the functions for managing stored files using Web Image Monitor, click [Help] on the upper right of each Web browser's window.
❒ You can send the URL by e-mail and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder.
In this case, the file is sent to the Scan to Folder destination, not the URL.
Reference
p.14 “Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail”
33
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
1
34
2. Sending Scan Files by Scan
to Folder
Using the Scan to Folder function, you can send scan files over the network to
shared folders, FTP server folders, or NetWare folders.
Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder
This section describes the preparations and procedure for sending files by Scan
to Folder.
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
This section outlines the function for sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
Sending files to shared folders
ZZZ509S
1. This machine
2. Computer with a shared folder
You can send scan files to shared network folders. To send scan files to shared
network folders, use the SMB protocol.
To use this function, it is necessary to create a shared folder in advance. You can
specify a shared folder to save scan files.
3. Client computer
You can also browse scanned files saved
to a shared folder from a client computer.
35
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Sending files to an FTP server
2
ZZZ510S
1. This machine
3. Client computer
You can send scan files to FTP server
folders. To send scan files to FTP server
folders, use the FTP protocol.
You can browse scanned files saved to an
FTP server from a client computer. You
need to have an FTP client program on
the computer to connect to an FTP server.
2. FTP server
The FTP server is a server that provides
file transfer services among computers
on the same network. Transferred files
are stored on this server. It is essential to
have the FTP server inside the LAN/WAN
where this machine belongs. It is not possible to access an FTP server via a proxy
server.
36
Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder
Sending files to a NetWare server
2
ZZZ511S
1. This machine
3. Client computer
You can send scan files to NetWare folders. To send scan files to NetWare folders, use the NCP protocol.
To download files, a computer must be
running the NetWare client and be
logged onto the server.
2. NetWare Server
You can use this server to share files over
the network via NetWare. By sending image data to the server, files can be stored
on the server.
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder
This section describes the preparations and settings for sending scan files by
Scan to Folder.
Important
❒ Files can be sent to shared folders on client computers.
❒ Files can also be sent to FTP servers if any exist on the network.
❒ Files can also be sent to NetWare servers if any exist on the network.
A Connect the machine to the network.
Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b).
37
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
B Make the necessary network settings in [System Settings].
If you have connected the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable,
make the following settings. For details, see General Settings Guide.
• Specify the machine’s IP address and subnet mask.
• Specify the gateway address.
• In [Effective Protocol], enable [TCP/IP].
• To send files to shared folders, enable [SMB] in [Effective Protocol]. To send
files to NetWare folders, enable [NetWare] in [Effective Protocol].
2
C If necessary, change settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features].
Note
❒ To connect the machine to the network using a wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11B),
an extended wireless LAN board is required respectively. For details, see
Network Guide.
❒ Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For more information about network settings, see General Settings
Guide.
❒ For details about [Scanner Features], see General Settings Guide.
❒ Sending files using SMB is available only under a NetBIOS over TCP/IP
environment. Sending files using SMB is not available under a NetBEUI
environment.
❒ Even when settings made with the control panel, Web Image Monitor, Telnet, or other methods do not permit the use of SMB and FTP, sending files
is still possible.
Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book
You can register the addresses of frequently-used destination folders in the address book. Register the folder addresses in [Address Book Management] under
[Administrator Tools] from [System Settings]. These addresses can also be registered
as groups.
Note
❒ For details about registering the address of a destination folder in the address
book, see General Settings Guide.
❒ You can register entries in the address book using Web Image Monitor or
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see Network Guide. For details about registering addresses, see each application’s Help.
❒ Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine
when it is updating the address book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
38
Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder
Scan to Folder Screen
This section describes the screen layout when sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by pressing it. When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is
highlighted like [
]. Keys that cannot be selected appear like [
].
1. Destination field
6. [File Name / Type]
The specified destination appears. If
more than one destination has been specified, press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to scroll
through the destinations.
Press to specify the names and formats of
the files you want to send.
2. [ ] E-mail / Scan to Folder
Press to switch a destination in the delivery server list to a destination list of this
machine, to search for a destination.
Press to switch between the Scan to Folder screen and E-mail screen
Also switch the screen when sending a
file simultaneously by both Scan to Folder and e-mail.
3. Scan to Folder icon ( )
Shows that the Scan to Folder screen is
displayed.
4. [Registration No.]
Press to specify a destination using a fivedigit registration number.
2
7. [ ] Switch Destination
List/Search/Switch Title
8. Destination List
The list of destinations registered in the
machine appears.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [U] or [T] to switch the
screen.
Group destinations are denoted by this
symbol ( ).
5. [Enter Destination]
To specify destinations not registered in
the address book, press this button to display the soft keyboard, and then enter the
address of the destination folder.
39
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder
This section describes the basic operations involved in using Scan to Folder.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the {Clear Modes} key.
B If the network delivery scanner screen or E-mail screen appears, switch to
2
the Scan to Folder screen.
For details, see "Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen".
C Place originals.
D If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as scan
type, resolution, image density, or scan size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".
E If necessary, press [1 Sided Orig.] or [2 Sided Orig.] to scan one or both sides of
the originals.
For details, see "Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals".
F If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as original orientation.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
G If necessary, press [File Name / Type] to specify settings such as file name and
file format.
For details, see "Setting File Type and File Name".
H Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see "Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations".
I Press the {Start} key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
40
Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder
Note
❒ If you have selected more than one destination, you can press [UPrev.] or
[TNext] next to the destination field to scroll through the destinations.
❒ To cancel a selected destination, press [UPrev.] or [TNext] to display the
destination in the destination field, and then press the {Clear / Stop} key.
You can cancel a destination selected from the destination list by pressing
the selected destination again.
❒ If you press the {Check Modes} key before pressing the {Start} key, the initial scanner screen switches to the Check Modes screen. You can use the
Check Modes screen to check the settings such as destinations. For details,
see "Check Modes".
❒ To cancel scanning, press the {Clear / Stop} key or [Stop] on the display panel.
❒ You can also store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder. For
details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder".
2
Reference
p.42 “Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen”
p.101 “Various Scan Settings”
p.112 “Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals”
p.114 “Setting of Original Feed Type”
p.124 “Setting File Type and File Name”
p.43 “Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations”
p.4 “Check Modes”
p.57 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder”
41
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen
This section explains how to switch to the Scan to Folder screen.
If the E-mail screen is being displayed, press [ ] to switch to the Scan to Folder
screen.
If the network delivery scanner screen is being displayed, switch to the Scan to
Folder screen as follows:
2
A Press [ ].
B Press [Switch Destination List].
C Press [E-mail].
D Press [Exit].
The e-mail screen or the scan to folder screen appears.
E If the e-mail screen appears, press [
].
The Scan to Folder screen appears.
Note
❒ You cannot switch from the network delivery scanner screen while delivery destinations are being specified. To clear the specified destination, display the destination in the destination field of the network delivery
scanner screen, and then press the {Clear / Stop} key.
42
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
This section explains how to specify Scan to Folder destinations.
You can send a file by Scan to Folder by any of the following methods:
• Select a destination registered in the machine’s address book
• Send a file to a shared network folder
• Send a file to an FTP server
• Send a file to NetWare server
2
Selecting the Destination from the Machine’s Address Book
This section explains how to select the destination from the machine’s address
book.
Important
❒ To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in
advance. For details, see General Settings Guide.
You can select a destination registered in the machine’s address book by any of
the following methods:
• Select the destination from the destination list
• Select the destination by entering its registration number
• Select the destination by searching the machine’s address book
Note
❒ If you have specified the protection code for accessing the address book, the
screen for entering the protection code appears.
❒ Depending on the security settings, certain destinations may not be displayed.
43
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Selecting a destination registered in the destination list
Select the destination from the destination list.
A In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.
The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears
in the destination field at the top of the screen.
2
If the target destination does not appear, take one of the following steps:
• Display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the title
• Display the destination by pressing [U] or [T]
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in
the destination list.
Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers
Select the destination from the machine’s address book using its registration
number.
A Press [Registration No.].
B Enter the five-digit registration number that has been assigned to a destination folder using the number keys.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press the {q} key after the last
number.
Example: To enter 00004
Press the {4} key, and then press the {q} key.
44
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
Searching the machine’s address book for the destination and selecting it
This section explains how to search the machine’s address book for the destination and select it.
A Press [
].
2
B To search by destination name, press [Search by Dest. Name].
To search by path, press [Search by Folder Name].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Search by Dest. Name] and [Search by Folder
Name].
C Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by path, enter the beginning of the folder path. If the folder path is
“\\volume\folder” then enter “\\volume\f”.
D Press [OK].
E Select the destination folder.
F Press [Exit].
45
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder
This section explains how to specify the destination when sending files to a
shared network folder.
Important
❒ You must create a shared folder on the client computer in advance. You can
create the shared folder under Windows98/Me/2000/XP, WindowsNT4.0,
Windows Server 2003, and Mac OS X.
2
❒ Depending on the operating system of the client computer, access to the
shared folder may require authentication.
You can send a file to a shared folder over the network by any of the following
methods:
• Enter the path to the destination directly
• Specify the path by browsing the network for the destination
Entering the path to the destination manually
You can enter the path to the destination folder manually.
A Press [Enter Destination].
B Press [SMB].
C Press [Manual Input] on the right side of the path field.
The soft keyboard appears.
D Enter the path for the folder.
The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the
computer name is "desk01": \\desk01\user.
Instead of specifying the destination using its path, you can also use its IP address.
For details about maximum number of characters that can be entered, see
"Folder transmission".
E Press [OK].
46
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
F Depending on the destination setting, enter the user name for logging on
to the client computer.
Press [Manual Input] on the right side of the user name field to display the soft
keyboard.
G Depending on the destination setting, enter the password for logging on to
the client computer.
Press [Manual Input] for [Password] to display the soft keyboard.
2
H Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified shared folder
exists.
I Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
J Press [OK].
Note
❒ If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears.
Enter the user name and password.
❒ If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation message appears.
❒ Computer and shared folder names containing more than 12 characters
cannot be displayed.
❒ To change the path for the folder that has been entered, press [Change] on
the left side of the destination field. Enter the correct path for the folder,
and then press [OK].
❒ The connection test may take time.
❒ You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel]
during a connection test.
❒ Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer
the file if you do not have write privileges for the file or there is not enough
free hard disk space.
❒ You can register the path to the destination in the machine’s address book.
For details, see "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
47
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Reference
p.144 “Folder transmission”
p.56 “Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book”
Specifying the path by browsing the network for destinations
2
You can browse computers on the network for the destination folder, and then
specify the path.
A Press [Enter Destination].
B Press [SMB].
C Press [Browse Network].
Domains or workgroups on the network appear.
D Select the domain or workgroup in which the destination folder is located.
E Select the client computer that has the destination folder.
If you cannot find the computer you are looking for, press [Up One Level] and
browse that level.
If authentication is required to access the selected computer, the authentication screen appears. To authenticate, enter the user name and password.
48
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
F Select the destination folder.
2
When the selected folder has sub-folders, the sub-folders list appears.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search
for the folder at that level.
G Press [OK] twice.
Note
❒ If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears.
Enter the user name and password.
❒ If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation message appears.
❒ Computer and shared folder names containing more than 12 characters
cannot be displayed.
❒ Up to 100 computers or shared folders can be displayed.
❒ The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have the write privileges for the shared folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
❒ You can register the path to the destination in the machine’s address book.
For details, see "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
Reference
p.56 “Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book”
49
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Sending Files to an FTP Server
This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to an FTP server.
Entering the path to an FTP server manually
You can enter the path to an FTP server manually.
2
A Press [Enter Destination].
B Press [FTP].
C Press [Manual Input] on the right side of the server name field.
The soft keyboard appears.
D Enter a server name.
Instead of specifying the destination using its path, you can also use its IP address.
E Press [OK].
F Press [Manual Input] on the right side of the path field.
The soft keyboard appears.
G Enter the path for the folder.
The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the
subfolder name is "lib": user\lib.
For details about maximum number of characters that can be entered, see
"Folder transmission".
H Press [OK].
50
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
I Enter the user name according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Input] on the right side of the user name field to display the soft
keyboard.
J Enter the password according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Input] for [Password] to display the soft keyboard.
K To change the port number which is set in [System Settings], press [Change]
2
on the right side of the port number field. Enter a port number using the
number keys, and then press the {q} key.
L Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified folder exists.
M Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
N Press [OK].
Note
❒ If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation message appears.
❒ The connection test may take time.
❒ You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel]
during a connection test.
❒ To change the path for the folder that has been entered, press [Change] on
the left side of the destination field. Enter the correct path for the folder,
and then press [OK].
❒ You can register the path to the destination in the machine’s address book.
For details, see "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
❒ The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges
for the folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
Reference
p.144 “Folder transmission”
p.56 “Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book”
51
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Sending Files to NetWare server
This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to NetWare
server.
The NetWare folder of the destination can be specified in an NDS tree or on a
NetWare Bindery server, depending on the NetWare environment. Consult
your administrator.
You can send a file to NetWare server by any of the following methods:
• Enter the destination path of the NetWare server directly
• Specify the path by browsing to the destination on the NetWare server
2
Entering the destination path of the NetWare server directly
You can directly enter the destination folder path of the NetWare server.
A Press [Enter Destination].
B Press [NCP].
C Select the connection type.
Press [NDS] to specify a folder in the NDS tree.
Press [Bindery] to specify the folder on the NetWare Bindery server.
D Press [Manual Input] on the right side of the path field.
The soft keyboard appears.
52
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
E Enter the path for the folder.
If you set the connection type to [NDS], the NDS tree name is "tree", the name
of the context including the volume is "context", the volume name is "volume", and the folder name is "folder", the path will be \\tree\volume.context\folder".
If you set the connection type to [Bindery], the NetWare Bindery server name
is "server", the volume name is "volume", and the folder name is "folder", the
path will be "\\server\volume\folder".
For details about maximum number of characters that can be entered, see
"Folder transmission".
2
F Press [OK].
G Enter the user name for logging on to the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery
server.
Press [Manual Input] on the right side of the user name field. The soft keyboard
appears.
If you press [NDS] for [Connection Type], enter the user name, and then enter
the name of the context containing the user object. If the user name is "user"
and the name of the Context is "context", the user name will be "user.context".
H If a password is specified for the logon user, enter it.
Press [Manual Input] for [Password] to display the soft keyboard.
I Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified share folder exists.
J Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
Note
❒ If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or
password, a confirmation message appears.
❒ To change the path for the folder that has been entered, press [Change] on
the left side of the destination field. Enter the correct path for the folder,
and then press [OK].
❒ You can connect only to folders that you have the read privileges for.
❒ The connection test may take time.
❒ You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel]
during a connection test.
❒ Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer
the file if you do not have write privileges for the file or there is not enough
free hard disk space.
53
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
❒ You can register the path to the destination in the machine’s address book.
For details, see "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
Reference
p.144 “Folder transmission”
p.56 “Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book”
2
Specifying the path by browsing to the destination on NetWare server
Specify the path by browsing to the destination folder in an NDS tree or on a
NetWare Bindery server.
A Press [Enter Destination].
B Press [NCP].
C Select the connection type.
Press [NDS] to specify a folder in the NDS tree.
Press [Bindery] to specify a folder on the NetWare Bindery server.
D Press [Browse Network] on the right side of the path name field.
If you selected [NDS] under [Connection Type], the NDS tree list appears.
If you selected [Bindery] under [Connection Type], the NetWare Bindery server
list appears.
E Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery serv54
er.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search
for the folder at that level.
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations
F Select the destination folder.
G Press [OK] twice.
Note
❒ If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or
password, a confirmation message appears.
❒ Only folders that you have the read privileges for are displayed.
❒ If the language used for the NDS tree or by the NetWare Bindery server
differs from that used by the machine, file names in the NDS tree or on the
NetWare Bindery server might appear garbled.
❒ Up to 100 items can be displayed.
❒ If the selected NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server requires authentication, a login screen appears. Enter a user name and password for logging
on to the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server. If you log on to the NDS
tree, enter a user name, and then enter the name of the context containing
the user object. If the user name is "user" and the name of the Context is
"context", the user name will be "user.context".
❒ The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges
for the folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
❒ You can register the path to the destination in the machine’s address book.
For details, see "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
2
Reference
p.56 “Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book”
55
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book
This section explains how to register folder paths you have entered manually or
specified by browsing the network to the machine's address book.
A In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.
2
B Press [ProgDest].
C Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see General Settings Guide.
D Press [OK].
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, [ProgDest] may not appear.
56
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by
Scan to Folder
This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to
Folder.
A Press [Store File].
2
B Press [Send & Store].
C If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File
Name], and [Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
D Press [OK].
E Specify the destination, make any other necessary settings, and then send the file.
For details about sending a file by Scan to Folder, see "Basic Operations When
Using Scan to Folder".
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead
of [User Name]. For details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult your
administrator.
❒ You can resend stored files by Scan to Folder. To resend stored files, select
the files on the screen for selecting stored files, and then send them. For details, see "Sending a Stored File".
57
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Reference
p.63 “Specifying File Information for a Stored File”
p.40 “Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder”
p.71 “Sending a Stored File”
2
58
3. Storing Files Using the Scanner
Function
Using the scanner function, you can store scan files in the machine and then send
the stored files by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
Before Storing Files
This section outlines file storage under the scanner function and provides related cautions.
Outline of File Storage under the Scanner Function
This section outlines storing files under the scanner function.
Important
❒ You can specify a password for each stored file. Files that are not passwordprotected can be accessed by other users on the same local area network using
DeskTopBinder. It is recommended that you protect stored files from unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
❒ Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We
advise against using the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall
not be responsible for any damage that may result from the loss of files. For
long-term storage of files, we recommend the use of DeskTopBinder. For details, contact your local dealer.
ZZZ512S
1. This Machine
2. Client Computer
You can store scan files on the machine’s
hard disk. The stored files can be sent by
e-mail, Scan to Folder, or the network delivery scanner.
Using DeskTopBinder, you can, over the
network, view, copy, or delete files stored
in the machine. Using Web Image Monitor, you can, over the network, view,
download, or delete files stored in the machine. For details about DeskTopBinder
Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite–related
manuals. For details about Web Image
Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
59
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Note
❒ Stored files will be deleted after a set period. For details about specifying the
period, see General Settings Guide.
❒ Files stored under the scanner function cannot be printed from the machine’s
control panel. Print the files from a client computer after receiving them on
the computer.
❒ You can also store a file and simultaneously send it. For details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail", "Simultaneous Storage and Sending
by Scan to Folder", and "Simultaneous Storage and Delivery".
3
Reference
p.32 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail”
p.57 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder”
p.94 “Simultaneous Storage and Delivery”
60
Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files
Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files
This section describes the basic operation for storing scan files.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the {Clear Modes} key.
B Place originals.
C If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as scan
type, resolution, image density, or scan size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".
3
D If necessary, press [1 Sided Orig.] or [2 Sided Orig.] to scan one or both sides of
the originals.
For details, see "Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals".
E If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as original orientation.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
F Press [Store File].
G Press [Store Only].
H If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File
Name], and [Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
I Press [OK].
61
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
J Press the {Start} key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead
of [User Name]. For details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult your
administrator.
❒ By pressing [Send & Store], you can simultaneously store scan files and send
them. For details, see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail", "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder", and "Simultaneous
Storage and Delivery".
❒ If a destination or sender has been selected, you cannot press [Store Only].
❒ To cancel scanning, press the {Clear / Stop} key or press [Stop] on the display
panel.
3
Reference
p.101 “Various Scan Settings”
p.112 “Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals”
p.114 “Setting of Original Feed Type”
p.63 “Specifying File Information for a Stored File”
p.32 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail”
p.57 “Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder”
p.94 “Simultaneous Storage and Delivery”
62
Specifying File Information for a Stored File
Specifying File Information for a Stored File
You can specify information for a stored file, such as user name, file name, and
password.
By specifying information for a stored file, you can search for the file by user
name or file name, or protect the file with a password to prevent other people
from accessing the file.
Specifying a User Name
3
You can specify a user name for the stored file.
A Press [Store File].
The Store File screen appears.
B Press [User Name].
C Press the user name you want to specify.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System Settings]. To specify a name not shown here, press
[Non-programmed Name], and then enter the user name.
D Press [OK] twice.
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead
of [User Name]. For details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult your
administrator.
63
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Specifying a File Name
This section explains how to change the name of a stored file.
A stored file is allocated a name starting with "SCAN" followed by a 4-digit
number.
• Example: SCAN0001
You can change this file name.
A Press [Store File].
3
The Store File screen appears.
B Press [File Name].
The soft keyboard appears.
C Change the file name.
D Press [OK] twice.
Note
❒ For details about entering the text, see About This Machine.
64
Specifying File Information for a Stored File
Specifying a Password
You can specify a password for the stored file.
Important
❒ Do not forget the password. If you forget it, consult the system administrator
of the machine.
By specifying a password, you can ensure that only the people who know the
password can view the file.
3
A Press [Store File].
The Store File screen appears
B Press [Password].
C Using the number keys, enter a four to eight-digit number.
D Press the {q} key.
To change the password, press [Change], and then enter a new one.
E For confirmation, enter the same number again.
F Press the {q} key.
To change the password, press [Change], and then enter a new one.
G Press [OK] twice.
65
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Displaying the List of Stored Files
This section describes the list of stored files.
Using the list of stored files, you can delete stored files or change the file data.
List of Stored Files
This section describes how the list of stored files is displayed.
To display the list of stored files, press [Select Stored File] on the initial scanner
screen.
3
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by pressing it. When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is
highlighted like [
]. Keys that cannot be selected appear like [
].
❖ When displaying information on all stored files
❖ When displaying information of a selected stored file
66
Displaying the List of Stored Files
1. Keys for searching for files
5. List of stored files
Press to switch to the screens for searching for a file by user name or file name, or
to the screen for displaying all files.
Displays the list of stored files.
If the file is not displayed, press [UPrev.]
or [TNext] to scroll through the list.
2. [Select File]/[Detail]
6. [Manage / Delete File]
Press to switch between the stored file list
and the detailed information of the selected file.
Press to perform operations such as deleting stored files or changing file information.
3. Keys for sorting files
7. [Send]
Press to sort the files using the selected
item. Select the same item once more for
a reverse sort. However, the files cannot
be sorted in reverse sending order.
Press to send or deliver stored files. For
details, see “Sending Stored Files”.
4. Keys for changing file information
Use for deleting the selected file or
changing the user name, file name, or
password.
3
8. Information for a selected stored
file
Press [Detail] to display the information
for a file after selecting the file from the
file list.
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, some files may not appear in the list.
❒ The files that are stored by functions other than the scanner can be displayed
by pressing the {Document Server} key.
❒ For files which are password protected, a key symbol( ) is shown on the left
side of the user name.
Reference
p.71 “Sending Stored Files”
67
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Searching the List of Stored Files
You can search for files from the stored files using the user name or file name.
You can search the list of stored files by either of the following methods:
• Search by user name
• Search by file name
Searching by user name
3
You can search for a stored file by its user name.
A Press [Select Stored File].
B Press [Search by User Name].
C Select the user name to be used for the search.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System Settings]. To change a user name not shown here,
press [Non-programmed Name], and then enter the user name.
D Press [OK].
The search begins, and then files belonging to the specified user appear.
68
Displaying the List of Stored Files
Searching by file name
You can search for a stored file by its file name.
A Press [Select Stored File].
3
B Press [Search by File Name].
The soft keyboard appears.
C Enter the file name.
It is necessary to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters.
For information about how to enter characters, see About This Machine.
D Press [OK].
The search starts, and files whose name starts with the entered string appear.
69
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Checking Stored Files from a Client Computer
This section explains how to check a stored file from the client computer.
Using DeskTopBinder Lite or Web Image Monitor, you can also display the files
stored in the machine on a client computer.
You can also check files stored under the copier, Document Server, and printer
functions.
Important
❒ To view stored files from a client computer, the IP address of the machine
must be specified.
3
Using Desk Top Binder Lite to Display Stored Files
The stored files are displayed and can be checked also on a client computer using
DeskTopBinder Lite.
You can also transfer the stored files to the client computer.
Note
❒ For details about DeskTopBinder, see the DeskTopBinder-related manuals.
❒ For details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Reference
p.81 “Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM”
Using Web Image Monitor to Display Stored Files
The stored files are displayed and can be checked also on a client computer using
Web Image Monitor.
You can also download the stored files.
When you enter http:// (machine IP address)/ in the address bar of the Web
browser on a client computer, the top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
Note
❒ It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor only within your local
area network.
❒ For details about displaying or downloading stored files using Web Image
Monitor, see Copy/ Document Server Reference.
❒ For details about making settings for using Web Image Monitor, see Network
Guide.
❒ For details about functions for managing stored files using Web Image Monitor, click [Help] on the upper-right corner of the displayed screen.
70
Sending a Stored File
Sending a Stored File
This section explains how to send a stored file.
Stored files can be sent by e-mail, Scan to Folder, or the network delivery scanner.
Note
❒ There are two methods of sending stored files. Settings made under [Scanner
Features] determine which method is used. For details, see General Settings
Guide.
3
• To send the URL by e-mail:
Under [Scanner Features], [Stored File E-mail Method], select [Send URL Link].
This method is useful when network restrictions prevent you sending attachments.
• To send an attached file by e-mail:
Under [Scanner Features], [Stored File E-mail Method], select [Send File].
Sending Stored Files
This section mainly explains how to select the files you want to send.
A Press [Select Stored File].
The list of stored files appears.
B Select the file you want to send.
You can select multiple files.
If you select multiple files, the files are sent in the selected order.
If you press [Display Selection], files you have selected are displayed in the order they will be sent.
C Press [OK].
71
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
D If necessary, switch to the e-mail, Scan to Folder, or network delivery scan-
ner screen.
For details about switching the screen, see "Switching to the E-mail Screen",
"Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen", or "Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
E Specify the destination, make any other necessary settings.
For details about how to send a file by e-mail or Scan to Folder, or how to deliver a file, see "Basic Operation for Sending Files by E-mail", "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder", or "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".
3
F Press the {Start} key.
The stored file will be sent.
Note
❒ If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the
password appears. To select the file, enter the correct password, and then
press [OK].
❒ When the URL has been sent by e-mail, the recipient can check the stored
file by clicking that URL. For details, see "Sending the URL by E-mail".
Reference
p.17 “Switching to the E-mail Screen”
p.42 “Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen”
p.86 “Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen”
p.14 “Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail”
p.40 “Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder”
p.83 “Basic Operation for Delivering Files”
p.33 “Sending the URL by E-mail”
72
Managing Stored Files
Managing Stored Files
This section explains how to delete stored files and how to change the information for stored files.
Deleting a Stored File
This section explains how to delete a stored file.
A Press [Select Stored File].
3
The list of stored files appears.
B Press [Manage / Delete File].
C Select the file you want to delete.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To select the file, enter the correct password, and then press
[OK].
D Press [Delete File].
A confirmation message about deleting the file appears.
E Press [Delete].
F Press [Exit].
Note
❒ You cannot delete files that are waiting to be sent.
73
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
❒ You can also delete files stored in the machine by accessing the machine
from a client computer using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder. For
details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
Changing Information for a Stored File
You can change information for a stored file, such as [User Name], [File Name], and
[Password].
3
Note
❒ Information for files waiting for being sent cannot be changed.
Changing a user name
You can change the user name for a stored file.
A Press [Select Stored File].
The list of stored files appears.
B Press [Manage / Delete File].
C Select the file containing the file information you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To select the file, enter the correct password, and then press
[OK].
D Press [Change User Name].
74
Managing Stored Files
E Specify a new user name.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System Settings]. To change a user name not shown here,
press [Non-programmed Name], and then enter the user name.
F Press [OK].
G Make sure that the user name was changed as necessary, and press [Exit].
3
Note
❒ Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the
user name of a file stored in the machine from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details
about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
❒ Depending on the security setting, [Change Acs. Priv.] may appear instead
of [Change User Name]. For details about specifying [Change Acs. Priv.], consult your administrator.
75
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Changing a file name
You can change the file name of a stored file.
A Press [Select Stored File].
3
The list of stored files appears.
B Press [Manage / Delete File].
C Select the file containing the file information you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To select the file, enter the correct password, and then press
[OK].
D Press [Change File Name].
E Change the file name.
For information about how to enter characters, see About This Machine.
F Press [OK].
G Make sure that the file information was changed as necessary, and press
[Exit].
Note
❒ Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the name
of a file stored in the machine from the client computer. For details about
Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
76
Managing Stored Files
Changing a password
Enter the password for accessing the stored file.
Important
❒ Be sure not to forget the password. If you forget it, consult the system administrator of the machine.
A Press [Select Stored File].
3
The list of stored files appears.
B Press [Manage / Delete File].
C Select the file containing the file information you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
D Press [Change Password].
E Using the number keys, enter a new four to eight-digit password.
F Press the {q} key.
To change the password, press [Change], and then enter a new one.
G For confirmation, enter the same number again.
H Press the {q} key.
To change the password, press [Change], and then enter a new one.
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
77
Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Note
❒ Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the password of a file stored in the machine from the client computer. For details
about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help. For details about
DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with DeskTopBinder.
3
78
4. Delivering Scan Files
Using the ScanRouter delivery software, you can deliver by various methods
scan files produced by the machine.
Before Delivering Files
This section describes the necessary preparations and the procedure for using
the network delivery scanner.
Important
❒ To use the network delivery scanner function, you need a delivery server on
which the optional ScanRouter delivery software is installed. You must also
register destination and sender information on the delivery server.
Outline of Scan File Delivery
This section outlines the function for delivering files using the network delivery
scanner.
ZZZ513S
1. This machine
You can send scan files to the delivery
server.
2. Delivery server
Install the ScanRouter delivery software
on this computer to use it as the delivery
server.
After receiving a scan file, the delivery
server delivers the file according to the
setting specified for the destination. The
delivery settings are as follows:
• Storing the file in an in-tray
• Delivering the file by e-mail
• Storing the file in a selected folder
For details about the ScanRouter delivery
software, see the manuals supplied with
the ScanRouter delivery software.
3. Client Computer
How to check a file from the client computer depends on the delivery method.
For example, you can check a file by one
of the following methods:
• Use DeskTopBinder to view a file delivered to the in-tray
• Use e-mail software to receive e-mail
with an attached file
• Browse a folder for a stored file
79
Delivering Scan Files
Preparing to Deliver a File
This section describes the preparations and settings for delivering scan files.
Important
❒ To use the network delivery scanner function, you need a delivery server on
which the optional ScanRouter delivery software is installed. For details
about the ScanRouter delivery software, see the manuals supplied with the
ScanRouter delivery software.
❒ To view files delivered to an in-tray, DeskTopBinder must be installed on the
client computer.
A Connect the machine to the network.
4
Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b).
B Make the necessary network settings in [System Settings].
If you have connected the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable,
make the following settings. For details, see General Settings Guide.
• Specify the machine’s IP address and subnet mask
• In [Effective Protocol], enable [TCP/IP]
• Set [Delivery Option] to [On]
C If necessary, change settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features].
D Using the ScanRouter delivery software, register this machine as an I/O device. In addition, specify register destinations and specify such settings as
the delivery type and sender.
For details, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
Note
❒ To connect the machine to the network using a wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b),
an extended wireless LAN board is required respectively. For details, see Network Guide.
❒ Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For details about the network settings, see General Settings Guide.
❒ For details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Reference
p.81 “Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM”
80
Before Delivering Files
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM
This section explains how to install DeskTopBinder Lite on a client computer
from the supplied "Scanner Driver and Utilities" or "Scanner Driver/Font Manager and Utilities" CD-ROM.
To view or receive files delivered to the in-trays, you must install DeskTopBinder Lite on the client computer.
A Make sure Windows is running on the client computer, and then insert the
"Scanner Driver and Utilities" or "Scanner Driver/Font Manager and Utilities" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer is automatically started.
B Click [DeskTopBinder Lite].
4
The [DeskTopBinder Lite Setup] dialog box appears.
For the subsequent installation steps, see the Setup Guide displayed from the
[DeskTopBinder Lite Setup] dialog box.
Note
❒ Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for DeskTopBinder Lite. For details, see "Software Supplied on CD-ROM".
❒ You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about
the auto-run program, see "Auto-Run Program".
❒ If the installer does not start automatically, see “Auto-Run Program”.
Reference
p.140 “Software Supplied on CD-ROM”
p.140 “Auto-Run Program”
81
Delivering Scan Files
Network Delivery Scanner Screen
This section describes the screen layout when using the network delivery scanner.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by pressing it. When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is
highlighted like [
]. Keys that cannot be selected appear like [
].
4
1. Network delivery scanner icon
( )
Indicates that the network delivery scanner screen is displayed.
2. Destination field
The selected destination is shown here. If
multiple destinations are selected, the
destinations are displayed in the order
they were selected by pressing [UPrev.] or
[TNext].
3. [Registration No.]
Select a destination by entering its Short
ID number (registered using the ScanRouter delivery software).
4. [Manual Input]
To send a file by e-mail via the delivery
server to a destination not registered in
the delivery server’s Destination List,
press this key to display the soft keyboard. Then use the soft keyboard to enter the e-mail address. For details about
how to send a file by e-mail via the delivery server, see the ScanRouter delivery
software manuals.
82
5. [Attach Sender's Name] [Return Receipt] [Attach Subject]
Specify the sender and subject when
sending a file by e-mail via the delivery
server. You can also select whether or not
to check if whether the file has been
opened at the destination.
6. [ ] Switch Destination
List/Search
Press to switch a destination list of this
machine to a destination in the delivery
server list, to search for a destination.
7. Destination list
The list of destinations registered in the
delivery server appears. If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [U] or
[T] to switch the screen. Group destinations are denoted by this symbol ( ).
Basic Operation for Delivering Files
Basic Operation for Delivering Files
This section describes the basic operation for delivering scan files using the network delivery scanner.
Important
❒ You must register destinations and senders in advance using the ScanRouter
delivery software installed on the delivery server.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the {Clear Modes} key.
B If the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears, switch to the network
delivery scanner screen.
For details, see "Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
4
C Place originals.
D If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as scan
type, resolution, image density, or scan size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".
E If necessary, press [1 Sided Orig.] or [2 Sided Orig.] to scan one or both sides of
the originals.
For details, see "Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals".
F If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as original orientation.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
G Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see "Specifying Delivery Destinations".
H If necessary, press [Attach Sender's Name] to specify the sender.
For details, see "Specifying the Sender".
83
Delivering Scan Files
I If necessary, specify the e-mail subject.
For details, see "Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the
Delivery Server".
J Press the {Start} key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
Note
❒ By pressing [Manual Input] on the network delivery scanner screen, you can
send a file by e-mail via the delivery server’s network. For details about entering the e-mail address directly, see "Entering an E-mail Address Manually".
❒ If you have selected more than one destination, press [UPrev.] or [TNext]
next to the destination field to scroll through the destinations.
❒ To cancel a selected destination, display the destination in the destination
field, and then press the {Clear / Stop} key. You can cancel a destination selected from the destination list by pressing the selected destination again.
❒ You can use the Return Receipt function when sending e-mail via delivery
server. An e-mail is sent to the sender selected in step H, notifying him/her
that the recipient has read his/her e-mail. To specify this setting, press [Return Receipt].
❒ To enable the Return Receipt function, you must specify the ScanRouter delivery software settings for sending e-mail by SMTP. For details about
specifying this setting, see the ScanRouter delivery software manual. Note,
however, that if the e-mail software used at the destination does not support Message Disposition Notification (MDN), e-mail notification that the
e-mail has been opened may not be sent.
❒ Register the sender’s e-mail address using the ScanRouter delivery software in advance.
❒ If you press the {Check Modes} key before pressing the {Start} key, the initial scanner screen switches to the Check Modes screen. You can use the
Check Modes screen to check the settings such as destinations. For details,
see "Check Modes".
❒ To cancel scanning, press the {Clear / Stop} key or [Stop] on the display panel.
❒ You can also store a scan file and simultaneously deliver it. For details, see
"Simultaneous Storage and Delivery".
4
84
Basic Operation for Delivering Files
Reference
p.86 “Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen”
p.101 “Various Scan Settings”
p.112 “Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals”
p.114 “Setting of Original Feed Type”
p.87 “Specifying Delivery Destinations”
p.90 “Specifying the Sender”
p.93 “Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server”
p.21 “Entering an E-mail Address Manually”
p.4 “Check Modes”
p.94 “Simultaneous Storage and Delivery”
4
85
Delivering Scan Files
Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner
Screen
This section explains how to switch the screen to the network delivery scanner
screen.
If the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen is being displayed, switch to the network delivery scanner screen.
A Press [ ].
B Press [Switch Destination List].
4
C Press [Delivery Server].
D Press [Exit].
The network delivery scanner screen appears.
Note
❒ You cannot switch from the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen while
destinations or senders are being specified. To clear a specified destination,
display the destination in the destination field of the E-mail screen or Scan
to Folder screen, and then press the {Clear / Stop} key.
86
Specifying Delivery Destinations
Specifying Delivery Destinations
This section explains how to specify delivery destinations.
Selecting Destinations Registered in the Destination List of the
Delivery Server
This section explains how to select destinations registered in the delivery server’s Destination List.
You can select a delivery destination registered in Destination List of the delivery server by any of the following methods:
• Select the destination from the delivery destination list
• Select the destination by entering the registration number
• Select the destination by searching in the delivery server
4
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, certain destinations may not be displayed.
Selecting a destination from the Destination List
From the destination list, select a destination.
A In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.
The selected destination is highlighted and also is displayed in the destination field at the top of the screen.
Destinations are registered in the delivery server under captions. The destination list is updated automatically.
If the target destination does not appear, take one of the following steps:
• Display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the title
• Display the destination by pressing [U] or [T]
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in
the destination list.
87
Delivering Scan Files
Selecting destinations by entering their registration numbers
Select a destination by entering its Short ID number (registered using the ScanRouter delivery software). For details about how to set Short IDs, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
A Press [Registration No.].
B Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number, and then
press the {q} key.
You can also enter a registration number of fewer than three digits.
Example: To enter 009
Press the {9} key, and then press the {q} key.
4
Selecting destinations by searching the delivery server’s Destination List
In the delivery server’s Destination List, you can search for destinations and select them.
A Press [
].
B Press [Search Address Book].
88
Specifying Delivery Destinations
C To search by destination name, press [Search by Dest. Name].
To search by comment, press [Search by Comment].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Search by Dest. Name] and [Search by Comment].
D Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by comment, enter the beginning of the comment.
E Press [OK].
F Select the destination.
G Press [Exit].
4
89
Delivering Scan Files
Specifying the Sender
This section explains how to specify the e-mail sender when sending a file by email via the delivery server.
The sender you specify appears in the subject line of e-mail.
You can specify the sender by any of the following methods:
• Select the sender from the sender list
• Select the sender by entering the registration number
• Select the sender by searching the delivery server’s Destination List
Selecting a Sender from the Sender List
4
This section explains how to select a sender from the sender list.
Destinations that are registered on the delivery server are displayed in the sender list.
A Press [Attach Sender's Name].
B Select the sender.
The selected sender and its registration number appear.
C Press [OK].
90
Specifying the Sender
Selecting the Sender by Entering the Registration Number
Select a sender by entering its Short ID number (registered using the ScanRouter
delivery software). For details about how to set Short IDs, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
A Press [Attach Sender's Name].
4
B Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number assigned
to the required destination folder.
If the entered number is less than three digits, press the {q} key after the last
number.
Example: To enter 006
Press the {6} key, and then press the {q} key.
C Press [OK].
91
Delivering Scan Files
Selecting a Sender by Searching the Delivery Server’s Destination List
This section explains how to select a sender by searching the delivery server’s
Destination List.
A Press [Attach Sender's Name].
4
B Press [
].
C To search by destination name, press [User (Dest.) Name].
To search by comment, press [Search by Comment].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [User (Dest.) Name] and [Search by Comment].
D Enter the beginning of the sender's name.
To search by comment, enter the beginning of the comment.
E Press [OK].
F Select the sender.
G Press [Exit].
H Press [OK].
Note
❒ The Comment search function searches for destinations by comment information, which is a registration item required by the ScanRouter delivery
software.
92
Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server
Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be
Transmitted via the Delivery Server
This section explains how to specify the e-mail subject when sending a file by email via the delivery server.
To specify a subject, you can select it from the list, enter it directly, or combine
selecting and entering it.
The procedure to specify the subject name “[Urgent] New product appearance”
is explained as an example here.
Important
❒ The subjects that can be selected from the list must be registered in [System
Settings] in advance. See General Settings Guide.
4
A Press [Attach Subject].
B Press the subject [Urgent].
C Press [Manual Input].
The soft keyboard appears.
D Enter the subject “New product appearance”.
E Press [OK] twice.
93
Delivering Scan Files
Simultaneous Storage and Delivery
This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously deliver it.
A Press [Store File].
4
B Make sure that [Send & Store] is selected.
C If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File
Name], and [Password].
For details, see “Specifying File Information for a Stored File”.
D Press [OK].
E Specify the destination, make any other necessary settings, and then send
the file.
For details about delivering a file, see "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".
Note
❒ Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead
of [User Name]. For details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult your
administrator.
❒ You can resend stored files. To resend stored files, select the files on the
screen for selecting stored files, and then send them. For details, see "Sending a Stored File".
Reference
p.63 “Specifying File Information for a Stored File”
p.83 “Basic Operation for Delivering Files”
p.71 “Sending a Stored File”
94
5. Scanning Originals with the
Network TWAIN Scanner
The TWAIN driver allows you to scan originals into a client computer over a network.
Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner
This section describes the preparations and procedure for using the network
TWAIN scanner.
Important
❒ To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver,
which is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing the TWAIN
driver, see "Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM".
❒ To use the network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such
as DeskTopBinder, must be installed on the client computer. DeskTopBinder
Lite is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Reference
p.98 “Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM”
p.81 “Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM”
95
Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
Outline of the Network TWAIN Scanner
This section outlines the network TWAIN scanner function.
In the TWAIN scanner mode, you can share this machine among multiple computers. Therefore, you don't have to prepare a special computer for scanner or
reconnect the scanner and each computer every time you need to use it.
5
ZZZ514S
1. This Machine
2. Client Computer
Scans an original after receiving a scan
instruction from a client computer, and
then sends the scan file over the network
to the client computer.
Specifies the scanner settings and controls the scanner using an application,
such as DeskTopBinder Lite, that supports the network TWAIN scanner. Receives the files scanned by the machine
and displays them using an application
that supports the network TWAIN scanner.
Note
❒ When using the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, you do not need to
press the {Scanner} key on the machine’s control panel. The screen switches
automatically when you scan an original from a client computer using the
TWAIN driver.
To use functions other than the network TWAIN scanner, press [Exit].
96
Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner
Preparing to Use the Network TWAIN Scanner
This section describes the preparations and settings for using the machine as a
network TWAIN scanner.
Important
❒ To use the network TWAIN scanner, an application that supports the scanner, such as DeskTopBinder Lite, must be installed on the computer. DeskTopBinder Lite is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing
DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied
CD-ROM".
A Connect the machine to the network.
Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b).
B Make the necessary network settings in [System Settings].
5
If you have connected the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable,
make the following settings. For details, see General Settings Guide.
• Specify the machine’s IP address and subnet mask
• In [Effective Protocol], enable [TCP/IP]
C Install the TWAIN driver on a client computer.
For details about installing the TWAIN driver, see "Installing the TWAIN
Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM".
Note
❒ To connect the machine to the network using a wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b),
an extended wireless LAN board is required respectively. For details, see Network Guide.
❒ For details about [System Settings], see General Settings Guide.
❒ Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environment. For details about the network settings, see General Settings Guide.
Reference
p.98 “Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM”
p.81 “Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM”
97
Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM
This section explains how to install the TWAIN driver on a client computer from
the supplied "Scanner Driver and Utilities" or "Scanner Driver/Font Manager
and Utilities" CD-ROM.
To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver on a client computer.
A Start Windows, and then insert the CD-ROM labeled "Scanner Driver and
Utilities" or "Scanner Driver/Font Manager and Utilities" into the CD-ROM
drive of the client computer.
The installer is automatically started.
B Click [TWAIN Driver].
C The installer of the TWAIN Driver starts. Follow the instructions.
5
Note
❒ Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for the
TWAIN driver. For details about the system requirements, see "Software
Supplied on CD-ROM".
❒ You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about
the auto-run program, see "Auto-Run Program".
❒ If the installer does not start automatically, see "Auto-Run Program".
❒ When the installation is complete, a message about restarting the client
computer may appear. In this case, restart the client computer.
❒ After the installation is complete, a folder with the name of the machine in
use is added in [Programs] or [All Programs] on the [Start] menu. Help can be
displayed from here.
❒ Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in "Readme.txt".
Be sure to read them before use.
Reference
p.140 “Software Supplied on CD-ROM”
p.140 “Auto-Run Program”
98
Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation
Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation
This section describes the basic operation for scanning with the network TWAIN
scanner.
Important
❒ To use the network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such
as DeskTopBinder and the TWAIN driver must be installed on the client computer.
The following procedure uses Windows XP and DeskTopBinder Lite by way of
example.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], point to [DeskTopBinder], and then
click [DeskTopBinder].
B On the [Tools] menu, click [Scanner Settings...].
C Click [Select Scanner Driver...].
D Select the name of the machine you want to use in the list, and then click
5
[Select].
E Click [OK].
F Place originals.
G On the [File] menu, point to [Add Document], and then click [Scan...] to display
the Scanner Control dialog box.
A dialog box that is used to control a scanner using the TWAIN driver is referred
to as the Scanner Control dialog box.
H Make settings according to such factors as the type of original, type of scanning, and orientation of the original.
For details, see the TWAIN driver Help.
I In the Scanner Control dialog box, click [Scan].
Depending on the security setting, if you press [Scan], a dialog box for entering the user name and password may appear.
If there are more originals to be scanned, place the next original, and then
click [Continue].
If there are no more originals to be scanned, click [Complete].
J On the [File] menu, click [Exit].
K Enter the document name, and then click [OK].
The DeskTopBinder viewer closes and the image is stored in DeskTopBinder
Lite.
99
Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
Note
❒ If you have already selected a scanner, you do not need to select the scanner unless you want to change it.
❒ Using DeskTopBinder, you can edit and print scan files. For more information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
❒ The model name of the connected scanner appears in the title bar of the
Scanner Control dialog box. If there is more than one scanner of the same
model on the network, make sure you have selected the correct scanner. If
you have not, click [Select Scanner Driver...], and then select the scanner
again. If the correct scanner does not appear in the list, check that the scanner is correctly connected to the network and that its IP address has been
specified. If the correct scanner still does not appear, consult the network
administrator.
5
100
6. Various Scan Settings
This section describes various scan settings.
Specifying Scan Settings
This section explains how to make Scan settings.
A Press [Scan Settings].
B Specify scan type, resolution, scan size, and other settings, as required.
C Press [OK].
101
Various Scan Settings
Items for Specifying Scan Settings
This section describes the items for Scan Settings.
Scan Type
Select a scan type that is appropriate for your original.
❖ [Text (Print)]
Standard originals containing mainly characters. Creates scanned images
suitable for printing.
❖ [Text (OCR)]
Standard originals containing mainly characters. Appropriate to increase
OCR readability using an OCR-compliant application.
❖ [Text / Photo]
Originals containing a mixture of photographs, pictures and characters (twovalue). Creates scanned images suitable for printing.
6
❖ [Photo]
Originals containing photographs and other pictures (two-value). Creates
scanned images suitable for printing.
❖ [Gray Scale]
Originals containing photographs and other pictures (multi-value). Creates
scanned images suitable for displaying on a computer screen.
Resolution
Select resolution for scanning originals.
Select [100 dpi], [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] as the scanning resolution.
Image Density
Select the density in seven steps from iLighter (1) to Darkerj (7) , or use Auto
Image Density.
Selecting [Auto Image Density] corrects scanning density to improve resolution of
paper types such as non-white paper like newspaper or transparent originals.
102
Items for Specifying Scan Settings
Scan Size
Select the size of the original to be scanned.
The following items and sizes can be selected:
❖ [Auto Detect]
Scans original sizes using the automatic size detect function.
❖ Template size
11 × 17L, 81/2 × 14L, 81/2 × 13L, 81/2 × 11K, 81/2 × 11L, 51/2 × 81/2K,
51/2 × 81/2L, A3L, A4K, A4L, A5K, A5L, B4 JISL, B5 JISK, B5 JISL
❖ [Custom Size]
Scans in a specified size.
You can specify the dimensions (width and height) of the scan area in inch.
Note
❒ You can specify original sizes of 5.5 inch (X1 and Y1) or larger in [Custom Size].
Relationship of original of mixed sizes and scan size
6
This section explains differences you need to be aware of when scanning originals of the same width but different length (such as 11" × 17" & 11" × 81/2" ) using
the original position setting and size.
• If you select [Mixed Sizes] under [Original Feed Type], the machine detects the
length of same width originals and scans them. For details, see "Mixed Sizes".
• If a template size is selected, the machine scans originals at the selected size
regardless of the actual size of originals. If an original is smaller than the selected size, the machine applies margins to the scan area.
• If [Auto Detect] is selected for scanning originals from the exposure glass, the
machine detects the size of individual originals and scans accordingly.
• If only [Auto Detect] is selected for scanning originals from the ADF, the machine detects the size of the largest original and scans all the other originals
based on that size.
Reference
p.118 “Mixed Sizes”
103
Various Scan Settings
Setting procedure of custom size when scanning an entire original
This section explains how to set a custom size for scanning an entire original.
To scan the entire area of an original, measure its dimensions on the surface of
the original and enter them under Original Size (X1 and Y1) and Scan Area (X3
and Y3).
The example below explains scanning an original of the following size.
ARE012S
6
You do not need to specify a Start Position (X2 and Y2). Specify it as 0 inch.
For Scan Size, enter the same value as Original Size.
A Press [Scan Settings].
B Press [Scan Size].
C Press [Custom Size].
104
Items for Specifying Scan Settings
D Specify Original Size (X1 and Y1) using the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
For example, set X1 to 17.0 inch and Y1 to 8.0 inch.
E Set Start Position (X2 and Y2) to 0 inch, and then press the {q} key.
For example, set X2 and Y2 to 0 inch, and press the {q} key.
F Specify Scan Area (X3 and Y3) using the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
For example, set X3 to 17.0 inch and Y3 to 8.0 inch.
G Press [OK].
H Check Scan Area (X3 and Y3) displayed in the [Custom Size] field, and then
6
press [OK].
Note
❒ You can specify original sizes (X1 and Y1) of 5.5 inch or larger.
105
Various Scan Settings
❒ To scan an original that is smaller than 5.5 inch, make settings as though
you were scanning a section of an original that is larger than 5.5 inch. For
example, to scan a CD label on the exposure glass, specify a size according
to the chart below. For details about scanning procedures, see “Setting procedure of custom size when scanning part of an original”.
ARE013S
Reference
p.107 “Setting procedure of custom size when scanning part of an original”
6
106
Items for Specifying Scan Settings
Setting procedure of custom size when scanning part of an original
This section explains how to set a custom size for scanning an area within an
original.
To scan a section of an original, measure Original Size (X1 and Y1), Start Position
(X2 and Y2), and Scan Area (X3 and Y3) on the surface of the original, and then
enter those values in the same order. Measuring methods differ depending on
the original’s orientation and the position it is set in. Examples 1 to 3 below show
how to measure the size in order to scan the section marked “R”. Refer to the following examples to measure each size correctly.
❖ Example 1
Original is placed in the
orientation on the exposure glass or in the ADF
6
ARE014S
❖ Example 2
Original is placed in the
orientation on the exposure glass
ARE015S
107
Various Scan Settings
❖ Example 3
Original is placed in the
orientation in the ADF
ARE016S
Examples 1 and 2 (above) explain the procedure for scanning the "R" area of the
original.
A Press [Scan Settings].
B Press [Scan Size].
C Press [Custom Size].
6
D Specify Original Size (X1 and Y1) using the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
For example, set X1 to 17.0 inch and Y1 to 8.0 inch.
108
Items for Specifying Scan Settings
E Specify Start Position (X2 and Y2) using the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
For example, set X2 to 2.0 inch and Y2 to 1.0 inch.
F Specify Scan Area (X3 and Y3) using the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
For example, set X3 and Y3 to 3.0 inch.
G Press [OK].
H Check Scan Area (X3 and Y3) displayed in the [Custom Size] field, and then
press [OK].
6
Note
❒ To scan an original that is smaller than 5.5 inch, make settings as though
you were scanning a section of an original that is larger than 5.5 inch.
109
Various Scan Settings
How to set originals to scan them by custom size
This section explains how to place originals you want to scan at Custom size.
❖ Original orientation setting
Under [Original Orientation], select [ ] or [ ] according to the orientation of
your original. To display [Original Orientation], on the initial scanner screen,
press [Original Feed Type]. For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
❖ Placing an original
Place originals face up in the ADF; face down on the exposure glass.
❖ Original Orientation is [ ]
Placing an original in the ADF
ALQ017S
6
Placing an original on the exposure glass
Align the original, turn it rightward or leftward, and then place it face down on the exposure glass.
ALQ018S
❖ Original Orientation is [ ]
Placing an original in the ADF
ALQ019S
Placing an original on the exposure glass
Turn the original over, place it face down on
the exposure glass, and then align it with the
top left corner of the exposure glass.
ALQ020S
Reference
p.114 “Setting of Original Feed Type”
110
Items for Specifying Scan Settings
Edit
Make editing settings.
❖ [Erase Border]
Deletes the borders of the scanned original according to the specified width.
If you select [Same Width], you can specify, in inch, a uniform width for deletion all around the original (top, bottom, left, and right sides). If you select
[Diff. Width], you can specify in inch a different width for deletion for each side.
6
111
Various Scan Settings
Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals
This section explains settings for scanning one- or two-sided originals.
One-sided original
This section explains the settings for scanning only one side of originals.
A Press [1 Sided Orig.].
6
Two-sided original
This section explains the settings for scanning both sides of originals.
A Press [2 Sided Orig.].
B Select [2 Sided Orig: T to T] or [2 Sided Orig: T to B] according to the binding orientation of the original.
Top to top original
Top to bottom original
112
Setting for Scanning Sides of Originals
C If the last page of the last original is blank, in [Last Page], select [1 Side] or [2
Sides].
To skip the last page, select [1 Side].
To scan the last page as blank page, select [2 Sides].
D Press [OK].
Note
❒ If you selected [Divide], the setting made here is applied to the last page of
each batch of divided originals.
6
113
Various Scan Settings
Setting of Original Feed Type
This section explains the settings for original orientation, Batch/SADF, mixed
sizes, divide, and stamp by pressing [Original Feed Type].
Original Orientation
This section explains how to correctly display the top/bottom orientation of
scanned originals on a client computer screen.
A Press [Original Feed Type].
6
B Press [
] or [ ] to select the same orientation as that of original.
C Press [OK].
114
Setting of Original Feed Type
Placing Originals
To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a client computer, the placement of the original and the settings made on the control
panel must match.
Place originals correctly by referring to the following table:
❖ Exposure Glass
Original orientation
Control Panel Key
top edge touches top left corner of exposure
glass
top edge touches rear of exposure glass
6
❖ ADF
Original orientation
Control Panel Key
top edge placed first
top edge touches rear of ADF
Note
❒ Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the
table above uses squares to make original orientation easier to understand.
Even if the actual shape of the original is different, the combination of original
orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver does not
change.
115
Various Scan Settings
❒ When you specify Gray Scale for Scan Type, and single page TIFF/JPEG or
multi-page TIFF is selected as the file type, refer to the table below for how to
place originals. Originals placed in orientations that are not recommended in
the table might appear incorrectly top/bottom oriented on client computer
displays.
Placing an Original on the Exposure
Glass
Placing an Original in the ADF
Batch, SADF
This section explains settings for scanning multiple originals in several batches.
To scan the originals as a single file, select [Batch].
To scan the originals individually in the ADF, select [SADF].
6
Important
❒ If the mode, [SADF] or [Batch], you want to select does not appear, change the
mode using [Switch to Batch] under [Scanner Features]. For details about [Switch
to Batch], see General Settings Guide.
• If you select [Batch], scanning starts as soon as you place the additional originals and press the {Start} key. When all the originals have been scanned, press
the {q} key. If you select [Batch], regardless of the default settings, the machine waits until additional originals are placed.
• If [SADF] is selected, scanning starts as soon as you place additional originals
in the ADF. Select which operation the machine performs while waiting for
additional originals in [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF] under [Scanner Features]. For details about [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF], see General Settings Guide.
A Press [Original Feed Type].
116
Setting of Original Feed Type
B Select [Batch] or [SADF].
C Press [OK].
Note
❒ For more details about procedures, see "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File".
❒ If [SADF] is selected, scanning starts as soon as you place additional originals in the ADF. However, in the following cases you must press the
{Start} key to start scanning additional originals.
• After scanning additional originals using the exposure glass
• After changing settings while waiting for additional originals
• After opening/closing the ADF
6
Reference
p.122 “Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File”
117
Various Scan Settings
Mixed Sizes
This section explains how to set the machine to detect the length of individual
originals when scanning a batch of originals that are the same width but different length.
A Press [Original Feed Type].
B Press [Mixed Sizes]
6
C Press [OK].
Note
❒ The following combinations of original sizes are available:
11" × 17"L & 81/2" × 11"K, 81/2" × 11"L & 51/2" × 81/2"K
❒ To set originals of the same width and different length at the same time, set
them according to the chart below.
AMW012S
118
Setting of Original Feed Type
Divide
This section explains settings for dividing multiple originals by a specified number of pages and then sending them.
A Press [Original Feed Type].
B Press [Divide / Stamp], and then [Divide].
6
C Press [Change], and then use the number keys to enter the number of pages
you want to divide the job into sets of.
D Press the {q} key.
E If necessary, press [Division Check].
When you select [Division Check], if the originals were not scanned in due to a
paper jam or multi-sheet feed, a screen for stopping or continuing scanning
appears at the end of the scan.
F Press [OK] twice.
The current settings are displayed.
119
Various Scan Settings
Note
❒ If the last page of a batch of divided originals is blank, you can skip that
page. To skip scanning, in [Last Page] under [2 Sided Original], select [1 Side].
To scan the last page as a blank page, select [2 Sides]. For details, see "Twosided original".
Reference
p.112 “Two-sided original”
Stamp
This section explains the procedure for stamping on originals scanned using the
ADF.
If you select [Stamp], a circle mark is stamped on originals that are scanned using
the ADF. On two-sided originals, circle marks are stamped on both sides.
This function is useful when you want to identify scanned originals.
6
ARO006S
This illustration is an example when scanning a two-sided original.
Important
❒ To enable stamping, you must install the stamp cartridge.
A Press [Original Feed Type].
120
Setting of Original Feed Type
B Press [Divide / Stamp], and then [Stamp].
C Press [OK].
Note
❒ Last pages are stamped even if you selected not to scan the last page.
❒ Stamping may continue if scanning is interrupted, depending on the cause
of interruption.
❒ Replace the stamp cartridge when stamp begins to fade. For details, see
Troubleshooting.
6
121
Various Scan Settings
Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as
One File
This section explains the procedure for sending multiple originals as a multipage file or storing them as a single stored file.
Important
❒ To send multiple originals as a multi-page file, in [File Name / Type], select a
multi-page file type. For details about file types, see "Setting File Type and
File Name".
A Press [Original Feed Type].
6
B Select [Batch] or [SADF].
To scan originals using the exposure glass, select [Batch]. To scan originals using the ADF, select [SADF]. For details about [Batch] and [SADF], see "Batch,
SADF".
Either [SADF] or [Batch] appears. If the mode you want to select does not appear, change the mode using [Switch to Batch] under [Scanner Features]. For details about [Switch to Batch], see General Settings Guide.
C Press [OK].
D Place originals.
E Make settings for sending by e-mail or Scan to Folder, delivering, or storing.
122
Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File
F Press the {Start} key to scan originals.
If [Batch] is selected, place additional originals, and then press the {Start} key.
If [SADF] is selected, scanning starts automatically when you place additional
originals.
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
G After all originals are scanned, press the {q} key.
Storing or transmission starts.
Note
❒ If [Batch] is selected, originals can be scanned using the ADF.
❒ When scanning originals using the exposure glass, depending on the settings for [Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] under [Scanner Features], the
machine can wait for additional originals even if [Batch] is not selected in
[Original Feed Type]. For details about [Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass],
see General Settings Guide.
❒ If, under [Scanner Features], [Set Wait Time] is set for [Wait Time for Next Orig.:
Exposure Glass] or [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF], place additional originals within the specified time. When the countdown ends, transmission or
storage starts automatically. To start transmission or storage before the
countdown is completed, press the {q} key. Countdown is canceled if
Scan Settings or other settings are changed in the meantime. Place additional originals, and then press the {Start} key. The machine scans the originals and the countdown is resumed. For details about [Wait Time for Next
Orig.: Exposure Glass] and [Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF], see General
Settings Guide.
❒ If [SADF] is selected, scanning from the exposure glass is enabled after scanning from the ADF. If this happens, you must press the {Start} key to start
scanning.
6
Reference
p.124 “Setting File Type and File Name”
p.116 “Batch, SADF”
123
Various Scan Settings
Setting File Type and File Name
This section explains the procedure for setting file type, file name, and security
for PDF files.
Setting File Type
This section explains the procedure for setting the file type of a file you want to
send. File types can be specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder,
and sending stored files by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
Important
❒ To deliver files, set the file type using the delivery server computer. For details, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
❒ Files are stored in TIFF or JPEG format. If [Store Only] is selected for [Store File],
file type cannot be specified. If [Send & Store] is selected for [Store File], files can
be sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder in a specified format. However, files are
not stored in the specified file type. Specify the file type for stored files when
sending them.
6
Selectable file types differ depending on scan and other settings. For details, see
"Scan Settings and File Types".
You can select one of the following file types:
• For Single Page
[TIFF / JPEG] or [PDF]
• For Multi-page
[TIFF] or [PDF]
A Press [File Name / Type].
B Press [File Type].
124
Setting File Type and File Name
C Select a file type.
D Press [OK] twice.
Reference
p.139 “Scan Settings and File Types”
Setting File Name
This section explains the procedure for setting a file name.
Scanned file will be given a file name consisting of the time and date of scanning,
4-digit page number, etc.
• Single-page and divided multi-page files are assigned file names that contain
the date and time of scanning and a four-digit page number. An underscore
is inserted between the date and time and the four-digit page number.
(Example: For a file scanned in single-page TIFF at 10 ms, 15 sect., 15:30 hours
on Dec. 31, 2020, the file name will be 20201231153015010_0001.tif)
• Multi-page files are given file names that contain the time and date of scanning.
(Example: For a file scanned in multi-page TIFF at 10 ms, 15 sec., 15:30 hours
on Dec. 31, 2020, the file name will be 20201231153015010.tif)
If necessary, you can change the file name.
6
A Press [File Name / Type].
125
Various Scan Settings
B Press [File Name].
The soft keyboard appears.
C Enter a file name.
D Press [OK] twice.
6
126
Programs
Programs
You can register frequently used settings in the machine memory and recall
them for future use.
Note
❒ You can register up to 10 programs for the scanner mode.
❒ Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing the {Clear Modes}
key unless the content is deleted or newly registered.
❒ The following settings can be registered to programs: the scan settings, 1 sided/2 sided original, Top to Top/Top to Bottom, Last Page, Divide, Original
Feed Type, File Type, Batch/SADF, and Stamp.
Registering Frequently Used Setting
To register frequently used settings in a program:
A On the initial scanner screen, make the settings you want to register in a
program.
6
B Press the {Program} key.
ARQ002S
C Press [m Register].
D Select the number of the program in which you want to register the settings.
Program numbers with m already have settings in them.
The soft keyboard appears.
E Enter the program name.
You can enter up to 40 characters.
127
Various Scan Settings
F Press [OK].
The Program screen reappears. When the settings are successfully registered,
m appears on the left side of the registered program number and the program
name appears on the right side. The initial screen reappears after a moment.
Recalling a Program
To recall settings registered in a program and use them for scanning:
A Press the {Program} key.
ARQ002S
B Press [B Recall].
6
C Press the number of the program you want to recall.
Settings registered in the program are recalled and the initial scanner screen
reappears.
Settings are not registered in numbers that appear without m.
D Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
128
Programs
Changing a Registered Program
To change the settings registered to a program:
A Press the {Program} key.
ARQ002S
B Press [B Recall].
C Press the number of the program you want to change.
D Change settings of the program.
E Press the {Program} key.
F Press [m Register].
G Press the number of the program whose settings you changed or the num-
6
ber of a different program in which you want to register the changed settings.
H If you select a program that is already registered, a confirmation message
appears. To overwrite the program, press [Register].
If you select a new program number, you can omit this step. Proceed to the
next step.
I Enter a program name.
J Press [OK].
If overwritten, the registered program is deleted.
The new program name appears briefly, and then the initial screen reappears
after a moment.
129
Various Scan Settings
Deleting a Program
To delete a registered program:
A Press the {Program} key.
ARQ002S
B Press [Delete].
6
C Press the number of the program you want to delete.
D Press [Yes].
The program is deleted, and the initial screen reappears after a moment.
Changing the Registered Program Name
To change the name of a registered program:
A Press the {Program} key.
ARQ002S
B Press [Change Name].
C Press the number of the program whose name you want to change.
130
Programs
D Enter a new program name.
A program name can be entered using up to 40 characters.
E Press [OK].
The new program name appears briefly, and then the initial screen reappears.
6
131
Various Scan Settings
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner
This section explains how to specify original orientation and scan setting for a
bundle of mixed size originals when using the TWAIN scanner.
Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner
To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a client computer, the placement of the original and the settings made in the Scanner
Control dialog box must match.
A Open the Scanner Control dialog box.
For details about how to open the Scanner Control dialog box, see "Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation".
B In the [Original Scan Method:] list, select the place where the original is placed.
C In the [Orig.Orientn.:] list, select [
] or [
].
D In the [Orientation:] list, select [
/
], [
/
],
6
[
/
], or [
/
].
E If an original is placed in the ADF, from the drop down menu of [Scan Settings], select [1 Sided], [2 Sided(Top to Top)], or [2 Sided(Top to Bottom)].
Reference
p.99 “Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation”
Placing Originals
The following table shows the relationship between the original orientation and
the Scanner Properties dialog box settings:
❖ Exposure Glass
Original Orientation
top edge touches top left of exposure glass
This orientation is the TWAIN driver's standard setting. Place originals in this orientation
normally.
top edge touches rear of exposure glass
132
TWAIN Scanner Control Dialog Box Key
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner
❖ ADF
Original Orientation
TWAIN Scanner Control Dialog Box Key
top edge of original placed first
top edge touches rear of ADF
Note
❒ Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the
table above uses squares to make original orientation easier to understand.
Even if the actual shape of the original is different, the combination of original
orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver does not
change.
❒ For details about the Scanner Control dialog box, see the TWAIN driver Help.
❒ Depending on the settings, originals of different sizes are scanned differently.
6
When Scanning Originals of Mixed Sizes Using TWAIN Scanner
This section explains the differences between scanning mixed-size originals using the TWAIN scanner and normal scanning.
• If [Auto detect(Mixed-size)] is selected in the [Original Size:] list, the machine detects the length of each same-width original and then scans them.
• If [Auto detect(Uni-size)] is selected in the [Original Size:] list, the machine detects
the size of the first original of the batch and scans all subsequent originals at
that size.
133
Various Scan Settings
6
134
7. Appendix
The appendix details specifications of the scanner function and explains supplementary settings.
Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size
This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size.
Resolution and scan size are inversely related. The higher the resolution (dpi) is
set, the smaller the area that can be scanned. Conversely, the larger the scan area,
the lower the resolution that can be set.
The relationship between the scanning resolution and the scan size is shown below. If the combination is unreadable, "Exceeded max. data capacity. Check the
scanning resolution, then press Start again." appears on the machine's control panel display. Change the condition until scanning is enabled.
Note
❒ Image compression level can limit Maximum image size.
135
Appendix
When Using E-mail, Folder Sending, Storing or Network Delivery
Function
This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when using the e-mail, Scan to Folder, storing, or network delivery scanner function.
❖ If [Text (Print)], [Text (OCR)], [Text / Photo], or [Photo] is selected for Scan Type
All combinations up to A3/297 × 432 mm (11 × 17 inches) and 600 dpi can be
scanned.
❖ If [Gray Scale] is selected for Scan Type
The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with
100 dpi
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
7
A6
A7
11×17
Legal (81/2×14)
81/2×13
Letter (81/2×11)
51/2×81/2
Note
❒ Enter B6, A6, and A7 sizes directly.
• B6 → (5.0 × 7.1 inches)
• A6 → (4.1 × 5.8 inches)
• A7 → (2.9 × 4.1 inches)
136
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
in the table.
600 dpi
Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner
This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when using the machine as a TWAIN scanner.
To specify the scan area or resolution on the machine you are using as a network
TWAIN scanner directly, see the TWAIN driver Help.
❖ If [Binary(Text)] or [Binary(Photo)] is selected in [Col./Grad.:]
The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with
if Original Orientation is L.
100
dpi
200
dpi
300
dpi
400
dpi
500
dpi
600
dpi
700
dpi
800
dpi
900
dpi
in the table
1000 1100 1200
dpi dpi dpi
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
7
A7
11×17
Legal (81/2×14)
81/2×13
Letter (81/2×11)
51/2×81/2
Note
❒ Enter size A7 (2.9 × 4.1 inches) directly.
137
Appendix
❖ If [Gray Scale] is selected in [Col./Grad.:]
The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with
if Original Orientation is L.
100
dpi
200
dpi
300
dpi
400
dpi
500
dpi
600
dpi
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
A7
11×17
Legal (81/2×14)
81/2×13
Letter (81/2×11)
7
51/2×81/2
Note
❒ Enter size A7 (2.9 × 4.1 inches) directly.
138
700
dpi
800
dpi
900
dpi
in the table
1000 1100 1200
dpi dpi dpi
Scan Settings and File Types
Scan Settings and File Types
This section explains about the relationship between the file type specified when
scanning originals and the file type to which files are converted when sending
by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
❖ Single-page file type
Scan Type
TIFF/JPEG specified
PDF specified
Text (Print), Text (OCR),
Text / Photo, Photo
TIFF
PDF
Gray Scale
TIFF (uncompressed) / JPEG (compressed)
PDF
Scan Type
TIFF specified
PDF specified
Text (Print), Text (OCR),
Text / Photo, Photo
TIFF
PDF
Gray Scale
TIFF (uncompressed)
PDF
❖ Multi-page file type
Note
❒ When you select to convert a scanned original to a single-page TIFF/JPEG
file, if [Gray Scale] is selected in [Scan Type] under [Scan Settings], depending
on the [Compression (Gray Scale)] setting under [Scanner Features], the file type
changes as follows:
7
• [On]...JPEG
• [Off]...TIFF
❒ When you set [Compression (Gray Scale)] to [On] under [Scanner Features], if you
specify [Gray Scale] in [Scan Type] under [Scan Settings], you cannot select
multi-page TIFF as the file type.
❒ Files are stored in single-page format. When sending files by e-mail or Scan
to Folder, you can select single-page or multi-page format.
❒ JPEG format files cannot be sent as a multi-page TIFF file even if you specify
to send it as a multi-page TIFF. The file is sent in a default format other than
multi-page TIFF.
139
Appendix
Software Supplied on CD-ROM
This section explains the applications on the supplied "Scanner Driver and Utilities" or "Scanner Driver/Font Manager and Utilities" CD-ROM.
Auto-Run Program
This section explains the auto-run program.
When the CD-ROM is inserted into a client computer running Windows
95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server2003, or Windows NT 4.0, the installer
starts up automatically (auto run) to install various software.
Note
❒ For installation under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, log on as an Administrators group member.
7
❒ Auto-run program may not automatically work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, start "Setup.exe" on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ To disable auto-run, set CD-ROM while pressing Shift key. Keep the Shift
key pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
❒ If [Cancel] is pressed during installation, the installation of all the software
thereafter will be stopped. If cancelled, reinstall the remaining software after
restarting the client computer.
TWAIN Driver
This section tells you the file path to the TWAIN driver and the TWAIN driver's
system requirements.
You must install this driver if you want to scan originals or use the machine as a
network TWAIN scanner.
❖ File path
The TWAIN driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
❖ System requirements
• Computer hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
This driver cannot be used in RISC-based processor (MIPS R series, Alpha
AXP, or PowerPC) Windows NT environments.
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Display resolution
800×600 pixels, 256 colors or higher
140
Software Supplied on CD-ROM
DeskTopBinder Lite
This section tells you the file path to DeskTopBinder Lite, the DeskTopBinder
Lite system requirements, and the applications that are installed with DeskTopBinder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is installed on the client computers to integrate and manage various kinds of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and existing
scan files. This software allows you to use various functions for stored scan files
such as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery software, you
can view the files stored in in-trays of the delivery server or use other functions
for stored files. For details about DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite
manuals or DeskTopBinder Lite Help.
❖ File path
DeskTopBinder Lite is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
❖ System requirements
• Computer hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system
properly
• Operating system
When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder Microsoft Windows
98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or later/ 2000
Advanced Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
7
When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Microsoft Windows 95 SP1/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
• Display resolution
800×600 pixels, 64K colors or higher
141
Appendix
❖ Software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite
• Auto Document Link
Auto Document Link on the client computer monitors in-trays of the delivery server periodically, retrieves files delivered to in-trays, and notifies the
user of delivery.
• Function Palette
Function Palette allows you to use DeskTopBinder functions such as Scan
using TWAIN scanner or Print without starting DeskTopBinder. To use
these functions from Function Palette, you must first configure them using
DeskTopBinder Extended Features. For details about Function Palette, see
DeskTopBinder manuals.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client provides functions for continuous device
status monitoring on the network via TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
7
142
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function
Values of Various Set Items for
Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function
This section explains the values of various transmission/storage/delivery function settings.
Note
❒ Depending on the type or settings of the file or original, you may not be able
to specify the destination or enter the maximum number of characters stated
below.
Transmission Function
This section explains the values of transmission function settings.
Sending E-mail
The following table tells you the maximum values of the e-mail sending function
settings.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of subject line characters
128 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of e-mail message
characters
80 alphanumeric characters
This is the total number of characters selected from the list and
the number of characters entered directly from text.
Number of e-mail address char- 128 alphanumeric characacters
ters
E-mail addresses found via
LDAP server search cannot be
selected if they contain more
than 128 characters.
Number of addresses you can
specify at the same time
500 addresses
You can specify 100 destinations by direct entry, including
LDAP search. Select the remaining 400 destinations from registered addresses.
Sendable file size
725.3 MB per file
-
Sendable number of pages
1,000 pages per file
-
7
143
Appendix
Folder transmission
The following table tells you the maximum values of the Scan to Folder function
settings.
7
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of path name characters on SMB
128 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of user name characters on SMB
64 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of password characters on SMB
64 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of server name charac- 64 alphanumeric characters on FTP
ters
-
Number of path name characters on FTP
128 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of user name characters on FTP
64 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of password characters on FTP
64 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of path name characters on NCP
128 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of user name characters on NCP
64 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of password characters on NCP
64 alphanumeric characters
-
Number of addresses you can
specify at the same time
50 addresses
Sendable file size
2,000 MB per file
You can specify a maximum of
50 directly entered destinations.
-
Simultaneous Transmission
The following table tells you the maximum values of settings for using the Email and Scan to Folder functions simultaneously.
Item
144
Maximum value
Comments
Number of destinations you can 550 addresses
select for E-mail and Scan to
Folder
-
Number of destinations you can 500 addresses
select for sending by e-mail
You can specify a maximum of
100 directly entered destinations, including LDAP searchretrieved destinations.
Number of destinations you can 50 addresses
set for sending by Scan to Folder
-
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function
Storage Function
The following table tells you the maximum values of the storage function settings.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of file name characters 64 alphanumeric characters
On the control panel, the first 16
characters are displayed. When
viewing the stored files from a
client computer using DeskTopBinder, all the entered characters can be viewed.
Number of user name characters
20 alphanumeric characters
On the control panel, the first 16
characters are displayed. When
viewing the stored files from a
client computer using DeskTopBinder, all the entered characters can be viewed.
Number of password characters
4-8 digit number
-
Number of stored files you can
select at the same time
30 files
-
Storable number of files
3,000 files
This is the total number of files
stored under the scanner, copier, document server, and printer functions.
Storable number of pages
9,000 pages
This is the total number of files
stored under the scanner, copier, document server, and printer functions.
Storable number of pages per
file
1,000 pages
-
Storable size
2,000 MB per file
-
7
145
Appendix
Network Delivery Function
The following table tells you the values of setting items for the network delivery
scanner function.
Item
Maximum value
Comments
Number of subject line characters
128 alphanumeric characters
This is the total number of characters selected from the list and
the number of characters entered directly from text.
Number of e-mail address char- 128 alphanumeric characacters
ters
Number of addresses you can
specify at the same time
500 addresses
You can specify 65 destinations
by direct entry, including
LDAP search. Select the remaining 435 destinations from registered addresses
The maximum number of destinations you can specify differs
depending on which ScanRouter delivery software you are using. For details, see the manuals
supplied with the ScanRouter
delivery software.
7
Sendable file size
146
2,000 MB per file
-
Specifications
Specifications
The following table tells you the specifications of the scanner.
Scan method
Flatbed scanning
Scan speed
When using the E-mail/Scan to Folder/Network Delivery Scanner function:
52 page/min
(Original size: A4K, Scan Type: Text (Print),
Resolution: 200 dpi, Compression (Black &
White): On, ITU-T No1 Chart, 1-side scanning)
Scanning speed differs depending on the following; operating environment of the machine
and computer, scan settings, and the content
of originals (denser images require more
time).
Image sensor type
CCD Image Sensor
Scan type
Sheet, book
Interface
Ethernet interface (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX),
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) (optional)
Maximum scan size
A3/297 × 432 mm, 11 × 17 inches
Scan sizes automatically detectable from the
exposure glass
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"K,
81/2"×11"L
Scan sizes automatically detectable from the
ADF
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"K,
81/2"×11"L, 51/2" × 81/2"K, 51/2" × 81/2"L,
10" × 14"L
Basic scanning resolution
600 dpi (8-bit gray scale)
Selectable scanning resolutions when using
the E-mail/Scan to Folder/Network delivery
scanner function
100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
Selectable scanning resolution when using
TWAIN scanner
100 dpi to 1200 dpi
Sendable file formats
TIFF, JPEG, PDF
Image compression type for black and white
(two-value)
TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
Image compression type for gray scale
JPEG
Network protocol
TCP/IP, IPX
Protocol for sending e-mail
SMTP, POP3
Protocol for Scan to Folder
SMB, FTP, NCP
7
147
INDEX
E
Edit, 111
E-mail, 11, 136
E-mail address, 12
E-mail destination, 18
destination list, 19
machine’s address book, 18
registration numbers, 19
E-mail message, 30
Entering an e-mail address, 21
Entering registration numbers, 88
Entering the path, 46
Erase border, 111
Ethernet, 12, 37, 80, 97
Exposure glass, 110, 115, 132
1 Sided Orig., 112
2 Sided Orig., 112
A
Address Book, 12, 38, 45
ADF, 110, 115, 132
Advanced search, 20, 22, 28, 45
Attach Subject, 29, 93
Auto Detect, 103
Auto Image Density, 102
Auto-run program, 140
B
Batch, 116
Bindery, 52, 54
F
File information, 63, 64, 65
File name, 63, 64, 76, 124
File type, 124
Folder sending, 136
FTP, 36
FTP server, 50
Functions, 3
C
CD-ROM, 140
Changing a file name, 76
Changing a password, 77
Changing a stored file's information, 74
Changing a user name, 74
Checking stored files from a client computer, 70
Confirmation displays, 4
check modes, 4
scanned files status, 5
CSV file, 12, 38
Custom size, 103, 104, 107, 110
D
Deleting a stored file, 73
Delivering files, 83
Delivery destination, 87
Delivery server, 79, 87
DeskTopBinder Lite, 70, 79, 81, 141
Destination
delivery, 87
e-mail, 18
scan to folder, 43
Destination list, 19, 44
Destination list settings, 7
Display
confirmation displays, 4
Display panel, 4
Divide, 119
148
G
Gray Scale, 102
I
Image density, 102
Initial settings, 7
Install, 81, 98
I/O device, 80
J
JPEG, 139
L
LDAP, 11
LDAP server, 22
List of stored files, 66
M
Managing stored files, 73
Manual entry, 21, 46
Message, 30
Mixed sizes, 103, 133
Multi-pages, 139
N
NCP, 52, 54
NDS, 52, 54
NetWare, 37, 52, 54
Network Delivery, 136
Notice, 1
O
One-sided original, 112
Original feed type, 114
P
Password, 63, 65, 77
PDF, 124, 139
Photo, 102
Placing an original, 110
Preparation
deliver, 80
scan to folder, 37
sending by e-mail, 12
using the network TWAIN scanner, 97
Programs, 127
changing registered program, 129
changing the name, 130
deleting, 130
recalling, 128
registering, 127
R
Registering a destination, 25
Registering in the address book, 25
Registering the path, 56
Registration numbers, 19, 27, 44, 88, 91
Resolution, 102
Resolution and scan size, 135, 137
Result of sending, 5
Return Receipt, 14, 83
S
SADF, 116
Scanned files status, 5
Scanner Features, 7
Scanning multiple pages, 122
ScanRouter delivery software, 79
Scan settings, 7, 101
Scan Size, 103
Scan to Folder, 35, 40
Scan to folder destination, 43
Scan Type, 102, 136
Screen
e-mail, 13
network delivery scanner, 82
Scan to Folder, 39
stored files, 66
Search by comment, 88
Searching by file name, 69
Searching by user name, 68, 92
Searching the delivery server’s
destination list, 88
Searching the list of stored files, 68
Searching the machine’s address book, 20
Selecting destinations, 18, 43, 87
Sender, 26, 27, 28, 90
Sender name, 26, 27, 28, 90, 91, 92
Sending by Scan to Folder, 35
Sending files
FTP, 50
NetWare server, 52
shared network folder, 46
Sending scan files by e-mail, 11, 14
Sending stored files, 71
Sending the URL by e-mail, 33
Send settings, 7
Send & Store, 32, 57, 94
Setting file name, 125
Setting file type, 124
Single page, 139
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 12, 38
SMB, 35, 48
SMTP, 11
Specifications, 147
Specifying the message, 30
Specifying the path, 48
Specifying the sender, 26, 90
Specifying the subject, 93
Stamp, 120
Storage, 32, 57, 94
Stored file's information, 74
Store only, 61
Storing, 59, 136
Storing scan files, 32, 57, 61, 94
Subject, 29, 93
Subject/Message, 29, 30, 31
Switching screen
e-mail screen, 17
network delivery scanner screen, 86
scan to folder, 42
Symbols, 2
149
T
Template size, 103
Text (OCR), 102
Text / Photo, 102
Text (Print), 102
TIFF, 139
TIFF/JPEG, 124
Transmission function
folder transmission, 144
sending e-mail, 143
simultaneous transmission, 144
TWAIN Driver, 98, 99, 140
TWAIN scanner, 95, 96, 99, 132, 133, 137
setting original orientation, 132
Two-sided original, 112
U
URL, 33
User name, 63, 74
User Tools / Counter, 7
V
Values of various set items, 143
network delivery function, 146
storage function, 145
transmission function, 143
W
Web Image Monitor, 12, 38, 59, 70
Wireless LAN, 12, 37, 80, 97
150
EN
USA
D313-6603
Trademarks
Adobe®, PostScript®, and Acrobat® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
NetWare® is a registered trademark of Novell, inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
•
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95.
•
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98.
•
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
•
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
•
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
•
The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
•
The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions Scanner Reference
EN USA D313-6603
Network Guide
1
Using a Printer Server
2
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
3
Special Operations under Windows
4
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Software Version Conventions Used in This Manual
•
NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2.
•
NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11, 4.2 and IntranetWare.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Trouble Shooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or
prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy/Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided. This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and settings that might not be available on
this machine. Images, illustrations, and information about operating systems
that are supported might also differ slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• Manuals for This Machine
• Safety Information
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference Fax Guide
• Quick Reference Printer Guide
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
• PostScript 3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and set not be available on this machine.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Setting Up the Machine on a Network..................................................................2
Printer/LAN-Fax .........................................................................................................2
Internet Fax ................................................................................................................4
E-mail .........................................................................................................................7
Scan to Folder..........................................................................................................10
Network Delivery Scanner........................................................................................ 12
Network TWAIN Scanner .........................................................................................14
Document Server .....................................................................................................16
1. Using a Printer Server
Preparing Printer Server .....................................................................................19
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................19
Using NetWare .....................................................................................................21
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x) .............................................................22
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5) .....................................23
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 / 5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment................................... 24
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x) ........................................................26
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5) ................................ 28
2. Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using Web Image Monitor...................................................................................31
Displaying Top Page ................................................................................................33
When user authentication is set ...............................................................................34
About Menu and Mode.............................................................................................35
Access in the Administrator Mode............................................................................36
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help........................................................................37
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ...............................................................38
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .................................................................39
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration.............................................. 40
Locking the Menus on the Machine's Control Panel ................................................41
Changing the Paper Type ........................................................................................ 41
Managing User Information......................................................................................42
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode ........................................................................45
Setting a Password ..................................................................................................45
Checking the Machine Status ..................................................................................46
Changing Names and Comments ............................................................................47
Load Fax Journal .....................................................................................................48
Viewing and Deleting Spool Print Jobs ....................................................................48
Managing Address Information ................................................................................49
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ................................................................50
Monitoring Printers ...................................................................................................50
Checking the Machine Status ..................................................................................50
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .............................................. 51
iii
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail..................................................................52
Auto E-mail Notification............................................................................................53
On-demand E-mail Notification ................................................................................54
Mail authentication ...................................................................................................55
On-demand E-mail Notification ................................................................................56
Remote Maintenance by telnet ...........................................................................58
Using telnet ..............................................................................................................58
access ......................................................................................................................59
appletalk...................................................................................................................59
autonet .....................................................................................................................60
btconfig.....................................................................................................................60
devicename..............................................................................................................61
dhcp .........................................................................................................................61
diprint ....................................................................................................................... 62
dns ...........................................................................................................................63
domainname ............................................................................................................64
help ..........................................................................................................................65
hostname .................................................................................................................65
ifconfig......................................................................................................................66
info ...........................................................................................................................67
ipp ............................................................................................................................67
netware .................................................................................................................... 68
passwd .....................................................................................................................69
prnlog ....................................................................................................................... 70
rendezvous...............................................................................................................70
route .........................................................................................................................71
set ............................................................................................................................72
show.........................................................................................................................74
slp.............................................................................................................................74
smb ..........................................................................................................................74
snmp ........................................................................................................................75
sntp ..........................................................................................................................78
spoolsw .................................................................................................................... 79
ssdp..........................................................................................................................79
status........................................................................................................................80
syslog ....................................................................................................................... 80
upnp .........................................................................................................................80
web...........................................................................................................................81
wiconfig .................................................................................................................... 82
wins ..........................................................................................................................84
SNMP.....................................................................................................................86
Getting Printer Information over the Network...................................................87
Current Printer Status ..............................................................................................87
Printer configuration .................................................................................................93
Understanding the Displayed Information ........................................................94
Print Job Information ................................................................................................94
Print Log Information................................................................................................94
Configuring the Network Interface Board .................................................................95
Message List ......................................................................................................101
System Log Information ......................................................................................... 101
iv
3. Special Operations under Windows
Printing Files Directly from Windows ..............................................................107
Setup......................................................................................................................107
Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address........................................................107
Printing Commands................................................................................................109
4. Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal Service / MetaFrame.................................... 111
Operating Environment ..........................................................................................111
Supported Printer Drivers.......................................................................................111
Limitations ..............................................................................................................112
Using DHCP........................................................................................................114
Using AutoNet ........................................................................................................115
Precautions ........................................................................................................116
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network ............................................................116
NetWare Printing.................................................................................................... 118
When the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit Is Installed ...................................119
Information about Installed Applications ........................................................120
RSA® BSAFE .........................................................................................................120
Specifications.....................................................................................................121
INDEX....................................................................................................... 123
v
vi
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
1
Setting Up the Machine on a Network
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (System Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the interface to be connected.
Important
❒ These settings should be made by the systems administrator, or after consulting with the systems administrator.
❖ Viewing the Information Displayed in the List
$ These items must be set to use the function. Be sure to set them before attempting to use the corresponding function.
These items must be set if required.
Printer/LAN-Fax
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
Ping Command
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Machine Name
2
$
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Machine Name
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication
Mode
$
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Encryption)
Setting
Transmission Speed
*1
*2
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the
selected interface has priority.
Check [Effective] is selected for TCP/IP.
3
Internet Fax
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
$
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *4
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
File Transfer
SMTP Server *2
$
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol *3
$
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings *5
Administrator's Email Address *7
E-mail Communication Port *3 *6
E-mail Reception Interval
Max. Reception Email Size
E-mail Storage in
Server
Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
Program / Change /
Delete Subject
4
$
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
File Transfer
Fax E-mail Account *2
$
*3
Auto Specify Sender
Name
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
$
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *4
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication
Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Encryption)
Setting
Transmission Speed
5
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
File Transfer
SMTP Server *2
$
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol *3
$
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings *5
Administrator's Email Address *7
E-mail Communication Port *3 *6
$
E-mail Reception Interval
Max. Reception Email Size
E-mail Storage in
Server
Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
Program / Change /
Delete Subject
Fax E-mail Account *2
$
*3
Auto Specify Sender
Name
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
6
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected interface has priority.
Minimum settings required to use transmission.
Minimum settings required to use reception.
Check[Effective] is selected for TCP/IP.
If you select [On] for [POP before SMTP], select this function also.
If you select [On] for [POP before SMTP], check the port number for [POP3].
If you select [On] for [SMTP Authentication], select this function also.
E-mail
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
$
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
File Transfer
SMTP Server
$
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings *3
Administrator's Email Address
E-mail Communication Port *4
Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
Program / Change /
Delete Subject
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner
Recalls
Auto Specify Sender
Name
7
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
$
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication
Mode
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Encryption)
Setting
Transmission Speed
8
$
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
File Transfer
SMTP Server
$
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol *3
Administrator's Email Address
E-mail Communication Port *4
Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
Program / Change /
Delete Subject
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner
Recalls
Auto Specify Sender
Name
*1
*2
*3
*4
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected interface has priority.
Check [Effective] is selected for TCP/IP.
If you select [On] for [POP before SMTP], select this function as well.
If you select [On] for [POP before SMTP], check the port number for [POP3].
9
Scan to Folder
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
$
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
File Transfer
Default User Name /
Password (Send)
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner
Recalls
10
$
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
$
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication
Mode
$
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Encryption)
Setting
Transmission Speed
File Transfer
Default User Name /
Password (Send)
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner
Recalls
*1
*2
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the
selected interface has priority.
Check [Effective] is selected for TCP/IP.
11
Network Delivery Scanner
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *3
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
File Transfer
Delivery Option *2
Fax RX File Transmission
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner
Recalls
12
$
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *3
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication
Mode
$
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Encryption)
Setting
Transmission Speed
File Transfer
Delivery Option *2
Fax RX File Transmission
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner
Recalls
*1
*2
*3
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the
selected interface has priority.
When delivery option is set to [On], make sure the IP address is set.
Check [Effective] is selected for TCP/IP.
13
Network TWAIN Scanner
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
14
$
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication
Mode
$
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Encryption)
Setting
Transmission Speed
*1
*2
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected interface has priority.
Check [Effective] is selected for TCP/IP.
15
Document Server
Interface
Ethernet
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
16
$
Interface
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
Settings
Interface Settings/Network
IP Address
$
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol *2
$
NCP Delivery Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type *1
$
Permit SNMP V3
Communication
Permit SSL / TLS
Communication
Host Name
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication
Mode
$
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Encryption)
Setting
Transmission Speed
*1
*2
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the
selected interface has priority.
Check [Effective] is selected for TCP/IP.
17
18
1. Using a Printer Server
Preparing Printer Server
This section explains how to configure the machine as a Windows network
printer. The machine is configured to enabling network clients to use it. When
the network printer is connected via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you can set
the printing notification function to notify clients of the results of their print jobs.
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003, to
change printer properties in the [Printer] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the
PowerUsers group.
A Open the [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.
The [Printers] window appears.
Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, [Printer and Fax] window appears.
B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
C On the [Sharing] tab, click [Shared this printer].
D To share the machine with users using a different version of Windows,
click [Additional Drivers...].
If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting [Shared this printer] during the printer driver installation, this step can be ignored.
E Click [OK], and then close the printer properties.
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Follow the procedure below to configure the machine to use the printing notification function of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
Setting the print server
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003, to
change printer properties in the [Printer] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the
PowerUsers group.
19
Using a Printer Server
A From the [Start] button on the task bar, point to [Programs], point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then click [Print Server Setting].
The print server setting dialog box appears.
B Select the [Notify client PCs of printout/data-transmission ] check box, and then
1
click [OK].
After print server setting is made, a dialog box appears. Confirm the dialog
box content, and click [OK].
Click [Cancel] to interrupt the procedure.
A dialog box appears for client setting.
C Click [OK].
The print server setting is completed. Each client must be set to receive print
notification.
Note
❒ Current printing jobs restart from the beginning after the spooler pauses
briefly.
❒ When the expansion function is not used, the function is automatically set
as available.
❒ If you log on using an account that does not have Administrator privileges,
the client may not be notified.
Setting a Client
A From the [Start] button on the task bar, point to [Program], point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then click [Extended Features Settings].
A dialog box for setting the expansion function appears.
B
Select the [Notify of printout/data-transmission/cancellation.] check box, and then
click [Detailed Settings].
C Select the [Notify of printout/data-transmission when using print server] check box
on the [Notification Settings] screen.
D Click [OK].
The dialog box for setting the expansion function closes. The client setting is
completed.
Note
❒ Set the printing notification function on the printer driver as well as on
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
20
Using NetWare
Using NetWare
This section describes the setting procedure for network printers in the NetWare
environment. In the NetWare environment, you can connect the machine as a
“print server” or “remote printer”.
1
Important
❒ IPv6 cannot be used on this function.
❖ Setting procedure
• When using the machine as a print server
A Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
B Setting the network interface board.
C Turning the machine off and then back on.
• When using the machine as a remote printer
A Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B Setting the network interface board.
C Setting NetWare.
D Starting the print server.
Note
❒ This procedure assumes an environment is already prepared for normal NetWare running the printing service setting.
❒ The procedure is explained with the following example settings:
• File server’s name …CAREE
• Print server’s name …PSERV
• Printer’s name …R-PRN
• Queue name …R-QUEUE
❖ Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
To use the machine in a NetWare environment, use SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin to set the NetWare printing environment.
Note
❒ The NetWare Client provided by Novell is required to set the printing environment using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin under the following environments:
• NDS mode in Windows 95/98/Me
• NDS or Bindery mode in Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0
Reference
For details about installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see p.39 “Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”
21
Using a Printer Server
❖ Printers listed by SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin lists printers connected to the network. If
you cannot identify the machine you want to configure, print configuration
page, and then check the machine name.
1
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine as a print server using NetWare 3.x.
A Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the [Start] menu.
C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].
D Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [Finish].
A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in
the Web browser appears. Click [OK], and then wait until Web Image Monitor
starts automatically.
E A dialog box for entering the [User Name] and [Password] appears.
Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
F Click [Configuration] in the left area, click [Network], and then click [NetWare].
• Print Server Name: Enter the NetWare print server name. To use the interface board as a print server, enter the name of a print server that is not active on the file server. Use up to 47 characters.
• Logon Mode: Specify whether to designate a file server or NDS tree when
logging on to NetWare.
• File Server Name: When a file server name is entered here, only the specified file server is searched for. This item is mandatory. Use up to 47 characters.
• NDS Tree: To enable NDS mode, enter the name of the NDS tree you want
to log on to. Use up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
• NDS Context Name: To enable NDS mode, enter the print server context.
Use up to 127 characters.
• Operation Mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a print server or a remote printer.
• Remote Printer No.: This item is effective when the interface board is specified as a remote printer. Enter the same number as the number of the
printer to be created on the print server (0 to 254 characters).
22
Using NetWare
• Job Timeout: When the interface board is used as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot detect when a print job ends. Therefore, the printer
terminates printing when a certain period of time has elapsed since it last
received print data (i.e., when it has not received print data for a certain period of time). Specify here this period of time (3 to 255 seconds). The initial
value is 15 (seconds).
• Frame Type: Select the frame type from the drop-down menu.
• Print Server Protocol: Select the protocol for NetWare from the drop-down
menu.
• NCP Delivery Protocol: Select the protocol for NCP delivery.
1
G Confirm the settings, and then click [Apply].
Configuration is now complete. Wait several before restarting Web Image
Monitor.
H Click [Logout].
Note
❒ To check the configuration is correct, enter the following from the command prompt:
F:> USERLIST
❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as
a connected user.
❒ If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer
name against the configuration page printed from the printer. For details
about printing a configuration page, see “Printer Reference”.
❒ If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs
for the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to
change the frame type of the computer.
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine as a print server using NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5 / 5.1, or NetWare 6 / 6.5.
Important
❒ When using the printer as a print server in NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5 / 5.1, or
NetWare 6 / 6.5, set it to the NDS mode.
❒ When using NetWare 5 / 5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5, set the printer as a print server.
A Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the [Start] menu.
C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].
23
Using a Printer Server
D Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [Finish].
A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in
the Web browser appears. Click [OK], and then wait until Web Image Monitor
starts automatically.
1
E A dialog box for entering the [User Name] and [Password] appears.
Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
F Click [Configuration] in the left area, click [Network], and then click [NetWare].
G Confirm the settings, and then click [Apply].
Configuration is now complete. Wait several minutes before restarting Web
Image Monitor.
H Click [Logout].
Reference
p.22 “Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)”
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 / 5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine as a print server in a pure IP
environment of NetWare 5 / 5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5.
Important
❒ When creating a queued print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5
/ 5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5, create a print queue on the file server using NetWare
Administrator.
❒ This printer is not available as a remote printer for use in a pure IP environment.
Setting up using NWadmin
A From Windows, start NWadmin.
For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.
B Select the object in which the print queue is located in the directory tree,
and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
C In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Queue], and then click [OK].
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue.
E In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse].
24
Using NetWare
F In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and then click [OK].
G Check the settings, and then click [Create].
H Select the object in which the printer is located, and then click [Create] on
1
the [Object] menu.
I In the [Class of new object] box, click [Printer], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non NDPS)].
J In the [Printer name] box, enter the printer name.
K Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
L Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
M In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click [OK].
N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel] in the [Printer type] list, and then click
[Communication].
O Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] area, and then click [OK].
P Check the settings, and then click [OK].
Q Select a context specified using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [Create] on
the [Object] menu.
R In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Server], and then click [OK]. For
NetWare 5, click [Print Sever (Non NDPS)].
S In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the print server name.
Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.
T Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
U Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
V In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click [OK].
W Check the settings, and then click [OK].
X Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.
❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
25
Using a Printer Server
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the [Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
D Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [Finish].
1
A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in
the Web browser appears. Click [OK], and then wait until Web Image Monitor
starts automatically.
E A dialog box for entering the [User Name] and [Password] appears.
Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
For details about the login name and password, consult your network administrator.
F Click [Configuration] in the left area, click [Network], and then click [NetWare].
G Confirm the settings, and then click [Apply].
Configuration is now complete. Wait several minutes before restarting Web
Image Monitor.
H Click [Logout].
Reference
For details , see p.22 “Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)”
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to use the machine as a remote printer under NetWare 3.x.
Setting up using PCONSOLE
A Enter “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE
B Create a print queue.
When using the existing print queue, go to the procedure for creating a printer.
C From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information], and then
press the {Enter} key.
26
D Press {Insert} key, and then enter a print queue name.
E Press {Esc} key to return to the [Available Options] menu.
Using NetWare
F Set up the network connection to a printer.
G On the [Available Options] menu, click [Print Server Information], and then press
the {Enter} key.
1
H To create a new print server, press the {Insert} key, and then enter a print
server name.
For a currently defined print server, select a print server in the [Print Server]
list.
Use the same printer name specified using NIB Setup Tool.
I From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
J From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
K Select the printer indicated as [Not Installed].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using
NIB Setup Tool.
L To change the printer name, enter a new name.
A name “printer x” is assigned to the printer. The “x” stands for the number
of the selected printer.
M As type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1].
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.
N Press the {Esc} key, and then click [Yes] on the confirmation message.
O Press the {Esc} key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu].
P Assign print queues to the created printer.
Q From [Print Server Configuration Menu], select [Queues Serviced By Printer].
R Select the printer created.
S Press the {Insert} key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
You can select several queues.
T Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.
Following these steps, check that the queues are assigned.
U Press
the {Esc} key until "Exit?" appears, and then select [Yes] to exit
PCONSOLE.
V Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.
27
Using a Printer Server
❖ To quit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
1
Note
❒ If the printer works as configured, the message “Waiting for job” appears.
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the [Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
D Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [Finish].
A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in
the Web browser appears. Click [OK], and then wait until Web Image Monitor
starts automatically.
E A dialog box for entering the [User Name] and [Password] appears.
Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
F Click [Configuration] in the left area, click [Network], and then click [NetWare].
G Confirm the settings, and then click [Apply].
Configuration is now complete. Wait several minutes before restarting Web
Image Monitor.
H Click [Logout].
Reference
For details, see p.22 “Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)”
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)
Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1 and 6 / 6.5.
Important
❒ To use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5, set
it to NDS mode.
❒ Do not use the printer as a remote printer when Pure IP is used.
28
Using NetWare
Setting up using NWadmin
A From Windows, start NWadmin.
1
For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.
B Set up the network connection to a print queue. Select the object in which
the print queue is located in the directory tree, and then click [Create] on the
[Object] menu.
C In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Queue], and then click [OK].
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue.
E In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse].
F In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and then click [OK].
G Check the settings, and then click [Create].
H Set up the network connection to a printer. Select the object in which the
printer is located, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
I In the [Class of new object] box, click [Printer], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non NDPS)].
J In the [Printer name] box, enter the printer name
K Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
L Assign print queues to the created printer. Click [Assignments], and then
click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
M In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click [OK].
N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel] in the [Printer type] list, and then click
[Communication].
O Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] area, and then click [OK].
Check the settings, and then click [OK].
P Set up the network connection to a print server. Select a context specified
using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
Q In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Server], and then click [OK]. For
NetWare 5, click [Print Sever (Non NDPS)].
R In the [Print Server Name:] box, enter the print server name.
Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.
S Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
T Assign the printer to the created print server. Click [Assignments], and then
click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
29
Using a Printer Server
U In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click [OK].
V In the [Printers] area, click the printer you assigned, and then click [Printer
Number]
1
W Enter the printer number, and then click [OK]. Check the settings, and then
click [OK].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using
NIB Setup Tool.
X Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.
❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the [Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
D Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [Finish].
A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in
the Web browser appears. Click [OK], and then wait until Web Image Monitor
starts automatically.
E A dialog box for entering the [User Name] and [Password] appears.
Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
F Click [Configuration] in the left area, click [Network], and then click [NetWare].
G Confirm the settings, and then click [Apply].
Configuration is now complete. Wait several minutes before restarting Web
Image Monitor.
H Click [Logout].
Reference
For details, see p.22 “Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)”
30
2. Monitoring and Configuring
the Printer
Using Web Image Monitor
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the machine status and change settings.
❖ Available operations
The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Monitor from a client computer.
• Displaying machine status or settings
• Checking the print job status or history
• Checking, modifying, printing, or deleting print jobs stored in the Document Server
• Interrupting currently printing jobs
• Resetting the printer
• Managing the Address Book
• Making machine settings
• Making network protocol settings
• Making security settings
❖ Configuring the machine
To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. After the machine is configured to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image
Monitor become available.
❖ Recommended Web browser
• Windows:
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP1 or higher
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or higher
• Mac OS:
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or higher
Safari 1.0 or higher
31
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Note
❒ To use Netscape Navigator with Secured Sockets Layer (SSL: an encryption
protocol), use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher.
❒ Safari cannot be used on Mac OS X 10.4.1.
❒ If the previous versions of the Web browser above are used or JavaScript and
cookies are not enabled with the Web browser used, display and operation
problems may occur.
❒ If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact
your network administrator for information about the settings.
❒ The previous page may not appear even after the back button of a Web
browser is clicked. If this happens, click the refresh button of a Web browser.
❒ Updating the machine information is not automatically performed. Click [Refresh] in the display area to update the machine information.
❒ We recommend using Web Image Monitor in the same network.
❒ You cannot access to the machine from outside the firewall.
❒ When using the machine under DHCP, the IP address may be automatically
changed by the DHCP server settings. Enable DDNS setting on the machine,
and then connect using the machine's host name. Alternatively, set a static IP
address to the DHCP server.
❒ If the HTTP port is disabled, connection to the machine using the machine's
URL cannot be established. SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For
details, consult your network administrator.
❒ When using the SSL encryption protocol, enter “https://(printer's address)/”. Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the most
recent available version. We recommend Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
2
32
Using Web Image Monitor
Displaying Top Page
This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.
A Start your Web browser.
B Enter “http: //(machine's address)/” in the address bar of a Web browser.
2
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server,
you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentication is issued , enter “https://(machine's address)/”.
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
4
4
1
2
3
AJL132S
1. Header area
The link to help and dialog box for
keyword search appears.
2. Menu area
The dialog box for switching to the
user mode and administrator mode
appears, and each mode's menu will
be displayed.
If you select menu, it's content will be
shown on the work area, or the sub area.
3. Display area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
Machine information in the display
area is not automatically updated.
Click [Refresh] at the upper right in the
display area to update the machine information. Click the Web browser's
[Refresh] button to refresh the entire
browser screen.
Machine status, network interface
board names, and comments are displayed.
4. Help
Use Help to view or download Help
file contents.
33
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
When user authentication is set
Login (using Web Image Monitor)
Follow the procedure below to log on when user authentication is set.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [OK].
2
Note
❒ For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then
click [OK].
❒ The procedure may differ depending on the Web browser used.
Log Off (using Web Image Monitor)
Click [Logout] to log off.
34
Using Web Image Monitor
About Menu and Mode
There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: user mode and administrator mode.
Displayed Items may differ depending on the machine type.
❖ About User Mode
In the user mode, machine status, settings, and print job status can be viewed,
but the machine settings cannot be changed.
2
1
2
3
AJL133S
1. Status
Machine status, including the amount
of remaining paper in paper trays and
the amount of remaining toner, is displayed.
3. Configuration
Display current machine and network
settings, and download help files.
2. Job
Allows you to display list of Spooled
print Job, Job History, Error Log,
Locked Print and Sample Print jobs.
This also perform or delete Locked
Print and Sample print jobs.
35
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Administrator Mode
In the administrator mode, you can configure various machine settings.
1
2
3
4
2
5
6
AJL134S
1. Status
Machine status, including the amount
of remaining paper in paper trays and
the amount of remaining toner, is displayed.
2. Job
Allows you to display list of Spool
Print Job, Job History, Error Log,
Locked Print and Sample Print jobs.
This also allows you to delete Spooled
Print Job, Locked Print and Sample
Print jobs.
3. Address Book
4. Configuration
Make system settings for the machine,
interface settings, and security.
5. Reset Printer Job
Click to reset current print jobs and
print jobs in queue. This button is located on Top Page.
6. Reset Device
Click to reset the printer. If a print job
is being processed, the printer will be
reset after the print job is completed.
This button is located on Top Page.
User information can be registered,
displayed, changed, and deleted.
Access in the Administrator Mode
Follow the procedure below to access Web Image Monitor in the administrator
mode.
A On Top Page, click [Login].
The window for entering the login user name and password appears.
B Enter your login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
36
Using Web Image Monitor
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help
When using Help for the first time, clicking either [Help] in the header area or the
icon marked “?” in the display area makes the following screen appear, in which
you can view Help in two different ways, as shown below:
❖ Viewing Help on our Web site
Downloading Help to your computer
2
❖ Downloading and Checking Help
You can download Help to your computer. As the Help URL, you can specify
the path to the local file to view the Help without connecting to the Internet.
Note
❒ By clicking [Help] in the header area, the contents of Help appear.
❒ By clicking “?”, the Help icon in the display area, Help for the setting items in
the display area appears.
Downloading Help
A In the [OS] list, select the operating system.
B In the [Language] list, select the language.
C Click [Download].
D Download Help by following the instructions on the screen.
E Store the downloaded compressed file in a location, and then decompress
the file.
To view the downloaded Web Image Monitor Help, set the path to the location of the decompressed file.
Linking the URL of the Help File to the [Help] Button.
You can link the URL of the help file on a computer or Web server to the [Help]
button.
A Log on to Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.
B In the menu area, click [Configuration].
C Click [Webpage].
D In the [Set Help URL Target] box, enter the URL of the help file.
If you saved the help file to “C:\HELP\EN”, enter “file://C:/HELP/”. For
example, if you saved the file to a Web server, and the URL of the index file
is “http:// a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html”, enter “http://a.b.c.d/HELP/”.
E Click [Apply].
37
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can monitor the network printers.
Also, you can change the configuration of the network interface board using
TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
Important
❒ IPv6 cannot be used on this function.
2
❖ Protocol stack provided with Operating System
• Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetWare
NetWare Client32 for Windows 95
IntraNetWare Client for Windows 95
Novell Client for Windows 95/98/Me
• Windows 2000
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetWare
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP
• Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
• Windows XP
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP
• Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Client Service for NetWare
NetWare Client32 for Windows NT
IntraNetWare Client for Windows NT
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP
38
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
❖ Available operations
The following functions are available:
• Limits settings done from the control panel, and disables changes made to
certain items.
• Enables selection of paper type loaded in the machine.
• Switches to, and comes out of Energy Saver mode.
• Checks information about printing, paper quantity, etc.
• Simultaneously monitors multiple printers. When there are many printers,
you can create groups and classify printers to facilitate management.
• Checks the machine's network settings and detailed device information.
• Enables you to change the machine's network settings.
• You can check details of print jobs sent from a computer.
• Allows you to check job histories of printed, faxed (LAN-Fax), scanned,
and photocopied documents identified by user codes.
• Allows selection of functions such as printing and scanning for each user
code.
• Fax numbers and e-mail addresses stored in the machine can be changed
and saved by computer.
• You can check each fax job history entry.
• You can make settings for and display the status changes of group devices.
• Using Address Management Tool, you can manage LAN-Fax numbers,
user names for Scan to Folder, and addresses for sending and receiving Internet faxes.
• The e-mail sender’s name and folder can be protected.
2
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Follow the procedure below to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Czech, Danish, German, English,
Spanish, French, Italian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese ,
Finnish, Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese Traditional.
D Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin].
E Click [Next >].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
39
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
F After reading through its contents, click [Next >].
G Follow the instructions on the screen.
A message appears when the installation is completed.
H Click [OK].
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
2
Note
❒ Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this
case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, restart the computer and continue the configuration.
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration
Follow the procedure below to change the network interface board configuration using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C In the list, select a machine whose configuration you want to change.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool].
A Web browser opens and the window for entering the login user name and
password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Click [Web
Browser], and then click [OK].
E Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
F Configure settings using Web Image Monitor.
G Quit Web Image Monitor.
H Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
40
Reference
p.31 “Using Web Image Monitor”
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Locking the Menus on the Machine's Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to lock the menus on the machine's control panel.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
2
C Select a machine.
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Lock Operation
Panel Menu].
A Web browser opens and the window for entering the login user name and
password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
E Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the user name and password, consult your network administrator.
The [System] page of Web Image Monitor appears. Enter required setting
items.
F Select [Level 1] or [Level 2] in the [Protect Printer Operation Panel] list.
G Click [Apply].
H Quit Web Image Monitor.
I Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ For details about setting items, see Help in the [General Settings] on [Configuration] page.
Changing the Paper Type
Follow the procedure below to change the paper type.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
41
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
C In the list, select a machine whose configuration you want to change.
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Select Paper
Type].
A Web browser opens and the window for entering the login user name and
password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
E Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
2
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
The [Paper] page appears.
F Select a paper type in the [Paper Type] list for each tray. Enter required setting items.
G Click [Apply].
H Quit Web Image Monitor.
I Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ For details about setting items, see Help in the [General Settings] on [Configuration] page.
Managing User Information
Follow the procedure below to manage the user's information using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Prints jobs can be managed and functions restricted by user codes.
Starting User Management Tool
Follow the procedure below to start User Management Tool.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C In the list, select a machine you want to manage.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [User Management Tool].
The dialog box for entering the login user name and password appears.
42
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
E Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
For details about the user name and password, consult your network administrator.
User Management Tool starts.
Note
❒ For details about User Management Tool, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
2
Displaying the Number of Sheets Printed
Follow the procedure below to display the number of sheets printed under each
user code.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Information Management Tool.
B Click the [User Page Count] tab of User Management Tool.
The number of pages printed under each user code appears.
C Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
Exporting the information about the number of pages printed
Follow the procedure below to export the information of the number of pages
printed under each user code as a .csv file.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Information Management Tool.
B Click the [User Page Count] tab of User Management Tool.
C On the [File] menu, click [Export User Statistics List].
D Specify the save location and file name, and then click [Save].
E Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
Resetting the number of pages printed to 0.
Follow the procedure below to reset the number of pages printed under each
user code to 0.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Information Management Tool.
B Click the [User Page Count] tab of User Management Tool.
C Click the user whose information you want to reset.
D On the [Edit] menu, click [Reset User Counters].
E Select the check box of the items you want to reset, and then click [OK].
A confirmation message appears.
43
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
F Click [OK].
The number of pages printed is reset to 0.
G On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply Settings].
Changes are applied to information on the [User Page Count] tab.
H Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
2
Restricting Functions
Follow the procedure below to restrict use of individual functions.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Information Management Tool.
B Click the [User Counter Information] tab of User Management Tool.
C On the [Edit] menu of User Management Tool, click [Restrict Access To Device].
D Select the check box of the functions you want to restrict.
E Click [OK].
A confirmation message appears.
F Click [Yes].
The settings are applied.
Setting Applicable Functions to New Users
Follow the procedure below to add new users and set functions applicable to
them.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Information Management Tool.
B Click the [Access Control List:] tab of User Management Tool.
C On the [Edit] menu, click [Add New User].
D Enter the user code and user name.
E Select the check box of the functions applicable to the new user.
If the check boxes are unavailable, there is no restriction to use that function.
F Click [OK].
The new user is added.
G On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply Settings].
The settings are applied.
44
H Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Note
❒ For details about setting restrictions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Help.
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode
Follow the procedure below to configure Energy Saver mode.
2
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C Select the machine whose settings you want to make.
To make settings for all machines in the selected group, select no machine.
D On the [Group:] menu, point to [Energy Save Mode], point to [Set Individually] to
make the settings for only the selected machine or point to [Set By Group] to
make the settings for all machines in the selected group, and then click [On]
or [Off].
E Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ For details about the setting for Energy Saver mode, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Setting a Password
Follow the procedure below to set a password.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C In the list, select a machine whose configuration you want to change.
45
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool].
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the login user name
and password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
E Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
2
For details about the user name and password, consult your network administrator.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
F Click [Configuration].
G Click [Program / Change Administrator] on the [Device Settings] area, and then
change the settings.
H Click [Change].
I On the [New Password], enter a password.
Enter the same password in [Confirm Password] .
J Click [OK].
K Click [Apply].
L Quit Web Image Monitor.
M Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Checking the Machine Status
Follow the procedure below to check machine status.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C To obtain status details, select the machine in the list, and then click [Open]
on the [Device] menu.
The machine status appears in the dialog box.
D Click [System] or [Printer].
The machine status appears in the dialog box.
46
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
E Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Changing Names and Comments
2
Follow the procedure below to change the names and comments of the machine.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C
Select a machine in the list, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools]
menu.
A Web browser opens and the window for entering the login user name and
password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
D Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
E Click [Configuration].
F Click [Device Settings].
G On the [System] page, enter the device name in the [Device Name] box and a
comment in the [Comment] box, and click [Apply].
• In the [Device Name] box, enter a device name on the machine using up to
31 characters.
• In the [Comment] box, enter a comment on the machine using up to 31 characters.
H Click [OK].
I Quit Web Image Monitor.
J Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
47
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Load Fax Journal
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
2
C Select a machine in the list, and then click [Load Fax Journal] on the [Tools]
menu.
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the login user name
and password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
D Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
Load Fax Journal area appears in the Web Image Monitor.
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
F Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ For details, see Help in [Load Fax Journal] area.
Viewing and Deleting Spool Print Jobs
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C Select a machine in the list, and then click [Spool Printing Job List(Printer)] on
the [Tools] menu.
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the login user name
and password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
48
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
D Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
Spool Printing Job List appears in the Web Image Monitor.
To delete the Spool Printing Job, select the document you want to delete and
then click [Delete].
2
Note
❒ To display Spool Printing Job List, spool must be set to [Enable] on Web Image Monitor in advance.
❒ For details, see Help in the Spool Printing Job List area.
Managing Address Information
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group:] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP SNMPv3].
A list of machines using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the machine whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
C Select a machine in the list, and then click [Address Management Tool]on the
[Tools] menu.
The dialog box for entering the login user name and password appears.
D Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Address Management Tool starts.
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
Note
❒ For details, see Address Management Tool Help.
49
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
To view the status of machines using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, configure
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client beforehand.
Monitoring Printers
2
Follow the procedure below to monitor the machine using SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client.
A Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, point to [Properties],
and then click [Option...].
The [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client - Options] dialog box appears.
B Select the machine you want to monitor, and then select the [To Be Monitored]
check box in the Monitoring Information Settings area.
To display the machine status in the task tray using the SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client icon, select the [Displayed on Task Bar] check box.
C Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the configured machine is monitored.
Note
❒ For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Checking the Machine Status
Follow the procedure below to check machine status using SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client.
A For status details, right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, and
then click the machine.
The machine status appears in the dialog box.
Note
❒ For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
50
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
When using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, note the following:
• The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client at a time. While the network printer is printing, another user cannot
access it until the job is finished. In this case, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
tries to access the network printer until the retry interval expires.
• If SmartDeviceMonitor for Client cannot access the network printer and times
out, it will stop sending the print job. In this case, you should cancel the
paused status from the print queue window. SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
will resume access to the network printer. You can delete the print job from
the print queue window, but canceling a print job printed by the network
printer might cause the next job sent from another user to be incorrectly printed.
• If a print job sent from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is interrupted and the
network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, send the
print job again.
• Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue window, regardless of protocol.
• If various users send print jobs using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client to network printers, the printing order might not be the same as that in which the
jobs were sent.
• An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address is
used for the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port name.
• When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentication is issued, enter “https://(machine's address)/”. Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the
highest version. Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is recommended.
• If the [Security Alert] dialog box appears when accessing the machine using IPP
to create or configure an IPP port, or when printing, install the certificate. To
select the certificate store location when using Certificate Import Wizard,
click [Place all certificates in the following store], and then click [Local Computer]
under [Trusted Root Certification Authorities].
2
Note
❒ For details about SSL settings, consult your network administrator.
51
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail
Whenever a paper tray becomes empty or paper is jammed, an e-mail alert is issued to the registered addresses to notify the printer status.
For this notification, you can make the e-mail notification settings.
Notification timing and e-mail content can be set.
You can be notified of the following events:
• Call Service
• Out of Toner
• Toner Almost Empty
• Waste Toner Bottle is Full
• Add Staple
• Paper Misfeed
• Cover Open
• Out of Paper
• Paper Tray Error
• Output Tray Full
• Unit Connection Error
• Duplex Unit Error
• Document Server Memory Full
2
Note
• When the service call is set, following call results can be sent.
• Failure automatic call success
• Failure automatic call out of time
• Failure automatic call failure
• Consumable automatic call success
• Remote machine check failure
• Firmware update confirmed
❒ Other call results can be displayed, depending on the machine type.
❒ For details about the service call, contact your service or sales representative.
A Open a Web browser, and then enter “http://(machine's address)/” in the
address bar.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentication is issued , enter “https://(machine's address)/”.
B Click [Login] on Top Page of Web Image Monitor.
52
The window for entering the login user name and password appears.
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail
C Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
D In the menu area, click [Configuration].
E Click [E-mail] on the [Device Settings] area.
F Make the following settings:
2
• Items in the Reception column: Make the necessary settings for sending
and receiving e-mail.
• Items in the SMTP column: Configure the SMTP server. Check your mailing environment, and then specify the necessary items. You can also perform mail authentication for the SMTP server.
• Items in the POP before SMTP column: Configure the POP server. Check
your mailing environment, and then specify the necessary items. You can
also perform mail authentication for the POP server.
• Items in the POP3/IMAP4 column: Configure the POP3 or IMAP4 server.
Check your mailing environment, and then specify the necessary items.
• Items in the E-mail Communication Port column: Configure the port to be
used for access to the mail server.
• Items in the E-mail Notification column: Items in the E-Mail Notification
Account column: Specify these items if you want to use on-demand e-mail
notification.
G Click [Apply].
Auto E-mail Notification
A Click [Configuration] in the menu area, and then click [Auto E-mail Notification]
on the [Device Settings] area.
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.
B Make the following settings:
• Items in Notification Message column: You can set this according to your
needs, for example, the machine's location, service representative contact
information.
• Items in the Groups to Notify column: E-mail notification addresses can be
grouped as required.
• Items in the Select Groups/Items to Notify column: Select groups for each
notification type, such as machine status and error.
To make detailed settings for these items, click [Edit] next to [Detailed Settings of Each Item].
C Click [Apply].
53
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
D Click [Logout].
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
On-demand E-mail Notification
A Click [Configuration] in the menu area, and then click [On-demand E-mail Notifi-
2
cation] on the [Device Settings] area.
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.
B Make the following settings:
• Notification Subject: Enter a text string to be added to the subject line of return e-mails.
• Notification Message: You can set this according to your needs, for example, the machine's location, service representative contact information.
• Items in the Access Restriction to Information column: Select whether to
restrict accesses based on a specific category of information.
• Items in the Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name Settings column:
Enter an e-mail address or domain name to use for requesting information
by e-mail and to receive its return e-mail.
C Click [Apply].
D Click [Logout].
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
54
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail
Mail authentication
You can configure mail authentication to prevent illegal use of the mail server.
❖ SMTP Authentication
Specify SMTP authentication (PLAN, LOGIN, CRAM-MD5, and DIGESTMD5).
When mail is sent to the SMTP server, authentication is performed using the
SMTP AUTH protocol by prompting the mail originator to enter the user
name and password. This prevents illegal use of the SMTP server.
A In the menu area, click [E-mail]
B Make the following settings:
• SMTP Auth. E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address.
• SMTP Auth. User Name: Enter the SMTP account name.
• SMTP Auth. Password: To set or change the password for SMTP AUTH.
• SMTP Auth. Encryption: Select whether to encrypt the password or not.
C Click [Apply]
D Click [Logout].
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
2
❖ POP before SMTP Authentication
Select whether to log on to the POP3 server before sending e-mail.
A In the menu area, click [E-mail].
B Make the following settings:
• POP before SMTP: Enable or disable POP before SMTP.
• POP E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address.
• POP User Name: Enter the POP account name.
• POP Password: To set or change the POP password.
• Timeout setting after POP Auth.: Enter the time available before connecting to the SMTP server after logging on to the POP server.
C Click [Apply].
D Click [Logout].
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
55
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
On-demand E-mail Notification
To use on-demand e-mail notification, perform the following configuration
tasks in Web Image Monitor.
A In the menu area, click [E-mail].
B Make the following settings:
• E-mail Notification E-mail Address: Enter the address using alphanumeric
characters.
• Receive E-mail Notification: Specify whether to use on-demand e-mail notification.
• E-mail Notification User Name: Enter the administrator's user name as the
mail originator name.
• E-mail Notification Password: Enter the password of the mail notification
user.
C Click [OK].
D Click [Logout].
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
2
❖ Format of on-demand e-mail messages
To use mail notification, you need to send an on-demand e-mail message to
this machine.
Using your mail software, enter the following:
Item
Description
Subject (Referred to as Subject)
Enter a request regarding the device. For details, see the table below.
From (Referred to as From)
Specify a valid mail address. The device information will be sent to the address specified here.
Note
❒ A mail message must be within 1 MB in size.
❒ E-mail may be incomplete if sent immediately after power on.
❖ Subject field
Format: devicestatus?parameter-name=parameter[&=parameter][&=parameter]...
Note
❒ The Subject field is case-insensitive.
❒ Parameter names can be written in any order.
56
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail
❖ Subject field coding examples
Coding example
Action
devicestatus?request=sysconfig&format=text&lang=en
The device's system configuration information will be sent in an English text format.
devicestatus?request=sysconfig
The device's system configuration information will be sent in a preset format and language.
2
❖ Parameters
Parameter
Meaning
Default
request
Information to be obtained
Mandatory
format
Mail format
Mail will be sent in the format preset for each mail address.
lang
Language for mail body
Mail will be sent in the language preset for each mail
address.
❖ Parameters specifying the information to be obtained
Information to be obtained
Parameter
System configuration information
sysconfig
Network configuration information
netconfig
Printer configuration information
prtconfig
Supplies information
supply
Device status information
status
❖ Parameters specifying the mail format
Mail format
Parameter
Text
text
HTML
html
XML
xml
Note
❒ HTML and XML can be selected for subject field, but output is text only.
❖ Parameters that specify the language for mail bodies
Language
Parameter
Japanese
ja
English
en
57
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Remote Maintenance by telnet
Important
❒ Remote Maintenance should be password-protected so that access is allowed
to administrators only.
❒ The password is the same as the one of Web Image Monitor administrator.
When the password is changed using “mshell”, other passwords change also.
❒ Some command cannot be set depending on the model type.
2
Using telnet
Follow the procedure below to use telnet.
Important
❒ Only one user at a time can log on to perform remote maintenance.
A Use the IP address or the host name of the machine to start telnet.
% telnet IP_address
B Enter your user name and password.
For details about the user name and password, consult your network administrator.
For user authentication, enter a login user name and password.
For user code authentication, enter a user code in User Name.
C Enter a command.
D Quit telnet.
msh> logout
The configuration message about saving the changes appears.
E Enter “yes” to save the changes, and then press the {Enter} key.
If you do not want to save the changes, enter “no”, and then press the {Enter}
key. To make further changes, enter “return” at the command line, and then
press the {Enter} key.
Note
❒ If the message “Can not write NVRAM information” appears, the changes
are not saved. Repeat the procedure above.
❒ When the changes are saved, the network interface board is reset automatically with that changes.
❒ When the network interface board resets, the print job in print process will
be printed. However, print jobs in queue will be canceled.
58
Remote Maintenance by telnet
access
Use the “access” command to view and configure access control. You can also
specify two or more access ranges.
❖ View settings
msh> access
2
❖ Configuration
msh> access
range “start-address end-address”
• The star mark represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges can be registered and selected.)
Example: to specify accessible IP addresses between 192.168.0.10 and
192.168.0.20:
msh> access 1 range 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20
❖ Access control initialization
msh> access flush
• Use the “flush” command to restore the default settings so that all access
ranges become “0.0.0.0”.
Note
❒ The access range restricts computers from use of the machine by IP address.
If you do not need to restrict printing, make the setting “0.0.0.0”.
❒ Valid ranges must be from lower (start address) to higher (end address).
❒ Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target
number is omitted.
❒ You cannot send print jobs, or access Web Image Monitor and diprint from a
restricted IP address.
appletalk
Use the “appletalk” command to view and configure Appletalk parameters.
❖ View settings
msh> appletalk
• [2] means “active” and [0] means “inactive”.
• The default is [2].
❖ Changing PAP timeout configuration
msh> appletalk ptimeout value > 0
• Timeout value becomes effective.
msh> appletalk ptimeout value = 0
• Timeout value becomes ineffective.
59
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
autonet
Use the “autonet” command to configure AutoNet parameters.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current AutoNet settings:
msh> autonet
2
❖ Configuration
You can configure AutoNet settings.
msh> autonet {on|off}
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
❖ Current interface priority configuration display
msh> autonet priority
❖ Interface priority configuration
msh> autonet priority “interface_name”
• You can give interface's AutoNet parameter priority.
• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
Note
❒ If an interface is not selected, the current interface connection settings remain
in effect.
❒ For details about AutoNet, refer to autonet parameters.
btconfig
Use the “btconfig” command to make Bluetooth settings.
❖ View settings
Bluetooth settings are displayed.
msh> btconfig
❖ Mode settings
You can set the Bluetooth operation mode to {private} or {public}.
msh> btconfig {private | public}
• The default is {public}.
60
Remote Maintenance by telnet
devicename
Use the “devicename” command to display and change the printer name.
❖ View settings
msh> devicename
2
❖ Printer name configuration
msh> devicename name “string”
• Enter a printer name using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• Set single names for each printer.
❖ Printer name initialization
msh> devicename clear name
• Reset the printer name to its default.
dhcp
Use the “dhcp” command to configure DHCP settings.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current DHCP settings.
msh> dhcp
❖ Configuration
You can configure DHCP.
msh> dhcp “interface_name” {on|off}
• Click {on} to enable dhcp. Click {off} to disable DHCP.
• If the DNS server address and domain name are obtained from DHCP, be
sure to click {on}.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11 interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11 interface
❖ Current interface priority configuration display
msh> dhcp priority
❖ Interface priority configuration
msh> dhcp priority “interface_name”
• You can select which interface has DHCP parameter priority.
• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.
61
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ DNS server address selection
msh> dhcp dnsaddr {dhcp | static}
• Specify whether to obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server
or use the address set by a user.
• To obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server, specify “dhcp”.
To use the address set by a user, specify “static”.
2
❖ Domain name selection
msh> dhcp domainname {dhcp | static}
• Specify whether to obtain the domain name from the DNS server or use the
domain name set by a user.
• To obtain the domain name from the DHCP server, specify “dhcp”. To use
the domain name set by a user, specify “static”.
Reference
p.114 “Using DHCP”
p.63 “dns”
p.64 “domainname”
diprint
The direct printing port enables direct printing from a network-connected computer.
Use the “diprint” command to change direct printing port settings.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current direct printing port settings:
msh> diprint
Example output:
port 9100
timeout=300(sec)
bidirect on
con multi
apl async
• The “port” specifies the port number of the direct printing port.
• The “bidirect” setting indicates whether the direct printing port is bidirectional or not.
❖ Setting timeout
msh> diprint timeout [30~65535]
• You can specify the timeout interval to use when the printer is expecting
data from the network.
• The default is 300 seconds.
62
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❖ Specifying the number of concurrent connections
msh> diprint con {multi | single}
• The above command specifies the number of concurrent diprint connections. Specify “multi” for multiple connections or “single” for a single connection.
• The default is “multi”.
2
dns
Use the “dns” command to configure or display DNS (Domain Name System)
settings.
❖ View settings
The following command displays current DNS settings:
msh> dns
❖ DNS server configuration
The following command enables or disables the IP DNS server address:
msh> dns “number” server “server address”
The following command displays a configuration using the IP address
192.168.15.16 on a DNS 1 server:
msh> dns 1 server 192.168.15.16
• You can register up to three IP DNS server numbers.
• You cannot use “255.255.255.255” as the DNS server address.
❖ Dynamic DNS function setting
msh> dns “interface_name” ddns {on|off}
• You can set the dynamic DNS function “active” or “inactive”.
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❖ Specifying the record overlap operation
msh> dns overlap {update|add}
• You can specify operations performed when records overlap.
• update
To delete old records and register new records.
• add
To add new records and store the old records.
• When CNAME overlaps, it is always changed, irrespective of settings.
63
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ CNAME registration
msh> dns cname {on|off}
• You can specify whether to register CNAME.
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• The CNAME registered is the default name beginning with rnp. CNAME
cannot be changed.
2
❖ A records registration
msh> dns arecord {dhcp|own}
• {dhcp}
You can specify the method of registering an A record when the dynamic
DNS function is enabled and DHCP is used.
• {own}
To register an A record using the printer as the DNS client.
The DNS server address and the domain name already designated are
used for the registration.
❖ Record updating interval settings
msh> dns interval “time”
• You can specify the interval after which records are updated when using
the dynamic DNS function.
• The updating interval is specified hourly. It can be entered between 1 and
255 hours.
• The default is 24 hours.
domainname
Use the “domainname” command to display or configure the domain name settings.
You can configure the Ethernet interface, or IEEE 802.11b interface.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current domain name:
msh> domainname
❖ Interface domain configuration
msh> domainname “interface_name”
64
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❖ Setting the Domain Name
msh> domainname “interface_name” name “domain name”
• A domain name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same domain name.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface
Interface set
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
2
❖ Deleting the Domain Name
msh> domainname “interface_name” clear name
help
Use the “help” command to display the available command list and the procedures for using those commands.
❖ Command list display
msh> help
❖ Display of procedure for using commands
msh> help “command_name”
hostname
Use the “hostname” command to change the printer name.
❖ View settings
msh> hostname
❖ Configuration
msh> hostname “interface_name ” “printer_name”
• Enter the printer name using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
• You cannot use a printer name beginning “RNP” (in either upper or lower
case).
• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same printer name.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
65
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Initializing the printer name for each interface
msh>hostname “interface_name” clear name
ifconfig
Use the “ifconfig” command to view and configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet
mask, broadcast address, default gateway address) for the printer.
2
❖ View settings
msh> ifconfig
❖ Configuration
msh> ifconfig “interface_name” “parameter” “address”
• If you did not enter an interface name, it is automatically set to the Ethernet
interface.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet Interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b Interface
The following explains how to configure an IP address 192.168.15.16 on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16
❖ Netmask configuration
msh> ifconfig “interface_name” netmask “address”
The following explains how to configure a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0
❖ Broadcast address configuration
msh> ifconfig “interface_name” broadcast “address”
❖ Changing the Interface
msh> ifconfig “interface” up
• You can specify either the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b interface
when using the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit.
66
Remote Maintenance by telnet
Note
❒ To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.
❒ Use the default configuration if you cannot obtain setting addresses.
❒ The IP address, subnet mask and broadcast address are the same as that for
the ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface.
❒ TCP/IP configuration is the same for both Ethernet and IEEE 802.11 interface.
If interfaces are changed, the new interface inherits the configuration.
❒ Use “0x” as the initial two letters of a hexadecimal address.
2
info
Use the “info” command to display printer information such as paper tray, output tray, and printer language.
❖ Printer information display
msh> info
Reference
p.87 “Getting Printer Information over the Network”
ipp
Use the “ipp” command to view and configure IPP settings.
❖ Viewing settings
The following command displays the current IPP settings:
msh> ipp
❖ IPP timeout configuration
Specify how many seconds the computer waits before canceling an interrupted print job. The time can be entered between 30 to 65535 seconds.
msh> ipp timeout [30 - 65535]
❖ IPP user authorization configuration
Use IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The default is
“off”.
msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}
• User authorization settings are “basic” and “digest”.
• If user authorization is specified, register a user name. You can register up
to 10 users.
67
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ IPP user configuration
Configure IPP users according to the following messages:
msh> ipp user
The following message appears:
msh> Input user number (1 to 10):
Enter the number, user name, and password.
msh> IPP user name:user1
msh> IPP password:*******
After configuring the settings, the following message appears:
User configuration changed.
2
netware
Use the “netware” command to view and configure the NetWare settings such
as the print server name or file server name.
❖ Netware Printer Server Names
msh> netware pname character string
• Enter the NetWare print server name using up to 47 characters.
❖ Netware File Server Names
msh> netware fname character string
• Enter the NetWare file server name using up to 47 characters.
❖ Encap type
msh> netware encap {802.3|802.2|snap|ethernet2|auto}
❖ Remote Printer Number
msh> netware rnum {0–254}
❖ Timeout
msh> netware timeout {3–255}
❖ Printer server mode
msh> netware mode pserver
msh> netware mode ps
❖ Remote printer mode
msh> netware mode rprinter
msh> netware mode rp
❖ NDS context name
msh> netware context character string
68
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❖ SAP interval
msh> netware “sap_interval”
❖ Setting login mode for file server
msh> netware login server
❖ Setting login mode for NDS tree
msh> netware login tree
2
❖ Setting login mode for NDS tree name
msh> netware tree “NDS name”
❖ File transfer protocol
msh> netware trans {ippri|ipxpri|ip|ipx}
• If you do not specify the protocol, the current setting is displayed.
Protocol
Set Protocol
ippri
TCP/IP+IPX
ipxpri
TCP/IP+IPX
ip
TCP/IP
ipx
IPX
passwd
Use the “passwd” command to change the remote maintenance password.
❖ Changing the Password
msh> passwd
• Enter the current password.
• Enter the new password.
• Renter the new password to confirm it.
❖ Changing the Password of the administrators using the Supervisor
msh> passwd {Administrator ID}
• Enter the new password.
• Renter the new password to confirm it.
Note
❒ Be sure not to forget or lose the password.
❒ The password can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, “R” is not the same as “r”.
69
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
prnlog
Use the “prnlog” command to obtain printer log information.
❖ Print logs display
msh> prnlog
• Display 20 previous print jobs.
msh> prnlog “ID Number”
• Specify the ID number of the displayed print log information to display additional details about a print job.
2
Reference
p.87 “Getting Printer Information over the Network”.
rendezvous
Use the “rendezvous” command to display rendezvous-related settings.
❖ View settings
rendezvous settings are displayed.
msh> rendezvous
❖ Rendezvous service name setting
You can specify the rendezvous service name.
msh> rendezvous cname “computer name”
• The computer name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
❖ Rendezvous Installation location information setting
You can enter information about the location where the printer is installed.
msh> rendezvous location “location”
• Information about location can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
❖ Setting order of priority for each protocol
• diprint
msh> rendezvous diprint [0–99]
• ipp
msh> rendezvous ipp [0–99]
You can specify the order of priority for “diprint” and “ipp”. Smaller numbers
indicate higher priority.
70
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❖ IP TTL setting
msh> rendezvous ip ttl {1-255}
You can specify the IP TTL (the number of routers a packet can pass through).
Note
❒ The default is 255.
❖ Resetting the computer name and location information
You can reset the computer name and location information.
msh> rendezvous clear {cname | location}
• cname
Reset the computer name. The default computer name will be displayed
when the computer is restarted.
• location
Reset the location information. The previous location information will be
deleted.
2
❖ Interface configuration
msh> rendezvous linklocal “interface_name”
• If many types of interface are installed, configure the interface that communicates with linklocal address.
• If you do not specify an interface, the Ethernet interface is automatically selected.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
route
Use the “route” command to view and control the routing table.
❖ Specified route information display
msh> route get “destination”
• Specify the IP address to destination.
“0.0.0.0” cannot be specified as destination address.
❖ Enabling/disabling specified IP destination
msh> route active {host|net} “destination” {on | off}
• You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes the default
setting.
71
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Adding IP Routing Table
msh> route add {host|net} “destination” “gateway”
• Adds a host or network route to “destination”, and a gateway address to
“gateway” in the table.
• Specify the IP address to destination and gateway.
• Host becomes the default setting.
2
❖ Setting the Default IP Gateway
msh> route add default “gateway”
❖ Deleting specified IP destination from Routing Table
msh> route delete {host|net} “destination”
• Host becomes the default setting.
• IP address of destination can be specified.
❖ Route initialization
msh> route flush
Note
❒ The maximum number of routing tables is 16.
❒ Set a gateway address when communicating with devices on an external network.
❒ The same gateway address is shared by all interfaces.
set
Use the “set” command to set the protocol information display “active” or “inactive”.
72
❖ View settings
The following command displays protocol information (active/inactive).
msh> set tcpip
msh> set appletalk
msh> set netware
msh> set smb
msh> set protocol
• When protocol is specified, information about TCP/IP, AppleTalk, Netware, SCSI print, and SMB appears.
msh> set ftp
msh> set rsh
msh> set diprint
msh> set web
msh> set snmp
Remote Maintenance by telnet
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
msh>
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
ssl
nrs
rfu
ipp
http
rendezvous
nbt
ssdp
2
❖ Configuration
• Enter “up”to enable protocol, and enter “down” to disable protocol.
You can set the protocol to “active” or “inactive”.
msh> set tcpip {up | down}
• If you disable TCP/IP, you cannot use remote access after logging off. If
you did this by mistake, you can use the control panel to enable remote access via TCP/IP.
• Disabling TCP/IP also disables ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp, ssl, ipp, http,
rendezvous.
msh> set appletalk {up | down}
msh> set netware {up | down}
msh> set smb {up | down}
msh> set ftp {up | down}
msh> set rsh {up | down}
msh> set diprint {up | down}
msh> set web {up | down}
msh> set snmp {up | down}
msh> set nrs {up | down}
msh> set rfu {up | down}
msh> set ipp {up | down}
msh> set http {up | down}
msh> set rendezvous {up | down}
msh> set ssdp {up | down}
msh> set nbt {up | down}
73
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
show
Use the “show” command to display network interface board configuration settings.
❖ View settings
msh> show
• If “-p” is added, you can view settings one by one.
2
Reference
p.95 “Configuring the Network Interface Board”
slp
Use “slp” command to view and configure SLP settings.
msh> slp ttl “ttl_val”
• You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of
NetWare 5/5.1. Using the “slp” command, you can configure the value of
TTL which can be used by SLP multicast packet.
• The default value of TTL is 1. A search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does not support multicast, the settings are not available
even if the TTL value is increased.
• The acceptable TTL value is between 1 and 255.
smb
Use the “smb” command to configure or delete the computer or workgroup
name for SMB.
❖ Computer Name settings
msh> smb comp “computer name”
• Set computer name using up to 15 characters. Names beginning with
“RNP” or “rnp” cannot be entered.
❖ Working Group Name settings
msh> smb group “work group name”
• Set workgroup name using up to 15 characters
❖ Comment settings
msh> smb comment “comment”
• Set comment using up to 31 characters.
74
❖ Notify print job completion
msh> smb notif {on | off}
• To notify print job completion, specify “on”. Otherwise, specify “off”
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❖ Deleting Computer Name
msh> smb clear comp
❖ Deleting Group Name
msh> smb clear group
❖ Deleting Comment
msh> smb clear comment
2
❖ View Protocol
msh> smb protocol
snmp
Use the “snmp” command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such
as the community name.
❖ View settings
msh> snmp
• Default access settings 1 is as follows:
Community name:public
IP address:0.0.0.0
IPX address:00000000:000000000000
Access type:read-only
Effective Protocol:IP/IPX
• Default access settings 2 is as follows:
Community name:admin
IP address:0.0.0.0
IPX address:00000000:000000000000
Access type:read-write
Effective Protocol:IP/IPX
• If “-p” is added, you can view settings one by one.
• To display the current community, specify its registration number.
❖ Display
msh> snmp ?
❖ Community name configuration
msh> snmp “number” name “community_name”
• You can configure ten SNMP access settings numbered 1-10.
• The printer cannot be accessed from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client if “public” is not registered in numbers 110. When changing the community name, use SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin and SNMP Setup Tool to correspond with printer settings.
• The community name can be entered using up to 15 characters.
75
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Deleting community name
msh> snmp “number” clear name
❖ Access type configuration
msh> snmp “number” type “access_type”
2
Access type
Type of access permission
no
not accessible
read
read only
write
read and write
trap
user is notified of trapmessages
❖ Protocol configuration
msh> snmp {ip|ipx} {on|off}
• Use the following command to set protocols “active” or “inactive”: If you
set a protocol “inactive”, all access settings for that protocol are disabled.
• Specify “ip” for TCP/IP or “ipx” for IPX/SPX.
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• All protocols cannot be turned off concurrently.
❖ Configuration of protocol for each registration number
msh> snmp “number” active {ip|ipx} {on|off}
• To change the protocol of access settings, use the following command.
However, if you have disabled a protocol with the above command, activating it here has no effect.
❖ Access configuration
msh> snmp “number” {ip|ipx} “address”
• You can configure a host address according to the protocol used.
• The network interface board accepts requests only from hosts that have IP
addresses with access types of “read-only” or “read-write”. Enter “0” to
have network interface board accept requests from any host without requiring a specific type of access.
• Enter a host address to deliver “trap” access type information to.
• To specify TCP/IP, enter “ip” followed by a space, and then the IP address.
• To specify IPX/SPX, enter “ipx” followed by a space, the IPX address followed by a decimal, and then the MAC address of the network interface
board.
❖ sysLocation configuration
msh> snmp location
76
❖ Deleting sysLocation
msh> snmp clear location
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❖ sysContact setting
msh> snmp contact
❖ Deleting sysContact
msh> snmp clear contact
❖ SNMP v1v2 function configuration
msh> snmp v1v2 {on|off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.
2
❖ SNMP v3 function configuration
msh> snmp v3 {on|off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.
❖ SNMP TRAP configuration
msh> snmp trap {v1|v2|v3} {on|off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.
❖ Remote Configuration Authorization configuration
msh> snmp remote {on|off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable the SNMP v1v2 setting.
❖ SNMP v3 TRAP configuration display
msh> snmp v3trap
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5}
• If a number from 1-5 is entered, settings are displayed for that number only.
❖ Configuring a sending address for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} {ip|ipx} “address”
❖ Configuring a sending protocol for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} active {ip|ipx} {on|off}
❖ Configuring a user account for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} account “account_name”
• Enter an account name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
❖ Deleting an SNMP v3 TRAP user account
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} clear account
❖ Configuring an SNMP v3 encryption algorithm
msh> snmp v3auth {md5|sha1}
77
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Configuring SNMP v3 encryption
msh> snmp v3priv {auto|on}
• Set “auto” for automatic encryption configuration
• Set “on” for mandatory encryption configuration.
sntp
2
The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using Simple
Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Use the “sntp” command to change SNTP settings.
❖ View settings
msh> sntp
❖ NTP server address configuration
You can specify the IP address of the NTP server.
msh> sntp server “IP_address”
❖ Interval configuration
msh> sntp interval “polling_time”
• You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the operator-specified NTP server. The default is 60 minutes.
• The interval can be entered from 0, or between 15 and 10,080 minutes.
• If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you
turn the printer on. After that, the printer does not synchronize with the
NTP server.
❖ Time-zone configuration
msh> sntp timezone “+/-hour_time”
• You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and NTP
server clock. The values are between –12:00 and +13:00.
78
Remote Maintenance by telnet
spoolsw
Use the “spoolsw” command to view and configure Job Spool settings.
You can only specify diprint, ipp, ftp, and smb(TCP/IP) protocol.
• The “spoolsw” command for configuring Job Spool settings is available only
when the optional hard disk is installed.
2
❖ View settings
The Job Spool setting appears.
msh> spoolsw
❖ Job Spool setting
msh> spoolsw spool {on|off}
Note
❒ Specify “on” to enable Job Spool, or “off” to disable it.
❖ Resetting Job spool setting
msh> spoolsw clear job {on|off}
• When the printer power is cut during job spooling, this determines whether to reprint the spooled job.
❖ Protocol configuration
msh> spoolsw diprint {on|off}
msh> spoolsw ipp {on|off}
msh> spoolsw smb {on|off}
msh> spoolsw ftp {on|off}
• You can specify the settings for diprint, ipp, ftp, and smb.
ssdp
Use the “ssdp” command to view and configure SSDP settings.
❖ View settings
msh> ssdp
❖ Setting effective time
msh> ssdp profile {1801–86400}
The default is 10800 seconds.
❖ Advertise packet TTL settings
msh> ssdp ttl {1–255}
The default is 4.
79
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
status
Use the “status” command to display the printer status.
❖ view messages
msh> status
2
Reference
p.101 “System Log Information”
syslog
Use the “syslog” command to display the information stored in the printer's system log.
❖ View message
msh> syslog
Reference
p.101 “System Log Information”
upnp
Use the “upnp” command to display and configure the universal plug and play.
❖ Public URL display
msh> upnp url
❖ Public URL configuration
msh> upnp url "string"
• Enter the URL string in the character string.
❖ Deleting Public URL
msh> upnp clear url
80
Remote Maintenance by telnet
web
Use the “web” command to display and configure parameters on Web Image
Monitor.
❖ View Settings
msh> web
2
❖ URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking [URL] on Web Image Monitor.
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the number corresponding to the URL. Up to two
URLs can be registered and specified.
msh> web url http://”The URL or IP address you want to
register”/
❖ Resetting URLs registered as link destinations
msh> web x clear url
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the corresponding number to the URL.
❖ Link name configuration
You can enter the name for URL that appears on Web Image Monitor.
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the corresponding number to the link name.
msh> web name “Name you want to display”
❖ Resetting URL names registered as link destinations
msh> web x clear name
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the number corresponding to the link name.
❖ Help URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking [Help] or [?] on Web Image Monitor.
msh> web help http://”Help URL or IP address”/help/
❖ Resetting Help URL
msh> web clear help
81
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
wiconfig
Use the “wiconfig” command to make settings for IEEE 802.11b.
❖ View settings
msh> wiconfig
2
❖ View IEEE 802.11b settings
msh> wiconfig cardinfo
• If IEEE 802.11b is not working correctly, its information is not displayed.
❖ Configuration
msh> wiconfig “parameter”
Parameter
Value configured
mode [ap|adhoc|802.11adhoc]
You can set the infrastructure mode(ap) , the
802.11 Ad hoc mode (802.11adhoc), or the ad
hoc mode (adhoc).
The default is ad hoc mode.
ssid “ID value”
You can make settings for the SSID in the infrastructure mode.
Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32
bytes).
An SSID value is set automatically to the
nearest access point if no setting is made.
If no setting is made for the 802.11 ad hoc
mode, the same value for the infrastructure
mode or an ASSID value is automatically set.
The default is blank.
channel frequency “channel no.”
You can enable or disable the WEP function.
To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to
disable it, specify [off].
To start the WEP function, enter the correct
WEP key. The default is “11”.
enc [on|off]
You can enable or disable the WEP function.
To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to
disable it, specify [off].
To start the WEP function, enter the correct
WEP key.
82
Remote Maintenance by telnet
Parameter
Value configured
key [ “key value” ] val [1|2|3|4]
You can specify the WEP key when entering
in hexadecimal.
With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use
26 digit hexadecimals.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered. Specify the number to be registered with “val”.
2
When a WEP is specified by key, the WEP
specified by key phrase is overwritten.
To use this function, set the same key
number and WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each other. Put “0x”on the front
of WEP key.
You can omit the numbers with “val”. The
key number is set to 1 when making these
omissions. The default is blank.
keyphrase [ “phrase” ] val [1|2|3|4]
You can specify the WEP key when entering
in ASCII.
With a 64-bit WEP, you can use10 digit hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use
26 digit hexadecimals.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered. Specify the number to be registered with “val”.
When a WEP is specified by key phrase, the
WEP specified by key is overwritten.
To use this function, set the same key
number and WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each other.
You can omit the numbers with “val”. The
key number is set to1 when making these
omissions. The default is blank.
encval [1|2|3|4]
You can specify which of the four WEP keys
is used for packet encoding. “1” is set if a
number is not specified.
auth [open|shared]
You can set an authorization mode when using WEP. The specified value and authorized
mode are as follows:
open: open system authorized (default)
shared: shared key authorized rate
83
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Parameter
Value configured
rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m]
You can set the IEEE 802.11b transmitting
speed.
The speed you specify here is the speed at
which data is sent. You can receive data at
any speed.
auto: automatically set (default)
2
11m: 11 Mbps fixed
5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed
2m:2 Mbps fixed
1m: 1 Mbps fixed
wins
Use the “wins” command to configure WINS server settings.
❖ Viewing settings
msh> wins
• If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address,
the DHCP address is the valid address.
❖ Configuration
msh> wins “interface_name” {on | off}
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• Be sure to specify the interface.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❖ Address configuration
Use the following command to configure a WINS server IP address:
msh> wins “interface_name” {primary|secondary} “IP address”
• Use the “primary” command to configure a primary WINS server IP address.
• Use the “secondary” command to configure a secondary WINS server IP
address.
• Do not use “255.255.255.255” as the IP address.
84
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❖ NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID Selection
You can specify the NBT scope ID.
msh> wins “interface_name” scope “scope ID”
• The scope ID can be entered using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• Be sure to specify the interface.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
2
85
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
SNMP
The SNMP agent operating on UDP and IPX is incorporated into the built-in Ethernet board and optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit of this printer.
Using the SNMP manager, you can get information about the printer.
Important
❒ If you changed the machine's community name, change the configuration of
the connected computer accordingly, using SNMP Setup Tool. For details, see
SNMP Setup Tool Help.
2
The default community names are [public] and [admin]. You can get MIB information using these community names.
❖ Start SNMP Setup Tool
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin] on the [Programs] menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
• Windows XP:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin] on the [All Programs] menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
❖ Supported MIBs(SNMPv1/v2)
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
• RicohPrivateMIB
❖ Supported MIBs(SNMPv3)
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
• RicohPrivateMIB
• SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
• SNMP-TARGET-MIB
• SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB
• SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB
86
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Getting Printer Information over the
Network
This section explains details of each item displayed in the printer status and information.
This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings
that may not be available for your model.
2
Current Printer Status
The printer status can be checked using the following commands:
• UNIX: Use the “lpq” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• mshell: Use the “status” command.
Messages
Description
Access Restricted
The job was canceled because user have no authority.
Add staples (Booklet: Back)
The staple of booklet finisher (back) is exhausted.
Add staples (Booklet: Both)
The staple of booklet finisher is exhausted.
Add staples (Booklet: Front)
The staple of booklet finisher (front) is exhausted.
Adjusting...
The machine is initializing or calibrating.
Call Service Center
There is a malfunction in the machine.
Canceled
The job is reset.
Canceling Job...
The job is being reset.
Card/Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for prepaid card or key.
Coin or amount not inserted
The machine is waiting for coin to be inserted.
Coin/Key Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for coin or key counter.
Configuring...
Setting is being changed.
Cooling Down Fusing Unit...
The fusing unit is cooling down.
Cover Open: ADF
The document feeder is open.
Cover Open: Bridge Unit Left
The cover of the left bridge unit is open.
Cover Open: Bridge Unit Right
The cover of the right bridge unit is open.
Cover Open: Duplex Unit
The cover of the duplex unit is open.
Cover Open: Finisher
The cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Front
The front cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Rear
The cover of the rear finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Upper
The upper cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Front Cover
The front cover is open.
Cover Open: Lower Right Cover
The lower right cover is open.
87
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
2
88
Description
Cover Open: Right Cover
The right cover is open.
Cover Open: Upper Right Cover
The upper right cover is open.
Data Size Error
The data size error occurred.
Empty: Black Toner
The black toner cartridge is almost empty.
Energy Saver Mode
The machine is in Energy Saver Mode.
Error
An error has occurred.
Error: Address Book
An error has occurred in the data of the address book.
Error: Command Transmission
An error has occurred in the machine.
Error: DIMM Value
A memory error occurred.
Error: Ethernet Board
An Ethernet board error has occurred.
Error: HDD Board
A hard disk drive board error has occurred.
Error: Media Link Board
An error has occurred on the media link board.
Error: Memory Switch
A memory switch error has occurred.
Error: Optional Font
An error has occurred in the font file of the machine.
Error: Optional RAM
An error has occurred in the optional memory unit.
Error: Parallel I/F Board
An error has occurred in the parallel interface.
Error: PDL
An error has occurred in the page description language.
Error: Rem. Certificate Renewal
An error has occurred in the remote sever renewal.
Error: USB Board
An error has occurred in the USB interface board.
Error: USB Interface
An error has occurred in the USB interface.
Error: Wireless Card
Wireless card is not inserted during start up, or the
IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the wireless card is taken out after start up .
Error: Wireless Card or Board
An error has occurred in the IEEE802.11b interface
unit.
Exceed Booklet Stapling Limit
The printing has exceeded the stapling limit of the
booklet finisher.
Full: Finisher
Finisher tray is full.
Full: Finisher Booklet Tray
Booklet tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Finisher Shift Tray
Shift tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Finisher Shift Tray 1, 2
The shift tray 1 and 2 of Finisher are full.
Full: Finisher Tray
Finisher Tray is full.
Full: Finisher Upper Tray
Finisher's upper tray is full.
Full: Hole Punch Receptacle
Punch Chip receptacle for hole punch is full.
Full: Internal Shift Tray
The internal shift tray is full.
Full: Internal Tray 1
Internal tray 1 is full.
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Messages
Description
Full: Internal Tray 2
Internal tray 2 is full.
Full: Waste Toner
Waste toner is full.
Hex Dump Mode
It is a hex dump mode.
Immed. Trans. not connected
It did not connect directly with the other party of the
transmission.
Immediate Transmission Failed
An error has occurred while transmitting directly.
In Use: Copier
The copier is being used.
In Use: Fax
The fax is being used.
In Use: Finisher
Other functions is using Finisher.
In Use: Input Tray
Other functions is using the input tray.
In Use: Staple Unit
Other functions is using the staple unit.
Independent-supplier Toner
Toner that is not recommended is set.
Key Card not inserted
The machine is waiting for key card to be inserted.
Key Card/Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for key card or key counter to
be inserted.
Key Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for key counter to be left in it.
Loading Toner...
Toner is being supplied.
Low: Black Toner
The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner
is almost running out.
Low: Toner
The toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.
Malfunction: Booklet Processor
There is a problem with booklet finisher.
Malfunction: Duplex Unit
There is a problem with the duplex unit.
Malfunction: Ext. Charge Unit
There is a problem with the external charge unit.
Malfunction: Finisher
There is a problem with the finisher.
Malfunction: Interposer
There is a problem with the interposer.
Malfunction: Output Tray
There is a problem with the output tray.
Malfunction: Staple Unit
There is a problem with the staple unit.
Malfunction: Tray 1
There is a problem with tray 1.
Malfunction: Tray 2
There is a problem with tray 2.
Malfunction: Tray 3
There is a problem with tray 3.
Malfunction: Tray 3 (LCT)
There is a problem with tray 3 (LCT).
Malfunction: Tray 4
There is a problem with tray 4.
Memory Low: Copy
Memory shortage has occurred while the copy was
operating.
Memory Low: Data Storage
Memory shortage has occurred while the document
was being accumulated.
2
89
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
2
90
Description
Memory Low: Fax Scanning
Memory shortage has occurred while transmitting the
fax.
Memory Low: Scanning
Memory shortage has occurred while the scanner was
working.
Miscellaneous Error
Other error has occurred.
Mismatch: Paper Size
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size.
Mismatch: Paper Size and Type
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size and type.
Mismatch: Paper Type
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected type.
Near Replacing: Black PCU
Prepare the new black photoconductor unit.
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit K
Prepare the new development unit (black).
Near Replacing: Fusing Unit
Prepare the new fusing unit.
Nearly Full: Waste Toner
Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Need more Staples
Stapler has almost run out of staples.
No Paper: Interposer Tray
There is no paper in interposer unit.
No Paper: Selected Tray
There is no paper in specified tray.
No Paper: Tray 1
There is no paper in tray 1.
No Paper: Tray 2
There is no paper in tray 2.
No Paper: Tray 3
There is no paper in tray 3.
No Paper: Tray 3 (LCT)
There is no paper in tray 3 (Large Capacity tray).
No Paper: Tray 4
There is no paper in tray 4.
Not Detected: B2 Lever
B2 lever is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Black Toner
Black toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (K)
The development unit (black) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Duplex Feed Unit
The duplex unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Duplex Unit
The duplex feed unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Finisher
Finisher is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Fusing Unit
The fusing unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Input Tray
The paper feed tray is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Interposer
Interposer unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU
The photoconductor unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (K)
The photoconductor unit (black) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 1
Tray 1 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 2
Tray 2 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 3
Tray 3 is not correctly set.
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Messages
Description
Not Detected: Tray 3 (LCT)
The large capacity tray (tray 3) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 4
Tray 4 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: WasteToner Bottle
Waste toner bottle is not correctly set.
Not Reached, Data Deleted
Unreached job is deleted.
Not Reached, Data Stored
Unreached job is stored.
Offline
Printer is offline.
Original on Exposure Glass
The original remains on the exposure glass.
Panel Off Mode
The machine is in Panel-Off mode.
Panel Off Mode>>Printing ava.
The machine is in Control Panel-Off mode.
Paper in Duplex Unit
The paper remains in the duplex unit.
Paper in Finisher
The paper remains in Finisher.
Paper Misfeed: ADF
The paper has jammed in Document Feeder.
Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit
The paper has jammed in the duplex unit.
Paper Misfeed: Finisher
The paper has jammed in Finisher.
Paper Misfeed: Input Tray
The paper has jammed in the input tray.
Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output
The paper has jammed inside the machine.
Paper on Finisher Shift Tray 2
The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 2.
Paper on FinisherShiftTray1, 2
The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 1 and 2.
Prepaid Card not inserted
The machine is waiting for prepaid card to be inserted.
Print Complete
The print was completed.
Printing...
Printing is in progress.
Processing
Data is being processed.
Proxy Address/Port Incorrect
The proxy address and port setting is incorrect.
Proxy User/Password Incorrect
The proxy user name and password setting is incorrect.
RC Gate Connection Error
Failed connection with RC Gate.
Ready
The machine is ready to print.
Renewing Remote Certificate
The remote certificate is being renewed.
Replace Black PCU
It is time to replace the black photoconductor unit.
Replace Charger Kit
It is time to replace the charger kit.
Replace Cleaning Web
It is time to replace the Cleaning Web.
Replace Develop. Unit
It is time to replace the development unit.
Replace Develop. Unit (Black)
It is time to replace the development unit (black).
Replace Fusing Unit
It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Replace PCU
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
Replace Transfer Belt
It is time to replace the transfer belt.
2
91
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
2
Description
Replace Transfer Cleaning Unit
It is time to replace the transfer cleaning unit.
SD Card Authentication failed
SD card authentication failed.
Setting Remotely
The RDS setting is being processed.
Skipped due to Error
Skipped the error.
Storage Complete
The storage is complete.
Storage Failed
The storage has failed.
Supplies Order Call failed
The supply order call has failed.
Suspend / Resume Key Error
Finisher stop button was pressed.
Transmission Aborted
The transmission was interrupted.
Transmission Complete
The transmission completion was completed.
Transmission Failed
The transmission has failed.
Tray Error: Chaptering
The paper feed tray specification error has occurred
because chaptering as well as the normal paper use
the same tray for printing.
Tray Error: Duplex Printing
Selected paper tray cannot be used for duplex printing.
Unit Left Open: ADF
Document feeder is opened.
Warming Up...
The machine is warming up.
Note
❒ For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement.
❒ Check the error contents that may be printed in the configuration page. For
details about printing a configuration page, see Printer Reference.
92
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Printer configuration
You can check the printer configuration using telnet.
This section explains the checking procedure for input/output tray and printer
language.
• UNIX: Use the “info” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• mshell: Use the “info” command.
2
❖ Input Tray
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the paper tray
Name
Name of the paper tray
PaperSize
Size of paper loaded in the paper tray
Status
Current status of the paper tray
• Normal:Normal
• NoInputTray: No tray
• PaperEnd:No paper
❖ Output Tray
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the output tray
Name
Name of the output tray
Status
Current status of the output tray
• Normal:Normal
• PaperExist:Paper exist
• OverFlow:Paper is full
• Error:Other errors
❖ Printer Language
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the printer language used by the
printer
Name
Name of the printer language used in the
printer
Version
Version of the printer language
Note
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
93
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Understanding the Displayed Information
This section explains how to read status information returned by the network interface board.
Print Job Information
2
Use the following command to display print job information:
• UNIX: Use the “info” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp”, parameters.
• mshell: Use the “info” command.
Item
Description
Rank
Print job status.
• Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
• Waiting
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner
Print request user name.
Job
Print request number.
Files
The name of the document.
Total Size
The size of the data (spooled).
The default is 0 bytes.
Note
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
Print Log Information
This is a record of the most recent jobs printed.
Use the following command to display print log information:
• UNIX: Use the “prnlog” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp”, parameters.
• telnet : Use the “prnlog” command.
94
Item
Description
ID
Print request ID.
User
Print request user name.
Page
Number of pages printed
Understanding the Displayed Information
Item
Description
Result
Print Request Result
Communication Result
• OK
Print was completed normally. However, the print result may
not be as required due to printer problems.
• NG
Printing was not completed normally.
2
• Canceled
An “rcp“, or “rsh“ command print request was canceled, possibly due to the printing application. Not applicable to the
“ftp” or “rprinter”command.
Time
Time the print requested was received.
Time of print request reception
User ID
Printer driver-configured User ID.
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
JobName
Name of the document for printing
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
Note
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
Configuring the Network Interface Board
Use the following command to display network interface board settings:
• telnet : Use the “show” command.
Item
Description
Common
Mode
Protocol Up/Down
Protocol Settings
AppleTalk
TCP/IP
Netware
SMB
SCSI print
Device Up/Down
Device Settings
Parallel
USB
Bluetooth
Ethernet interface
Syslog priority
95
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
NVRAM version
Device name
Comment
Location
Contact
2
Soft switch
AppleTalk
AppleTalk settings
Mode
Net
Object
Type
Zone
TCP/IP
Mode
ftp
rsh
telnet
diprint
web
http
ftpc
snmp
ipp
autonet
rendezvous
ssl
nrs
rfu
nbt
ssdp
EncapType
DHCP
Host name
Address
Network
96
TCP/IP settings
Understanding the Displayed Information
Item
Description
Broadcast
DNS Domain
Gateway
Access Control settings
AccessRange[X]
X can be set between 1 and 5.
Time server
Time settings
2
Time Zone
Time server polling time
SYSLOG server
Websys settings
Home page URL[1]
Home page linkname[1]
Home page URL[2]
Home page linkname[2]
Help page URL
Netware
EncapType
RPRINTER number
Print server name
File server name
Context name
Switch
Mode
NDS/Bindery
Packet negotiation
Login Mode
Print job timeout
Protocol
SAP interval time
NDS Tree Name
Transfer Protocol
SMB
SMB settings
Switch
Mode
Direct print
Notification
Workgroup name
97
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
Computer name
Comment
Share name[1]
Protocol
SCSI print
2
Bidi
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11b settings
Host Name
DHCP
Address
Network
Broadcast
BDNS Domain
Communication Mode
SSID
Channel range
Channel
Authentication
TX Rate
Encyption key
DNS
Server[X]
Selected DNS Server
SMTP
Server name
Port number
Domain Name
ether
wlan
DDNS
ether
wlan
98
DNS settings
X can be set between 1 and 3.
Understanding the Displayed Information
Item
Description
WINS
WINS settings
ether
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
wlan
2
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
Bluetooth
Bluetooth mode
SSDP
Bluetooth settings
Bluetooth connection mode
SSDP settings
UUID
Profile
TTL
UPnP
UPnP settings
URL
Rendezvous
Rendezvous settings
Computer Name (cname)
Local Hostname<ether>
Local Hostname<wlan>
Location
Priority <diprint>
Priority <ipp>
IP TTL
LinkLocal Route for Multi I/F
SNMP
SNMP settings
SNMPv1v2
SNMPv3
protocol
v1Trap
v2Trap
v3Trap
SNMPv1v2 Remote Setting
SNMPv3 Privacy
99
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
AuthFree
Authfree settings
AuthFreeEntry[X]
X can be set between 1 and 5.
Parallel
USB
Shell mode
2
100
Remote maintenance tool mode
Message List
Message List
This is a list of messages that appear in the machine's system log. The system log
can be viewed using the “syslog” command.
System Log Information
2
Use the following command to display the system log information:
• UNIX: Use the “syslog” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• telnet : Use the “syslog” command.
Message
Problem and solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name>
denied. Either there is no account for this print
server on the NetWare server or the password
was incorrect.
(In the print server mode) Login to the file
server failed. Make sure that the print server is
registered on the file server. If a password is
specified for the print server, delete it.
account is unavailable:
User account is disabled. This could be because it use the same account name as the administrator account.
Same account name be used.
account is unavailable:
The authentication password is not set up.
User account is disabled. This could be because the authentication password is not set,
and only the encryption account is set.
account is unavailable: encryption is impossible.
Encryption is not possible and account is disabled. This could be because:
• Security option is not installed.
• Encryption password has not been specified.
add_sess: bad trap <IP address>community
<community name>
The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when
the community access type is TRAP. Specify
the host IP address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess: community<community name> already defined.
The same community name already exists.
Use another community name.
add_sess_ipx: bad trap<IPX address>commu- The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailnity <community name>
able when the community access type is
TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the
TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: community <community
name> already defined.
The same community name already exists.
Use another community name.
Attach FileServer= <file servername>
Connection to the file server as the nearest
server has been established.
Attach to print queue <print queue name>
(In the print server mode) Attached to the
print queue.
btd is disabled.
Communication via Bluetooth is unavailable
because btd is disabled in the security mode.
Enable the btd in the security mode.
101
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message
Problem and solutions
centrod is disabled.
Communication via parallel connection is unavailable because centrod is disabled in the security mode.
Enable centrod in the security mode.
Cannot create service connection
(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
file server has not been established. The
number of file server users may have exceeded
the maximum capacity of the file server.
Cannot find rprinter (<print server
name>/<printer number>)
The printer with the number displayed on the
print server does not exist. Make sure that the
printer number is registered on the print server.
Change IP address from DHCP Server.
The IP address changes when DHCP lease is renewed. To always assign the same IP address,
set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
child process exec error! (process name)
The network service failed to start. Turn the
printer off and then on. If this does not work,
contact your service or sales representative.
Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP serveraddress>).
The IP address was successfully received from
the DHCP server.
connection from <IP address>
Login was from the host IP address.
2
Could not attach to FileServer<error number> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
file server has not been established. The file
server has refused the connection. Check the
file server configuration.
102
Could not attach to PServer<print server>
(In the remote printermode) Connection to the
print server has not been established. The
print server has refused the connection. Check
the print server configuration.
Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps
Speed of the network (10Mbps, 100 Mbps, or
1Gbps).
Current IP address <current IP address>
Current IPv4 address.
Current IPX address<IPX address>
Current IPX address
DHCP lease time expired.
DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries
to discover the DHCP server again. The IP address until now becomes invalid.
DHCP server not found.
The DHCP server was not found. Make sure
that the DHCP is on the network.
dhcpcd start.
The DHCPCD service (dhcp client service) has
started.
dpsd is disabled.
Communication via PictBridge is unavailable
because PictBridge is disabled in the security
mode. Enable PictBridge in the security mode.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from<MAC address>).
The same IP address was used. Each IP address must be unique. Check the address of the
device indicated in [MAC address].
Message List
Message
Problem and solutions
Established SPX Connection with PServer,
(RPSocket=<socketnumber>, connID=<connection ID>)
(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
print server has been established.
exiting
The lpd service has ended and the system is
exiting the process.
Exit pserver
(In the print server mode) The print server
function is disabled because the necessary
print server settings have not been made.
Frametype =<frame typename>
The frame type name is configured to be used
on NetWare.
httpd start.
The httpd service has started.
inetd start.
The inetd service has started.
< Interface >: Subnet overlap.
The same IP address and the subnet mask is
used with other device.
IPP cancel-job: permission denied.
The printer could not authenticate the name of
the user attempting to cancel a job.
IPP job canceled. jobid=%d.
The spooled job was canceled due to error or
user request.
LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), RenewTime=<renewtime>(sec).
The resource lease time received from the
DHCP server is displayed in [lease time] in
seconds. The renewal time is displayed in [renew time] in seconds.
Login to fileserver <file server name>
(<IPX|IP>,<NDS|BINDERY>)
(In the print server mode) Login to the file
server is in the NDS or BINDERY mode.
Memory allocate error.
2
Data cannot be obtained.
Disconnect the USB cable, and then connect it.
Name registration success. WINS Server=<WINS server address> NetBIOS
Name=<NetBIOS name>
Name registration of <NetBIOS Name> to
<WINS server address> was successful.
Name registration success in Broadcast
name=<NetBIOS Name>
Name registration by Broadcast name of <NetBIOS Name> was successful.
Name registration failed. name=<NetBIOS
name>
Name registration of <NetBIOS Name> failed.
Change to different NetBIOS name.
nbtd start.
The nbtd service has started.
nprinter start (Netware)
(In the remote printer mode) The NetWare
service has started.
nwstart start. (NetWare)
The service for NetWare protocol stack setting
has started.
Open log file <file name>
(In the print server mode) The specified log file
has been opened.
papd start. (AppleTalk)
The AppleTalk print service has started.
103
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
2
Message
Problem and solutions
phy release file open failed.
Replacing the network interface board is required. Contact your sales or service representative.
Print queue <print queue name> cannot be
serviced by printer 0, <print server name>
(In the print server mode) The print queue
cannot be established. Make sure that print
queue exists on the specified file server.
Print server <print servername>has no printer. (In the print server mode) The printer is not assigned to the print server. Using NWadmin,
assign the printer, and then restart it.
print session full
No more print jobs can be accepted.
Printer <printer name> has no queue
(In the print server mode) The print queue is
not assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin,
assign the print queue to the printer, and then
restart it.
pserver start. (NetWare)
(In the print server mode) The NetWare service has started.
Required file server (<file servername>) not
found
The required file server is not found.
restarted.
The lpd service has started.
sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP name>
The SAP function has started. The SAP packet
is issued to advertise the service on the SAP table on the NetWare server.
session <community name> not defined.
The requested community name is not defined.
session_ipx <community name> not defined.
The requested community name is not defined.
Set context to <NDS contextname>
An NDS context name has been set.
shutdown signal received. network service re- The network service is rebooting.
booting...
smbd start. (NETBIOS)
The smbd service has started.
SMTPC: failed to get smtp server ip-address.
The SMTP server IP address could not be obtained. This could be because:
• The specified DNS server could not be
found.
• No connection to the network has been established.
• The specified DNS server could not be
found.
• An incorrect DNS server is specified.
• The specified SMTP server IP address
could not be found in the DNS server.
104
Message List
Message
Problem and solutions
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. timeout.
Connection to the SMTP server failed due to
timeout. This could be because the specified
SMTP server name is incorrect, or no connection to the network has been established, or the
network configuration is incorrect, so there is
no response from the SMTP server. Check the
SMTP server name, or the network connection
and configuration.
SMTPC: refused connect by smtp server.
Connection to the SMTP server is denied. This
could be because server other than the SMTP
server has been specified, or the specified
SMTP server port number is incorrect. Check
the SMTP server name, port number, or the
SMTP server port number.
SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close.
Connection to the SMTP server failed due to
no response from SMTP. This could be because a server other than the SMTP server has
been specified, or the specified SMTP server
port number is incorrect. Check the SMTP
server name, port number, or the SMTP server
port number.
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server.
Connection to the SMTP server failed. This
could be because no connection to the network
has been established, or the network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from
the SMTP server, or the specified SMTP server
name is incorrect, or the specified SMTP server
IP address could not be found in the DNS server, or a server other than the SMTP server has
been specified, or the specified SMTP server
port number is incorrect. Check the DNS Server's IP address and SMTP server's IP address,
or the SMTP server name and SMTP port
number, or the SMTP server's SMTP port
number, or the network connection and configuration.
SMTPC: username or password wasn’t correct. [response code] (information)
Connection to the SMTP server failed, because
the specified SMTP user name is incorrect, or
the specified SMTP password is incorrect.
Check the SMTP user name and password.
Snmp over IP is ready
Communication over TCP/IP with snmp is
available.
Snmp over ipx is ready.
Communication over IPX with snmp is available.
snmpd start.
The snmpd service has started.
started.
The direct print service has started.
Started.
The rendezvous function is enabled.
terminated.
The rendezvous function is disabled.
2
105
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message
Problem and solutions
The print server received error <error
number> during attempt to log in to the network. Access to the network was denied. Verify that the print server name and password
are correct.
Login to the file server failed. The print server
is not registered or a password is specified.
Register the print server without specifying a
password.
too many pictures.
PictBridge printing failed because too many
image are sent during one print transaction.
Reduce images at one print transaction.
trap account is unavailable.
v3Trap cannot be sent. This could be because
the Trap destination account is different from
the account specified by the printer.
usbd is disable.
Plug and Play function and printing is disabled because usbd is disabled in the security
mode.
2
Enable usbd in the security mode.
WINS name registration: No response to serv- There was no response from the WINS server.
er<WINS server address>
Check the correct WINS server address is entered. Alternatively, check the WINS server is
functioning properly.
WINS wrong scopeID=<Scope ID>
An invalid scope ID was used. Use a valid
scope ID.
Note
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
106
3. Special Operations under
Windows
Printing Files Directly from Windows
You can print files directly using Windows commands. For example, you can
print PostScript files for PostScript 3.
❖ Windows 95/98/Me
You can print files directly using ftp command.
❖ Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0
You can print files directly using rcp and ftp command.
Setup
Follow the procedure below to make network environment settings.
A Enable TCP/IP with the control panel, and then set up the printer’s network
environment about TCP/IP including IP addresses.
TCP/IP of the printer is set as default.
B Install a TCP/IP in Windows to set up the network environment.
Consult the network administrator for the local setting information.
C To print under Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, install “Printing
service for UNIX” as the network application. To print under Windows NT
4.0, install “Microsoft TCP/IP printing” as the network application.
Reference
For details about setting the IP address of the printer using DHCP, see
p.114 “Using DHCP”
Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address
When a host name is defined, you can specify a printer by host name instead of
IP address. The host names vary depending on the network environment.
When using DNS
Use the host name set to the data file on the DNS server.
When setting the IP address of a printer using DHCP
Use the printer name on the configuration page as the host name.
Note
❒ For details about printing a configuration page, see General Setting Guide.
107
Special Operations under Windows
In other cases
Add the IP address and host name of the network printer to the hosts file on the
computer used for printing. Methods of addition vary depending on operating
systems.
Windows 95/98/Me
A Copy
\WINDOWS\HOSTS.SAM to the same directory and name it
“HOSTS” with no extension.
3
B Open the "\WINDOWS\HOSTS" file created using memo pad files, for instance.
C Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following for-
mat:
192.168.15.16 host # NP
“192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#NP”
is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between “192.168.15.16” and
“host”, between “host” and “#NP” respectively, using one line for this format.
D Save the file.
Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0
A Open the hosts file using memo pad files, for instance.
The hosts file is in the following folder:
\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC\HOSTS
“\WINNT” is the directory of the installation destination for Windows
2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
B Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following for-
mat:
192.168.15.16 host # NP
“192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#NP”
is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between “192.168.15.16” and
“host”, between “host” and “#NP” respectively, using one line for this format.
C Save the file.
108
Printing Files Directly from Windows
Printing Commands
The following explains printing operations using the “rcp”, and “ftp” commands.
Enter commands using the command prompt window. The location of the command prompts varies depending on operating systems:
• Windows 95/98
[Start] - [Programs] - [MS-DOS Prompt]
• Windows Me
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] - [MS-DOS Prompt]
• Windows 2000
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] - [Command Prompt]
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
[Start] - [All Programs] - [Accessories] - [Command Prompt]
• Windows NT 4.0
[Start] - [Programs] - [Command Prompt]
3
Note
❒ Match the data format of the file to be printed with the emulation mode of the
printer.
❒ If the message “print requests full” appears, no print jobs can be accepted. Try
again when sessions end. For each command, the amount of possible sessions
is indicated as follows:
• rcp, rsh: 5
• ftp: 3
❒ Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing commands.
❒ The “option” specified in a command is an intrinsic printer option and its syntax is similar to printing from UNIX. For details, see UNIX Supplement.
rcp
First, register the printer's host name in the hosts file.
c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file name [pass name\file name...]
printer's host name:[option]
Note
❒ In file names, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards.
❒ When printing a binary file, add the “-b” option.
When using a printer with the host name “host” to print a PostScript file named
“file 1” or “file 2” located in the “C:\PRINT” directory, the command line is as follows:
c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 host:filetype=RPS
109
Special Operations under Windows
Reference
For details about registering the printer's host name in the hosts file, see p.107
“Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address”
ftp
Use the “put” or “mput” command according to the number of files to be printed.
❖ When one file is printed
ftp> put \pass name\file name [option]
3
❖ When multiple files are printed
ftp> mput \pass name\file name [\pass name\file name...]
[option]
Follow the procedure below to print using the “ftp” command.
A Formulate the printer's IP address or the host name of the hosts file printer
as an argument and use the "ftp" command.
% ftp printer's IP address
B Enter the user name and password, and then press the {# Enter} key.
For details about the user name and password, consult your network administrator.
User:
Password:
When user authentication is set, enter a login user name and password.
C When printing a binary file, set the file mode to binary.
ftp> bin
When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.
D Specify files to be printed.
The following shows the examples of printing a PostScript file named “file 1”
in the “C:\PRINT” directory and printing file 1 and file 2.
ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1 filetype=RPS
ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2
E Quit ftp.
ftp> bye
Note
❒ “=”, “,”, “_”, and “;”cannot be used for filenames. File names will be read
as option strings.
110
❒ For “mput” command, option can not be defined.
❒ For “mput” command, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards in file names.
❒ When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.
4. Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal Service /
MetaFrame
The following explains how to use Windows Terminal Service and Maintenance.
Operating Environment
The following operating systems and MetaFrame versions are supported.
❖ Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3 / FR1+SP3 / SP4
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1 / SP2 / FR1
❖ Windows 2000 Server / Advanced Server
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3 / FR1+SP3 / SP4
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1 / SP2 / SP3 / FR1 / FR2 / FR3
• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0
• Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
❖ Windows 2003 Server
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR3
• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0
• Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
Supported Printer Drivers
❖ When Windows Terminal Service is operating
• PCL drivers
• PostScript 3
• RPCS drivers
Note
❒ Some RPCS printer driver functions do not work if Windows Terminal Service is installed.
111
Appendix
Limitations
The following limitations apply to the Windows Terminal Service environment.
These limitations are built in Windows Terminal Service or MetaFrame.
❖ Windows Terminal Service
In the Windows Terminal Service environment, some of the printer driver’s
functions is unavailable. In an environment where Windows Terminal Service is installed, some of the printer driver’s functions is unavailable, even if
any function of Windows Terminal Service is not used. When you install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client in an environment where the Terminal Service is running on a Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition or the
Windows 2000 Server family computer, be sure to install it using the install
mode. The following are the two methods of installation using the install
mode:
A Use [Add/Remove Programs] in [Control Panel] to install SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client.
B Enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:
To quit the install mode, enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt.
4
❖ MetaFrame's [Auto-creating client printers]
Using [Auto-creating client printers] can select a logical printer created by copying the client's local printer data to the MetaFrame server. We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for
your work.
• The settings for optional equipment will not be stored in the server after
the equipment is disconnected. The settings for optional equipment will be
restored to its defaults each time the client computer logs on to the server.
• When printing a large number of bitmap images or using the server in a
WAN environment over dial-up lines such as ISDN, printing may not be
possible or errors may occur, depending on data transfer rates.
• When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or higher versions, we recommend making
settings in [Client Printer bandwidth] under [Citrix Management Console] according to the environment.
• If a print error occurs on the server and the print job or a printer created in
[Auto-creating client printers] cannot be deleted, we recommend the following:
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1
Make settings in [Delete unfinished print jobs] in the registry. For details,
see the Readme file provided with MetaFrame.
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2
Make settings in [Delete pending print jobs at logout] under [Printer Properties Management] of Citrix Management Console.
112
When Using Windows Terminal Service / MetaFrame
❖ MetaFrame's [Printer driver replication]
Using [Printer driver replication] can distribute printer drivers across all servers
in a server farm. We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for your work.
• If the printer drivers are not properly copied, install them directly onto
each server.
4
113
Appendix
Using DHCP
You can use the printer in a DHCP environment. You can also register the printer NetBIOS name on a WINS server when it is running.
❖ When a static IP address is set for both interfaces
• IP Address: If interface IP addresses overlap, the Ethernet interface is selected.
• Subnet Mask: If interface subnet masks overlap, the Ethernet interface is
selected.
• Gateway Address: The selected value is applied.
Note
❒ Make the gateway address setting inside the subnet set in the interface.
4
❒ If a value is beyond the range of the subnet selected by the interface, the
machine operates using “0.0.0.0”.
❖ When obtaining addresses from the DHCP server
• IP Address, Subnet Mask: you can configure addresses assigned by a
DHCP server. If IP addresses overlap or the same subnet IP addresses are
selected, the effective value is assigned only to the prioritized interface.
Ethernet has default interface priority.
• AutoNet: A temporary IP address starting with 169.254 and not used on
the network, is assigned to the prioritized interface.
• Gateway Address, DNS Server Address, and Domain Name: You can configure the addresses assigned by DHCP to the prioritized interface.
If the gateway address is beyond the range of the subnet selected for the
interface, the machine operates using “0.0.0.0”.
Ethernet has default interface priority.
❖ When there are static IP addresses and addresses assigned by DHCP
• IP Address and subnet mask: if a static IP address is the same as an address
assigned by DHCP, or the static subnet mask address and the subnet mask
address assigned by DHCP overlap, the machine uses the static IP address
interface. The interface with the DHCP setting is set by default.
• Gateway Address: operates using the address entered manually.
If a static address is not selected, or is set to 0.0.0.0, the interface using the
address assigned by DHCP is used.
114
Using DHCP
Note
❒ Printers that register the printer NetBIOS name on a WINS server must be
configured for the WINS server.
❒ Supported DHCP servers are Microsoft DHCP Server included with Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, and the
DHCP server included with NetWare and UNIX.
❒ If you do not use the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the
DHCP server so the same IP address is assigned every time.
❒ To use the WINS server, change the WINS server setting to “active” using the
control panel.
❒ Using the WINS server, you can configure the host name via the remote network printer port.
❒ DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you use DHCP relay-agent on a network via ISDN, it will result in increased line charges. This is because your
computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred from the
printer.
❒ If there is more than one DHCP server, use the same setting for all servers.
The machine operates using data from the DHCP server that responds first.
4
Using AutoNet
If the printer IP address is not automatically assigned by the DHCP server, a
temporary IP address starting with 169.254 and not used on the network can be
automatically selected by the printer.
Note
❒ The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is given priority over that selected by AutoNet.
❒ You can confirm the current IP address on the configuration page. For more
information about the configuration page, see General Settings Guide.
❒ When AutoNet is running, the NetBIOS name is not registered on the WINS
server.
❒ The machine cannot communicate with devices that do not have the AutoNet
function. However, this machine can communicate with Macintosh computers running Mac OS X 10.2.3. or higher.
115
Appendix
Precautions
Please pay attention to the following when using the network interface board.
When configuration is necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below.
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network
When using NetWare (file server)
If the NetWare file server and printer are on opposite sides of a router, packets
are sent back and forth continuously, possibly incurring communications charges. Because packet transmission is a feature of NetWare, you need to change the
configuration of the router. If the network you are using does not allow you to
configure the router, configure the machine instead.
4
❖ Configuring the router
Filter packets so they do not pass over the dial-up router.
Note
❒ The MAC address of the filtering printer is printed on the printer configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see
Printer Reference.
❒ For more information about configuring the printer if the router cannot be
configured, see the following instructions.
Configuring the printer with NetWare
A Following the setup method described earlier in this manual, configure the
file server.
B Set the frame type for NetWare environment.
Reference
For more information about selecting a frame type, see the General Settings Guide.
Configuring the printer without NetWare
A When not printing, the network interface board sends packets over the network. Set NetWare to “inactive”.
Reference
For more information about selecting a protocol, see General Settings
Guide.
116
Precautions
When Using Network Utility
If the machine is connected to a network, observe the following points when setting up the machine or changing settings:
For more details, see the operating instructions and Help for ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder Lite/Professional.
❖ When a dial-up router is connected in a network environment
The settings for the delivery server to be connected must be made appropriately for the machine with ScanRouter V2 Professional, Auto Document Link,
or DeskTopBinder Lite/Professional. In addition, set up connected devices
using the I/O settings of ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility.
If the network environment changes, make the necessary changes for the delivery server using the machine, the administration utility of client computers, Auto Document Link, and DeskTopBinder Lite/Professional. Also, set
the correct information for the connected devices using the I/O settings of
ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility.
4
Important
❒ If the machine is set up to connect to the delivery server via a dial-up router, the router will dial and go online whenever a connection to the delivery
server is made. Telephone charges may be incurred.
❖ When connected to a computer that uses dial-up access
• Do not install ScanRouter V2 Professional on a computer which uses dialup access.
• When using ScanRouter V2 Professional, DeskTopBinder Lite/Professional, Auto Document Link, or a TWAIN driver on a computer with dial-up
access, a dial-up connection may be performed when connecting to the delivery server and other equipment, depending on the setup. If the computer is set up to connect to the Internet automatically, the confirmation
dialog box will not appear, and telephone charges may be incurred without your being aware of it. To prevent unnecessary connections, the computer should be set up so the confirmation dialog box always appears
before establishing a connection. Do not make unnecessary connections
when using the above listed software.
117
Appendix
NetWare Printing
Form feed
You should not configure form feed on NetWare. Form feed is controlled by the
printer driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer
might not work properly. If you want to change form feed settings, always configure them using Windows.
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, clear the [Form feed]
check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
4
Banner page
You should not configure a banner page on NetWare. If you want to change the
banner page setting, always configure it using Windows.
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, clear the [Enable banner]
check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Printing after resetting the machine
After resetting the remote printer, the connection from the print server will be
cut off for about 30-40 seconds before re-connecting. Depending on the NetWare
specification, print jobs may be accepted, but they will not be printed during this
interval.
When using the machine as a remote printer, wait about two minutes after resetting before attempting to print.
118
Precautions
When the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit Is Installed
When using the wireless LAN interface on the network, note the following:
❖ When moving the machine
Detach the antennas when relocating the machine locally.
After moving the machine, reattach the antennas, ensuring that:
• The antennas are positioned clear of obstacles.
• There is 40 to 60 mm between the antennas, so that they do not touch.
• The exposure glass cover and the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) do not
knock the antennas.
❖ If the network area provides poor radio environment
Where radio wave conditions are bad, the network may not function due to
interrupted or failed connections. When checking the wireless LAN signal
and the access point, follow the procedure below to improve the situation:
• Position the access point nearer to the machine.
• Clear the space between access point and machine of obstructions.
• Move radio wave generating appliances, such as microwaves, away from
the machine and access point.
4
Note
❒ For information about how to check radio wave status, see the General Settings Guide.
❒ For more information about access point radio wave conditions, refer to the
access point manual.
119
Appendix
Information about Installed Applications
RSA® BSAFE
• This product includes RSA® BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security Inc.
• RSA is a registered trademark and BSAFE is a registered trademark of RSA
Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.
4
120
Specifications
Specifications
Interface
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.11b
Frame type
EthernetII, IEEE 802.2, IEEE 802.3, SNAP
Printer (LAN-Fax)
TCP/IP
RSH
RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
IPP
IPX/SPX (NetWare)
AppleTalk
Internet Fax
4
TCP/IP
SMTP
POP
IMAP
Network Scanner
TCP/IP
RSH
FTP
SMTP
POP
Document Server
TCP/IP
FTP
HTTP
Management Function
TCP/IP
RSH
RCP
FTP
SNMP
HTTP
TELNET (mshell)
NBT
DHCP
DNS
LDAP
SNMP v1/v2
MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB
SNMP v3
MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB, SNMPFRAMEWORK-MIB, SNMP-TARGET-MIB, SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB, SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB, SNMP-VIEWBASED-ACM-MIB
121
Appendix
To use IPP and SMB, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
To use IPP under Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, use the Standard IPP
port. To use IPP under Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
Appletalk can be used when the PostScript 3 module is installed.
4
122
INDEX
A
Access Control, 59
appletalk, 59
Auto E-mail Notification, 53
AutoNet, 115
Autonet, 60
B
Bluetooth, 60
C
Changing the Network Interface Board
Configuration, 40
Changing the Paper Type, 41
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode, 45
D
DHCP, 61, 114
dial-up router, 116
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help, 37
dns, 63
Domain Name, 64
G
Getting Printer Information over the
Network, 87
Going to the Top Page
Web Image Monitor, 33
H
Host Name, 65
How to Read This Manual, 1
I
L
Locking the Menus on the machine's
Control Panel, 41
M
Mail authentication, 55
Managing User Information, 42
message, 101
MIB, 86
N
netware, 68
NetWare 5/5.1, 23, 24
NetWare 6/6.5, 23, 24
Notify by e-mail function, 52
O
On-demand E-mail Notification, 56
P
passwd, 69
Password, 69
precautions, 116
Printer Status Notification by E-mail, 52
Printing Commands, 109
Printing Files Directly from Windows,
107
prnlog, 70
Pure IP, 24
R
remote printer, setup, 28
rendezvous, 70
route, 71
IEEE 802.11b, 82
ifconfig, 66
info, 67
information, 74, 94, 95, 101
Installing, 39
IPP, 67
J
Job Spool, 79
123
S
T
set, 72
Setting a Password, 45
Setting Up as a Print Server, 22, 23, 24
Setting Up as a Remote Printer, 26, 28
Setup, 107
show, 74
slp, 74
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 39
smb, 74
SNMP, 86
snmp, 75
sntp, 78
specifications, 121
spoolsw, 79
status, 80
syslog, 80
124
GB
TCP/IP address, 66
telnet, 58, 60, 84
Types of Menu Configuration and Mode
Web Image Monitor, 35
U
Using a Host Name Instead of an IP
Address, 107
W
Web Image Monitor, 31
WINS, 84
GB
EN
USA
AE
AE
D313-6700
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS , and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc, registered in the United States and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
Novell, NetWare, NDS and NDPS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
Citrix® and MetaFrame® are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
UPnP is a trademark of the UPnP Implementers Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
The product names of Windows Server™ 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Web Edition
The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
Copyright© 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the “RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing this software
or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified
as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
Copyright © 2006
Network Guide
GB GB
EN USA
AE AE D313-6700
PostScript 3 Supplement
1
Windows Configuration
2
Mac OS Configuration
3
Using PostScript 3
4
Printer Utility for Mac
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Trouble Shooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner or print cartridge, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or
prevent the machine from unauthorized use. Also refer to this manual for the
procedures for registering administrators, as well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy/Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
i
❖ Other manuals
• Manuals for This Machine
• Safety Information
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference Fax Guide
• Quick Reference Printer Guide
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
• PostScript 3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Windows Configuration
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port.......................3
Installing DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .........................................3
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - TCP/IP)................4
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - IPP) .....................5
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)...........................7
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP) ................................8
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - TCP/IP)...9
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - IPP) ...10
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP)......................12
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)............................13
Changing the Port Settings for DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .....15
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port .........................................................................17
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................17
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....18
Using the LPR Port ..............................................................................................20
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................20
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....21
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................22
Using as the Windows Network Printer .............................................................24
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me) ............................24
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................25
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....26
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................27
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer........................................29
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver..............................................................29
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................30
Windows 98 SE / Me - USB .....................................................................................30
Windows 2000 - USB ...............................................................................................32
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB .............................................................33
Troubleshooting for using USB ................................................................................34
Printing with Parallel Connection.......................................................................35
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me) ............................35
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (Windows 2000) ........................................36
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....37
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................38
Printing with Bluetooth Connection...................................................................39
Supported Profiles....................................................................................................39
Printing with Bluetooth Connection .......................................................................... 39
If a Message Appears during Installation ..........................................................42
Making Option Settings for the Printer ..............................................................43
Setting Up the Printer Driver...............................................................................44
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................44
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................45
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................47
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................49
iii
2. Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS..................................................................................................................51
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File ............................................51
Setting Up PPD Files ...............................................................................................52
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................................52
Installing Adobe Type Manager ...............................................................................53
Installing Screen fonts..............................................................................................54
Changing to EtherTalk .............................................................................................55
Mac OS X ..............................................................................................................56
Installing the PPD Files ............................................................................................56
Setting Up the PPD File ........................................................................................... 56
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................................57
Using USB Interface.................................................................................................57
Using Bonjour (Rendezvous) ...................................................................................58
Changing to EtherTalk .............................................................................................59
Configuring the Printer........................................................................................60
3. Using PostScript 3
Setting Up Options ..............................................................................................61
Printing a Document............................................................................................63
Job Type ..................................................................................................................64
User Code ................................................................................................................85
Paper Selection........................................................................................................86
Paper Size................................................................................................................86
Fit to Paper...............................................................................................................86
Input Slot ..................................................................................................................87
Toner Saving / Edge Smoothing ..............................................................................87
Duplex Printing......................................................................................................... 88
Collate ......................................................................................................................90
Paper Type...............................................................................................................91
Destination Tray .......................................................................................................91
Staple ....................................................................................................................... 92
Watermark................................................................................................................92
Watermark Text........................................................................................................93
Watermark Font .......................................................................................................93
Watermark Size........................................................................................................93
Watermark Angle .....................................................................................................94
Watermark Style.......................................................................................................94
Dithering...................................................................................................................95
Image Smoothing: ....................................................................................................95
iv
4. Printer Utility for Mac
Installing Printer Utility for Mac..........................................................................97
Starting Printer Utility for Mac ............................................................................98
Mac OS .................................................................................................................... 98
Mac OS X.................................................................................................................98
Printer Utility for Mac Functions ........................................................................99
Downloading PS Fonts...........................................................................................100
Displaying Printer's Fonts.......................................................................................100
Deleting Fonts ........................................................................................................101
Initializing the Printer Disk...................................................................................... 101
Page Setup ............................................................................................................102
Printing Fonts Catalog............................................................................................102
Printing Fonts Sample............................................................................................102
Renaming the Printer .............................................................................................102
Restarting the Printer .............................................................................................103
Downloading PostScript Files ................................................................................104
Selecting the Zone .................................................................................................104
Displaying the Printer Status..................................................................................105
Launching the Dialogue Console ........................................................................... 106
INDEX....................................................................................................... 107
v
vi
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
1
2
1. Windows Configuration
Using the DeskTop BinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
Installing DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Important
❒ To install DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows
2000 / XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you
must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ Install DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the
printer driver when using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box. After reading through its contents, click [I accept the agreement.], and
then click [Next >].
F Click the [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin] checkbox, and then click [Next >].
The DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.
G Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
H Click [Complete].
If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTop BinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart the computer.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
3
Windows Configuration
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me TCP/IP)
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
1
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next >].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port…].
N Click [SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click [OK].
O Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
4
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
P Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], enter the IP address or host
name of the machine, and then click [OK].
You cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For
example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly,
if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
1
Q Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Print to the following port:], and
then click [OK].
R Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me IPP)
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next >].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
5
Windows Configuration
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
1
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port…].
N Click [SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click [OK].
O Click [IPP].
P In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the print-
er's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL ( a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's address/ipp" as the printer's address.
Q Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port name.
R Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, IPP user name, and other
settings. Make these settings, and then click [OK].
You can enter "http://printer's address/ipp" as the printer's address.
S Click [OK].
T Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Print to the following port:], and
then click [OK] .
U Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
6
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
1
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the machine.
K Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
7
Windows Configuration
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's address/ipp" as the printer's address.
8
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the name of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port name.
1
L Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, the IPP user name and other settings. Specify the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
For information about the settings, see DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client Help.
M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
O Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003 - TCP/IP)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
9
Windows Configuration
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
1
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the machine.
K Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
N Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003 - IPP)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
10
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
1
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's address/ipp" as the printer's address.
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port name.
L Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For information about the settings, see DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client Help.
M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the printer driver you want to install is selected, and
then click [Next >].
O Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
11
Windows Configuration
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 TCP/IP)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].
F Click [Add Port...].
G Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
H Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using [TCP/IP] appears.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the machine.
J Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.
K Click [Next >].
L Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
12
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
M Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
N Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
1
The printer driver installation starts.
P Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].
F Click [Add Port...].
G Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
H Click [IPP].
13
Windows Configuration
I In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer”as the printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's address/ipp" as the printer's address.
1
J Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port name.
K Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For information about the settings, see DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client Help.
L Click [OK].
M Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.
N Click [Next >].
O Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
P Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
Q Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
R Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
S Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
14
Using the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
Changing the Port Settings for DeskTop BinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client
1
Follow the procedure below to change the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and
printer groups.
Windows 95 / 98:
A Open the [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.
B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C
Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings...].
The [Port Settings:] dialog box appears.
Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:
A Open the [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.
B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port]
The [Port Configuration] dialog box appears.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
A Open the [Printers and Faxes] window from the [Start] menu.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
C
Click the [Port] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.
• User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.
Reference
For information about these settings, see DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
15
Windows Configuration
How to enable Recovery/Parallel Printing
If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the procedure below.
1
A Start DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click
the DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar.
B Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel
Printing for each port] check box.
C Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box
16
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
1
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP Port. Use the
SmartDeviceMonitor port.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
I Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
J Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name
if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model".
K Click [Next >]
L Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
17
Windows Configuration
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
O Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
1
The printer driver installation starts.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP Port. Use the
SmartDeviceMonitor port.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
18
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer attached to this printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Create a new port], and then click [Next >].
I Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port
J Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name
if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model".
1
K Click [Next >]
L Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
P Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
19
Windows Configuration
Using the LPR Port
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
1
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
J Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click
[OK].
K Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
20
Using the LPR Port
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the LPR Port. Use the SmartDeviceMonitor port.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].
F Click [Local Printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [LPR Port] in [Create a new port], and then click [Next >].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
J Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box], and then click
[OK].
K Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
21
Windows Configuration
M Click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
1
The printer driver installation starts.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory."
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].
F Click [Add Port...].
G Select [LPR Port], and then click [New Port...].
H Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
I Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, and then
click [OK].
J Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.
K Click [Next >].
22
Using the LPR Port
L Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
M Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
1
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
N Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
P Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
23
Windows Configuration
Using as the Windows Network Printer
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me)
1
Important
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Browse].
H Click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for
Printer] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
J Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
M Restart the computer.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
24
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Using as the Windows Network Printer
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
Important
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
1
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next >].
G Select the location method from the [Locate Your Printer] screen, and then
click [Next >].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
25
Windows Configuration
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
1
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, SmartDeviceMonitor notification functions may not be possible for the client.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer] and then click
[Next >].
G Select [Browse for a printer], and then click [Next >].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
26
Using as the Windows Network Printer
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
❒ To print from a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before
you connect the print server to the printer.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Network printer server], and then click [Next >].
F Click [Next >].
G Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
H Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
I Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next >].
J Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
K Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
27
Windows Configuration
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
1
28
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote
Printer
1
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Important
❒ In an IPv6 environment, Netware servers cannot be used.
Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.
A In the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, open the printer properties.
B Click the [PostScript] tab.
When using Windows 2000 / XP or Windows NT 4.0, click the [Device Settings] tab, and then proceed to step to clear the check box.
C Click [Advanced].
D Clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes, and
then click [OK].
E Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
29
Windows Configuration
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
1
Important
❒ Make sure that machine is connected to the computer's USB ports using the
USB interface cable.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in progress.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
Windows 98 SE / Me - USB
Important
❒ Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95 / 98. Upgrade to Windows 98 SE / Me.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers] window.
A Turn off the power of the machine.
B Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
C Turn on the power of the machine.
The plug and play function starts and the [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver
Wizard], or [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, depending on the operating system.
D Click [Next >].
E Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click
[Next >].
F Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
H Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click
[Next >].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of USB Printing Support are stored
in the following location:
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME
30
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
I Check the location, and then click [Next >].
USB Printing Support is installed.
J Click [Finish].
1
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and
the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers]
window.
K Click [Next >].
L Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click
[Next >].
M Select the [Specify a location:], check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
N Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
O Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored,
and then click [Next >].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
P Check the location, and then click [Next >].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
Q Click [Finish].
Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
❒ The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.
❒ It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a different machine via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.
❒ After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed,
follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.
❒ Install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with the printer.
31
Windows Configuration
Windows 2000 - USB
Important
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
1
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers] window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Check that the power of the printer is off.
B Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
C Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
D Click [Next >] in the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box.
E Select the [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)] check box,
and then click [Next >].
F Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
H Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
I Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].
J Click [Next >].
K Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and
the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers]
window.
Note
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
32
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB
Important
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
1
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers] window.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Turn off the power of the machine.
B Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
C Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
D In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended] ], and then click [Next >].
E To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
F Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best
driver in these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
G Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
H Click [Continue].
I Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001"
port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
33
Windows Configuration
Troubleshooting for using USB
Problems
1
Solutions
The machine is not automatically rec- Turn off the power of the machine, reconnect the USB
ognized.
cable, and then turn it on again.
Windows has already configured the
USB settings.
Open Windows' Device Manager, and then, under [Universal Serial Bus controllers], remove any conflicting devices. Conflicting devices have a yellow [!] or [?] icon by
them. Take care not to accidentally remove required devices. For details, see Windows Help.
Note
❒ When using Windows 2000 / XP or Windows Server
2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [USB
Controller] in the [Device Manager] dialog box.
34
Printing with Parallel Connection
Printing with Parallel Connection
To use a machine connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when installing the printer driver.
1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me)
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the machine whose printer driver you want to install,
and then click [Next >].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next >].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
35
Windows Configuration
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (Windows 2000)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
1
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select [LPT1] at the [Selecting the Printer Port] dialog box, and then click [Next >].
H Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
I Select whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
K Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
L Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
36
Printing with Parallel Connection
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
1
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
G Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
H Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
I Click [Next >].
J Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
K Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
The printer driver installation starts.
L Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
37
Windows Configuration
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)
Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.
1
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].
F Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
H Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
I Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
The printer driver installation starts.
K Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
38
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
Supported Profiles
1
❖ SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers
can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by
SPP, one by HCRP.
• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped
computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel
the first established connection.
• Conditions for bidirectional communications
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
❖ BIP
• For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in
the machine.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.
Important
❒ To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator or Power Users group member.
Note
❒ System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see the manuals provided with each product.
❒ For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or
using it with different utilities, see the manuals provided with those operating systems or utilities.
39
Windows Configuration
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
B Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
1
C On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port].
D Check that the message "Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) " appears under
Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
E Click [Close].
F On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
G Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
H On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
I Click the [Ports] tab.
J Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box.
X indicates the COM port
number used by Bluetooth.
K Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network
connection as follows:
A Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Fax] box.
B Click [Connect].
Note
❒ To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection]
check box.
Reference
For details, see the manuals provided with the Bluetooth adaptor or computer equipped with Bluetooth.
40
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
Configuring Security Mode Settings
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
B On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
1
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
C Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.
If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog
box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see p.41 “Printing in the Security Mode”
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
For information about each mode, see the manuals provided with the utility.
D Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.
Reference
For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to transmit print jobs, see p.41 “Printing in the Security Mode”.
Printing in the Security Mode
A Send the print job to the printer in use.
Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.
B The [Authentication] dialog box appears.
C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the machine's serial
number. You can find the serial number on the label on the back of the machine. For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth password is 1234.
D The print job is sent.
Note
❒ The Bluetooth password differs for each machine and cannot be changed.
41
Windows Configuration
If a Message Appears during Installation
Message number 58 or 34 indicates the printer driver cannot be installed using
Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer] or [Install Printer].
1
For Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0:
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the Add Printer icon.
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
Note
❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the PostScript 3 printer
driver is either D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1,
D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1, or D:\DRIVERS\PS3\NT4\(Language)\DISK1. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to
quit.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003:
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
B Click [Add a printer].
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
Note
❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1. If the installer
starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
For Windows XP Home Editions:
A On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].
D Click [Install Printer].
E Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
42
Note
❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is D:\DRIVERS\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1. If the installer
starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
Making Option Settings for the Printer
Making Option Settings for the Printer
Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional
communication is disabled.
Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.
1
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder.
Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the
printer properties in the [Printers] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Accessories] tab.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows NT 4.0, click
the [Device Settings] tab.
E Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the neces-
sary settings.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows NT 4.0, click
the [Installable Options] area.
F Click [Apply], and then click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
Reference
For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.61 “Setting
Up Options”.
43
Windows Configuration
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
1
There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making printer default settings
To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name:] list, and then click [Properties...].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
44
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Setting Up the Printer Driver
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
1
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission
by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you mak